Re erent . Y : a § Pie bace rere tyra ted echstas jp Penetae ee Gbatansaim eee anette torte cs Babee heer = ee ale aan ca i ak Reh itil oa C x . = ae oe “ } Saneoms + hae a Ceci 6s oa a re Teigrace: ereee La bs » “= brs et J PY etere & eae, rere tatarstee gi reese rate eat eee cpase te: oes ee! = <8 ROSS oe - fy 9.9 ¢ 8 sebte-e 8 * 8 ee eee ss mem wore me oe ae aa eT ow Al oe oi ~e . — j «i = \ } ~ . 2 _ ¢ ~ yi Be 4: . \ i ¢ Zz TWEEDDALE * SeB9a Se * ; es sa Ti) Sm ees : s Palin Et . - i, Fe . ta 7) ~~ [ae “i THE JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL: EDITED BY THE SECRETARY. VOb. bX. PART I.—JANUARY TO JUNE, 1840. NEW SERIES. ‘‘ Tt will flourish, if naturalists, chemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men of science, in differ- ent parts of Asia will commit their observations to writing, and send them to the Asiatic Society in Calcutta; it will languish, if such com i FY, shall be long intermitted ; and will die away, Sh. My - if they shall entirely cease.”—S1r W, )... |. Wool and Woollen Manufactures of Khorassan By, Captain Hutton, 37th Regt. N. [..... an Zoological Catalogue of the Museum of the Asiatic Society. By J. T. Pearson, Esq. sate nest OL 379 099 082 155 440 b = »¥; aby: xy Be abn 1! Y tet Pyle - * aa vik aeons ene ee “ ‘ ce al em el 8 sd = io f a sagt dl . ' } aS ia 2 ri rl, oy Pj ype iN an Brey, if fi ence Bat ae f eso ie aS Siar fee i Sho Se nes a — ‘ - eo end : — os ae eS x e's ? soap gees POL ose'ee “MH 8.00. ‘ANVTNAHLAS 0 9 £ SS ‘dA ‘dASNIMA LH aa svonmeimaunentne yuaag Jo WOR ONY OF OOUELEEL OL | Ind 968'Fo © oat Meg. 00 Re tod g 98 (widjouud wo uNpaNOUs oo 6 purw (uuour | #799 ‘ees "Ad 6 8 Oe OL HT ose't oO ole Tia ain Ob ch. tr poumnouy sazeyo pi renmes om 0 0 SHE ay) 0} pani tdosuisd t PId It 6or's oO 8 sot . 6 Pt cer “ 0 0 986 Gan oe Oe a tm acecana 6 Bt cocks “MBAON OF SEBL AQUI Woy JUDTYSTLAMIPT PIeL AP ce aia 7HO Jo spassard omy toy soueL Fo 26199 21 mous passefruo KawsqnT [o1>4I0, A at uo pareyamnd ryooq Joy wosiord WL“ “40 Wody oniqy SS Lie rs 8 ZO £30 WnourD 9 Burg -oF PUT YOLOTINAR “ESE Y a ay petite ao ‘OPTEXMTY “AL “f OVICT £4 plo |SAUMI9g APUTUAAOD Jo OTS 105 OFIP ONC. of Ie aT aA pT Suis uo youmuy “0 © 0 0OF'e “OOF FE OTP O7 OND MAY KROg 91p Jo Pow urmomyy #unspro om dn #ajd994 205 onsp onic © UL ces's a Or aegis es ereamee aie PUMIE DUETTTEUA v pure opowod w 40g pred DONT wHOay TETAS 330A Jo o89TIOD oMp MOI} paLsay sid esas paakoaans pay poreyind aoe fue “Graqyy (eyTIUG Jo POY |] 405 oD cll ce 3 Me “OP © onIP Mey e>0aFanUE) 00 008 cena 208 nwo 1 SaIOg ‘Suton nite = x ee ee 1 29qAO Ny 1 BEBE AIQMIIIA] MOY TOM “MAAN O1 Stet qMAIC wo juaUH TH FonvEl soy “someacle Tuonruiaasy + x or i al oo of a = emma oy NO LH sou0¢ ™“ Pp y peayent mpeg for . 0 0 Lesy = “ay Uopmurpe paw sing KOEN JO Moury + ZL SZ OMTP Oo} OTIP MOY SOUR yuAdoN WO 405 on 2 se = = = 3 “SPS1 aaquaasaq 00 tm = Cai oe | assenpoar ‘egy | 297mK0N VIE] 0 pass uaumg yoy Jo sour Ky OV SEL eqMIOIG wa IBIUIUMATIKA pred qe OT, eM, a 49 (0 * Asopessos. “oO “GERT “Aj100g ame ayy vy % So's WfW OL TEL. O¢2 2405 0) ap aauoyeq wtutawory 6 9 She's fepawgququyy op Jo TOA snp oy FunuLd Gy osokE worm deg vy 30 WIND oy “EN 1 1 oLe'0L ssoodn eT "5,00 T_T oer “> “seedny “5,00, b %, Stes seco seee fpuwy wr ooUNTeEL : 6 vi eer 0 0 0B TTtr thts 727% fang 4q poptmnyor Mou pue 49m) plos mOOG TMOG Jo spoodoad oy) wos 9ouEAA BL ATNOIIE 0 0 of “g} qe ‘sXup pr paw qyuou | sty uo poswqasnd y nosed “Lf 3a Se Sa10g,‘oasnpour ‘egg 1 YOQWOAON ‘NOE O} 294770 WPL 0 0 caso rc0 repeats Ooi moa “eeaUYQENEY Jo XOPUT ay Jo sjoord oy Fano emuom Eg] Amaq ‘GEST QUIIAON 1 SST 1qwOAON =109 10} A4vjes sty OOUTUSSOL) PUTA pred oJ, : Rane ner ye Soom ony arqeouoHT om Au pomon | gp se se sess 4, Sureay Jo YUOTUTOAOE) Om JO OST" OT Sues yuws AyyiwoU jo yonome ‘ssNsEIL-GUS AE Joy souruog wosy sepaA om 30 sodo> Faunsoid soy V1 ese — Xq ating sosuodxe 40 “bsg ‘dos sorup otc @ ofoeon fcc: stress Src aR 8 01 98 sees ou exeYs amp Furuta soy [MH 69 st ++ -yuauruaaaosy jo asuryeq op 3! 2 ojousooyy ONL —uopun se | 0 0 00S CCCOMT CD BRS vekpey WUNYS, oy onp pow ‘SegT aoquason, wt ‘dasmug sourey “sTY omy jo sayejd oq jo anoIIe Go “7G 30) puMsag Jo oumuedap ogy 3 pasoja yunosxy Jo souvruq Ker to [hq ¥ 305 asjonboog “Hf a pred Hee? OL “49 “fyaog nymispy ay, YPM pUIti) PUROIIP UE SUOYOIYGN [VPRO ML td JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY. Journal of a Mission from the Supreme Government of India to the Court of Siam.—By Dr. Ricnarpson.! January 22nd.—Long-song-noi, 4h. 50m., fifteen miles. Left Fata-kan, and proceed in a south-west direction along the level towards the hills near the foot of which the path lies till 9h. 35m. when we ascend a rocky hill, and cross a small stream; pass a large Kareen village, which seems a permanent residence of a portion of that wandering tribe ; their houses were large, their dress better, and the women were seated in the house more clean and neat in their person than usual; they were the first Kareens we had seen whose forefathers had been inhabitants of this part of the country. The village which was surrounded by high, abrupt rocky hills, consisted of seven or eight houses, with their betel vines and jack fruit trees close round the houses; from this we descend in a ravine till llh. 25m. where we cross a second run of water; from this the coun- try is more open (the valley of the May-nam-noi may be three miles across) and rocky, the trees small and stunted, with little or no foliage, affording no shade from the sun; the latter part of the march was excessively hot. At 12h. 15m. we crossed the small dry bed of a stream forming the boundary between Tata-kan and Long-tsong ; these towns, if they may be 1 Continued from p. 1036, vou. vin. No. 97. New Serizs, No. 18. ‘3 2 Mission to the Court of Siam. [No. 97. dignified with the name, have only lately had any territory assigned them, as the province of Dayiek formerly reached from the Pon river, near Takanom, north, to a stream near Camboorie, and form the district of Dwong-ka-dhot, or Moimg-Ontai, east, to the three pagodas on the Tavoy frontier, west. At 12h. 25m. pass a third small stream of water, and at lh. 20m. halt here on the banks of another, in which the water is standing in small pools in the deepest parts of the bed, with an underground current through the sand. We are not more than two miles from Long-tsong stockade, but to allow the elephants to come up with day-light we were obliged to halt here. The path to- day has upon the whole been good for a hill country, and the water scarce, taking the same circumstance into consideration ; but as this is the most precipitous side of the hills the larger portion of the water probably finds its way by the Tenasserim river into the Bay of Bengal. The number of Kareens who pay tribute through Camboorie, mentioned yesterday, is, as I suppose, exaggerated, Dayiek and Taung-ka-paung being the places ; Mung-keik’s (present chief of the Talines in Siam) father took up his abode on coming over from the Birmans, though the largest number of that people dependant on them have only about 100 each ; Tatakan has only thirty, and Pra-sao-one seventy ; the average of these two would give fifty for the smaller towns, or a total of about 550. Nine Kareens and fifteen Talines are free from tax, as garrison, if I may call them so, of each of the frontier posts along the river, but they have in lieu to furnish guides and provisions to public officers passing through the country. The elephants came up at 6h. 10m. and it was dark before the tent was pitched. January 23rd.—4h. 10m., thirteen miles. Start at 8 a. M., and at 8h. 50m. pass the road leading to Long-tsong, about a mile from the river on which that post is situated; from hence we had a cart road throughout the rest of the day, the jungle thin, the trees stunted and scanty of foliage, the country sterile or covered with strong rank grass, the sandstone work protruding through the surface at intervals, without other mark of culti- vation or sign of inhabitants, except the good level cart road by which we travelled. 9h. We pass the stream of Long-tsong with 1840. ] Mission to the Court of Siam. 3 a run of water ancle-deep, soon after which we saw the first sapan wood, the tree much resembling the Caouchouc tree in leaf and appearance, and seldom reaching here (the N. W. limits of its growth) a greater size than the thickest part of a man’s arm. Our route lay occasionally near the eastern and occa- sionally near the western range of hills. At 11h. 45m. we pass another small stream (the May-ta-pan) in a sort of ravine, and at 12h. 30m. halt opposite Moung-tseing (Lion’s town) a ruined stockade on the eastern or north-eastern side of the river. I find the Taline garrison in these stockades are more military than I supposed them; they are not employed in collecting the duties which are taken by the Kareens to Camboorie. The chief of Moung-tseing receives sixty tickels a year from the king, and fifty men are detailed for the duty of this post, but as there is no muster roll forwarded to head quarters, those who choose to remain with their families by paying twenty tickals to the Myotsa are allowed to do so; a small part only of the detach- ment find their way to the frontiers; at this part the force is larger than usual, there are now fifteen men present, and the Myotsa is at Bankok with a party of five. He (the Myotsa) also levies an annual tax of ten pieces on each man, the king’s people excepted, who cut sapan wood in his jurisdiction. Their period of service on the frontier is six months; they say they are allowed to bring their families, but do not do so on account of the malaria, intermittent prevailing here in May and October. Here also they are all Talines from the pro- vince of Martaban. A part of their duty is to carry the provisions which are sent up by the king to the gold washers on the Belank, of whom I am here informed there were last _ year 1500 employed, besides 60 men of the Myotsa of Dayiek or May-nam-noi. January 24th.—3h. 30m., 11 miles. At 8 left the modern post Moung-tseing, and in |] minutes reach the crossing of the river, which here runs east. Crossing in three small boats occu- pied us 30 minutes, and in 20 minutes more reach the walls of the old city of Moung-tseing (or Lion’s city) which must have been long deserted; the walls though well defined, are, as well as the whole interior of the place, quite overgrown 4 Mission to the Court of Siam. [No. 97. with lofty forest trees; it had the form of a square, of a mile in extent on each face, with a large tank and interior town. ‘The people who accompanied us had no traditions res- pecting it, except that in former days gold and silver were very plentiful here. 15 minutes more brought us out at the river face, from which it is distant a few yards. An hour after leaving the town we met a party of two Siamese and three Talines, with an order from the Myo-won of Cam- boorie to the T’seetkay of Moung-tseing to accompany us to Camboorie ; as we were however some miles from him he es- caped the duty. So difficult is it to get, or so careless are the people in giving information to be depended on, that one of the two Shans told us they left Camboorie yesterday before day- light, and the other at 11 in the forenoon. At 11h. 15m. pass the small town of Moung-khiet, probably deserted about the same time as Moung-tseing; the interior was a perfect level, cover- ed with a long even grass, and high forest trees wide apart from each other, and without underwood, giving it the ap- pearance of a park. At 12h. 40m. halt here by a small puddle of stinking green water, the only water except the river which we left at Moung-tseing we have seen this march, and the Siamese declare there’ is no other halting place for nearly as far as we have come. We have had a good, perfectly level cart road, though the plain has never been more than four miles across (from information); the soil seems fertile, and capable of affording subsistence to a large population ; but with exception of the posts on the river, the country ap- pears destitute of mhabitants, there being only one or two Kareen villages of two or three houses, in the district of - Moung-tseing.. The See-sa-wat which joins this river at Cam- boorie is said to have fewer inhabitants than even this, and the intermediate country is a wilderness. We have been much exposed to the sun to-day, which is very powerful, our halt- ing place a perfect level, open, and covered with short grass; the people sleeping about in groups is exceedingly pictu- resque by the clear moonlight. We have seen to-day hares, partridges, and pea-fowls, and wild dogs are said to be numer- ous here, larger, with longer hair than the common dog, but 1840. | Mission to the Court of Siam. 5 equally varying in colour. Buffaloes, bison, and wild cows have long disappeared, but deer and wild hog are still plentiful. January 25th.—Camboorie, 5h. 20m., fifteen miles. Thermr. 6 a.m. 66°, Noon 90°. Notwithstanding the repeated assurance of our old Siamese guide, (hitherto they have been Talines,) that the vile water we were drinking was the only water within many miles, the elephant people, when looking for their elephants this morning came on a beautiful stream with- in 100 yards of us, just when it was too late to be of any use tous. We started at8 a.m. and marching along a dead level plain, averaging from two or three to six miles in breadth, thinly covered with low trees, very little underwood, with strong crop of coarse grass, the soil apparently good, reached in an hour another stream of water a little N. W. of the road; the march was of one uniform character throughout, and at no great distance from the See-sa-wat river, between which and the road runs a low range of hills, and another of greater altitude, and more rugged and abrupt, between us and the May- nam-noi; at 10h.30m. passed another small run of water spring- ing out of some rocks in the plain, the water of which is soft and unpleasant. Here we halted half an hour; from this the grass is shorter, but still rank and coarse. At 12h. 45m. we saw the first paddy fields since leaving Maulmain, near which we march till lh. 25m. when we enter a_ plantation of cotton, (which was high and flourishing) plantain, and _to- bacco, close to the See-sa-wat, which we should have known to belong to Chinese, even had we not seen them at work in the fields, so incomparably superior are they in all their opera- tions, agricultural or mechanical, to the indolent slovenly natives of Indo-China. Along this our route lay till 1h.50m. when we crossed the See-sa-wat, about three and a half or four feet at the deepest, but of considerable width, perhaps 160 paces wide ; after waiting an hour at a shed, about thirty feet wide and forty- eight long, enclosed by a palasade of bamboos close to, and partly in the river, and no notice being taken of us, I sent the Siamese interpreter and writer to announce my arrival, and pur- pose of my visit to the Myo-won, and request an interview to- morrow. The great man was as usual reported to be asleep, 6 Mission to the Court of Siam. [No. 97. but his writer promised to let him know when he awoke; and almost as soon as my people, the writer made his appearance with a present of ten or twelve trays of fruit, and a civil speech ; a few minutes after he had taken his departure, he returned again with three or four trays of sweetmeats and oranges, sent by the Myo-won, with a civil message, and a request to be excused seeing me to-morrow; I however repeated my re- quest of an interview to-morrow, being hurried from delays on the road hither, and have not heard his answer; in the mean- time, as usual, the people are not allowed to go out, and two people accompanied my grass cutter when he went for grass. I am told we are still five days from Bankok, and that it is impossible to take on the elephants by a shorter route than twenty days, up the west side of the Nakoutchathee* river and down the east, the small nullahs being under the influence of the tide, and the mud consequently deep. My in- formant is the Myotsa of Taung-ka-paung, a wily old Taline, who came here in the great rising of 1876, (1816. a. D.) January 26th.—Camboorie. About 10 o’clock the Myo-won’s writer came out to say, the Won would be glad to see me in the afternoon, as he was engaged now listening to the instructions of some Poonghees of great sanctity, wha live the greater part of the year in the jungle, sleeping under trees, with no fear of wild beasts. He inquired what I was in the habit of eating, as he wished to give me an entertainment; I told him I was obliged by his kind intentions, but as I never eat but twice a day begged him not to take any trouble on that account. I had found this the best plea for not partaking of their unsavory kindness, as abstinence is considered meritorious, and eating only twice a day quite a virtue. At a little after lh. the same person came to say the Myo-won was prepared to receive me, I accordingly rode in taking with me a double barrelled gun, a flask or two of powder, some caps, and a small carpet. On arrival at a zayat on the bank of the river, ten minutes walk from my tent, I found all the officers of the town assembled, one of whom met * My informant did not appear to know, or at all events did not give us to understand, that this river was a branch of the May-nam. 1840. | Mission to the Court of Siam... 7 me at the door, and pointed out my seat, a chair on one side of the entrance, and the place for some of my people on the floor immediately in front of me. The Won came in about five minutes, and seated himself on a sort of platform at the other end of the room or shed, which might be fifty feet long by twenty-five broad ; his officers were in front of him, crouched on their elbows. He asked the usual questions, when I left Maulmain, the state of the road, how I had been treated and fur- nished with provisions, &c. &c. I inquired when he heard from Bankok, the health of the king, state of the country, war with Cochin-China, his own health, &c. &c. and after some time I asked him about the convicts escaped from the jail at Tavoy ; he said there had twelve arrived some time ago, two of whom had died; six others had been sent from May-nam-noi and arrived the day before yesterday ; the ten remaining of the first arrival, were now in irons in jail; the others were not yet confined, but should be immediately. I had yesterday heard (our people who came in the boats saw them) that the officers for Maulmain and Tavoy had left this the day before yesterday, and the Myo-won now confirmed this intelli- gence. I had expressed my anxiety to see them, and get them to take charge of these prisoners, to the Myotsa of May- nam-noi, and have no doubt the boatmen mentioning this, was the reason of their starting without seeing me, as they would naturally otherwise have wished to do; I however still urged him to send these men back with them. After much con- versation, in which I pointed out to him the article in the treaty on the subject, he refused to send them back without an order from the ministers; as he declined giving them up, I requested he would not allow them to escape, as I should re- peat the request at Bankok; he said they were all in irons except the last six; if I did not believe him, I might go and see them. I of course assured him I had implicit confidence in his word; at this juncture about 30 unfortunate Cochin- Chinese prisoners were marched in, of whom there were 3000 at Camboorie ; I afterwards heard there were near 1000, pro- bably 300 may be nearer the truth; he said six of these men had made their escape, and begged me to apprehend and send 8 Mission to the Court of Siam. [No. 97. them back, if I should see them at Maulmain. I told him the people he mentioned I had seen at Maulmain, and on their arrival had assisted them; that he quite mistook the ground on which I demanded these natives of India; that they were felons, condemned to imprisonment for life for murders of the most aggravated kind, which I explained to him, and warned him of their character. After some conversation on the Cochin- Chinese war, he ordered in two or three and twenty small dishes of sweetmeats, roast pork, roast fowls, and soup, all apparently — Chinese cooking, of most uninviting appearance, for myself, and different trays for all the people, who did more honour to his hospitality than I could. He then pressed me to stop here for four or five days, as he said was the custom ; I however declined remaining more than one day more, and am to start on the 28th. I had by a great deal of inquiry amongst the Talines here learned that there is a good and much frequented road, as was to be expected, from this to Bankok, by Nongkaw, in six days ; and when the subject of my route was discussed, as all matters are here, I intimated my intention of going by that route, with- out allusion to the attempt made to deceive me yesterday. I spoke of the goodness of the road with such confidence, that no attempt was made to dispute the fact now, but a wish expressed that I should go by boats, or if by land even, that I must go to Rajapore or Pra-pree. This I also objected to doing, as it is considerably out of the direct course to Bankok ; that I had no business with the Myo-won of Rajapore or Pra- pree; and had here waited on him, the Myo-won of Camboorie, and stated the only object of my visit; he said-they had no wish to put any restraint on me; that I might go by any road I felt inclined, but the Myo-won of Pra-pree had made prepara- tions to receive me, and would be disappointed if I did not visit him. The subject was then dropped, and I took my leave, near three o’clock; the sweetmeats, &c. were sent after me to the tent, and about nine in the evening the Taung-ka-paung Myotsa came to press again on me the necessity of going by Pra-pree ; I again declined going by that route, as my business lay at Ban- kok with the ministers; it was decidedly out of my way, and when I got there, how was I to be assured the Myo-won of Pra- 1840. ] Mission to the Court of Siam. 9 pree would not send me off to some other place; I acknowledged their kindness in wishing to entertain me, and requested him to tell the Myo-won that I preferred going by the route I had mentioned; he promised to do so, staid till near 11 o’clock p.m. and took his departure. I had a visit also from the second officer of the town, who being ill only stayed a few minutes. On the whole they have been civil and attentive ; I cannot how- ever make out the motive of the officers en route to Maulmain avoiding me (which they certainly have pointedly done, unless co avoid refusing to take back the Thugs) as it might have influenced their reception there. The Myo-won here receives from the royal bounty 600 tickels a year, besides youm fees. January 27th.—Received from the Myo-won this morning a present of fruit, &c., and had a long discussion with his writer about the road; they appear determined to.take me round by Pra-pree, at the same time to avoid the appearance of con- straint. After dinner I called on the Myo-won, according to my proposal of yesterday; he met me at the zayat where I had seen him yesterday, and taking my hand led me to his house just inside the fort. After a good deal of conversation on different subjects, I remonstrated strongly against going round by Rajapore, as I had no business whatever with the chief of that town. I reminded him that the purpose of my mission having last year been intimated to the court, that he himself had been instructed not to detain me (of this I had no doubt); I told him I had already exceeded by many days the time I expected to be in Bankok, and further delay would render it doubtful whether I should be able to return till after the monsoon, &c. &c. &c. I naturally anticipate a stay of some time in the capital, and fear I shall not be able to get _down any number of cattle before the rains, as the route from Bankok to Zimmay, should I be allowed to proceed there, will occupy a full month. An attempt was made to convict me of having said I would go by Rajapore, and the Myo-won said he had written before my arrival to the chief of that town that I would visit him. I said I did not see in what way the ends of my mission were to be forwarded by the detour, nor that he should have written without my concurrence to the effect he men- Cc 10 Mission to the Court of Siam. [Noi.97. tioned ; requested him to consider whether he was doing right in endeavouring to place restraints on me, which we never attempted with Siamese officers’ convoy to our provinces. I told him unless I was positively prevented going by Nougkan I should take that route; after a great deal of argument I have been obliged to go by the route they wished. With the ex- ception of this dragging me some days out of my way, my reception here has been on the whole very friendly, though the Myo-won’s manner was constrained, and the old writer, whom I suspect is the principal obstacle to going direct to Bankok, prompted him. We have been plentifully supplied with provisions, and since my first visit to the Myo-won the people have been allowed to move freely about. I re- peated the application for the convicts, and mentioned that a sum of 15 rupees each would be paid to cover their expenses on their delivery at Tavoy ; he again declined giving them up, as I was going to Bankok, without an order from thence. I applied for a boat, which was furnished, and by putting the heaviest of the things in it, we shall be enabled to make longer marches; one or two of the people also are sick, and unable to proceed by land. A number of dishes of meat and sweetmeats were again served to me, and the people who accompanied me ; and after remaining an hour and a half I returned home, where the Youkabat (or Nakan) soon followed me with twenty-four dancers and musicians, whom he told me were all of his own household ; amongst whom there were eight unfortunate women, Cochin-Chinese prisoners, of whose wretchedness and destitu- tion I have heard a good deal to-day; they remained dancing and singing in the clear moonlight night in front of the Tay till eleven o’clock, when I gave each of the performers a rupee, with which they were apparently well satisfied. Their song was all to one air; though the voices frequently did not keep time, it was rather pleasing; the dancing, if it could so be called, was any thing but graceful; the words sometimes Cochin-Chinese, sometimes Siamese. The town of Camboorie is situated opposite the junction of the See-sa-wat and May-man-noi rivers, prin- cipally along the bank of the former; it is a long, straggling place, consisting of one long street along the banks of the river, 1840. | Mission to the Court of Siam. Il containing in all 300 houses, and there may be 200 more in the small streets running off, and in the fort. The See-sa-wat is here 150 paces, perhaps 250 feet wide, and 34 feet deep; from the water at its present height, to the point it reaches in the rains, is nearly the same distance as the width of the stream. There are lying here about 122 boats, of which thirty- eight are canoes, the others are boats of considerable size. A brick fort has lately been built here, of about 500 paces long by 300 broad, without defences, unless two semi-lunar breastworks outside on the river face, with five old guns each, may be so called ; the wall appears about sixteen or eighteen feet high, and there are said to be twenty guns within the fort; three gates on each side, and one at each end; there is no bazar in the town, but a few stalls on the single bed of the river, where the Chinese have a gambling shop, and where salted eggs and gnapee are sold in small quantities. Upon the whole it is rather a paltry place, considering the importance attached to it by the Burmans, and that it is within six days of the capital. Many of the Cochin-Chinese who can speak Siamese, have been questioning our people as to the possibility of reach- ing Maulmain, and the Talines are equally anxious that some means for their deliverance could be arranged; I have however checked all idea that my visit was connected with such an object. January 28th.—Small green pool, S. 36 E. 4h. 40m., fifteen miles. Started at 9h. 15m. having been detained about half an hour for the boat, and in giving a list of the things to be put into it; ten minutes brought us to the end of the village or city, and travelling along near the bank of the Camboorie river, formed by the junction of the May-nam-noi and See-sa-wat, _ we passed several large plantations of tobacco, and one or two small fields of sugar cane, cultivated by the Chinese ; at 10h. dom., cross the smaller branch of the river, about half-leg deep, ‘and passed along a sandy island, with a kind of short willow on it; cross the larger branch by a boat, this however though rather rapid is of no great depth; just after crossing the river, _ we pass two small villages, since which we have seen no sign of inhabitants. The road has been level throughout, and well 12 Mission to the Court of Siam. [No. 97. travelled, jungle thin, water very scarce, and at this halting place it is green and bad; our party has been increased at the little villages we passed in the morning, and we are now ac- companied by thirty men who bivouac at a little distance, but do not however interfere with our arrangements. On starting this morning, some of the Myo-won’s people met us with a few baskets of rice and some meat opposite the gate of the town. January 29th.—Bausong-roy, 4h. 20m., fourteen miles. ‘Started this morning at 8h. 50m., and marching along a level road, through a thin jungle with long grass, a great deal of which had however been burned, we passed one old plantation of cotton and plantains, the cotton of a kind I have not seen before, being now ready to gather ; the crop was small and scanty, but the plants are now two or three years old, the cotton fine and soft, but rather short in the staple. We are now fairly in the alluvial plain at the head of the gulf; saw only one or two small rocky hills to the westward; the water has been scarcer and worse than yesterday, and we were nearly missing this, which is a swamp, as it lies a little off the road, and the people of the few houses near it, who are Talines, or Laos prisoners from Wiang-tchong took fright at our appearance, taking us for Siamese or Taline small officers. It appears that at stated periods, the Talines are branded on the arm, as belonging to the right or left wing of the army, and their name, number, and officer’s company to which they belong, entered in the mus- ter roll of Talines, from which time they are liable to all calls for public duty, those only who have entered the priesthood are excepted ; and such as can escape, by concealing themselves, till the impress is over, do so. One old woman in her joy to find who we were, abused the government of the country roundly (though several Siamese of our thirty conductors were present); she said the Siamese, bad as they were, were not so bad as the low Talines who form the officers in army; she said scarce a day passed without tears for the old country; now it was quiet she prayed daily that her next transmigration might be a bird to return there, as she had no hopes now of doing so in this life. There are now about 5000 Talines, 1500 of whom receive royal pay, such as it is; some as little as three 1840. | Mission to the Court of Siam. 13 or four tickels a year; all who have reached the height of two cubits and a span, are branded, and they are numerous, as there has been no impress for three years. January 30th.—Rajapore, Oh. Kighteen miles. Started this morning at 7h. 45m. and in twenty minutes passed through the clearing in which we pitched our little camp last night ; from this, till 9h. 35m. our route lay through a jungle, of the same scanty stunted trees as we have had for the last few days, the soil poor and sandy ; at 9h. 35m. pass a village of 15 or 20 houses, and enter a plain covered with long reedy grass, near which we saw the first black cattle we have met with in the route; at 9h. 55m. came on the banks of the Song-roy river, here about sixty feet. wide, and apparently not more than ancle-deep, with the tide coming in; and immediately after coming on the river pass a large village, with a number of Chinamen about it. Here the plain is about three and a half or four miles across, from east to west, with the range of hills to westward, (along which our route has been throughout at no great distance,) running round to a few points east of south, broken and irregular, and the highest probably not more than 6 or 700 feet ; we march along the Song-roy till a little after eleven, when it tends away east, to join the Camboorie river; the plain increases a little in breadth, and contains three or four small shallow lagoons, all along the borders of which the people, principally prisoners from Wiang- tchong, were employed in planting out paddy. They have a mode of irrigation here, I have not seen used except in China, by means of a long spoon-shaped light trough, with a long bamboo handle, slung in a high triangle of bamboos, the person using which stands on a slight frame raised in the _ water, and with a spoon in each hand, by means of the slings, throws the water into the channel for conducting it over the fields to a height of about three or four feet. At I1h. 25m. we passed the village of Song-roy of 20 houses, generally of very miserable description; from this, our route lay 8. 31 E. to the town; the swampy nature of the ground in one place, and a detour round one or two of the small lakes, kept us till two o’clock before we reached it. The boats must have been manned and waiting for us on the town side of the 14 Mission to the Court of Siam. [No. 97. river, for there started to meet us the moment we halted on the opposite bank, four handsome large boats with plat- form in the middle, covered with a high roof on four very high posts ; in mine there was a carpet and pillow. We pulled ra- pidly down the river, about a quarter of a mile, and land- ed at a neat, well finished (I may call it) house, with two wharfs run out into the river, which ran a few feet from the doors; here I found the Myo-won’s brother, the Tseetkay, Nakans, and some other officers of the town, waiting to re- ceive me, seated at the edge of the raised centre of the house ; there were one or two small China tables and chairs, two or three Calcutta made chairs; and a large old Dutch looking high backed ornamented heavy one in the centre of the room, on which I was requested to be seated. Conversation was confined to a very few questions, when a party with at least twenty trays of fruits, vegetables, and sweetmeats, from the Myo-won, was presented by his brother. The people and my servants were requested not to cook any thing, as every thing ready dressed would be supplied us, and in a few minutes my dinner was brought in, consisting of rice, roast pork, fowls, ducks, and soup, curries of three or four kinds, and some stews; as the curries were not the most inviting, I smug- gled my own curry on the table, and managed to make my dinner, after which the people were served in an equally plentiful manner. Two officers (writers), were appointed to attend to all my wishes, a band of eight singers and musicians came by the Myo-won’s order to amuse me for an hour and a half, all very well dressed, who remained till 10 o’clock p.m. when our watch was set, and quiet obtained for the night. The music was much less soft and pleasing than that I have been accustomed to hear in Laos, called Siamese. By some ac- cident one of the horses was drowned in crossing the river to-day, he had in the last few years travelled with me up- wards of two thousand miles, in the course of which he had repeatedly crossed rivers of much greater width. The Myo- won sent several messages expressive of his sorrow of the accident, and an offer of two or three horses to replace him. ad 1840. | Mission to the Court of Siam. 15 January 3\st.—This morning the Myo-won sent a plentiful breakfast for my whole party, and at noon, just as I was pre- paring to take an altitude of the sun, a number of officers came to say he was waiting to receive me ; I accompanied them, taking with me two fuzils, a flask of powder, two small carpets, and a piece of Bengal handkerchief. I found a chair placed for me in the centre of the room, the Myo-won seated with a mat and richly embroidered pillow on a sort of wooden couch, at the end of the room, his officers lying before him on the floor, which was covered with small carpets ; the room had been ornamented by a Chinese or Siamese artist with beautiful yellow grass, brown trees, green rocks, and blue cows, with houses stuck here and there in most extraordinary per- spective on the rocks, anda ship and one or two junks full sail amongst the trees. Some small old fashioned English prints, China lamps and lanterns, with some spears and muskets, com- pleted the furniture and ornaments of the hall, which was about the size of the house erected for me The conversation was ex- ceedingly constrained, no one joining except the Myo-won and myself; the subject talked of, was of course the object of my mission, which I told him was to convey to the ministers of his Majesty the king of Siam, the assurance of the high esteem and friendship in which they were held by the ministers of the great ruler of India, to increase and strengthen the friend- ship between the two countries, and an invitation on my part to his people to be more frequent in their visits to Maulmain, which was now a large and flourishing country. He begged me to be perfectly at home, and said there was no restraint on the people with me, who might go where they pleased, &c. &c. &c. 1 asked him regarding the route, and intimated my intention to go by land, as I had already been delayed longer than I anticipated on leaving Maulmain; he wished me for my own ease and comfort to go by water, and further urged the impassible state of the road; I expressed my disinclination to do so, as confinement in a boat affected my health; he said he would send word to the Myo-won of Nakoutchathee that he might be prepared to expect me, and the matter seemed settled. JI remained about an hour and a half. The interview 16 _ Mission to the Court of Siam. [No. 97. was I think more stiff and constrained than I have had with any of the numerous native chiefs I have visited in this country. Soon after my return, his brother brought about thirty or forty large trays of sweetmeats, and twelve or fourteen men loaded with cocoanuts, jacks, and other fruits. I begged him to convey my thanks to the Myo-won for his attention and hospitality, and a request that the guides might be ready early to-morrow, as I wished to start in the cool of the morning. The objections to the land route were again raised, and as the only reason assigned was that the Myo-won had written to the Myo-won of May-klong that I would come that way, but that of course if I wished to go by land, I should not be prevented; as I do not know in what way I may be obliged to travel into Laos, I parti- cularly wish to avoid being parted from my elephants, as the state of the roads may be made an excuse for detaining them, and their absence be pleaded at Bankok as a bar to going up the country at the season when the water is at the lowest ; and as I believe one object of some importance will be gained by breaking down the ridiculous restriction to our intercourse with this people, I assured him I asked for nothing we did not readily accord to others; and drew his attention to the perfect freedom from restraint of their officers at Tavoy and Maulmain, and repeated my wish to goby land; pointed out to him that we were here to the south of Bankok, and should now have to return N. E. whereas had I been allowed to proceed, which I wished to do directly, across the country from Camboorie, and which any other person going to Bankok would have done, I should by to- morrow have reached that city, &c., though making the acquain- tance of the Myo-won of Pra-pree had rewarded me for coming so far out of my way; but I now wished to take the nearest route. He said he would take his brother’s orders, and went into the town for that purpose. I requested him to say, as curiosity was not my motive, if the Myo-won would say he did not wish me to see that part of the country, I would go by any route he pleased. As he had not returned at 11 o’clock I told the mahouts to get the elephants early in the morning to start by land, as I had agreed with the Myo-won personally in the forenoon. The town of Rajapore, or as it is commonly called, Pra-pree, is of very 1840. | Mission to the Court of Siam. 17 considerable size, though I have been unable to obtain any accurate information as to the number of people it contains, from the excessive jealousy of the people on such subjects ; and from its extent, have not been able to count the number of houses, as-was roughly done at Camboorie. The greater number of the inhabitants, as in that town, live about the banks of the river, outside the fort, which has a brick wall of about eighteen feet high, with an open parapet and ravelin at each corner, two doors in the long faces, and one at the ends; it stands east and west along the banks of the river, which here runs to the eastward a distance of a few hundred paces, it is about 300 paces broad, and 7 or 800 long, with a large portion of the ground waste inside; there were about 200 or 280 boats in the river of a large size; the river is fordable a short way above the town at low water, and the tide does not rise more than four feet opposite the town at spring tides. I am told the Myo-won receives from the king 600 tickels a year, and has the law fees and presents besides. I do not believe, from all I have heard, that any of the chiefs of towns receive so large a sum. February \st.—Bankiew, 4h. 50m., fifteen miles. Sent the mahouts for the elephants at day-light ; they found them, contra- ry to the promise of the people sent by the Myo-won to take charge of them, tied up close to the town. When preparing to start, a message was brought from the Myo-won to request me not to hurry off, as breakfast was preparing for our party, to which I returned an acknowledgment of his kindness, and intimation of my readiness to wait. The interval was employed by me in dispatching two boats I had been furnished with for the sick and some of the royal presents, and by them in again urging me to go by the river, now on the Myo-won’s account, as the Myo-won of Camboorie would obtain credit with the king for having prevailed on me to come here, whilst he could not get me to go to May-klong ; they disclaimed any wish to prevent my seeing that part of the country; I said I did not think personal motives should have weight with us, that I did not consult my own personal ease in labouring over the hot plains, but that I had been sent by a great government to the D 18 Mission to the Court of Siam. [No. 97. ministers at Bankok, and that I wished to make the greatest possible dispatch to where I was ordered, and should have done so from Camboorie had I not been prevented ; and when I had seen the ministers, I should be happy to comply with their desire in visiting any towns they might wish. The breakfast was brought in and discussed, and we started ; the guides were fortu- nately not ready. We were conducted along the west and south faces of the fort, and whilst halting for the guides at a small zayat, half a mile from the town, met a party of labourers coming in from the paddy fields, and on inquiry found that they were just about to lead us amongst muddy nullahs and inlets from the sea, influenced by the tide, against which we had several times been warned to be on our guard by Burman and Taline refugees. The labourers had just pointed out the proper road, when the guides came up, and declared that no road existed in the direction I now proposed to go; that, that road, pointing along a road apparently leading to the salt grounds at the head of the gulf, was the only one in existence ; I however took the direction pointed out to us considerably more to the northward, and inquiring of people on the road and at the villages, all of whom assured me we were on the proper road, reached this place at 3h. 35m. A few miles north of the town ~ runs a rather deep belt of palmyra trees with common jungle, tending away a little to the northward of east, in which is the high road to Bankok, with several villages along it ; also in the jungle, between this belt and the head of the gulf, a distance of about two days, is an alluvial plain, the lower edge intersected, as already stated, and forming salt fields, the upper edge cul- tivated to a considerable extent by the inhabitants of the villages along the road, though this plain is said to be covered with water in the rains, so that boats pass along it in all direc- tions, but at this season is perfectly dry near the jungle, so that we had no occasion to go on to the road, which ran a mile or a mile and a half to the northward of our course. Though there was no path, we took the direction pointed out by the few people we met. We passed seven villages in the day, the largest might contain thirty or forty houses, and at the last a large herd of cattle and buffaloes, which sell here 1840. ] Mission to the Court of Siam. 19 the former at three or three and a half tickels, and the latter at seven ; the best carriage bullocks, five tickels, or six and a half Madras rupees; the low price is of course from the absence of a demand, for they are very scarce, and indeed can be of very little use in so swampy a country with a Boodist popu- lation, though the Siamese no more than the Burmans object to eat beef, and there are not wanting people to take on them- selves the sin of killing the cattle. Our guides here in no way interfered with us. February 2nd.—Ban-ta-chang, 5h. fifteen miles (close to Bankem). One small well of brackish water formed the whole sup- ply for our party after an excessively hot day’s march ; yesterday we were not sorry to leave our last halting place, which we did at 7h. 40m. a.m. Our route has been exactly of the same character as yesterday, sometimes across the country through the paddy fields or reedy plains, sometimes along the main road, in the jungle and palmyra forest which skirted it, all along which are the villages of the cultivators, consisting of small groups of five or six houses, and the population just along the line of road is considerable. A small portion of the plain crossed to-day is under cultivation, the largest patch we crossed at 9h. 50m. with a few hundred head of cattle and buffaloes graz- ing about. At ten we cross a small jeel, and close to our pre- sent halting place another long one, extending some miles into the plains, and here three and a half feet deep with a mud- dy bed and covered with floating grass; it did not seem influ- enced by the tide, and is used by the people for domestic pur- poses. We are still accompanied by the thirty men sent with us from Pra-pree ; they have not to-day interfered in any way, or been of the least service to us. February 3rd—Nakoutchathee, 5h. 20m., seventeen miles four furlongs. The people who have accompanied us from Pra-pree left us last evening, (the lake being the boundary of their dis- trict) without any apparent communication with the people of this district, or stating to me their intention, and we had some difficulty in procuring a guide to-day, who would not approach this village, and returned as soon as we came in sight of it. We started at 7h. 30m. and travelled along a road of the same charae- 20 Mission to the Court of Siam. [No. 97. ter as the last two or three days, still at an average distance of about two days from the sea. Cutting across the skirts of the plain, by which we have saved a day, as it is two days by the high road from Ban-ta-chang to Nakouchathee, we crossed in the course of the day eight muddy lakes or long pools of water, with mud, weeds, and water, varying from 2 or 3 to 6 or 8 feet deep ; the worst one we crossed in a small boat just capable of holding two persons ; we passed also seven straggling villages, but as they were within the belt of trees, we had no opportunity of judging of their extent, except by inference, as though there was a good deal of cultivation it was perhaps less than the two previous days, the cattle and buffaloes rather more numerous. We saw two herds of perhaps 200, the others consisting of a few, say four herds of 10 or 12. I was told by our guide to-day, that the best buffaloes sell for 10 or 12 tickels, and good bullocks, about the same price, though as much as 20 tickels is some- time paid for a choice cart bullock, inferior at 6 or 7, as cattle are cheaper near Camboorie, but not abundant in any of the southern provinces. ‘There were a few people at work in the paddy fields, but all their thrashing floors seem small, as if the cultivation in the neighbouring villages was principally for their own consumption; the largest floor we have seen is at this place, where there is a stack of paddy ready to be trodden out, which my agricultural people estimate at 1500 Burman baskets, and I was told in crossing the fields to-day that it sold at about 9 tickels for 664 Burman baskets, but their measure seems arbitrary and uncertain. On arriving here the first person we met in the village (for it does not contain more than 200 houses) told us that the Myo-won was at the north end of it, preparing the zayat for us; and on arriving here we found by the chips and new thatch that it had been new roofed yesterday. Just as my people were going in to the Myo-won to report my arrival, the Tseetkay and town officers . came out to inquire who I was, where I came from, and where I was going ; though by their preparations they were certainly aware of our coming. I satisfied them on these points, and asked if the Myo-won of Pra-pree had not sent, as he had promised me he would do, to the officers here, stating the purport of my — 1840. | Mission to the Court of Siam. 21 mission, and a request to furnish me with what I might require ; they said they had not heard a word of my approach before the moment of my arrival; they said it was impossible to take elephants and horses by this route to Bankok, that indeed there was no road even for foot passengers. They departed with the information they had obtained to the Myo-won, who in about an hour sent to say he would be glad to see me if I wished to call on him, and I did so before dinner. After the usual topics were discussed, he repeated with such earnestness and apparent sincerity, appealing to his age (which may be about seventy-eight) as a voucher for his veracity, that the road was impassable between this and Bankok, in fact that no road existed, that it was scarcely possible to resist conviction, particularly as I had not had time to make any private inquiries amongst the people, and had learned nothing about the road except the general assertion of all we have asked about it, that it is good and daily travelled. I was obliged to consent to his writing to the ministers, and as I had no Siamese writer, I myself wrote to Mr. Hunter—a British merchant who has resided at Bankok many years, and has often been the channel of communication with the ministers both from Singapore and Maulmain—stating the fact of my arrival here, and begging him to intimate the same to the ministers, with the reason of my not writing, and a request not to be kept longer than necessary. I much fear it will be impossible, in compliance with the terms of my instruc- tions, to have any of the cattle in Maulmain by the beginning of May. My previous information regarding the goodness of the road has been confirmed by the people of the village and the Pounghees, who also told my people that messengers from Pra- pree arrived here yesterday with a communication regarding me, the nature of which I have not learned. February 4th—Have had communication with the people of the village to-day. I endeavoured to send some of my Taline people to a village of their countrymen on the opposite side of the river to buy fowls, and inquire about the road, but a boat was refused them, and the town officers offered to procure any thing we wanted. February Sth.—We have received from the town provisions 22 Mission to the Court of Siam. [No; 97: for the people, and boughs for the elephants, which we are obliged to tie up at night, as there is so much paddy ex- posed at this season. This afternoon I had a request from the Myo-won that I would call on him, with which I imme- diately complied, and found that our boat had arrived at the capital during the previous night, and the ministers had sent an order to the chief here to furnish me with boats to proceed, leaving the elephants and horse. I endeavoured, without suc- cess, to take the latter, as I should want him; they made all manner of excuses; said there were no boats large enough ; I should have to wait a day, as they must send down the river for one; I told them, I had seen several boats here sufficiently large; they said they were unsteady and unsafe; I replied the horse was accustomed to boating, that I had carried him 500 miles in a boat last year; they then shuffled from one objection to another. I begged them to say at once if I would be allowed to take him or not, as I had no intention to oppose their wishes, but if not positively prevented, I wished to take him’ with me as necessary to my comfort; though they would not pointedly refuse, they would not allow me to take him. After some conversation on matters of no interest I took my leave, and they set about preparing our boats. I this morning sent a Taline lad (the head mahout) to a village about a mile and a half down the river; the only Taline there is (with his family) em- ployed in making bricks for the Myo-won, to whom he is a bonded debtor; he said that that was the commencement of the road to Bankok, that buffaloes, people, and elephants travel it every day; that about “a call”? inland from where they were, the jungle terminated, being only a narrow strip by the river, and from thence with a glass they might see three zayats on the road at about equal distances, and from the last, from the back of the elephants, they might see the village Quankalanai (Ta- line king’s village) on the banks of the May-nam river ; that the distance was easily done in half a day by an unencumbered man ; that he himself came that way a short time ago, his re- sidence being on this side of the May-nam, in little more than half a day with a little boy of his, whom he pointed out. The family were all familiar with the road, and some of the women , 1840. | Mission to the Court of Siam. 23 made a sketch on the ground. A short way above the town is the entrance of a canal; between this branch and the main river, and on the banks of this canal the second of the three zayats before mentioned is situated; from this the road runs along its banks. If crossed at the first zayat there is another road which comes on the river May-nam above Bankok. Had I been possessed of this information yesterday I need not have lost so much time here. This is rather a large straggling village, along the banks of the river of the same name, containing about 300 houses, and ten or twelve large Pounghee houses, though there does not appear to be more than twenty priests. The houses are here small and ruious in appearance, nearly all built of bamboos, that of the Myo-won only a little larger than the rest. He is said to receive from the king 200 tickels a year, the Tseetkay and Ngakan 100 each. The river is about 160 or 200 feet wide, with soft muddy banks, and apparently of considerable depth; the tide rises here four feet, and large masses of weeds knit together by the root, growing vigorously, some of them having a surface of sixty or eighty square feet, float up and down with the tide. On asking the old Myo-won to-day the distance from this to the sea, he said he could not tell, never having been there; I learned how- ever that it is about two days by the river. February 6th.—Embarked in four boats, and started for Bankok at 9 a.m. Proceeding south-easterly, passed at Qh. 30m. a small sugar factory with. two mills, with high coni- cal thatched roofs, the roofs of the boiling houses of the same material, and apparently very low, considering the large fires that were burning in them. At 9h. 55m., passed the end of the road leading across to Bankok; at 12h. 30m. halted at a small village for the people to breakfast ; my servants’ boat was overloaded, and did not come up till near three o’clock, when I had breakfast and dinner in one, to prevent a second halt. Started again at 3h. 45m. and continued pulling with the stream till 9 p.m, when we halted for some hours. We passed in the course of the day many small villages, almost entirely occupied by Chinese employed in the manufacture of sugar, in all eight small establishments, the largest with four mills drawn by 24 Mission to the Court -of Siam. [No. 97. one or two buffaloes each for breaking the cane; the heaps of firewood opposite each seemed disproportionally large. The banks of the river are excessively low, but at the village where we halted for breakfast, on proceeding about a gunshot in land, you pass a belt of cocoanut trees, with a good deal of under- wood, and come out on an extensive plain, which appeared to reach to the May-nam, quite dry at this season, and covered with paddy stubble. Here we were again assured of the existence of a road, perfectly dry and good, and the fact of an elephant (called white, but which only differed from the common ones in having a reddish coloured head) having crossed lately to Ban- kok. February 7th—Started lh. 30m. a.m. with the moon ; the fog which did not clear up till 8 o’clock was so thick that nothing was to be seen. The east bank of the river, near which we kept, was of the same character as yesterday, but fewer inhabitants ; indeed, I did not see a village till we reached this place. We halted at a custom house chokey from 5h. 15m. till 6 a.m. just before reaching which we passed the cross branch lead- ing to the May-klong, the banks of which are thickly peopled by salt makers ; the sea water being evaporated, is repeated by fresh artificial inundations into quillets like those of a paddy field ; the salt is sold at three annas a basket, and pays one rupee eight annas duty! Passing the chokey we leave the main branch of the river, which runs away westerly to fall into the sea, and at 7h. 50m. enter the Maha-tshi Canal, which runs north-east to Ban- kok; just above the bifurcation is situated Moung-tachin, an uninhabited low square brick fort, and immediately below it a village of Talines of nearly 100 houses, joining which is the Siamese town of Moung-tachin. The water here being salt they get their water from Bankok for six months in the year ; the Chinese, who appear to monopolise the traffic of the coun- try, bringing it down in jars, or in perfectly tight boats which they fill; the price is sufficiently moderate. Here a tay had been built for our reception, which we reached at 8h. 15m. having been on the way about six hours. The Myo-won’s brother was at the tay to receive me, and he himself soon afterwards came out in a sort of Chinese monshell; he was dressed in China 1840. | Mission to the Court of Siam. 25 crape ; indeed the whole furniture and ornaments of their houses, and most of their clothes, are borrowed from that people. He was quite civil, and remained about an hour ; he told me it would be expected I should remain here till the next day, against which I in vain remonstrated. The people were all feasted, the dinner placed on little tables in the Chinese manner, and an abundance of pork and vegetables, fruit, sweetmeats, and tea, &c. &c. &c. were brought out for me. The Myo-won told me there were about 1500 Talines here, and I learned after- wards from a brother of the Hloot-din writer at Maulmain, who is a refugee and most anxious to get away, that there are on the different branches of the river about eight or nine hundred families of Talines, many of them employed in mak- ing salt. February 8th.—Bankok, 13h.30m. About 7 a.m. the Myo- won came to the zayat, having previously sent out break- fast for myself and the people, and said we had better now start. He asked a number of questions regarding the objects of my mission, which, having the orders of the ministers, and boats sent by them to convey us to Bankok, he ought not to have put ; as however I had no object in refusing, I answered him in detail. He came to the end of the wharf to see me off, and hoped to see me on my return. The boats which had arrived from Bankok in the night were large, commodious paungs (long boats with a house on them) sufficient to convey every body with comfort, manned, the one by twenty Talines, the other by twenty Cummins, or Cambodians ; the Talines were dressed in blue shirts and trowsers, and black bamboo-work hats, and the Cummins like Malays, whom they very much resemble in ap- pearance. We started at 9 a.m. the tide turned against us at 10, and our progress was consequently very slow ; at 4h. 45m. we were obliged to halt from want of water, and remained till past 10 pe. m. when we started at quarter flood. At Ih. 20m. P. M. we enter a cut made from the head of the Mahitchi to the small stream which falls into the May-nam, which completes the communication through the Nakoutchathee branch between the May-nam and May-klong ; this we passed in seven minutes, and in half an hour got into deep water on the Bankok E 26 Mission to the Court of Siam. [No. 97. side of the.cut. Since dark, the light in the boat prevented us seeing any thing on the banks. At 4h. a.m. halted at the British factory, on the side of the river opposite the fort and city of Bankok, and found Peadadie, the port Captain, a Benedito (who has received from the king the title of Peavitsit) commandant of artillery, and Pascal, all native Christian Portu- guese, waiting my arrival at a mat house, Mr. Hunter, under orders from the ministers, had prepared for me just between his own compound and the river. Mr. Hunter, who has a Siamese title, and whom they consider in some degree as a Siamese officer, also came down to receive me. February 9th.—Bankok. About seven or eight o’clock a message was brought from His Excellency the Praklang (minister for foreign affairs, whose house is on this side of the river, and close to the British factory) requesting to see Mr. Hunter, who immediately waited on him ; after he had been gone some minutes, he sent a note to say the Praklang wished to see copies of the letters, if I had them, and had no objection to send them (to which as I saw no objection) I forwarded them by the person who brought the note. During Mr. Hunter’s absence a son of the Praklang’s, an exceeding intelli- gent young man, came to see me,* and a present was brought me from the Praklang of fruits and sweetmeats; and Mr. Hunter, on his return, said the Praklang was very much pleased with the letters, and would be glad to see me in the forenoon. About twelve o’clock boats were reported ready to take us to the house of the minister, but just as we were starting, a second message arrived to say the king was so much inclined to be friends with the English, that though the letters were not addressed to him, he would receive them as though they had been, and that a boat would be sent for them; and as the letters were to go to the king, the Pra- klang begged us to defer our visit till the evening. In a few minutes one of the royal state boats, with a roof of em- broidered cloth of scarlet and gold, and rowed by about *T afterwards doubted if he came on my account, and had good reason to believe he did not. Se i UO Ne es PS et ee 1840. | Mission to the Court of Siam. 27 forty men in the royal livery (red jackets), and command- ed by an officer, was announced, and a proper vessel for the reception of the letters brought up, covered with a cloth of gold embroidery ; on this I placed the letters both of the secretary of the government of India and the commissioner, and carried them myself (a Siamese officer covering them with a red umbrella) down to the boat, where they were respect- fully received, placed in the centre of it, and covered with an umbrella. We departed attended with three other state boats. Soon after dinner a message arrived from the Praklang to say he had sent boats for our conveyance, and was ready to receive us, I accordingly went; Mr. Hunter, Captain Browne, Captain Hughes, Mr. Smith, and Mr. Hayes accompanied me. Mr. Hunter, who kindly acted as interpreter, and myself went in the state boat sent for me, and the other gentlemen in Mr. Hunter’s boat, the Ghyne-Goung-Gyoup, a Burman officer who accompanied me, and whom I begged Mr. Hunter to mention to the Praklang, and some of my Burman followers in a second government boat; we reached the Praklang’s in about five minutes, and found him with the second Praklang and several other officers of rank already assembled; chairs were placed for us at the opposite side of the hall to where the Siamese officers were crouched on their elbows, and coffee was served to us in a handsome set of Dresden China. The hall was a long and handsome room, entirely in the Chinese style, and splendidly lighted up with English lamps and chanda- liers. We walked at once up to the chairs; when seated | saluted him by raising my hand up to my forehead; removing our shoes was not once alluded to; indeed all the English gentlemen always retain them when visiting His Majesty or his ministers. Conversation was entirely between the Praklang and myself, except for a few minutes, when he addressed himself to the Goung-Gyoup through a Taline of his house- hold. I explained the purpose of my visit to be to assure them of the wish of the Indian Government to strengthen, if possible, the already firm friendship for many years uninterrupted, and begged them to receive the thanks of the commissioner for their kindness to our traders, and for their prompt endeavours to discover and 28 Mission to the Court of Siam. [No. 97. release Mrs. Breisley.* I expressed my sense of the friendly act of the king in receiving the letters himself; the Praklang replied that the Siamese government were equally anxious with the English for the increase of existing friendship, and were much obliged to the government of India and to the com- missioner for sending, and to myself for coming through such a desolate jungle as that I have crossed. I was asked the usual questions as to the health of the Right Hon’ble. the Governor General of India and other members of Government; how long I had been on the road ; how I had been received ; and whether all my people were well ; to which I returned the usual answers, and expressed my thanks for the kindness which I had re- ceived. I mentioned the deception practised by the governor of Nakoutchathee ; he said it was all out of kindness and con- sideration for my own comfort, and laughing heartily, he said he could not conceive how any one could prefer travelling in the sun to lying quietly on his back in a boat, and progressing by the labour of other people. He then alluded to what I had mentioned to him through Mr. Hunter in the morning; the indignity they had offered in making the walls of the hall they had prepared for me and my people of materials which had been used in the funeral of the late queen, than which, according to the superstitious notions of the Burmans, and of course of the Siamese, no greater insult can be offered in Bur- ma; no one but the Toobayazah (who with his whole family are so degraded that no one will associate with them) will touch any article which has been so defiled ; in fact, with the pecu- liar notions of these people ; it was impossible for me to avoid mentioning it ; he said they had no such feelings regarding these * The wife of an English gentleman who left Mergui with his family in the disturbance in 1829, with the intention of applying to the Penang government for assistance. They were supposed to have been murdered by their Malay boat’s crew as they had a good deal of property on board, but as reports reached Penang and Maulmain, where some of the lady’s friends reside, that she had been seen in some of the Siamese Malayan states the commissioner in the Tenasserim provinces wrote to the min- isters, who at once sent for the people described, they however turned out to be Burmans who had accompanied some ship’s officers many years ago, and had no wish to return. 1840. | Mission to the Court of Siam. 29 things in Siam, which I know is not true, and Mr. Hunter had heard the people in passing making remarks on the ma- terials, but was not aware of the feelings on the subject. The Praklang offered if I wished to have it immediately taken down ; I told him that of course I should be obliged by his doing so, as I could not use the house until it was altered. The Praklang seemed excessively annoyed that I had been told of it, and gave orders to prevent the people communicating with my followers ; of this I complained, and asked him to remove the restriction; he said they have always been enemies with the Burmans, and could not now feel otherwise ; but as they had come with me no restraint should be put upon them, but they must tell the officer on duty at their quarters when their friends came to see them. I pointed out to him, that these people had no more to do with the Burman government than the Siamese, and that I only wished them to have the same liberty the Siamese had when they came to Maulmain. He said such was their friendship for the English, that they might go when and where they pleased. He then asked me if I had served in the last war with Ava, and whether it was likely we should go to war with that country again. I explained the conduct of the present Burman government towards Colonel Burney, the forbearance of the government of India, and its wish to avoid a war, but that fears were entertained that it would be impossible, from the warlike preparations made by the present king, his refusal to consider himself bound by the treaty of Yandaboo, or receive the present resident. A good deal of conversation passed on this subject ; he did not, however, proffer any assistance, nor did I think it necessary at this meeting to make any re- quest about the cattle. He asked me how and when I proposed returning ; I said it was impossible for me to say; he assured me I might go in any direction I chose, by land or by water, and remain as long as I pleased; he requested me to wait a couple of days, when I should be introduced to the king, for which honour I expressed my thanks; we took our leave and returned home. The Praklang is a fat, good tempered old gentleman, about sixty, he received us with nothing on but the cloth round his loins, seated on a raised platform or square couch. 30 Mission to the Court of Siam. [No. 97. His manners are said to be much changed since his first arrival at his present dignity; he was then haughty and imperious, he is now friendly and affable, a great favourite of Mr. Hunter’s and all Kuropeans frequenting the port. In the evening Coon-sit, the son of the Praklang, who is intimate with Mr. Hunter, and whom he meets on terms of perfect equality, came in for an hour to our residence ; he is a modest and unassuming man, of considerable intelligence ; he writes English pretty well, un- derstands nearly all that is said to him, and speaks a little. He has considerable mechanical talent, and has just finished — a ship on an English model of about 400 or 500 tons ; he is by some said to be an eaves-dropper, and to take advantage of his intimacy with Mr. Hunter to listen to and report to his father any inadvertent remark made by Europeans. Memoranda respecting the existence of Copper in the territory of Luz, near Bela. By Captain DE ua Hosts, Assistant Quarter Master General, S. R. F. [Communicated to the Society from the Political Department, Government of India. ] During the absence on sick leave from the Sinde Reserve Force, Captain George Boyd, of the second Grenadiers, perform- ed my duties, and having heard that antimony was procurable near a place called Shah Bellawl, he sent one of the guides to survey the road to that village, and make inquiries on the sub- ject of antimony being found there. On the return of the guide (second guide Esso Rama) he brought with him specimens of /ead as well as of antimony, both of which were sent by Captain Boyd to Dr. Hedde, Assay Master in the Mint, Bombay. Having shortly after arrived and assumed charge of my appointment, it became my duty to extract the route from the guide’s field book, when on ques- tioning him respecting the place to which he had been (Hoja Samote) I found he had been informed, that in former days copper, silver, and gold had been found in the mountains near that village. | Considering the report worthy of being inquired into, I sent for the brother of Navillull, named Sukkaramdass, and asked him if he had ever heard any thing of the report ; he informed me that he had, and that a banian of Kurrachee 1840.| Hxistence of Copper in the territory of Luz. ol had been near the town. of Bela, and brought away specimens of copper ore, which he melted and sold at Kurrachee, making a considerable profit; but that the Jam of Bela had heard of, and prohibited his returning, having punished those who gave him the ore. I requested Sukkaramdass to bring the man to me, or his son, if the man himself was dead, as I feared he was. On the 4th December Sukkaramdass brought the son of the man who had been to Bela, and his statement is as follows. Twenty years ago, the informant, a banian named Kattoo, and his father Phuth, having dealings at Sonmianee, were in- formed that tamba (copper) was procurable from a mountain near Bela, they accordingly went to within four coss of the mountain, and got about three maunds of ore from some Belochees and Baboonies there ; they melted this, and it yielded nearly half a maund of excellent copper; they took avery small specimen of this, and went to the brother of the Jam of Bela (Kes- ser Khan) and offered to work the ore under his protection ; he at first seemed inclined to listen to the proposal, but an old man, named Neroo, of Shikarpore, said, that if he agreed or caused his brother Ali to agree, he would lose the country ; on which both Kesser Khan and the Jam Ali desired the inform- ant and his father to go; and told them if ever they again came there, they would be buried alive. They left Bela, and brought with them the copper they had concealed, which they sold at Kurrachee, making a good profit. The following ques- tions were put by me to the banian. Question. How did you go to Bela? Answer. By Sonmianee. Q. Is there any other road to it? A. Yes, by Shah Billawl, and the Kunnaraj river. Q. How far is the Kunnaraj river from the place where cop- per is found ? A. I believe about 20 coss, but do not really know, never having been that road. Q. Where did you get the ore (muttee or phatur) from which you extracted the copper ? A. From a hill 12 coss south-east of Bela; some Belochees brought it to us. 32 Existence of Copper in the territory of Luz. {No. 97. Q. Do the people work the ore ? A. No; they are ignorant Mahomedans, and think of nothing but their cattle and thieving. Q. Is it known to many that the ore exists ? A. I do not know; but believe it is; the Jam is aware of it, and some of his people. Q. Of what description was the copper you brought ? A, Of the best, equal to that sold in the bazar, which is sheet copper, and comes from Velété (Europe). Q. What average does the ore yield ? A. Some will yield 4, others 4 or 4, but the average is a little less than 4. Q. How did you extract it ? A. We simply melted it with wood in a mud furnace, and the copper ran off like a stream of gold. . At what cost ? . At that of the firewood, which is mere nothing. . What is the value of copper here (Kurrachee) ? . Sixty rupees for 80 Ibs. the best. Do you know the value of 80 Ibs. of copper in Bombay ? . I believe, about 42 rupees. Where is it brought from ? . It is sheet copper, brought from Velété (Kurope.) . What would be the cost of bringing 60 lbs. of copper from the place you had the specimen you speak of ? A. 1 could, I think, bring 60 Ibs. of copper to Kurrachee, and sell it with profit for 30, or 28. rupees less if worked on the spot. Q. Are any other metals found where the copper is pro- OKROROROAO cured ? A. I cannot say; we searched by stealth, and were afraid of being discovered ; but it is said that silver is found in these mountains. Q. Did you ever hear of a black substance like charcoal, which burns well, being found ? A. No, I never did ; but I have told you, how much afraid of being found out we were. | Q. Could you shew me the hill from which you got the copper ? 1840.| Ewistence of Copper in the territory of Luz. 30 A. Certainly, I saw it plainly, and could point it out to you. Q. Is there much of the ore? A, Yes, it is a mountain, and you could get any quantity. Q. Are lead and antimony found there, (Shisa ? Soorma ?) A, Yes, in abundance, the latter is exported. From the foregoing information, it appears to me, that no doubt can exist respecting the existence of copper inthe vicinity of the Kunnaraj river, and Bela. | Firstly, Because the guide heard such a report at the spot from the people of the place. Secondly, Because it was known to the native Sukkaramdass. Thirdly, Because I have conversed with a person who declares he has been there, and because it is well known to more than one person, that he had procured copper and sold it at Kurrachee. This statement is clear and distinct, and I think at least worthy of notice and inquiry, if not of implicit belief. P.S. I have been promised specimens of the ore, and that it shall be melted in my presence ; when brought it is my inten- tion to weigh the ore, and ascertain what proportion of copper it yields. Memoir on the Climate, Soil, Produce, and Husbandry of Afghan-~ ustan and the neighbouring Countries.—By Lieut. (rwi.! PART IV. Husbandry and Cultivation. 165. It was originally my intention to have attempted a treatise of considerable length on this subject, in which would have been mentioned all the cultivated products, as far as ascer- tained, of all the districts. ‘To this would have been added an account of the operations of agriculture in some of the most in- teresting and best known of them, with some details of the life of the poor. Various reasons now withhold me from this attempt, and among them the chief is the want of time to execute it with 1 Continued from p. 1015. vol. vii. 34 Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanistan. [No. 97. tolerable accuracy. I have in consequence greatly restricted the plan. The matter which is here to follow, relates to two heads ; Ist, Some particulars of the husbandry of these countries in general; 2nd, A review of the districts ; in which an attempt will be made to estimate, or enable the reader himself to estimate, their present degree of cultivation, the supplies they yield, their population, and the distinction of their in- dustry ; this is, as it were, the summing up of all. It is much to be regretted, that it is the most difficult, as well as the most important of the subjects attempted, and that in which the conclusions drawn, will the oftenest be found vague, unsa- tisfactory, and erroneous ; nor could it be otherwise, if we advert to the natural difficulties of the subject, when it is necessary to proceed on report merely. The witnesses, though numerous for the elucidating other subjects, were few for the elucidating of this, which requires many concurring testimonies, and much minuteness of testimony. The local and national vanity of informants, not to mention individual prejudices and hasty judgments, forbid our relying on their opinions as judicious and impartial; could they be relied on, still there is much diffi- culty in ascertaining the exact force of those comparative terms, which in all cases must be used, for they assume a different meaning according to the standard to which the mind of the speaker has been accustomed. Section I.—Of Husbandry. 166. Lands in these countries are divided into irrigated and not irrigated, or in the local Persian abee and lulm; this last term I have for brevity’s sake retained. Lulm is itself of vari- ous kinds; that which most strictly deserves the name is com- monest in Chuch and the plain of the Mundurs, where the quality of the soil is excellent ; the fields are merely ploughed in the ordinary way, and not divided into partitions, nor is any other contrivance used either for the retaining the rain which may fall on the surface, or for receiving any supplies from other quarters. But in general, lulm lands have some advantage in this particular, natural or artificial. In hilly countries the hollows which ne- 1840. | Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanistan. 35 cessarily receive part of the rain falling on the neighbouring heights are cultivated in preference; others are so situated that it is easy to turn on them the water of nullahs, and these are not reckoned irrigated, but lulm, (see paragraph 78). In Toorkistan, certain lands are distinguished into a class as receiving in the spring a great deal of thaw water. There are other lands, which depend entirely on the rain which may fall on their own surface, but have been provided with a high bank of earth which surrounds them and retains the water ; such may be seen at Oormul, a village about 9 miles south-east of Peshawur ; they are every year under crop from one generation to another. There is still another species of lulm quite distinct in its nature from all the preceding, being land moist in itself, without requiring for the success of the crops raised on it rain or any other supply; such is in Cabul called za, and in that, and similar climates, is commonly in the state of natural meadow. In Hindoostan are considerable tracts of it, being the low banks of rivers subject to be under water for a great part of the rainy season, and large spaces lying under the great northern mountains. In Mooltan, where it is considered as the most valuable species of land, it is called sew or seo, that is literally border, because it lies near the rivers. 167. Irrigated lands too, may be divided into species whose differences it is important to note. Some lands are only imper- fectly irrigated. The Kamojoe Kafirs turn the water of springs upon their fields, but the supply is so defective, that summer showers are anxiously looked for. In most cases, rain in the accustomed season is welcome to the owner of even well urigated lands, as saving him the trouble and expense of watering. Irrigated lands may be divided into those which depend on springs and natural streams; secondly, those which depend on wells; thirdly, those which depend on kahrezas ; fourthly, those depending on dams. The first kind con- tains several species. In the vallies of mountainous coun- tries, and in plains under mountains, it is easy to conduct the water of streams from a higher level upon the fields, and this constitutes the first species; but in open and champaign countries the difference of level is seldom so considerable as 36 Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanistan. [No. 97. to admit of this, it is therefore necessary in watering from the rivers or the canals which are drawn from them, to raise the water by machinery. I have heard that on the bank of the little river Turee, which runs near Jumboo, and afterwards falls into the Chunab, there is a machine for raising water out of it, which is turned by the current of the river itself. But I believe no other instance is known, where instead of the force of the water a living force is not employed; this species therefore approaches to the second kind, or that of wells. In Mooltan and Sindh, the most common mode of watering is by what are called jhulars, which are half wells cut out of the edge of the channel within which the canal runs. Jhulars are used by the Daoodzyes and Mihmudzyes, and are not unknown on the banks of the Oxus, in the do- minions of Bokhara; but in the whole of Toorkistan, the only mode of irrigation worth attention is the first species, or that in which streams are turned upon the fields. 168. Wells may be divided into three kinds; the Ist is the cutch well, which in Hindoostan they call Dhenkulee, or rather that name is applied to the pole, which in this species is used. 2d, The Persian wheel, called in Persian, Churkh-Chah ; and in Hin- doostan, Ruhut or Hurt. 3rd The bucket well. The first species is proper only when the depth to the water is very small. In the Punjab it is sometimes used in irrigation. In Cabul and KKushmeer it is employed only in wells whose water is drawn for domestic purposes. The Persian wheel is proper for mo- derate depths; it brings up the water by means of pots, in a manner already described by travellers in Egypt, in which country it is very common. I believe it to be found in Me- sopotamia, and in certain quarters of Persia, but in large spaces of that kingdom it is utterly unknown, neither is it known in Khoorasan, and it is barely known in Bactria and the west of Toorkistan. It is this wheel which is worked in the jhulars of that country. There was once a Persian wheel in Cabul, but now there is none west of Jellalabad. In Peshawur, Chuch, and Sindh, it is the chief kind used ; it even extends into See- weestan, but in that country streams are partly used in irri- gation, and for drinking they have another kind of well, to be 1840. | Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanistan. 37 mentioned. Towards the quarter of India, we may trace the wheel through parts of Chuch, Jodhpoor, Oodpoor, and Goojrat as far as Bombay; in the north it extends to Loodhiana, in the upper part of our Dooab, but it is lost as the traveller proceeds thence towards Delhi. There is only one east of the Ganges. There is no doubt that it might be adopted with great advantage in all our provinces, especially where the water is at a medium depth below the surface ; but where it is beyond fifty feet, the weight of the pots is so great that the use of it will be no longer economical; and instead, ought to be substituted the bucket well, which is the third species enumerated. It has some varieties, which need not here be adverted to, as only one is well known in these countries. The bucket is of leather, and is raised by a single rope which passes over a pulley, and is drawn by cattle; this is the commonest well in Toorkistan and Khoorasan, where however it is not used in irrigation but only for the supply of water for men and cattle. The pasturing tribes in the west of Toorkistan and north-west of Khoorasan carry buckets with them, with which they draw water. In India this species of wells is on the whole the commonest ; in the desert and the arid tracts lying east of it, the water is at too great a depth in the soil to admit of any other. 169. The third species of irrigation is still more expen- sive and operose. It is that by kahrezas, or aqueducts, by which the water of a hill or rising ground is brought out at its foot in a rivulet, to be disposed of at the pleasure of the farmer. A kahrez is usually made in the following manner :—A well is dug at the spot where it is intended the water shall issue ; above it, in the acclivity, is dug another at the distance of from - five to twenty yards, according to circumstances and the custom of the place. It is said great skill is required to judge what hills will yield a copious rivulet and in what line it is most ad- visable to conduct the kahrez. The wells are continued at dis- tances generally equal, until the owner thinks the quantity of water will be sufficient, or until the depth of the wells (which however does not increase at the same rate as the height of their summits in the acclivity) becomes so great that the expense ex- 38 Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanistan. [No. 97. ceeds the advantage. In Ghaeen, Toorshish, and some other parts of Khoorasan, the highest wells are sometimes 70 yards deep, but in countries better supplied with water, they are much shallower. All the wells are connected below by means of an aqueduct through which water flows to the foot of the hill. Kahrezas are known in almost all parts of Persia and Khoorasan, in the west and middle of Bulochistan, in the country of the Tureens and Bulochees, in the table land of Ghuznee, and even Cabul, but they are not to be found east of that dis- trict. There is at present not one in repair in the whole of Toorkistan, but in the last generation a considerable num- ber were dug by Koobad Khan Undijanee, lord of Koonduz, with a view to the cultivation of hilly wastes called the Dushti Jubulda, but they are now gone to ruin. Very good kahrezas will turn a small mill of the country. The most famous is that in the neighbourhood of Ghuznee, ascribed to Sultan Mahmood. Including its branches it is asserted to be 12 koss, but this is probably an exaggeration. Many kahrezas are two miles long, and in some quarters a great one will cost 20,000 rupees. Such works do great honour to those nations, and are one proof out of many of their industrious dispositions. 170. Wells are proper in level champaign countries and plains, in which water is found throughout at a moderate depth ; natural rills are chiefly useful within hills of considerable height, or at their foot. Kahrezas are natural to a country when the hills are low and unconnected, and consequently send out no constant streams; but when there are found vallies among such hills, which in the seasons of rain receive the water of the neighbourhood, but are dry during the remainder of the year, it may become advisable to retain that water (to be used when in future most advantageous) by extending a dam across the valley in a convenient situation ; these are the dams most common, and which peculiarly deserve that name. The water of a feeble stream is sometimes dammed up for future use; and dams are often required in drawing a canal from a river, or diverting the channel of a constant stream; but such fall under the first species of irrigation. Rain water dams are common in the Soolemanee hills, and in some quarters of Seeweestan. There a gt ae 1840. | Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanistan. 39 are ruins of very magnificent dams within the Paraparnisan mountains. Somewhat similar to dams, are tanks, very much used in irrigation in some quarters of India, but very little in any of those countries, and in most of them not at all. The method of scooping water is probably unknown beyond the provinces which border on India. 171. India has two harvests in the year, the products of which are for the most part distinct, but not always. The rudbdee, sown in autumn and the beginning of winter, is cut in the spring, and consists chiefly of wheat, barley, chunna, musoor, peas, and beans, most of which are raised in cold climates also. The khureef, sown during the rains, or immediately before them, is reaped in the autumn, which is the harvest time of the higher latitudes; but the khureef products are seldom capable of being cultivated to advantage in them, being rice, maize, jooaree, bajra, moth, moong, oord, murhwa or baggy, and some others. These two harvests thus distinguished, extend as far as Jellalabad and Lughman, and generally to the cold climates; but these last, and also the warmer ones beyond them, are com- monly said to have the rubbee only; this is strictly true of the very coldest,—such as the Tibets, the greater part of the Huzara country, the upper parts of Budukhshan, and some others ; but with respect to the more temperate, some cir- cumstances may be stated in modification of it. It is of little importance what phraseology we adopt, provided the facts be kept in mind. 172. Even in Cabul many products of the khureef are actually raised, and probably all might be raised. In the whole of the west of Toorkistan beyond the Oxus, and of Bactria, _jooaree is one of the greatest crops in the country, and does not fall short of the Indian either in quantity or quality of produce. We may trace it into the country of the Kuzzaks and Kirghizes. Maize grows in all but the coldest countries, as well as in India, except that there it is sooner ripe. It has been but lately introduced into Cabul, Candahar, and most other of the neigh- bouring countries. In those quarters it is raised not to be ground into flour, but be eaten whole after being roasted. Mash, which includes oord and moong, is acommon produce in Toorkis- 40 Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanistan. [No. 97. tan, parts of Khoorasan and Afghanistan. Rice is the chief corn of Kushmeer, and is raised in all but the coldest countries, provided there be a sufficient supply of water; it seems how- ever to degenerate in quality in such countries. In the warmer parts of Khoorasan, were there but summer rains as in India, the khureef might be expected to be equivalent to the rub- bee. Not only can we trace some of the products of the khureef into the moderately cold climates, but we may mark two harvests tolerably distinct in their seed times and their products. This may be exemplified by a sketch of husbandry of the valley of Cabul. The great seed time is the autumn, in which are reaped wheat, barley, musoor, and peas; these are reaped chiefly in the month of June, having lain under the snow during winter and been protected by it. All of them are sometimes sown in the spring, and this practice is far commoner in Budukhshan and many other quarters, but the spring-sown are cut nearly at the same time with the autumn-sown. To this harvest belongs chunna, which is very rarely sown in the autumn, but beans are sown about the end of May and reaped in the end of September; the autumn- sown products, together with chunna, may be said to form the rubbee of Cabul, which is by far its greatest crop. There remains however some considerable products which have different harvests. Besides beans, which in India belong to the rubbee, we may mention the two grains there called cheena and kungunee, in Persian urzun and gal. In India they are scarcely considered as belonging to any season, for by the help of water they may be raised equally well in all. The cheena however is more common- ly cultivated in the rubbee, or rather after it, and the kungunee in the khureef. In Cabul they are raised sometimes for fodder and sometimes for their grain. In the latter case they are sown in the beginning of May and reaped in August. Maize and mash are sown a few days later, and reaped in September. Rice, a far more important product than maize, is sown in May and June, and reaped the end of August and September. 173. It is even practicable in this valley, by good manage- ment, to gather two crops within the year off the same ground. In India the farmer usually contents himself with one crop in 1840. | Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanistan. 4] the year, and the rubbee and khureef lands are distinct. In Cabul there is a similar distinction between spring lands and autumn (buharee and teeramahee). A good farmer ploughs his spring lands in autumn, and gives them a red winter fallow; and his autumn lands in spring, giving them a red summer fallow; but where plenty of manure is to be _ had, he both gives more to his fields and exacts more from them. After cutting his wheat, barley, and other rubbee products, but especially after barley, he ploughs and sows other things which come to their perfection in the autumn. Kungunee and cheena intended to ripen, can scarcely, in Cabul, be raised after wheat, but may be raised after barley, which is about twenty days sooner. In Bulkh considerable quantities of these grains are raised after barley, and sometimes after wheat, for the harvest there is earlier. In Cabul they may be cultivated for fodder even after wheat. The kungunee, when its ear is forming, is eaten down by sheep or other animals ; the cheena is reaped in the same state and given to stack. In Bulkh they sometimes raise maize, mash, melons, and garden vegetables and greens, after wheat and barley; but chiefly in Cabul, certain only of | these can be raised to advantage in this manner, for the land is there scarcer than in Bulkh, and the farmer studies to _ draw the utmost from it ; the lateness of the harvest and coldness _ of the autumn often defeat his intention. _ 174. The grains and garden vegetables just mentioned are, | in general, the same which are cultivated in England—carrots, ) turnips, radishes, cabbages, lettuce, cauliflower, onions, garlic, _ &c.; to these are added some from India. The mothee of India | gives but little produce in Cabul. The shukurkund, or sweet _ potatoe, is not known even in Peshawur. Most garden vegetables are cultivated in spring ground, some in ground lately under rubbee. Melons are commonly raised in spring land. In Bulkh it is customary after cutting barley, to plough, manure, and sow a mixture of mash, musk melons, and water melons, which all ripen in the autumn. In Candahar there is no difficulty in raising the paliz (for that is the name given to a crop of melons or cucumbers) after the rubbee. Great quantities of manure and water must be given to the paliz. In certain places in the G 42 Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanistan. _|No. 97. east of Bactria, however, it is lulm raised. Next to their fruits, the natives dwell on the excellence of their paliz, and it forms no inconsiderable object of attention to the farmer; it is most abundant in the neighbourhood of cities ; in very re- mote and rustic parts it is unknown, but they are few. Few things that are cultivated, derive their qualities so much from the soil as from some unknown circumstances. Futehabad, on the road between Jellalabad and Cabul, is famous for the excellence of its water melons; near this place Shujaool Moolk was defeated in June 1809. All the products which have been mentioned, including paliz, are, in Khoorasan, included under the name subzbur, except wheat and barley, which are called sufedbur. In Toorkistan, the terms kupood, burgee, and — sufedburger are substituted. The distinction is recognized in — the revenue system, and the rules of collection from each are sometimes different. 175. The boast of the natives is their fruits. Those of — Cabul are acknowledged to be good, even by the Persians, whose country is celebrated for its fruit, and who are gene- rally loth to commend any other. The Cabulees probably — lavish too high praises on their fruits. Their pears at least — are but ordinary ;. their apples are inferior to those of Kush- meer, and even they, when brought to India, are not so good as the English or American. It is but just to observe, that the — most delicate and luscious varieties of the fruits are not capable — of being preserved for exportation, and a foreigner cannot — judge of their merits, without visiting the place. The following — are the chief fruits of Cabul—the apple, pear, plumb, cherry, — peach, apricot, quince, mulberry, pomegranate, almond, walnut, — and grape. The fruit called Allo Bokhara, is not here raised ; it is quite unknown at Bokhara. The greatest quantities are raised — in the district of Ghuznee, whence it is exported, but some — are produced in particular places of Khoorasan. The mulberry — has been already mentioned, and appears to be a most important — object of culture in certain parts of the country; the walnut is — cultivated in the neighbourhood of Cabul, but on the whole, it — ranks rather as an uncultivated, than a cultivated product. In the — valley the season of fruit begins about the time that the — 1840. | Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanistan. 43 barley is reaping. The earliest species are certain kinds of mulberry, the plumb, and a kind of apple called Jaurisigurma. The latest fruit are certain kinds of apple, which ripen in the end of September and beginning of October. The apricot is very abundant in Ghorbund. ‘The grapes of Cabul are much celebrated, and comprehend many varieties and degrees of esti- mation ; the earliest are ripe in the last days of August. The fruit gardens of Cabul on the whole, occupy a considerable part of the valley, and furnish one of the greatest exports of the country. In Khoorasan the fruit is good, but it does not form a prominent object of culture. The pomegranates of Canda- har are large and good; some are exported. The natives of 'Toor- kistan boast of the goodness of their fruits, and probably with justice, but little reaches India. The quince of Peshawur is said to excel all others. The place produces no other fruit of remarkable goodness. 176. Hay is known in most of these countries, but not in all places of them. We have already seen that most of the pastoral nations trust the subsistence of their stock during the winter to the withered grass still remaining in the pasturing grounds, even though it have been buried to a considerable depth under snow. I have already mentioned the custom of the Hazard Ymaks, and others, of reaping the natural grass of their pastures, to serve as fodder during the winter. With respect to the provinces towards India, and formerly part of it, their customs, in this respect, are the same as those of that country. No natural grass is reaped for hay; the only ex- ception I am acquainted with in the whole of those wide countries, is the custom in the countries east of the great Indian desert of cutting grass at the end of the rains. A provision of grass is reckoned necessary to enable a town to stand a siege. The cultivation of artificial grasses is (I believe) quite unknown in India, but it is very common to sow certain of the khureef products, such as jooaree and moth, with a view to cut them before ripening for the stock. When so intended, they are always sown thicker than usual, and called churee ; part is given green, but more is reserved to be dry food during the cold season. The same custom prevails in Cabul 44 Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afyhanistan. [No. 97. with respect to cheena and kungunee, as already mentioned, (see paragraph 172); but what corresponds to our clover and hay is the rishka and shufteer. These plants are found in a wild state in many parts of these countries, as has already been mentioned (see paragraph 124). The shufteer is an annual, or at least is cultivated for only one year from the same seed ; it is generally sown in the autumn. The first reaping is, in Cabul, about the 30th of April, and it may be cut again twice or thrice during the course of the summer and autumn. It is little cultivated in Khoorasan. In the district of Hirat, it is sometimes ploughed in, without having been once cut, to serve as a preparation for rice. It is scarcely cultivated in Toorkistan, where it is very commonly wild. Rishka seems to be a much su- perior plant. It is represented as a perennial, and is in fact allowed to remain on the ground ten years, sometimes fifteen. It is cultivated in Cabul and all the countries west of it, but both rishka and shufteer are unknown in Peshawur; they re- quire much watering. Rishka is generally sown in the spring. 177. A custom little known in India is, that of cutting what are called khuseels. By this is meant the cutting out the leaves of wheat or barley, before the stalk has risen, to be given to horses or cattle. . In Peshawur it is thought that barley may be thus cut twice, or even thrice, with little or no injury to it ; but wheat is more delicate in this respect, and many condemn the cutting even one khuseel of it. In Cabul no khuseels are cut, and perhaps the custom is pernicious in that climate. It is very common to eat down by cattle, the young leaves of the wheat and barley in the autumn or beginning of winter. In the Kuchhee of Mohummud Khan, both customs prevail, and the cutting of khuseel is common in most parts of the Sikh country. When a crop is likely, in the Punjab or Peshawur, to turn out an indifferent one, or when danger is apprehended from military violence, the farmer sometimes thinks it advisable to cut it down, even when the ear is formed, as a khuseel, and instead of it to sow some other product. Khuseels, in the sense first ex- plained, are cut in all provinces of Persia; they are thought to be a good food for animals. 178. The rubbee of India and of the warm provinces of the 1840. | Lieut. Irwin's Memoir of Afghanistan. 45 Afghan monarchy as far as the hills to the west, is almost invariably autumn-sown. In our upper provinces, the month of October is the best month for sowing, and that in which most is sown. Moderate rain before sowing, or in lieu of it, one watering, is favourable to the future crops, but not reckoned indispensable. In the neighbourhood of Peshawur, the owners of lands capable of irrigation never fail to give one water before sowing wheat or barley. This is called in the local dialect tleap, and is not considered as included in the number of waters commonly said to be given to these crops. Beyond Jellalabad there is not the same uniformity of practice with respect to seed time as formerly observed ; all the products of the rubbee are, in Cabul, occasionally sown in the spring, and cheena is always so treated. In Ghobund the whole of the barley is spring. In the district of Ghuznee there is on the whole more spring corn than winter. In Budukshan the barley is generally spring, as well as a part of the wheat. In the whole of Toorkis- tan and the greater part of Khoorasan, the whole of the cheena is spring. In Candahar it is true most of it is winter, and spring corn is but little known in that district; but in the country of the Hazaras, except the most temperate parts, all the crops are spring; the same is true of the most lofty parts of Budukhsan, Durwaz, Keerategin and Wukheeha, the Pamer, a considerable part at least of Kashkar, and all the Tibets. From the last, the custom has spread to Kushmeer, but the rubbee there is inconsiderable. It will be found in most cases true, that the greater the cold of the place, the less of winter crops ; ano- ther rule usually ‘holds, that where the lands are irrigated, there is more winter corn, and vice versa. The chief reason as- signed is, that lulm crops sown in the autumn are subject to be hurt by the frost ; but the owner of irrigated lands can pro- tect his young crops from its rigour, by watering them. This water is therefore called yukhab, in Persian. In Keerategin alone, the rule is reversed under peculiar circumstances. 179. In our upper provinces, the harvest of wheat and barley is in March and April. It is observed that the south-east is earlier than the north-west; but the difference is not consider- able. The rule however holds good in our further progress to 46 Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanistan. [N é 97. Peshawur, and between the harvest of that place and of Delhi there is at least one month. On the 20th May, there was wheat still uncut in the valley of Peshawur; Bajour, Koonur, Jellala- bad and Lughman are somewhat later. It is a common saying in the country, that the rubbee comes from the east (that is, begins soonest in that quarter) and the khureef from the west. The latter fact it is not difficult to explain, for the khureef here meant, is the Huramee khureef (so called in the country) which is sown in the end of May, or earlier, and is artificially watered. The causes of the former fact deserve our attention. They seem to be the following. Ist, As we proceed north-west, the heat of climate declines, and crops ripen a little more tardily. 2nd, To the west the periodical summer rains be- come later and later, and hence the seed time, and as depending upon it the harvest of the khureef, is retarded, which has a natural tendency to retard the seed time and harvest of the rubbee. 3rd, A great proportion of the rubbee is sown on low lands (see paragaph 166). ‘The consequence is, that the seed time must be deferred until these lands become capable of tillage, by losing a portion of the moisture they have gained during the flood of the rivers and the periodical rains. In the second place, crops sown on such lands are later in ripening than the crops of higher lands. 180. All parts of the valley of Cabul are not of the same temperature, and in the ripening of crops on soil and exposure, June on the whole is the harvest month. Ghuznee is some days later than Cabul, and the Hazara country considerably later than Ghuznee. In Seatsung of the’ Hazaras the har- vest is in October, and snow sometimes falls before it is gathered. Candahar is a little later than Peshawur. Bokhara seems equal with Cabul, and the harvest of other places may be calculated with tolerable exactness, from the temperature. The Pamer however is very early. The Kirghizes during their visits to it in the summer, cultivate some wheat, barley, and cheena. There wheat though later sown than the little spring wheat sown in the dominions of Bokhara, is sooner ready. We may here notice a curious circumstance with respect to the corn of the highest countries. The wheat of Tibet, the Pamer, and the Hazaras, is 1840. | Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghamstan. 47 bearded like that of India, but the barley (especially of Tibet) is unbearded. Not less singular is that species of barley well known in Persia, in Mushhud, Goonabad and some other parts of Persian Khoorasan, under the name of jouitoorshee. That part which is intended for seed is given to horses, with such pre- cautions as prevent its being triturated, and thus losing its vegetative power in the body of the animal; when afterwards sown in the spring it comes to perfection in sixty days. 181. The scythe is unknown, and crops are reaped by the sickle. Wheat and barley are, in Toorkistan and most other quarters, separated from their straw on the field. In Cabul the straw is reckoned equal in value to the grain, and to prevent its dissipation, most farmers carry the crop after reaping and drying to the farmstead and there separate them. In these countries, as in India, the rubbee crops are trod out by animals, not thrashed ; to these there are few exceptions. In Kushmeer the labour of men is cheap, and there all crops are separated from their straw by being beaten with sticks. I recollect to have heard of the flail being somewhere used. The methods of preserving corn are various. In Toorkistan the most com- mon practice is to lodge it in guts, which locally they call wells, but in Tashkund Week-kheeha, and Keerategin, kundoos are commoner. These are well known in Hindustan, and are made above ground of mud and straw. In such are lodged a great part of the grain of Cabul, Ghuznee, and Khoorasan, but in cities, granaries belonging to individuals are upon a much greater scale. Many of the Dooranees have considerable stores of former years lodged in their houses. This resource secures that country from even the chance of a famine; and famines are rare in any part of the countries in question; the most common cause is _ the devastations of locusts. SEcTION II.—A Review of the Districts. 182. In the following review of the districts, I shall alto- gether omit some considerable spaces of country which have been mentioned under preceding subjects. The late embassy in Sindh must have procured information respecting the Tal- 48 Lieut. Irwin’?s Memoir of Afghanistan. [ No. 97. pooree dominions, much preferable to any I can offer. During our inquiries we have always experienced great difficulties in gaining just and consistent accounts of Bulochistan, and I have learnt that government have lately received some information respecting that country ; on both accounts I intend passing most of it in silence. To the south we begin with Keharapoor, and the line between it and the neighbourhood of Candahar. In my opinion there is no other line with which it so much behoves us to be well acquainted, and I therefore feel the greater regret, that the information yet obtained regarding it is so unsatisfactory. The country immediately north of it, constituting the southern part of Afghanistan, is still more obscure, and there are certain places, the routes between which we have never been able to obtain. In the account of Candahar, something will be said of the Doorranee country and Seestan. With respect to Persian Khoorasan, it will also be mentioned, though very briefly. We have to regret that our information is often the most scanty concerning those countries whose position and other circumstances render them most interesting in a public view. To the north I shall omit the Punjab as far as the river Hydaspes, as being little different from many provinces of India, and because of information already obtained of it. Four Tuppas of Cabul. 183. The rubbee is the greatest crop, and according to our way of speaking, the only one (see paragraphs 171—3.) Wheat is the chief product, and after it barley. The poorest classes consume a considerable proportion of barley and peas in their food. There are none so poor, but that they occasionally in- dulge in animal food, and the rich in a great measure subsist on it. Corn is imported even from the environs of Ghuznee. Rice is brought from upper Bungush, Jellalabad, Lughman, and even Koomer; in a dear year, corn is sometimes brought from Bamean in small quantities; on the whole however the quantity of corn annually imported into the valley does not bear a great proportion to that produced in it, and provisions are seldom dear. The chief supply of ghee is from Bamean, the Hazara country, and the Ghigies, who pasture their flocks i 1840. | Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanistan. 49 in the southern parts of the valley and its skirts; some is brought from the extremities of the Hazara country. From -Toorkistan are brought sheep, but seldom either ghee or lambs. From the Hazara country come considerable numbers of sheep. In the spring, lambs are had from the Ghiljies. Horses and ponies are imported from Toorkistan, but some are fed up in the valley. The people drink from streams, but those of the city in part use wells. Fuel is brought to the city chiefly from the south ; the chief supply of timber is from the mountain Kul- kucha, three days to the east of Cabul. In the valley itself there is a good deal of cultivated wood, being that of fruit trees, willows, and sycamores. In Kohistan there is abundance of natural timber, but it is not required. The orchards of this valley, which are very numerous, are chiefly in the Kohdamun, and in it the valley of Irtalif is much celebrated for the excellence and _ profusion of its fruits, and also for its picturesque beauties ; still the most interesting object to the people is tillage. The chief _ pasturage is in Logur and the south, as also towards Ghorbund. The Tuppa of Bootkehak is that in which agriculture is most | pursued. In the whole valley the watered lands much exceed | the unwatered, but in the southern skirts there are some small | spaces in which the reverse is true. Fodder is scarce and dear in Cabul, and most parts of the valley ; artificial grasses constitute _a considerable part of it in those quarters where pasturage is much pursued. A part of the population live under tents, in summer but otherwise houses are used, and the most com- mon kind is the flat, roofed» In Cabul, which is a close built town, house rent and ground rent are very dear. The chief live stock is in cows, except where pasturage is followed, and there sheep are a more important object. A considerable trade is carried on by the Cabulese, especially with Toorkistan and Hindoostan ; the late distractions have thrown obstacles in the way of trade, but otherwise little affected the prosperity of this city and district. The population of the city may be zuessed at 60,000 souls ; the villages are various sized, and on an average may contain 150 families; they are not fortified, but in- variably contain small castles or private forts, of very contempti- dle strength. There are few wastes or spaces ill supplied with H 50 Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanistan. [No. 97. water in this district ; such as do exist are towards the southern and north-western limits. With respect to carriage, bullocks are chiefly used within the valley; those who trade to Koora- san employ a majority of camels; goods taken into the Hazara country are carried on mules and ponies; the Ghiljies who trade to Toorkistan by the road of Bameean use camels. In the trade to the eastward, including all quarters, equal use is probably made of camels on the one hand, and mules and ponies on the other. Ghorbund. 184. This is but a small district, and on the borders are large tracts which are merely pastured; but except the waste called Regrawan (see paragraph 99) there is no considerable space where the water of springs or streams is not to be had. A great part of the district is hilly, and though the hills be — often of a tame character, some of them yield pine. The houses of the district are flat-roofed. In the summer a part of the population live under black tents. The pasturage is very im- portant, but still the chief subsistence of the people is from agriculture. There are very numerous orchards, and the chief fruits are apricots, almonds, and grapes. Raisins are brought from Ghorbund to Hindoostan. The chief cultivation is along the stream of Ghorbund, and of course the proportion of lulm is very inconsiderable. The chief product is wheat, and after it rice, notwithstanding the coldness of the climate; after rice is barley, which is chiefly spring sown; there is little palez or maize, nor are pease much raised. Wheat, sheep, the ghee of milk, and that of doomba fat, are exported to Cabul, and | of course provisions are cheap. The people, who are not very — numerous, live much at their ease, and the climate is healthy. The — Kheshkees, a small tribe of Afghans who reside here, carry on — some trade between Cabul and Toorkistan. Grass in the summer is very abundant. Some rishka is also cultivated for the wants — of winter. The chief live stock is sheep, but their cows are — in a considerable proportion. The pasturing people breed some — horses, chiefly of a small size. Within the district the chief — carriage is probably on ponies. For fuel they burn shrubs and — 1840. | Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanstan. ol sometimes the branches of trees, and they drink the water of streams and springs. The chief village of the district, which is called Ufzul Khan, may have 200 houses, all the others are much smaller. Kohistan of Cabul. 185. The term Kohistan, when used by the Cabulese es- pecially, is seldomer applicable to a hilly country in general than to that mountainous space which lies north of the valley of Cabul; every valley in it has its stream, and there are many springs among the mountains; timber too is plentiful, and in the summer, grass. The inhabitants chiefly subsist on mul- berries, and after them perhaps their grain and their live stock are of equal importance. 1 know not that any of the tame animals can be said to be the favourite stock. Of grain, wheat is most cultivated, and after it kungunee and barley. Some grain is imported, especially from the Kohdamun, and the re- turns are made in cheese, which is here very good, and cotton, a product we would not have expected in a country so cold. On the whole, however, there is but little trade internal or external, and the people live much to themselves. The country is strong, and at times refuses revenue. The people live in flat- roofed houses, and those who attend the live stock to the mountains in summer do not use tents. The villages are small but numerous; and though the surface under the plough be little, the population is not inconsiderable. Wheat and barley, with very few exceptions, are autumn-sown and watered. Jellalabad. 186. This district is very diversified, and many of the fol- lowing observations are not true when applied to certain parts of it. It may be said to begin in the eastern quarters, near Umburkhara, in the vicinity of the Markoh or Bedoulut, to ex- tend west to Nimla Kuja, a town of the Khogeeanus, a tribe of Afghans, is. within the revenue division, and being situated nearly on the crown of the range of 34°, which is here moderately high, is a cold place. The other towns and villages, with but few exceptions, are in a warm climate, and there are 52 Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanistan. (No. 97. two crops in the year, as there are in Kuja also. The chief subsistence of the people is from tillage, but they have con- siderable herds of cows and buffaloes. It may be observed, however, that in these countries the keeping of both these animals depends, or is supposed to depend, on agriculture. In the winter great flocks of sheep pasture in certain parts, but they do not belong to the in- habitants of this country, but to the Ghiljies to the west. The khureef is the greater crop, and in it, rice; but the quantity of maize is also considerable. The wheat, barley, and maize are nearly equal. A part of the wheat and barley are raised lulm, and some is spring sown; all the khureef is irrigated expect it be some jooaree, which is raised for green food; that plant is not cultivated for its grain in any of the districts north of the range of 34°, and bajra is not to be seen. In Jellalabad the quantity of chuna is very small. For watering their lands they use living streams, and in certain parts rills from springs. There are no kahrezas, or dams, but in some quarters khwurs are turned to account. Wheat is imported from Bajour into the town of Jellalabad, which may contain 10 or 12,000 in- habitants. To Cabul is exported sugar and cotton, some apricots and pomegranates; the pomegranates of Kuja are much esteem- ed. Cabul returns chiefly dried fruits. Jellalabad lying on the road from the east to the west, certain of the inhabitants of its villages subsist by the hire of mules and other animals; and the supplying of provisions to travellers of all descriptions is an important object. Fodder is in general but moderately plentiful. For fuel they burn dung, shrubs, and those along the river, drift wood. The chief supply of timber is from the white mountain, and others connected with it. The houses are flat-roofed. In the villages they drink from streams or springs. In the town there are also some draw wells. There is little fruit compared with the countries to the west; and if we subtract the transit. trade, the district carries on but little traffic. The inhabitants are few who use tents in any season of the year. Their villages are small, and there are consider- able tracts, both hill and plain, without cultivation, and some of these without water. Bullocks are the chief carriage within 1840. | Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanistan. ad the district, and in its intercourse with others, perhaps mules are most used. Gundumuk—Ishpan—K hingul—Tugao, &c. 187. By means of these names it is intended to designate that space of country which lies between Cabul and Kohistan to the west, and Jellalabad and Lughman to the east, being itself bounded to the north and south by two great ranges of mountains or their branches. It is very diversified, and its importance is not sufficient to justify the lengthened details requisite for fully explaining the nature of its various parts. A very great part of it, or its borders, is uncultivated pasture, chiefly hilly; there are few considerable spaces destitute of water. The villages are generally small, but there are some large ones. The population of a given surface is greatest in Tugao; Khingul and Tugao belong to the Safees, a tribe of Afghans formerly more numerous than now, and lie to the north. South of them, in the present tract, are Ghiljies and some Khogeeanus. With the exception of Tugao, the khureef is the greater crop in this tract, and of it, rice and mash; and quantities of these are exported to Cabul. The rubbee har- vest being here earlier than in Cabul, a portion of the crop is sold in that city to great advantage immediately before the harvest commences in the valley. With respect to the fixed inhabitants, agriculture is more important to them than pas- turage, and cows are their chief live stock; but as the wan- dering Ghiljies from the west pasture their flocks here during a part of the year, it is a matter of doubt whether the district is to be called an agricultural or pastoral one. The numerous flocks of the Ghiljies consuming the grass, fodder bears a considerable price, especially in the cold part of the year; but in Tugao it is cheap. The natives live in houses which are flat- roofed, and timber is easily procurable in most situations, as is fuel from shrubs or branches of trees; and they drink from the numerous springs and streams. Provisions are cheap, but it is to be remembered that the population is small. Some sheep are bought from the Ghiljies. Besides provisions some pome- granates and other fruits are sent to Cabul before they come in 54 Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanistan. [No. 97. season there, and this district is distinguished by making a little silk. The crops are irrigated with few exceptions, and the quantity of rubbee, which is spring-sown, is but little. Within the district bullocks are the chief carriage. The cli- mate is different in various places, but on an average is a tem- perate one. Lughman. 188. Nature has divided Lughman into two districts,—the hilly, inhabited by Ghiljies, and the plain, inhabited by Lugh- manees, a race of Indian descent. In both however there is abundance of water, timber, and fuel. The houses are flat-roof- ed, and the people drink from streams, or in the hilly tract from springs. Among the hills, black tents are used by some of the shepherds in summer. The temperature is much milder than in the Kohistan of Cabul; the country does not appear to be strong. The term Kohistan without the addition of any other to explain it, is not applicable to the hilly part of Lughman. Both there and in the plain the khureef is the chief crop, and rice the chief product. Among the hills maize is the next important to rice, but very little is raised in the plain, where, in its stead are raised sugar and cotton. In either quarter the quantity of wheat is but little, and barley is scarcely raised at all, rice straw being the chief food of the horses. Their horses are not numerous, and they have no camels. Within the district the chief car- riage is by bullocks; among the hills the chief stock is per- haps goats, and after them cows, but in the plains the chief stock is buffaloes. Almost all the lands are watered, and chiefly _ from streams; the climate of the plains is accordingly moist, and agues common. The little rubbee raised is almost in- variably autumn-sown. The cultivation and population are consi- derable. ‘To the west however is an extensive waste, being a plain with small hills, and yielding little water ; it is called the plain or desert of Shytan-goom. There are some large villages which may have 800 houses, but in general they are small. — There is little fruit, and the chief trade is in rude produce. Wheat is imported from Bajour; ghee and sheep are brought — 1840.) Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanstan. 58 from the Ghiljies during their annual visits to the low coun- try, when some of them pasture on the skirts of this country, and others pass through it. Sugar, cotton, and rice are exported to Cabul. Koonur. 189. Koonur is an agricultural country, though there are certain dependencies of it to the north-west which are perhaps pastural, but they are of little account. The chief crop is the khureef, and the chief produce rice, part of which they export to Cabul, the country of the Upper Mihmunds, which lies east and south, and some other quarters. The population is con- siderable along the banks of the river. The capital, which is called Pushut, is equal to Jellalabad, and there are some large villages; but generally speaking the villages are not so large as in the plain of Peshawur. Into Pushut they import some wheat from Bajour. Ghee is brought from Deogul, and other hilly dependencies to the west of the river; sheep and goats from Bajour; but provisions in general are sufficiently cheap. In the valley cows are the chief stock, and after them buffaloes ; the chief carriage is by asses. Fuel, fodder, and water are plentiful, and timber is procured in abundance from the west side of the river. There is also some pine in that part of the Upper Mihmund country which borders on Koonur, and in which the Syyaed of Koonur has influence. The people live in flat-roofed houses, and never use tents. Their fields are almost all irrigated, and their wheat and their barley, which are not great crops, are autumn-sown. The wood of the olive is much burned. Bajour. 190. This also is an agricultural country, and cows the most important live stock ; yet the pasturage, and number of sheep and goats is considerable. There are no black tents used; in many cases however the shepherds pass the summer under what are called koodies, which are made of mats supported by wood. These are erected at what the Afghans call bandas, which are pasturing stations remote from the village, and at them Wa 56 Lieut. Irwin’?s Memoir of Afghanistan. — [{No. 97. is sometimes a few acres of cultivated ground, but no inhabitants in winter. This however is not the only meaning of the term. The fields of this country are generally lulm, though the quantity of irrigated is still considerable; part of the lulm has the advantage of water from khwurs. Wheat is a chief product, and in ordinary years more than a maund and a half of Delhi may be had for a rupee, and the exportation is considerable. The northern part however does little more than supply itself. It does not appear that any sort of provisions is imported into the country. The quantity of sugar raised is very small, and that article is import- ed chiefly from Jellalabad in return for wheat. Fuel, timber, and fodder are sufficiently plentiful, especially in the hilly parts, and water is every where near, the people drinking from springs and from streams; there are few wells. A certain shrub, by the Afghans called zirkh, is the chief fuel. Nawangee is perhaps the largest town, Bajour itself being much declined, and the former may be equal in population to one-half of Pushut. The villages in general are small or ordinary. On some of the fron- tiers are considerable spaces without fixed inhabitants, and the centre of the country is not so well peopled as the plain of Peshawur. Bullocks and asses are most used in carriage, and there are not many horses in the country. The wheat, ghee, and honey are good, and iron is one of the exports from the northern parts. Kafirs. 191. This people live in a very rugged country, with numer- ous streams and springs ; from the latter they drink, and also water their fields, which however are of little account. They derive their subsistence from their flocks of goats, which seem to be of a species superior to others known in these countries. Their cows and sheep are perhaps in equal numbers ; wheat far exceeds all the other grains they cultivate ; it is sown in the spring, and watered. Fuel and timber are plentiful, and their houses are con- structed of wood. Some of their villages are large, containing 3,000 inhabitants, and on an average they are of an ordinary size; they are not fortified, but are situated in places difficult of access. They do not use tents in any season of the year, but 1840. ] Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanistan. 57 sometimes shelter themselves in caves. Within the country there is no traffic, but they exchange their ghee, cheese, goats, and vinegar for rice, cloths of various kinds, axes, but chiefly salt. Every thing is carried by men, and there is no camel, buffalo, mule, or ass in the country. They make wines and vinegars, both much esteemed, from the grapes of their own country, which are partly wild and partly cultivated ; and uncultivated walnuts are abundant. This country can neither furnish sup- plies, nor be crossed by troops, except with the utmost hazard. Punjkora. 192. The people subsist by tillage; their chief crop is the rubbee, and the greatest product, wheat ; after which, barley. A small quantity of grain is imported from the valley of Buroul, which is in the northern part of the country of Bajour, but has its own chief, who is a Turkulanee. In Punjkora the lulm and irrigated lands are perhaps equal. The latter depends on springs and streams. But little wheat and barley are sown in the spring. Cows are the chief stock, but according to others,. buffa- loes ; goats too are numerous, but sheep very few. The chief carriage is by bullocks and asses. The trade between Peshawur and Yarkund for the most part passes through this country, and Kasin Khan, the chief of Deer, which is. the capital of it, and may have 500 houses, levies taxes on the merchants. The other villages are generally small, and some hamlets among the moun- tains have but five houses, or less. The mountains yield pines, which serve for timber and fuel, and also for torches. The mountainous parts are very thinly peopled, but that part of Punjkora towards the Ootman Khel and lower Swad is very populous. Tents are not used in any season of the year. Fodder is plentiful. There are few horses in the country. Upper Mihmunds. 193. This is a hilly country, and its hills though not high, are often very rugged. Some of them yield pines, but more commonly they are covered with shrubs. The houses are some- times thatched. The natives in general live in houses, but some tribes have black tents, and the same use is made of I 58 Lieut. Irwiw’s Memoir of Afghanistan. [No. 97. koodies as in Bajour, and to a greater extent. On the whole this is an agricultural country. In some places sheep, in others — goats, are the chief stock. Asses are numerous, and are the chief — carriage, next to which are bullocks. In many villages a horse, — mule, buffalo, or camel is not to be found. Timber on the whole — is scarce, but fuel is plentiful, and there is no want of fodder. — Some corn is imported from Bajour, Koonur, and the Dooab — of Peshawur. The chief return made is in mats, which the natives manufacture from the Putha shrub (see paragraph 129.) | From certain parts good ghee is exported to Peshawur. The — fields are generally lulm, and the chief product wheat. The two — crops are nearly equal, but perhaps the rubbee is the greater. — The natives drink from tanks, streams, and springs. There is — much hilly waste, of no use but as pasture for goats, and insome ~ cases water is scarce. With very few exceptions the villages are small, and the population on a given surface cannot be great. Ootman Khel. 194. This country is more difficult than even the preceding, which however it resembles in many particulars. It has more timber, its hills producing pine, and water is more plentiful. The chief subsistence is probably from the keeping of goats, and wheat the chief product. The villages are small, but if we — believe the received accounts, the population is not incon- — siderable, for this tribe is never rated lower than 10,000 families. — They have never paid revenue, and have little amicable inter- course with their neighbours. Khybur. 195. This is a rugged and unproductive tract, lying between Jellalabad and Peshawur. The natives live by tillage, the keep- ing of goats, and robbery. Water in many places is scarce, and no pines grow on the hills, which are nearly of the same temperature as those of the Upper Mihmunds. Fuel is plentiful, and there is sufficiency of grass, fresh or withered. Teera. 196. This is an agrieultural country, though goats be very — numerous. The two crops are nearly equal; and on the whole, — | 1840. } Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanistan. a9 the production is equal to the consumption. The houses are flat- roofed, and built partly of stone and partly of mud; no tents are used at any season of the year. The inhabitants are of the Af- reedee tribe. West of them are the Shinwarees, in whose flocks are a greater proportion of sheep than among the Af- reedees, and some of them live at times under black tents. Teera yields considerable quantities of good honey. The villages are small. The Afreedee tribe may be conjectured to be 55,000 souls; part of them live in Khybur, and that subdivision which is called Adum Khel live towards Kohat; and the northern Khutuks inhabit the continuation of their hills. Their country answers in most particulars to the description already given of that of the Upper Mihmunds. Peshawur. 197. The plain of Peshawur is an agricultural country, and no space of the same extent in the Cabul dominions is equally cultivated or peopled. | Upon the whole the khureef is the chief crop. In the plain of the Mundars the rubbee is the chief, and the like is true of that portion of the valley which the Khutuks possess. Perhaps maize is the chief crop, and it certainly is so in the vicinity of the city. The flour of maize is generally cheaper than that of wheat, in the proportion of at least three to two, and a certain mixture of it in the latter is supposed to improve it. The maize of Peshawur is remarkably white, and much esteemed. The rice of certain villages is exported to great distances, but the consumption of this article in that part of the valley which is subject to the king, is partly supplied from Lower Swad. In the same manner great quantities of wheat and some other articles of provision are brought from the country of the Mundars. The valley generally considered, does not support its own population, for the exports are inconsider- able, compared with the imports from Bajour, Chuch, Pothwar, and Kohat, especially the two former. Contrary to what is gene- rally true of India, the khureef is commonly watered, and the rubbee commonly lulm. The watered lands depend on streams much more than wells. Jhulars are used in part by the Daoodzyes and Mihmundzyes. ays | fe JX Fe f FL 2 Obnict ifhien fA. 3 porn be jt oy a r Dehetr Be hts Cdagtee ha ce ; Ra ccirore MSNA SWNT F PAA TST: ACI ST ae ARGUING SANTANA | Saka Aaa VaTarI www: Balana TaN aaR Sa Sam ka tu ta dhy na na pa pa bo ba badho Ga a quusey ia Meant lle Hz] IF © aeuag q | y z Ko & a Llach,Asitlichith Press, eg (Hs Se GE Sa $5 tt RETHeTT AA Ha sa AERA WP? BAUGH UBGa Qua rgn HILAR Ze, ae — - me 6 “di On) : ‘ US alah ‘ Arscripihor ar Criy ste AH Q4agiee . ee Y UA SOY, Tae RIAA Ty: ATCT URE MS a ere IRR sSrshes a izy THINSETUMBAAae Tey TRYST MSE my ea ur” che “chha aie. at AI TAT § OS SMe sigesans pt bha ma ya va ele ita tie ete, VUHHRUNUAHsR HA 3 4 @ ct aq wl y pi, ‘ Cr 3 Huthydemus. Baemean ———————————————————————————— T Black, tsiadec Lith hs Fees. Pre 1840. | Lieut. Irwin’s Memoir of Afghanistan. 65 sheep, according to circumstances. Timber is exceedingly scarce, and hence the houses are generally of the vaulted kind. A part of the population is in summer under tents, and in winter they flit to warmer climates. Fodder is moderately abundant. There are considerable spaces without cultivation, and the population on a given surface is much inferior to that in the valley of Cabul. Jajee. 208. This is a narrow valley, and its climate is cold; the stream ultimately joins the Koom. The stream natives main- ly subsist by tillage, and the chief products in their order are wheat, barley, rice, and pease. The lands are watered. The chief stock is goats. Timber, fuel, and fodder are abundant, and some provisions are exported to Cabul, to which they also send some planks of pine, about six or seven feet long. The carriage is on mules, for the nearest road to Cabul (with which they have most intercourse) is not practicable for a bullock or camel, it is called the road Goubund. The natives live in flat-roofed houses, and have no tents. The population is but small, and there is no large village. Notice of an inscription in Behar, communicated by Mr. Ra- VENSHAW, as published in the May number of the Journal, 1839. The Editors of the Journal noted (vol. viii. page 347,) in announcing the communication by Mr. Ravenshaw of certain impressions of very ancient inscriptions from Behar, that “ the most important and interesting of these impressions were so imperfect, and confused, as to baffle the attempts of the Pundit Kamala Kanta, who aided Mr. James Prinsep in his valuable discoveries. We allude particularly to the inscriptions on the inverted column in the Fort of Behar.” I have now the pleasure of laying before the readers of the Journal a rendering of one of these inscriptions as decyphered by Pundit Kamala Kanta Vidyalanka, and Baboo Hurrinboo- nath. They succeeded in giving this interpretation after a great expense of time and labour. The characters are of a class K 66 Mr. Ravenshaw’s Behar Inscription. | No. 97. not hitherto met with, and I confess I cannot submit this first attempt to interpret them without considerable diffidence. The inscription is unfortunately destitute of both name and date ; and does not, moreover, afford any clue by which the period of its record can be traced. It is however a very singular relic in itself, and the formation of an alphabet from the characters which compose it, may have important results, in leading to the easy perusal of other similar inscriptions, which I am not without hope a more diligent search may bring to light. The ancient history of Magadha and Mithela may come to be tested by evidence the most valid in the prosecution of such research, unpromising though the first fruits be, historically speaking, of what has been as yet attempted. I may here, to save the trouble of reference, remind the readers of the Journal, that Mr. Ravenshaw reports the in- scription to have been found on a broken stone pillar, situated in a reversed position a little to the west of the northern gate of the old Fort of Behar: its original site was according to tradition, in front of the gate. The following is the translation of the inscription, facsimile of which is given opposite page 65. - Be patient when angry. - Perform religious sacrifices as prescribed. - Be liberal in religious performances. . Be charitable to the weak and needy. . Riches should be spent in the celebration of rites in honour of Siva and Parvati. 6. The weak and destitute pilgrims should be supplied with the expenses of their journey. 7. Remove difficulties in the way of pilgrimage. 8. [Exercise no oppression in any acquired (conquered) king- dom. 9. Encourage the officers of the state.* 10. Punish the oppressor of the (people), high or low. op N= The above affords little matter for speculation, save as regards * The Pundit is doubtful as to the interpretation of this phrase. 1840. | Mr. Ravenshaw’s Behar Inscription. 67 the creed of the person who caused it to be inscribed, who was evidently not a Boodhist.* Nos. | and 2 (duplicates) of the Behar inscriptions have been for the most part read by Pundit Kamala Kanta, but he is as yet unable to make out their full meaning. The character is not the same with that of No. 3, now published. As hopes are entertained of the arrival of that excellent orientalist, and able antiquary, the Honorable George Turnour, Secretary to Government in Ceylon, at this Presidency before the close of the present year, and as it is believed that he will make a tour through Behar and elsewhere, for the purpose of exploring still further the interesting subject of Boodhist antiquity, I trust to see these remains critically considered by a scholar in every way competent to pronounce upon their era. In the mean while, it is our duty to make the most of im- perfect opportunities, in order to publish (submitting it to the judgment of abler critics) whatsoever casual research has put us in possession of. I may here remark, that circumstances appear hitherto to have conspired to prevent more than a very cursory inspection of the remains of Hindoo monarchy in Magadha (Behar) and Mithela, (Tirhoot and Sarun.) Indeed Mr. Hodgson’s brief, but interesting note of Simrown in the Turaee (vol. iv. Asiatic Society’s Journal, p. 121) is the only description we possess of that ancient city, while the Behar inscriptions, one of which Mr. Ravenshaw’s discoveries have enabled me to publish, have been copied in some instances with more haste than was con- sistent with correctness ; and by the specimen now afforded, seem rather valuable as tending to excite further investigation, than as rewarding the search already undertaken. An ample and untried field is opened for inquiry in these regions, and it is sincerely to be hoped that no opportunity may be neglected of engaging in it. * The injunction No. 8, with its allusion to a conquered, and acquired ter- ritory, might by conjecture be assumed to point to Jara Sandha, who having subdued the whole of Prachi “(the eastern region) as we read in the puranas, fixed his residence at Bali putra.” (Wilford, As, Res. vol. v. p. 281.) 68 Mr. Ravenshaw’s Behar Inscription. [No. 97. In the month of February last, Captain Burt of the Engineers, obligingly supplied the officiating Secretary with the fac-simile of an inscription taken by him at Pinjore; it was discovered there on the side of a well. The character is, as Captain Burt observes, different in many letters from all the alphabets given by Mr. James Prinsep; Kamala Kanta has therefore prepared an alphabet from it (No 4) and enabled me to give the accompanying translation. AHMHTPIY. This Demetrius (called the handsome) son of Euthydemus, married a daughter of Antiochus the Great ; fixed by Bayer 205 s. c. I have also found at Bameean this winter a coin of Euthyde- mus, the father of Demetrius; but altogether so inferior in ap- pearance to those handsome medals figured in Burnes’s work, that it is evident mine must have been struck at a provincial mint, and represents Euthydemus merely as Soter, not Basileus. The letters are badly executed, and it will be observed that the Epsilon is used reversed where in Burnes’s coin an Eta is substi- tuted, and the H is used instead of 98. Thus EYHTAXMOY The reverse has Hercules and a Pehlevi legend, which is not sufficiently clear to distinguish. These are the only true Bac- trian coins that have been discovered since our sojourn at Bameean, and both are in my possession. As the coins of Antimachus do not appear common, and I do not remember seeing one figured, | send an impression of a very perfect silver coin which I procured from a cafila on its way from Balkh: from the same cafila I was fortunate enough to procure a large and very perfect silver Eukratides, which I think has been described in a former number of the Asiatic Society’s Journal. | have many other coins of Apollodotus, Menander, Pantaleon, Lysius, Ermaios, Spalirisces, Azos, also. coins of the Indo-Sythic series, Kadphices and Kanerkas, but I fancy all these appear in Masson’s list of discoveries, and are by this time I hope under the able description of H. Wilson. I remain, with respect, Your obedient servant, WILLIAM HAY. 70 Note on the Bameean Coins. [ No. 97. Note on the above—By the Officiating Secretary. The discovery of the copper Demetrius at Bameean is valuable, as throwing (if the evidence may be taken as sufficiently strong) a new light upon the history of that prince. Mr. Schlegel (Asiatic Journal, vol. ii. p. 408,) in his Epitome of the history of the later Bactrian kings has adopted the opinion that, “Demetrius did not succeed Euthydemus in Bactria.” He holds that Demetrius governed the provinces situated along the lower Indus after their subjugation by his father Euthyde- mus: the title given him by Justin “King of India,” favours the supposition. Professor Lassen of Bonn, however, in his “ Chronological Table’* of Bactrian monarchs, notes as follows, “Demetrius succeeds his father in Bactria about (s. c.) 185,” and he assigns the usurpation of Bactria by Eukratides, and the consequent retirement to Arachosia of Demetrius to the year 175, 8. c., thus placing this occurrence six years after the period noted for it by Bayer (s.c. 181.) The discovery of a coin of Demetrius at Bameean would appear to bear out the Professor’s position, viz., that this prince actually exercised regal authority in Bactria in succession to his father. I venture to point out this (apparent) proof to those valued contribu- tors to the Journal, who are now in Afghanistan, and to request that they will turn their attention to the elucidation of what has been well termed “one of the darkest parts of Bactrian history” for further investigation of the value of what has now been advanced. The coins of Demetrius are very rare; I do not indeed believe that more than five have been hitherto found, and all, (acknowledged as his) but Capt. Hay’s, have been silver, similar in device to that figured in the Asiatic Journal, vol. iv. P, XXV. On this copper Demetrius I am inclined to risk a theory as regards a very interesting and hitherto obscure coin, noted (Asiatic Journal, vol. iv. P. XXV. Fig. 4.) as the coin of “ Ma- yus,” a supposed monarch, two of whose coins exist in the Ventura col- lection. “This,” says Mr. James Prinsep, “is an entirely new name ; nor can it be read as a Greek word in its present shape, although the characters are perfectly distinct on the coin, and the style of engraving Norr.—The chronological table, with some extracts from Professor Lassen’s work, were translated for the Honble Mr. H. T. Prinsep by Mr. Piddington. I have made arrangements with a gentleman (Dr. Roer,) fully competent to the task, for a translation of the whole work, to be published in the Journal of the Society. It will be highly useful to Indian numismatologists, and as the work, even in the original language is not procurable in this country, I know no better method of making it public, than by translation in the pages of that Journal, which under our Secretary’s able management sup- plied the Professor with some of the most valuable material for his work. 1840. | Note on the Bameean Cows. (i corresponds with the early, and pure Greek types.” He goes on to sug- gest that could “ Mayus,” be read with the third letter as a gamma it might denote the union of the office of chief priest with that of king, and identify the holder of the title with Menander, or Demetrius, on the authority of the elephant’s head found on the coins of both those monarchs, and prominently exhibited on the one under consideration. The exact similarity of the upper Demetrius in the possession of Capt. Hay to this coin of a supposed, “ Mayus,” in all except the name of the monarch, inclines me strongly to believe that MAYOY, which in the first-found coin holds the place of the AEMHTPIOY of Capt. Hay’s, is merely a synonym, a title, or attributive epithet, whereby the prince was so particularly distinguished as to induce his con- temporaries to mention him, and even allow his coin to be struck, under that appellation alone. Under the strong impression of this idea, I turned to examine the opinion of critics of more authority, and found (Journal des Savans, Mai, 1836,) that my own conception had been anticipated in favour of another Bactrian prince, Apollodotus, by Mons. de Raoul Rochette, in a singularly ingenious paper on this “ Mayus” coin. “ All,” says this able critic, “is extraordinary, and all new as regards this medal; another specimen of which I know not the existence of, nor at least do I know that it has been noted, described, or published. The workmanship is quite peculiar, and belongs to a Greek era of some remoteness: the form and proportion of the letters indeed unite in assigning to it a manufacture at least contemporary with the reign of Apollodotus. Zhe elephant’s head, being a symbol used on the coin of Menander and Apollodotus, suits the assumption well enough, and in this instance, I observe that the bell, which may be seen suspended from the elephant’s head is a peculiarity presented to us also by the little bronze of Menander, published by me, but (which peculiarity) I omitted observing on it. In making up for this omission, I would say, that the bell is always seen, even on Roman denarii, hung to the elephant’s head, which forms one of the symbols of the Cecilia family, nor need I except the similar head, serving as ornament to the Macedonian buckler-symbol on the coins of Metallus Macedonicus. This peculiarity which escaped Eckhel, has been carefully brought to notice by M. Cavedoni. “But the circumstance of most importance offered by our medal, one which makes it a sort of numismatic problem, is the legend, the name of the king Mayus, of a form so foreign to the Grecian language in- scribed on so purely Greek a relic,---a name elsewhere so completely unknown, the place of which we know not how to establish by the aid of 72 Note on the Bameean Coins. [No. 97. any reference furnished by history, in its proper order in the series of kings of Bactria. Perhaps even one might almost doubt whether this medal does form a part of Bactrian numismatics, as the symbol of the elephant, found on the coins of the kings of Syria, does not afford of itself means for determining the matter, and that conjecture, when the subject be but one or two medals, is a still more insufficient index. The absence of a Bactrian inscription on one of these medals, almost all bilingual, would be again a reason sound enough to doubt its belonging to the same numismatic family. In spite of this, I think I recognize a Bactrian medal here by a characteristic mark, which seems to me decisive, in the monogram found on the square drachma of Apollodotus, and which, added to the symbol of the elephant’s head, used on the little bronze of Menander, appear to guarantee this coin as the produce of a Bactrian mint. As regards the prince whose name our medal bears, whose existence and whose reign it alone, among the ancient relics which remain to us, reveals, it would be superfluous to give oneself up to conjecture, which can rest on no solid base. How- ever, I cannot help remarking that this name affords very nearly a transcript of both the Zend and Sanscrit words signifying moon, Mao, with the sign of the Greek genitivee MAYOY. To bear out this observation, I may call to mind that the Bactrian medals of the Indo- Scythic series, belonging to the reign of Kanerkes, present us ordinarily on the reverse of the figure of the standing prince, a personage, the head surrounded by a radiated halo, designated at times by the Greek word HAIO®, Sun, at other times, and most frequently, by the Zend words MIOPO or MAO, sun or Moon indiscriminately. These medals, lately published by the Asiatic Society of Bengal, with learned observations on them by Mr. James Prinsep, are found also in almost all their varieties in the collection we owe to General Allard; and the notion which we thence derive of a personification of some deity of the Bactrian mythology, answer- ing at once to both the male and female of light, and designable either by the term Mithro, or by that of Mao, according as the male and female prin- ciple of this androgyne deity prevailed in its representation, appears sus- ceptible of no sort of doubt. This is the same idea which produced the figure of a god Lunus, so common on the Greeco-Asiatic coins, in the like- ness in which he is most commonly represented as a young man, crowned with a radiated tiara, with a loose robe on his shoulders, and mounted on a horse, an animal consecrated in all ancient religions to the Sun ; and the god Lunus must have answered to the lunar genius Maho, of the Zendish works. This same idea is it, which is again found under another form in the goddess of Comana, a goddess equally androgyne, the worship of whom, 1840. | Note on the Bameean Coins. 72 established in Pontus from of old, may be traced indisputably to an Asia- tic origin, and whose real name Mag, as given by Strabo himself, a native of those regions, is precisely the Sanscrit name of the Moon. This being established, it might not be impossible that the name MAYOY, joined to the word BASITAEQS, on our Bactrian coin, might be an equivalent for the name Apollodotus, suggested perhaps by the same motive which had caused the choice of the figure of Apollo as type of the coin of Apollo- dotus. Under this hypothesis, the various numismatic indices which made me assign our medal to the epoch of that prince, would be fully borne out as true by gaining thus their full force. This is however no more than a conjecture, which I submit most deferentially to our philologists in the tongues of India, through whom alone, one may hope for the solution of this curious problem.” I confess this does not seem to me to be a question referable for decision to a philological test, of the nature above specified. The word MAYOY may indeed be derived in the manner suggested by Mons. de Raoul Rochette in the above ingenious paper, but with the Caduceus on the coi, the application of it would I think be more readily made to Mercury, than to the ‘“androgyne deity,” or ‘Deus Lunus,” whom the writer points to as affording in the analogous shape of Apollo, an equivalent to Apollodotus. The Caduceus is too remarkable an em- blem to be mistaken as regards its reference: it has been found on the coins of this series, only in juxtaposition with the name of Demetrius, and with the mysterious word, Mayus; this coincidence enables me to suggest a direct mythological meaning to the unknown term, without attempting to interfere with the philological exposition of Mons. de Raoul Rochette. Mercury, whose parentage is (Sophocles Electra, ** watac mae” Eurip. Rhe- sus, and Helen, ** wavadoc TOKOC ) ordinarily noted with direct reference by Greek poets to his mother, is named by a purely classic author (Eurip. Medea v.759) as 0 paiac avaé, a poetic license, in which however may be found an approximation to a masculine matronymic, applicable to the deity, and corrupted in after years, under the impure dialect of a distant military colony into the word before us. Thus allowing the philological theory, I am inclined to find in MAO the original of Maia, the fabled mother of Mercury, and to detect in this masculine adaptation of her name, not an androgyne deity, but the «—._ A lme Filius Maiz — 9 74 Note on the Bameean Coins. [No. 97. himself, especially as the peculiar emblem of the god occupies the reverse on which the legend MAYOY appears. There are, I think, sufficient reasons against admitting the application to Apollodotus of this attributive epithet, independently of any force which may attach to what has been above stated, in as much as we already know Apollodotus by two distinct peculiar cognomina, assigned to him in a form, which as Mr. J. Prinsep observes, affords in its emphatic singularity a sort of phenomenon in numismatics, I mean, in the use of the conjunction Kat between the words in the legend ATIOAAOAOTOY BASIAEOS SOTHPOS KAI ®IAOTIA TOPOS. (Vide vol. ui. As. Jour. p. 406.) Now it is possible that instances may be adduced in which a number of different attributive epithets are to be found applied to some distinguished personage in Grecian history, but the course of ordinary experience is against this; and one may reasonably conclude (even supposing no other argument existed to disprove the claim of Apollodotus to the title) that MAYOY would not be assigned to him on any coin in addition to his other designations, (vide vol. ii. Asiatic Society’s Journal, Pl. VIII. vol. iv. Pl. XXV.) I would on the above grounds then, deny the conjecture of ‘‘king Mayus” being identifiable with Apol- lodotus, though I will again avail myself of part of the argument of the able conjecturist to assign the title to its real owner. In the extract from the Journal des Savans, above translated, very sufficient reasons have been assigned for considering the Mayus coin as contempora- neous in its manufacture with Apollodotus; but, not being a coin of Apollodotus, the fact of its having been struck at an epoch almost identified with his own, gives me a stronger right to assign the coin to one, whom Mr. James Prinsep, (vol. 1. Asiatic Society’s Journal, p. 410,) conceives may have been the elder brother of Apollodotus, Demetrius in fact, whose name we have impressed upon a coin precisely similar in all but the presence of that name, to the Mayus medal, on which so much ingenious conjecture has been expended. The elephant’s head with the bell, is common to both, the circular ornament, the monogram, and, lastly, the remarkable type of the Caduceus, are found exhibited in exact fac-simile, leading to the natural conclusion, that the BASITAEQS> MAYOY of the one is the BASIAEQS AHMHTPIOY of the other. The title, or synonyme rather, may very probably have been with Demetrius as with Mercury, a matronymic, and bestowed perhaps in adulation or in fondness on the princely offspring of some mortal Maize. Suppose this fairly proved, and another clue is found to the authentica- tion of the history of Demetrius; since, the Mayus coins having been 1840. | Note on the Bameean Coins. 75 found in Bactria Proper, stronger grounds are elicited for believing that he did succeed Euthydemus in his hereditary possession of the integral kingdom. ‘The rare occurrence of the Mayus or of the Demetrius coins, seems to suggest that he was very shortly after his succession ejected by Eucratides. Mr. Schlegal, who assumes that he did not succeed his father in Bactria, but who acknowledges his ejection from his paternal dominions, and his retirement into Arachosia, must allow that to be ejected, he must have once possessed. As governor during his father’s life time, of provinces along the Indus, the elephant’s head would be an appropriate type for the coin struck by Demetrius. The bell, which appears to have attracted so much attention in Paris, is in shape and proportion similar to the large bells now in com- mon use with native chieftains in Upper India, saving with a rope on either side the elephant, instead of about his neck, as in the coin. The object of the modern custom is to regulate the pace of the animal by the alternate sound of the swinging bell; the ancient practice originated, perhaps, in some similar fancy. Should any of our contributors see reason to think that these observa- tions have really made out the point they are intended to establish, may I hope that the idea of further success in elucidating fact as regards a very interesting, but most obscure epoch, will encourage them to make public the fruits of their research? I have requested Captain Hay to favour me with drawings of the most remarkable coins in his collection, and am most sorry to say that I have been as yet unable to have lithographs taken from the impressions in sealing wax which he has sent me. ee Memorandum on the differences of the Meridian of the Obser- vatory at Madras and the Flag-Staff of Fort William and of the Cantonment of Futtehghur in the Doab.—By Colonel J. A. Honeson, late Surveyor-General of India. I purpose in the following remarks, to give an account of the above differences, as deduced from eclipses of the first satellite of Jupiter, made by myself, and to add some notices regarding the modes of determining the longitudes, and la- titudes, of places in Asia, which may be found useful to the officers of this army, now serving in places far distant from each other. The Indian Government has for upwards of fifty years maintained an Observatory at Madras, but until 1829, it was 76 Differences of Meridian at Madras, [No. 97. on a small scale, with an astronomer and a few native assistants ; since that time, the establishment has been improved, and valu- able instruments erected, of which most important use has been made by Mr. Taylor, the present astronomer to the Honorable East India Company. In Bengal, we have not had any regular astronomical esta- blishment, but many valuable observations have at different times been taken by the officers of the Bengal Army, employed on geographical and other duties, as well as by gentlemen of the civil service, in different parts of the country, for their own satisfaction. With regard to the longitude of the Madras Observatory, it was very assiduously investigated for many years, by the late astronomer Mr. Goldingham, as may be seen by the Madras Observatory papers, and others published by him, and in his Memoir laid before the Royal Society, in which he has recorded the observations made of the eclipses of the satellites of Jupiter. Until the year 1817, the meridian of the Observatory was accounted to be 5h. 21m. 14s. East ; but afterwards Mr. Gold- ingham had reason, by correcting his numerous and valuable observations, by the errors of the tables, and from some emersions and immersions of the Ist and 2nd _ satellites cor- respondent with observations made at Greenwich, to estimate his Observatory to be 5h. 21m. 9s.°4. In the Ist. volume of the Madras Observatory Papers, Mr Taylor gives for his meridian, m. s. By Jupiter’s first satellite ...... 5 21 1:00 By transits of moon and stars. . .. 3°77 Mean. 5 21 2°38 but in the 2nd. volume (page 113) the astronomer, from more numerous transits, compared with those made at the Cambridge Observatory, finds.—By 14 transits of 8 m. Ss. first ‘limb, and statejqis a5 5 5 20 30°56 2nd ditto, 2nd. ditto, 33°60 These reduced to Greenwich, give for Madras Observatory, es els tae 1840. | Fort Wilktam, and Futtehghur. 7/7 which Mr. Taylor thinks may be 8 or 10 seconds in defect. Mr. Taylor, who has now, I believe, gone to England, will no doubt find there, numerous observations with which he can compare the above, and the subsequent observations he has made, and will be able to put to the test, the value of the lunar transits, when he has the comparisons from the Ist. and 2nd limbs of the moon in equal and greater numbers ; he will also get correspondents for his numerous sights of Jupiter’s satellites : we shall then see, how far the two modes, by the transits and by the satellites, agree with each other. It is an inquiry of interest, but in the interval, I think we may fairly take the mean of what I have above stated, thus— h. m. S. Mr. Goldingham’s Ist. and 2nd_ satellites, D9 2] . 9-40 Mr. Taylor’s Ist. satellite and lunar transits af Ditto, 2nd. satellite of ditto, ditto, 5 20 55:62 Mean Madras Obsy. 5 21 02:98 The following series of nine immersions, and eight emersions of the first satellite is selected from my notes, as having been made under the circumstances most favourable to accuracy. Those circumstances are, that the immersions and emersions be equal in number ; these are nearly so—it is proper that they should be taken with telescopes of the same description, at either place ; these were so taken, the telescopes being those of Dollond, of 45 inches focal length, aperture 2 inches *7 and power 70 to 75 ;— that the same person observe at each place; I myself did so at the Surveyor-General’s House at Chowringhee, Calcutta ; and the same individual, I believed, took the eclipses at the Madras Observatory—the satellite was the first, which by reason of its quicker motion, gives the best results. The circumstances of climate, and altitude of the planet, did not very materially differ at Calcutta and Madras. When these conditions are attended to, a moderate number of corresponding sights will give a better difference than a far greater number would under other cir- cumstances. I have the dates and particulars of all these eclipses, but it would take too much space to insert them here ; they were taken in 1821, 1826, 1827. The differences in time, reduced to the Flag-Staff, are— 78 Differences of Meridian at Madras, | No. 97. Emersions. Immersions. mM. Ss. ' m. Ss. 32. 123° 40 ol 57-90 32 38:30 31 52-70 32 27-00 31 28-00 32 08-00 32 08-29 32 12-70 32 09°51 32 27-10 31 56-09 32 51:50 32 11-76 32 26-10 32 08-91 32 17-70 mM. Se Mean of 9emersions, .. .. .. .. 32 25°79 Ditto of 8 imamersionsiyee.) ae. ua ae 31 59°08 Mean of emersions and immersions of the Ist. satellite, .. .. 32 12°4 The mean before stated for the Madras h. Observatorys) 4. iii. ai.) eas. a2) 29 5 63-153 Longitude of Flag-Staff, Fort William, 88° 18’ 45" I must mention, that I should have taken a greater number of eclipses of the satellites in Calcutta, had I not been absent from it on duty, in the North-west provinces, from 1822 to the rains of 1826. To several of my observations of eclipses in 1821, I found correspondents, in the series taken by the late Colonel Beaufoy, at Bushey Heath ; they give for the Flag- Staff 5h. 53m. 10s.3. I sent to the excellent astronomer at the Cape of Good Hope, the late Rev. Fearon Fallows, the particulars of my observations, requesting him to give me correspondents, if he had any. I may here most convenient- ly make an extract from his reply (dated Ist September, 1823) to my letter. He says, “‘ Amongst the very few eclipses which “had been taken, I could not find any corresponding to the date “of your observations, which I am happy to say bear the stamp ‘“‘of being taken with great accuracy. As the calculations of “these eclipses are not made from the most approved tables, ‘* (De Lambre’s,) and as you may be desirous of seeing your result — 1840. | Fort William, and Futtehghur. 19 “ compared with those tables, I shall take the liberty of selecting “those which appear to me to have been taken by the same “person, and with the same telescope. The longitude of the «© Surveyor-General’s Office at Calcutta, from comparison of obser- “ vations, made of Jupiter’s Ist satellite, with De Lambre’s tables. Date. Emersions. | Date. Immersions. h. m. s. h. m.s. 182] Nov. 22! 5 53 16 | 1822 Oct.10 | 5 53 6-4 Dec. 8 123) (= Oct.24 | 5 52 55°4 1822 Jan. 7 (| 26 | 5 53 12:0 ge. 16 57 |——— |, ——— 31 6°5 Nov. 27 10:2 Nov. 18 1:0 oo! = CDec 13 | «5 O52 561 Mpa as Daten baal ———__- 5 53 4:26 ——_. 5 de Do —E— 5 538 426 ee Mean 5 53 5:00 “The mean is about twelve seconds of time less than you “make it by the Nautical Almanac, yet the accordance between “the means of the emersions and immersions, is truly sur- “prising.” These observations, with particulars of the transit of Mercury, Mr. Fallows sent to the Admiralty. Though the result deduced by him is not from corresponding sights, yet the corrections made by so skilful an astronomer, and his opinion of their value, may be thought to render them worthy of some notice. In 1821 and 1822 the Surveyor General’s Office was at No. 8, Russell Street, Chowringhee. The reduction to the Fort Flag-Staff is four seconds of time, it will therefore, by these observations, be in 5h. 53m. 3s.1 = 88° 15’ 15". If the above eclipses were in sufficient number to entitle them to a place on the mean, it would give for the Madras Obser- vatory, 5h. 20m. 59s'34. Another mode by which I endeavoured to find the meridian of Fort William, was by the transits of the moon’s limbs over the meridian, compared with those of stars differing little from her in right ascension and declination ; for this purpose, 80 Differences of Meridian at Madras, [No. 97. on my return to Calcutta in 1826, I instituted a series of these observations in the small temporary observatory on the roof of my house, No. 37, Park Street, Chowringhee. The transit telescope, of thirty-four inches focus, had five wires, though not large, was good, and firmly mounted, and the clock and other astronomical apparatus, were of the best kind. The transits were taken by the native assistant, the Syud, Mhir Mhosin, a most respectable man and steady observer ; the calcu- lations were made in my office, immediately after the transits were taken, by the computer, Mr. Vincent Rees, aided by the young men, apprentices, in the Survey Department. The whole of these calculations in detail, were inserted in lithographic forms, and were forwarded by the Government to the Royal Astronomical Society of London. They are con- tained in two large folio volumes. I need here only mention the results. From 19th Nov. 1826, to 13th Dec. 1827. hs ... (it. peesenee eo - 3 82 transits of stars and moon’s . 53 come preceding damb.7 5.0.4... 82 transits do. do. following limb .. 5 53 12°89 Mean reduced to Flag-Staff 5 53 21:16 These results, it is to be remarked, are deduced from the data in the Nautical Almanac, and not from comparisons with ob- servations made at Greenwich, -from which a better determi- nation would be obtained, if so great a number of transits had been taken at Greenwich or Cambridge ; but that is not likely to have been done in so short a space of time, in the cloudy climate of England ; because, results from those transits, though very numerous, are only merely from calculation from the Nau- tical Almanac. I have thought it better, not to allow them a place in the general mean; though I did so in some obser- vations I gave to the Marine Surveyor General, Captain Ross, and which, with observations he had taken, gave for the Flag- Staff 5h. 53m. 20s°7. as he has mentioned, in the notice pub- lished by him in 1829. It seems, I think, likely, from the 1840. | Fort William, and Futtehghur. 81 tendency of Mr. Taylor’s subsequent operations at Madras, that the meridian of Fort William Flag-Staff will prove to be less than the above. This method of determining longitudes, or rather differences of longitude, has been much recommended of late by astrono- mers; and doubtless it is as capable of great accuracy, when a long series of corresponding sights can be taken in fixed obser- vatories ; but to those to whose lot it falls, for the most part, to determine new positions,—to military and maritime officers, and to scientific travellers,—it will not I fear be found so ge- nerally convenient, as it may appear to be. It is requisite, that the transit instrument be good, and well and firmly fixed, and that the sights be most carefully made, for an error of only two- tenths of a second of time, on the observation of the transit of the moon’s limb, will on her mean motion cause an error of six seconds of time in the longitude. To duly estimate a small part of time requires much practice, and it is difficult to be sure of the precise instant when the moon’s preceding limb touches the wires, it is perhaps rather less so of the following limb lea- ving the wire, but a mean must be taken; add to this, that except to those, whose sole occupation is in a fixed observa- tory, it would be very irksome to get through a long series of lunar transits, at the varying periods of three quarters of an hour’s difference of time, every night. On these accounts, I hope the satellites of Jupiter (especially the first) will meet with more favour than has been allowed to them lately, in some notices on practical astronomy. I believe that by their means, the meridian of more distant places have been nearly settled, and more useful additions, in that particular, made to Geography, than by any other mode; and from long experience, I find that great dependence is to be placed on the results, provided the requisite conditions, which I have mentioned, are attended to. In this extensive country, we little need insist on the import- ant consequences of well determined differences of longitude. Moderate distances, can be best laid down from survey, and referred to some known meridian; but it frequently happens in the emergency of service, that officers even on a survey, are detached to a great distance from their field of operations, with M 82 Differences of Meridian at Madras, [No. 97. which their new positions cannot be connected, except by astro- nomical means. This was particularly the case, when the revenue surveyors in the North-western provinces were suddenly ordered to join the armies on the eastern frontiers, in the Burmese war. I was at that time the Revenue Surveyor-Gene- ral. With those officers, though they were withdrawn from my superintendence, I continued to keep private correspondence, and I particularly requested them to make as many observations of the satellites as they could, that I might compare them with those I made at Futtehghur ; and to the skill and zeal of Majors Bedford and Wilcox, in Assam, to Major Pemberton, in Munnipour, of Major Fisher, in Sylhet, Capt. Wroughton in Arracan, and the late Capt. Grant, at Prome, (all officers of the Bengal Native Infantry Regiments,) 1 am indebted for many data, by which the geography of the eastern frontiers has been so much improved. It may serve to give an idea of the extended field of their operations, merely to mention that the observed difference of longitude taken by me at Futtehghur, and Major Wilcox at Suddia in Assam, by the Ist satellite, was in time, lh. 4m. 15s., or 964 miles of longitude. When places like Suddia, Munnipour, and others at such great distances, and to which there had been no opportunity of extending geodesic surveys, can have their positions assigned to them exactly in latitude, and within perhaps two to three miles, or indeed I think within less, by a few correspondent observa- tions of the satellites, they serve as starting points, from which to originate more detailed and local surveys, in those new countries. As an example, I will now give the differences of meridian of Futtehghur and Madras Observatory. My house at Futtehghur was on the high right bank of the Ganges, and nearly in the rear of the left of the Native Infantry lines, and in latitude 27° 21’ 37”. 1840. | Fort William, and Futtehghur. 83 Date. Set. | Im. or Em. Madras time. |Futtehghur ae Difference. eS. Hew Se me ise 1824 Dec. 21 1 Immersion TIP S6wAl eras PP 33 56003) 2) 44058 seotal — 9 _ Do. 139029 548 4 13.09% 038 8 2 54 ‘9 1925 — Do. 17 16 46 74 17,13 32 3 SS Et 1825 Jan. 10 1 Do. 10 00 35 6 9 5V 14, 33 3h ese es —— 26 1 Do. 8 15 28 6 Si AS 13h i Wail 3} 5 Immersions Mean 2 53 “3 Jobe Biol, WSs hs mes 1825 Mar. 22 1 Emersion. te OS 7, (f We 8D a DO Su ee be} leat Do 9 11 32 5 | 9 09 20 | 2° 12°55 ——. April 5 1 Do 11 06 23 07 11 04 19 -0 2 04 0 ee —— 21 1 Do. 9 25 07 “4 9 22 59 -0 2 08 “4 —=- —— 28 1 Do. ll 20 15 ‘6 11 18 03 :0 2 12 6 5 Emersions. Mean, De AA! 2 Mean of Immersions and Emersions. ... Be ZOO) Madras Observatory. ... SY | SoS tery woe ee ee) Futtehghur. cic or : ae Sco OS S0ip eo The above were all taken with Troughton’s 46-inch telescope, power 64, and by myself, except one immersion on the 9th December, which was observed by Mr. William Rix James, one of my best sub-assistants. At the same time observations were taken by several young men, apprentices in the Revenue Survey Department, in my presence ; but I did not allow of any com- munication between them,—each gave to me, on the spot, sepa- rately and silently, the time at which he noted the phenomenon. The following are the differences given by numerous immer- sions and emersions of Ist satellite. ma. a Dollond’s 64-inch telescope, power 100... 2 28 °7 Troughton’s 46 Do. Do. power GH US 25 25a -2 Dollond’s 45 Do. Do. $s. Jae) hi BBY Mean; ins on Baad jot h. Madras Observatory, .. 5 21 2 ‘9 Futtehghur, Do. ... .. .8 I8 32 38 84 Differences of Meridian at Madras, [No. 97. These were the best telescopes, and used by the steadiest observers, but not always the same instrument, by the same person. The mean of these, with that of my individual sights, give 2m. 31s. ‘40 for the difference, which must be near the truth, and for my station 5h. 18m. 32s. °37, or 79° 38’, that is, if the meridian of Madras be correctly settled. I may further mention, that I took and compared with the Nautical Almanac six immersions, and an egual number of emersions of the Ist satellite—they give, h. m...8. Gimmersionsy....(, eco LA aa ihc Mae ee G_emersions,...... s)he bine. 9. See Mean, .. 5 18 35 °5 All taken with Troughton’s 46-inch telescope, power 64, and by the same person. I have extended these remarks to a far greater length than I intended, but perhaps some notice of another mode of investigating the longitude, may be useful to the officers of the Bengal army, who are serving with our regiments from Afghanistan to China. This is the well known mode of lunar distances from the sun and stars, which has «not been so much used on land, as it might be, and with very great advantage, in the clear atmosphere of Asia; fre- quent opportunities of seeing the moon and stars and sun occur ; the mode of operating is not difficult, and the instru-_ ments required are easy of carriage, and do not require any fixed supports. The calculation is rendered simple, and the results satisfactory, by means of the correct data in the Nautical Almanac; with these, and that most excellent of all instruments, Troughton’s reflecting circle, any officer may, with a little practice, do good service to geography. I wish it to be understood, that it is not by the sextant that we are to look for such results, it being only a second best instrument, but from the circle, which is, though a little heavier, equally, nay, more convenient, in use, than that imperfect part of a circle, the sextant; which should never be used on land, nor at sea either, if satisfactory longitudes are hoped for; and where are they more required ? 1840. | Fort Wiliam, and Futtehghur. 85 As Troughton’s directions for using his circle are not uni- versally known, I will here extract from them a few lines, in which he plainly states its advantages, when compared with the sextant ; they are chiefly these :— “The observations for finding the index error, are ren- * dered useless; all knowledge of that, being put out of the ** question, by observations both forwards and backwards. By ‘the same means the errors of the dark glasses are also cor- “rected, for if they increase the angle one way, they must “diminish it the other, by the same quantity. This also ** perfectly corrects the error of the horizon glass, and those ** of the index glass, very nearly. But what is of still more “* importance, the error of the centre is perfectly connected, “by reading the three branches of the index, while this “* property, combined with that of observing both ways, proba- “bly reduces the errors of dividing, to one-sixth part of “their simple value. Moreover, angles can be measured as “far as one hundred and fifty degrees, consequently the sun’s ** double altitude may be observed, when his distance from “the zenith is not less than fifteen degrees, at which alti- “‘ tude the head of the observer begins to intercept the rays of “light, incident on the artificial horizon, and of course if a ““ greater angle could be measured, it would be of no use “in this respect.” Mr. Troughton has not noticed a farther great advantage, in there being no need to take the index error of the circle, as there is with the sextant; the finding this error with the latter, as it is generally done by measuring the sun’s diameter, on each side of the zero, is well known in these hot coun- tries to be a most painful, as well as a tedious and uncer- tain operation, and we measure only on a small part of the arc the glaring disk of the sun, through the stained glasses, which we see under a very different degree of brightness, from that under which we take the contact of the moon and sun or stars, and this index error ought, with the very best sextant, to be rigorously examined at each observation. With the circle the correction for the zero point is included in the observed distances on both arcs, and given on six parts of 86 Differences of Meridian at Madras, [ No. 97. the circumference ; and what is of great consequence, the obser- ved objects have the same, or very nearly the same, degree of light, so that the eye has not to change its focus and condition; besides, if the reading of the three indexes take up more time, it is a very little more than the reading of one, it is amply repaid by the time gained, in not being obliged to take the index error. In Mr. Troughton’s paper, he, in his usual clear manner, explained the adjustments and mode of using his circle. I give one more extract from it, to shew the opinion of him, allowed to be the best artist in Europe, of its value ; he says— “The greatest error, to which dividing by a good engine “is liable, may be taken at about twenty seconds; the six “readings required in a double observation on different parts “of the circumference, will probably reduce that error to ‘** within five seconds, where the reflecting glasses and _ teles- “copes are good, and power considerable (about twelve) a “mean of contacts will come out within this quantity, and “‘ where every other source of error is corrected by the prin- “ ciples of the instrument, we are of opinion, that a series of ““ lunar observations will give the longitude on land, nearly, “if not quite, as accurately, as can be obtained from an occul- ** tation of a star, by the moon, when observed with a powerful “* telescope.” It is well known that Mr. Troughton made more and better sextants than any other artist, and of course derived much profit by their sale, yet such was his disinterested desire that his circle should come into general use, that he made the price only one guinea more than that of his best sextants, though the real difference of cost in material and workmanship is considerable. On the same terms, and with the same ex- cellence of execution, Troughton’s reflecting circles are now supplied and constructed by his worthy successor, Mr. William Simms, F.R.S., an artist whom Mr. Troughton selected as best worthy to sustain his great reputation. The chief reason why the circle has not come into more general use at sea, is its greater weight than the sextant, and the partiality men feel for instruments they have been used to; 1840. | Fort Willtam, and Futtehghur. 87 but the difference of weight is not much, and after being ac- customed to it, it feels steadier in the hand than the sextant. It may indeed happen when a ship has much motion, that in one position of the circle, the right hand being further from the eye than it is with a sextant, a degree of inconvenience is felt, but it is soon surmounted, and is moreover balanced by the convenience of having two handles to the circle, so that the face is never held downwards, as the sextant must frequently be. There is indeed a little longer time required to read off the three verniers than the single one of the sextant, and this may sometimes make the assisting observers of the sun and moon’s altitude impatient, or less attentive. For my part, I think that lunar observations are most satisfactorily taken without an assist- ant, except one to note the watch, (and one may be dispensed with) all that is required, is to have, say, a sextant and a good quadrant. Then proceed to take one altitude of the moon, and lay the sextant down ;—that done, take one of the sun, with the quadrant, and lay it down ;—then take two or three sets of distances with the circle on both arcs, and then observe the altitudes of sun and moon, noting all the times. All these things, with a little pre-arrangement, may be soon and calmly done, which is the chief thing, and readily reduced to the mean of times and distances; but if two instruments are not available, the altitudes may be taken with the circle. On shore the altitudes of sun or star and moon may be taken with a well adjusted theodolite, or sextant, or the circle, and if the observer has not an assistant, the seconds of time may be conveniently noted by the beat of a metronome, but a prac- tised observer will himself count the seconds correctly. Or if the latitude and time are correctly known, as they can be on land, _ altitudes of the sun, moon, or stars, may be calculated. In in- vestigating longitudes on shore, the time should always be determined by equal altitudes of the sun or stars, which may be taken by two or three sextants with the artificial horizon, or by meridian passages of stars made with a portable transit telescope. Lithographic forms are useful, in which to fill up all the figures of calculations, and these should always be preserved. i. 88 Differences of Meridian at Madras, [No. 97. In determining J/atitudes, the reflecting circle is most useful to the geographical surveyor and navigator. By no instru- ment can so many good observations be taken in so short a time, the meridian altitudes of the sun and stars, one day or night, taken by the readings of the three branches of one arc are corrected by those of the next; but by a still more rapid, and equally accurate process in one day, a sufficient number of circummeridional altitudes of the sun can be taken, and reduced to the meridian. During ten minutes on each side of noon, ten or twelve double altitudes may be well taken from the artificial horizon, marking the horary angles by the chro- nometer, and at night, many stars may in like manner be calmly and well observed. They are best selected on both sides of the zenith, and the time from noon may be extended in proportion to the slowness of the star’s motion; with the pole star to a great extent at sea, but on land, in geodesic operations, it may be extended to half an hour on each side of the meridian. Of course, as in a lunar distance, the observations must be.taken on the right and left arcs alternately, or on equal numbers before and after the meridian passage. A stand is sometimes used with the circle, but I always found I could work quicker and better without. In oblique distances a support for the elbow is desirable, but in taking altitudes, the best way is to sit on the ground, the back being supported by a Hindostanee morah, or some such thing; ¢his posture gives to the hands perfect command over the instrument ; also re- member that when the glass roof is used over the mer- cury it should be reversed at each contact. Circumstances may prevent observations with the circle being obtained on both the arcs, in such cases the instrument may be used in the manner of a sextant, and the index error applied, with this advantage over the sextant, that the index error, as well as the observed angle which it is to correct, is read on three verniers instead of on one, as with the sextant; also the index error may be taken on two small stars, or other well defined objects, subtending a greater angle than the sun’s diameter, and the usual painful operation of measuring it avoided altogether. With the circle also, which is called at sea 1840. | Fort William, and Futtehghur. 89 the back observation, for the altitude of the sun or a star may be taken. To conclude, I can from long experience of its excellent properties, very confidently recommend to my brother officers of the Indian Army, the use of Troughton’s reflecting circle, and also of a small theodolite, which I will describe, as it was lately constructed under the following circumstances. When I was in England, my opinion was demanded at the Kast India House as to the best construction of theodolites required for the revenue surveys, in the North-west provinces. I well knew the defects of the instruments hitherto supplied to the government, which were unsteady and top-heavy. I accordingly consulted Mr. Simms, and we agreed on the construction of the instru- ment, I will now describe. This theodolite, though small, being only five inches in diame- ter, is of a stout firm make, the azimuthal circle has three verni- ers, and by it horizontal angles can be taken with much exact- ness, by taking them on both arcs, in the same manner as in the reflecting circle, each angle being from the result of six ‘readings. When more exactness is required, several observa- ‘tions should of course be taken, and as a further check, the an- | gles may be repeated on different parts of the limb, due atten- | tion being always paid to the lower, or watching telescope. The vertical angles are taken on a complete circle, which being capa- ble of reversion has many advantages as to correct observations and means of adjustment. Altitudes and depressions are to be taken with the face of the vertical circle in one direction, it is then to be reversed in azimuth, and the operation repeated, there being room for the telescope to be turned over, as is done with astronomical circular instruments, and the vertical angles repeat- ‘ed. There are two levels as usual, but the correction of the line of collimation is best effected by taking the direct alti- tude of a stationary object, and its reflected image by depression on quicksilver. By this last mode of observing, also, a desirable degree of approximation to the latitude may be had when re- flecting instruments are not at hand, or cannot be used. __ A good sized magnetic compass is part of this theodolite, and can be applied above it, when required. N 90 Differences of Meridian at Madras, &c. No. 97. The instrument is mounted on a brass tripod, which may be commodiously placed on a wall, or other situation, when the usual wooden stand (which it also has) cannot be used. This theodolite being so portable and strong, would be found most useful to the military surveyor or scientific traveller. Mr. Simms speedily completed an extensive order for these instruments; they were sent to the India House, and I sup- pose to India. Those officers who have the requisite opportunities and in- struments, may also avail themselves of some other modes of determining differences of meridians. These modes (which are noticed in the account of the survey of the Himalya Mountains, in the 14th vol. of the Asiatic Re- searches, page 189) consist in chronometrical observations, the sudden ignition of gunpowder at distant stations, and the observation of the horizontal angles subtended by any two or three of the well defined snowy peaks, the positions of which in latitude and longitude have been determined by the survey ; these peaks, it is well known, are visible as well in the moun- tains as in the plains, at very great distances. Jaks HT. Teetaghur, May, 1840. Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. Wednesday Evening, \st April, 1840. The Hon’ble H. T. Prinsep, Esa. Vice-President, in the chair. The Proceedings of the last Meeting were read. The Rev. Professor StREET and Rajah KisHtonatua Raya, proposed at the last Meeting, were balloted for, and duly elected members of the Society. Library. Read a letter from T. H. Mappock, Esa., Secretary to the Government of India, forwarding for inspection the following works— Illustrations of Indian Botany, No. 13. Figures of Indian plants, No. 13 and 14. By Dr. Wicur. Read a letter from Col. J. Stuart, Secretary to the Government of India, Military Department, forwarding copy of a work containing the result of Astronomical observations at the Observatory of the Madras Presidency, during the years 1838 and 1839. Literary and Antiquities. Read a letter from H. Torrens, Esa. late Officiating Secretary to the Govern- ment of India, General Department, transmitting three books, being a Political and =), Sy abel +) . 1840. | Asiatic Society. 91 Historical account of the British setthements in the Straits of Malacca, from the year 1785 to July 1839, by Capt. James Low. Resolved that they be referred to the Committee of Papers. Physical. Read a letter from Mr. Woprnouse, Acting Colonial Secretary at Colombo, forwarding a copy of the Tide Register kept at Trincomalee during the year 1839. Read a letter from Lieut. Col. Hopason, presenting a stuffed Albatross. Skin of a Cat and and also a specimen of the glue root, were presented by Dr. H. H. Spry. The Annual Report of the past year was then read. Secretaries’ Annual Report. On areview of the proceedings of the Society, for the year 1839, we submit to you this Report. Your Society has been stationary during the past year. 12 ordinary Members have been admitted, and 13 have been lost by death and departure for Europe. Those who have died, are Mr. G. A. Prinsep, Dr. Bain, Mr.W. K. Ewart, Captain J. TayLor, and Mr. ©. Brown tow, an associate Member. Those who have quitted India are HisExcellency Sir H. Fane, the Hon. Col. Morrison, Mr. C. G. MansELL, Dr. G. Evans, Mr. W. Cracrort, Dr. J. Martin, Lieut. Col. Low, and Mr. D. Ross. Of your honorary Members, we regret to notice the death of two distinguished Ori- entalists, Baron Dre Sacy and M. De Tassy. The reputation of Dr Sacy, and his valuable labours in the field of Oriental Literature, need no eulogium. Our feeble praise could add nothing to his well deserved fame. ‘ Publications. We noticed in our last report the completion of the 4th vol. of the Mahabharat, and the defect of plates which rendered the Sharria Vidya, the Sanscrit Version of Hooper’s Anatomy, incomplete. Fifty pounds have been remitted to Englandon account, and we hope that in the course of the year, we shall receive from Europe well executed plates, which will render the translation of that useful work subservient to the extension of sound Medical knowledge amongst the Hindu classical cultivators of the science. The Sharay-ul-Islam, noticed in our last report, has been completed, and we trust this publication, which treats on the civil law of the Arabs, according to the doctrine of the juris-consults of the Shea sect, will be found to supply a want which we believe was sensibly felt. We bring also to your notice, that Part ii. of the x1x Vol. of your Physical Resear- ches has since our last report been published. Museum. We here introduce the following interesting report of your Curator, in regard to this branch of your Institution. “The donations to the Museum are communicated monthly with the proceedings of the Society. The only donation omitted in the usual place, is that of a collection of several fishes from Mr. R. J. Ross, in spirits supplied for ‘the purpose. This little collection, consisting of ten or fifteen species, includes two or three kinds of eels, which Mr. Rose states are very destructive to the embankments so essential 92 Asiatic Society. [No. 97. to the safety of the low districts at the head of the Bay, from their habits of burrowing, a curious fact not before known, I believe, of this family. “¢ Our own establishment in the Museum have added considerably to our collection of fishes during the past year; and in a short time it may be hoped that we shall possess examples of most of the commoner species in Bengal. Our collection of skeletons has received three interesting additions, besides that made to it by the king of Oude, already acknowledged in the monthly proceedings, particularly that of a marsupial animal. The others are, a skeleton of a turtle, and of a gooial, the former commenced by Dr. Evans. ‘“‘Of birds, several interesting collections have been added to that of the Society during the same period, but as they have all been acknowledged in the monthly proceedings, it is unnecessary to specify them again in this place. For the safer preservation of objects in this department, the whole of the Ornithological cabinets ought to be removed before the ensuing rains, to the new room upstairs, on the west side of the house. ‘‘Of minerals, we have received from Dr. Spry, on the part of Captain JENKINS, Agent to the Governor General, 58 specimens from Cornwall, on condition that a similar collection of Indian specimens be presented by this Society to the Royal Geological Society of Cornwall. «‘ The delay that has taken place in the supply of cabinets for the Society’s minerals, has prevented, as yet, any return being made for this donation, in as much as our own collection must be first arranged before we can know what duplicates we have to offer in exchange, and the necessary examination of the collection cannot be made until the cabinets that have been ordered are supplied. J. M‘CLELLAND. 7th January, 1840. «*P.S.—The number of animals set up in the Museum during the last year (1839, ) is three hundred and seventy-seven (377,) including nine mammalia, two hundred and nineteen birds, and one hundred and twenty-nine fishes.’ J. M. Antiquities. We cannot report results and communications in this branch, so important as those referred to in our last. In the past year many valuable contributors have been with- drawn from their studies to the camp, to perform the active duties of their profession But we may indulge in the hope that many, even in the busy scenes in which they have engaged, may have collected valuable materials, which future leisure may enable them to elaborate. The readers, however, of the Asiatic Journal will have observed several antique inscriptions, which may be pronounced interesting, and might have even been characterised as important, had not the exciting result of Mr. Jamzs PRINSEP’S researches raised our estimate of importance. Library. The accessions to the Library may be thus classified :— Vols. English, .. es oe ee - a oe French, .. on oe oe si ay ate de xe 74 Latin, Se ed ame ‘a ae ave ee ate ate 8 German, .. e8 “a a2 ae we wld. 0 Mints a 10 Arabic, .. ole * ae ae bee a - af 6 Sanscrit, .. b. ih bh ae re us ae a 3 Hindustani, Ay AS wie is ote Ste de om 3 1840. | Asiatic Society. 93 Finances. The useful additions, and thorough repair which your premises have received have much swelled the expenditure of the two past years. The outlay, however, has, we are happy to say, rendered the house commodious, and well adapted for the various objects you encourage. The following table shews your financial state. [The account current will be found at the end.] Memorandum of the Books received into the Library in 1839. The Number of all the Books, large and small, in different Languages, on the stated subjects, amounts to 336. English. Vols.Pam, No. Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopedia. Literary and Scientific Men. .. so MD OO ——_— S§s- ———-_ ————_ Literary Men of France. 46 soheliee O7n0 ——$<— ss ——— __- ————_ Statesmen. ae ie on Soh eee Oe O Probabilities. .. ne Ae senate Oragii@ ——_ —_——-_ ————._ Biiography,—English Poets. .. someind: FeO 2G) —_—_ Ss-§ ——_ ——__ History.—Denmark. .. oe Sere de POLO — Ss ——-S — England... sie i 0O 0O —=—- ——————- So Greece. aie ae 1.0.0 ———_ _ ——-_ Natural History,—Geology. .. Say ietewie On) ——_ - -—_ - ——_ Fish. 65 seetjd iO Transactions. ee ae ae bie ae fe es CON ag Reports. Sc a5 oe oe “ Ls, eoniee Proceedings. ar ve or ee ae oe Shahi se OTe Journals. .. Bs Be bie Ae a5 oe Peco, 4 History. .. te Be ne 3 46 ae 4 ll 0O Naturalist’s Library. fe an °° Accounts. ate oe ae oe ore < aye Le Or aKO Philosophy. 5 ae be oe oe ° piipitind Ove O Jara (0) Mathematics. e be om ae eo ele On Observations. ae be on ae os sore Oa O List of Members of Societies. Bie os 56 mia ty EE | Maps. ee xe Se ee as = °° ae ea. 6 70 Botany. ae oe a6 8 ae ae ae Serer kG Illustrations. af oe oe ROTH 9: Catalogues. = 5 50 aie nc Bee 30 Treatises. ie ae Sc es : Ow rhe 0 Voyages. ore or POT Memoirs. oe == a te 2 ONO Documents, ata as €s : 1 OU State Papers. ae oS es oe a oe lene. LOD .O Analysis, (Mackenzie’s Collections, by Wilson). ae -- Copies, O 50 0O Descriptions. ae ate . ° ° ° EO 0 Miscellaneous. .. sip ae . TAOS Til 94 Asiatic Society. [No. 97. Brought over. ee os ee oe oe wie -- 43 32 66 French. Researches. ote as ae Reports. os ar ee os Bulletin. a on 5 ate Natural History, .. Notices. cio Mies ers “5 Collections. ne ae ex Grammar, (French and Armenian). oe Miscellaneous. .. — e\coowocdc.v woerew cCOr © State Papers. .. ce os Miscellaneous. .. ae Periodicals. we a5 we 4 Natural History. 4c 46 1 Treatises. aie ee ate oe ae ocala Biography. es se 4 Miscellaneous. .. we 0 Arabic. Dictionary, (Arabic and Latin). Arabian Nights. .. ee Sanscrit. Poetical Works. ed os Se bg ae 1 Psalms of David. an we et se : hae | The Ramayana, 1 Hindustani. The New Testament. .. as | 1 Miscellaneous. ave ie os te oe Copies. 2 ee eo ee ee ee eee Total, i 26 47.99 90 eee SS As1aTic Society’s House. ALEX. CSOMA, 2nd. January, 1840. Librarian, Asiatic Society. Note.—For the Books received in the month of January, see Journal Asiatic Society, No. 3, new Series for March 1839. — ‘ . Apri 5 Meteorological Register, hept at the Surveyor-General's Office, Caleutta, for the Month of April, 1840. 95 Minimum Temperature observed 7 ~Wexiouan Pi Fremure obverved 7 Observations made at apparent Noon at sunrise, at i, 50 a1. es 5 of \Temperature, | Wind, : * 2 F Wind. Fj omperature, i : # Z/3 5 § g ele ; Z Si ; FS § lz, 4 2 aate z Aly Hi z 3 ioe] : : Es % 36] 5 lap i iss E 4 a |s 2 Sere Sa Hse Je pL eae eee, Ee 6 29, 966) 92,0) N.bW|Clear F st ps] at ‘930] 82 HUW. ..|Cloar 7\¢e@ BAY) 888) 87, 4) W. ..|Clear. 3 8,7 san 8. =) Cloar i 17983) 36,5) S, 1. Clear, é Cala, |G Ey ‘706) 85,0) |ssiw “= |Cloar, ; ia 0,0) 8] 3 1730) 55,0 last {Light Clouds, 8 2] 04 {7972 83, 8. ../A few detached Clouds, 4 8,0) 88,9) 1820) 8,0 8. ¢./Clear. 5,8] 59,5] Bd) 89, 8. :1|Clear ,2| 90,0) 43) #05) 8... |Cloar, 87; 89,0) 83, 59,0) S. ..|Cloar 86,5} 1,9) Bi, 510) S. W,/C 86,3) 94,8) 83, 2) 9,0) WwW. Gloudy, 3,0] 92,0] 8d, 89,5 w {)Cloudy. 4,9] 99,0] 83, 77| 9). S {|Gonerally Clear Fs Cloudy partially, K 8? gents of Generally Cleat, wy) 80) ‘Cumuli detached, Cirro Cummuli interspd, 89, a} 87, Cloudy, Cirrostrati. BR ««|'To the east oir,-at. &afow cumult + |Light Mists, 1) BGye) 920 82318. <:\Curnate, & Cum, zenith clear, A fow detached Clouds, 91,0 83,0 Clear. Gonorally Clear, ).0) 81,218, Cunuli. Detached Clouds, ; Shigh|Cu Detached Clouds (Moating.) Clear. 5 8) 82.0) 8, high Ploating Cumuli. Riou ea =-|Cumult enerally Clear. +.|Curm, Cloudy occasionally. Clouly, ‘76) 8, Cloudy, si Clouily ‘674) 840 Nimbi intorspersed. 816] 85,4 ee Maximum i perature observed Minimum Presure, obseryor ata atl aa, ) PM, Wind Observations made at sun-set, —$—<—<$$$<—$ | Temperature. Tom perature. (Wind, ‘Teroperature. Wind. . |Generally Clear, AAvfow detached Clouds to Cloudy. E ee the Zenith, JA. fow detached Clouds Saas! hat afew. sionally.) » | = aise eres P) wt | a = {5 |] . [8] E 4 |2. $ 2 (2s) = 63) § a < F : 2 |35| $/55! g % ra = ele g |S°| = |g) z é 383 a Rue a (5 | S/6 | a 2 8/5 < ish et 1 &7, 81,9) w 1 [st 2 a Si] 126.9) Ww. in et 3 Ct SS, 8. 103,0) 80) 4 my Ss. 95,0) 86,8 oy, 3| ae i neal wis 7 5 ‘To the N. Cum, stratus, 97,0) x I io 8 By 8 Comuli detach we Sis 89,0) 10 9 s. | Sa 70) Cloar, t Fe ri A) 89, Horizon Hazy. He , 8. 995) 849 89,9) Clear. Hh Be 8 104,2184/0 8u,9 Clear. 4 a 1035) 839 89,5) Clear 5 y 1085] S45) 81,8) Cleat ib ne s feu 95,9] 81.0 9,8) Clea u | ferent tached (occasional 88,0] 82,0) 2) ‘Scattered Clouds. | 5 PAR asitt jotached, 99,8) 84,0) 86,9) 8) |A few Scattered clouds. 2 Gumi deached SLO) SHL 3,5, ‘Dense Clouds intersp. 2 SAUL 1277 Cumuli a few. é ar on Bie |Cumuloatr.” elondy. occas 0 0.13) Osta 3 7 ‘0lS PEL LER: S LF = occasion-| (ally. ; BEZZRE ZESESESE SS: 2 4 2) Be: JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY. Note of Discoveries of Gems from Kandahar.—By Lieutenant Cono_ty. My DEAR Sir, Kandahar, October 24, 1839. In default of something more interesting, you will perhaps not think the enclosed facsimiles of gems unworthy of place in your Journal. They are sent rather, it must be confessed, with the desire of gaining information, than a hope of being able to impart it. The number of the Journal which contains the Pehlevi Alphabet not being procurable here, we are unable to read the inscriptions. Our harvest of antiquities has as yet been most unpromising. This is partly owing to the disturbed state of the country, but also in a great measure to our researches having been confined to the southern pro- vinces of Afghanistan, to which the Greek rule and civiliza- tion would seem only very partially to have extended. From Shikarpore to Herat or Seistan there is hardly one stone edifice, and not one of antiquity. Pure Bactrian coins are very rare, and the only description found in any quantity, are coins having some connection with the Azos series; the most com- mon being copper coins, with a head and illegible inscription on the obverse, with the Unadpherros reverse. Seistan, which we hoped would prove an Eldorado, furnishes, or has as yet furnished, nothing but these, together with numerous Sassanian and Arsakian coins. Of the Sassanian, the most common is a Species not noticed in the Journal, but probably to be recog- nized in some of your numismatological works. Obverse, two heads, one with the usual Sassanian high cap and long beard, the other facing it smaller. No. 98. New Serizs, No. 14. O 98 Gems from Kandahar. [No. 98. But leaving coins to a future opportunity, I proceed to lay before you the history of the gems forwarded. 1. A Buddhist (?) monogram on an agate, found at Kandahar. 2. A female with child, and a hawk in her hand. The figures on the margin, which might be mistaken for letters, seem rather to be birds; seals with this impression seem not to be uncommon ; they have been found at Herat and Kandahar. The inclosed is from an agate. 3. i a eS EY NE RE SS er eS cm fe ce | RS ——— ‘syleuley pue ‘Tayyea Ay “PUL AA uOTeNTS ‘sate Ny ,S[ASSa A ‘ayeq ‘DIINID) 0} suOLgDIS Jassag JYOVT PUD 30) ay? wolf ‘sang ay, buojo pasuaruadua sp “Gegt “2day 181% 02 YIGT 242 fo a1DH ay? fo mai ADN90 J, th reference to wv we Second Memo 116 “Apnojo pue sozaaiq Ysaay | royjey $Atyenbs pue “qgq oO} | sezeoiq 4YySI] sjred o[ppImM pue 4st) “YSIT] Sunyeoyg rsuuy oy) vean}'* ‘* tA tg “euseyy| “BELONIMS COT ©} persed §royea Youu Sutddrys pue Suryoztd jassaa { Surnuryuos [peas $punoa qe ‘SuruyySty pue repunyy ‘urea pue purm jo sjjenbs Aavoy ‘AN pue “AN 0} ‘GQ Woy prey Surmoyq eres ojerepou 4ystu -pIul [[) pue ‘W ‘d Q 0} C—*SuTHUT}UOD [JAMS “seq OY} 0} soounreodde petesun Apnopo yrep S°ANN pue “AN 0} ‘(SW Sutseosour -w ‘d Pye Spremyseq oy} wiosrz [jams Aavoy ev pue uUTer YIM ‘suTUEzeeIy} pue ‘Apnoyo ‘sezeaiq “GSA Suorjs 0} Yysoay ‘uooU [1 WYStuprur wOIy|***- Oe “UOT}LIG IanO] ** se 7A "YT ‘uooeveg) ‘ured yyim ATTenbs 10992] ‘Jayyeam uy yred atppru pur ysl “GN Wosz opeS oyetopou e Sur |++*- sens et ‘jeu -MOT “AN Loe] pue oppprut “ANA 0} Jseq WoIy apqeiea jared ysitq|-ueyO usoyseq oy} UI YsIom Japuy|*° "tA tg SeuysIry ‘SUINUI}UOD [Tams f soUeIeodde Sutuszeatyy pure * AA N OF ISO AA WO SulUjzYSi] ‘punos [Te spnoyo yep qIIM “ANN ye sjsns yuenb “aif “QUStuptu £yno vfqeo suLoyyey OZ] “AS 01 eoUereedde payyasun Aioa pure ‘ured Jo sjsnS ‘sipenbs yim "ANA 0} ‘ASA Spurm Aptoyso AA a7eLApOU “W'd Q Sauies ay} JoSUNg “YNOG 07 sey Wor sooueteadde Surua}voiy} § jams AAvey snopusutas} ‘sezeeiq ATLOY}AO N| SUOIIS “WW *d F ‘aUIeS OY} UOON ‘senurjuod jjems AAvoY “|S 0} ‘A WoIy ooUereodde Suruoyeoiy} ‘spnojo Aavoy $a NV ye ayetepou pue soyyeam popyasun AuLooTS Qysitéeq ‘[jems Aavay pue ‘Aypenbs pue Apnojo ‘sourt} ye s}sns YIM ‘sazaaIq “SN 0} Jseq Ysoay "wv p Sdn Sutteayo royyeapy ‘Wsvis°* ‘YIQ]T UO se UOT}eYs oUUT|** ov AQ “ry ty Sodoyy "ANG Woy tTenbs ew -d g ye $4 St] AIDA “|QS Wor pulpal ss? —“-ATTar Wtog MOTEG ETP Wis?’ 8’ CA Cd, Sour “UlGL YIM “AEN wtosy Aypenbs yystupru ye ¢ Apnoyo pue ‘azee1q S[lOYWON ayeepou 0} Sutseasout ‘ez001q “ANN J4Sry wed ysityqiss*: noee ‘speoy salaspay|** ce ta cq fAtaaneg ; ‘urer AAvOY “UION 0} “ANG ST[enbs Aavoy ‘iaqyey Seuy pue jes sone cece ‘Tau ‘ANN o}etapou ‘uoou fouy pue sazooiq “AN Jueseotd yred 4sitq|-ueyg s,pAoy'y pur speoy oaiespay|** ss: °° * *forose[eq IW eevee ‘SRT y 02 "MS SpurtAA WS e@eeve ee “OIST pl[etouly @Crereeeeenee ES ee LOU] -CaM eal “YG Woy oyelepoy|**** ‘oreq werpjtA, uYyor Geis © 2t_ *ezaatd Alloy nos |" ‘\s1oyWY ‘S$ *O°H ‘Apnopo pueyseq ‘ozoorq Apeaqg|*ssssesees ‘Kdg 311g "AE NN 0} SULIooa‘ojeIopoul*AAN | ttt ots ** “elopesy yreg eeeoce ‘TET Aq preaysa AA @oee dy} 0} SULIedA a[es Ysorg “AAG|**** ‘ostadioqug “NG °9 "HH — *IOYJVOAA pue SpuULAA "Sa0v[d W SlessaA jo souren “WOON 79 “GEST Laqguajday Is[Z pun YQ] Uaamjoag any ay? fo Mara w0jngny, “6E8E ‘ydeg (I8E ‘MOON, a2. — ‘aun [TAT {i iy 13] the Theory of the Law of Storms in India. 1840. "Wd OL |S WIOY azo01g "Wd 2 3e stjenbs “seq oq} 0} Sutue}voITy, , : ‘Wd P ret yyey ye qyenbs Aavoyzy 68 ‘AS Wo ew *a p 78 peoueurun0s e[ey *p}seq oq} 0} Surus}vory J, *speoy so1ospoy “ATTef¢ WIOg YO "T'7 oY) wou ioyoue yy ‘jouuryy) U1d}Seq ‘SpRol volespoy *jjaas Aavoy “W'S pue *y 0} Sutuszyeory J, . 38 “19Y VOM *574} ‘*pArjsee \ ay} Woi [jams Aavofy 98 *‘jauueyO iedser oy} uy “MG 04} Wo ves Aavoy W|98 ynosy ut r0youe iy é “WOOT }e SUTIVIApOU NG “TN OY} 03 Suru9zvoay J, *speod uvjedesiziA 39] ‘ulvi pue syjenbs ; ‘eas Sutddo} ystpy ‘SyIVULOY ‘Lou Y 89 68 LL'6G | LE 06 60 16 66 06 66 88 02°63} 20 88 46 88 68°63 | St 88 S $6 10 88 ‘dug | seg |‘qeuoT rN NWT eeeseo “Toy{VaM Iwa]d .OPFF ‘sues pue Arjns OFT ‘rayjeom ArypNs OF] ‘sare “op NT ‘supe A1q[ns 4OF] ‘Apjox9gsezeerq A[19Y}10U o}v19poT “TSS Wo spurs yYPSry] ‘Ayyenbs pure “qSq 0} “YF sozeoiq 3ST] seceee CrrAT WOLZ B]Vs O}eIOPOT, ‘ouy pure az901q “ANN o}e1OpOT “10 -B8OM BSUIUAVIIY] “WN OFeIOpoT ‘uler pue Apnojo ‘sozeelq “| Qy sursvorout ‘suons °° ‘Apnojo pue S9Z90Iq SOI} “AN *> ‘Apnojpo pue SazaoIq YSorj “YN ‘syyenbs suissed pur sozeeiq SU0Ns “ANT 4 ‘urer pue Ajenbs "Wg ‘elojoq ueyy oyeI9pOW slow ynq aes “Nay pue ceeeoeaeeee ‘royjvoMm Au00;3 “MNN 8Felepopy “AAG ‘ojes Lavozy sputar | ST ES EE EY OR ce "1OYJVI AA PUL SPUTAA eee ee e@eesoeeos e@ees @eoesneveee ‘aiodyeun ¢ “ea0eqd “yey[turm0f ‘nesting ‘V¥LLOOIVO W mu "A ‘qd ‘Atoaney "A *d ‘ours sie "A ‘d ‘eusoy “A ‘d Vaysty “A ‘d ‘iosnes "A YT ‘odoy eeeece aN 2 ‘mosRvag ‘ga10S8poy ‘oloseleg VW ‘aS plerourgy ‘oreq, WRITTAA UYOL Qsroywy "SO “HH ‘Adg 81g ‘elopesy, yreg ‘astidiejuy 1awe94s *D “yy “6S8I dag yI6T ‘WOON *Sa0e[q pur s[essoA JO soulvar] ‘own [LAID aed Second Memoir with reference to 132 ‘WV ‘WIOS ‘UOT 38 Weseq BVH *‘yourstp Atoa you s}10daxy Wa F978 AA NN Joge MOI o7eH surer Aavoy pue Apyuepora Surmolq “ANN — 248tupryy ‘uoou ynoge Surne1epoyy] ‘TJ et) Qoeelespoy Uoeayjog “OUR IV "oyIp 0331p 0791 ‘VYSt] Sunroly rousoyoue yy *[eUULYD Uleyseq IOyoue iV ajes @ 07 *Ssvorour ‘eourreed -de *}ee14} 2 ves pesnjuog “MANA OF “MANN Surtdze \ *MNUWO Souty ye 83sn8 SuoNS ‘ga10spey JO 10youe iy ‘jresdo) ureut 2 Pejoed 9SO]9 IapuN 003 aaojy § *“Inoqieyy oodyg ynoAy uy ‘uoouj3e ‘sg 0} Suttesa “YS wo s]yenbg “19M "SUIT CF UT [Iesdo; urem ? poeyeer esoyd Japun 003 aa07] § "meyedeliuiig 1V ‘uoou Aq payeutuiie) pey aed *SyIVULOYy ence ene ao ‘durtg LT 06 60 16 66 06 66 88 SP'6s | 40 88 4G 88 $6°6% OF GS 777 tees ‘uted Liph an ales "AN °° “yeqyeiyD e1odsuny 89 FS |*° °° “AS OF Wor o[es ysorg|***: a1odjeun 60 C6 |** ‘pacyou jou purm {surutrey|++*- ‘epleynl eeeeteoeve ‘peqepoysioy +e ‘sysns aepnsort ut ApIeyseq| sess ‘e1odASune OF PAi,\ 2 2 serene ‘UIVI PUL o}eIOPOU “WAN eeeeveve eeec “ed0Ncy 836s \°° ‘“YNos ynoge oes ayeIepoy|s*°°"* “Ye [IMU0D Ge 36 | ANWMoge)souspora YIM sMoTA|ssss 888" “TnestLINgG €E BG | ‘uter 2» *[bs Suons “qN 0} ‘|NNI*°*°** “eyqno[e,) 1V ‘UIvI pur sozeoig ATIoYy OU SUOIIG|** °° *A'd ‘Araanesy ‘ater 29° [bs sozaaiq BU0NG *AANN[****) °° "A “qd ‘ours ne ‘sjearojut ye urea Aavoy Yqtaa “ANN 03 °N sezoolq prey eeeeeoee eeeeove “eusayAl *eeee Cures pur sjjenbs Aavay q[vs eyelapou Ssurmoiq “AAN|°* °° "Ad Seuystty ured PuS “MM N 03 °N syyenbs prezq| °° ra "A ‘d ‘tosneg 96 T% “5 ‘sjjenbs prey yjIM sezooiq SuONIG *AANNI°* ° *‘T88seA 34st ‘edoxy 0 1G | ‘sypenbs Aavay “AA N anoqge ofey|** °° “TassaA WSrT ‘uooveg ** = ‘urel pue spnojo Surdy * AA NI °° ve s* ‘azoseyeq VW “MN 03 “MN M 8001s Sutmoyg|*" °* fos] prereurg OF OG |** ‘Urer YITA *AANTNY Safes Aavopz]**** «fore WetpytA, uyor 93 61 {°° ‘Ajpenbs pue Aurer ‘qynog}** °° °*asiaywy °S°O °H FF OG |‘utuaqvory) pue *AAN Wo oaenle*’ °* ore te Ae Sec Og 4T jee s*) S1ayyeem Apnopd "AA NIN **° * **elopesy yieg 66 8 4F| ‘1ealo 2oauy aes -8s19ep ‘sq AAs] ‘estidiojuq Jowrva3s *5 ‘py{I}"3}deS reg |“q°uoT|'N Ie] eee Se ‘1OYIVI AA PUL SPUTAA rere ‘SQ0U[ {PUL S[esse A JO souleN] “6S8t Woz ‘ewTy [TAT *27eq 133 the Theory of the Law of Storms in India. 1840.] “MS 9} tte ‘prey Sunstys PULA pur TIN] a8.) 28 88 @ pug uo “mge “YT IV § SUIMO[G pUe s}sn8 JUSTOIA “ANN eyyetyy) s1odsuny °M 0} poteoa pey ‘Wd OT/82 89 68 |89 FS |°°"° “7S ynoqy ‘aiodjeun 60 8g |so ge j|°°°* ‘urer yt (@ MNN) 3N0qV “eple Sutr998A ss me €T 88 |86 Po \°°*° ‘ure ‘Y}ION ‘o1odASune 1106 |b Es \°°°° °° ‘sipenbs yw Yser “qinog ‘eo00Rq 2016 |8BEs jorer'” ‘Sura -74 31] pue topund ‘ures Ap1ajsvq~s “qe][TUIUMI0D BS 06.|9E5S \°°°°°* ‘azyelopou ysoAA JNOGY ‘ynestiing *u00u BB 8eQ |PE ss ls°eee? ‘UIel SUT[Z qnoOge pejeUlUie, 9]e4 -2UIp “AAS pueyseAA wor ATTenbe ‘VLLNOTVO 1V ‘jouuey,) uloyseq omer’ “ouy pue SezaeIq “AAS "A *d ‘ktaaneg “[[eysyueg BO seue ‘ayeropour “ySo\\ joqy Aad ouer ZONED OFT PLONE ** “MSM 0} 989AA 89Z9001q YSoly “Ad “eusayy ‘Joel W1e}seq oy} UC ens 's,0.° ‘ouyg pue oezooiq AjIosoA\ 9}elopoyy “A ‘qd Seuysiy ‘kong jooy oy} 1von esos “Souy pues “AASMA OFeLOpop|s** °° ‘A °d ‘aosnes $8 t9°66 | 20 88 |93 TS [°° °°*"? °° “Joy VOM Auloojs pue 9Z901q “MN M YSerq| °° ‘Tasso A Ipsry edoyy | *S9Z90Tq “MSM YSal ‘ . as wate ‘ : uA foe 3 Gee 2 ; LG 83 |%O TS |‘ouy pue ozoe1g “MSM OFeLApOT [PSseA "T wooveg 8 Suse ‘uled YSIS “|S purma|**** ‘eloseleg 1V ‘golaspoy ‘1oyoue yV omc Siexe ‘Ays 18979 “AAS M| °° ‘gIST prerowy sees SJgy}VeM OU pure oyetlapoyy|o**ss* «= ‘alvq] WITT AA UYOL FS 66 | 96 6F |‘uter juesseoUy, *o}eLapouUr ‘Y}NOG] °° \sIeyWy *S'*O°H "MS Woz [Jams Aavozy G88 |£9 04 |** ‘Apnojo (4 AAS) Oze0Iq Ysorg|s*s* °° ‘Adg Sug ‘ureyedeyimig 3 GE 8 |OG AT |r°°° “194d *6S8T -vam Azey pue sputm Ajpioysoqy}e+s** ‘elopesyT yieg] ‘}dag 34stz 998 | 2a bt | ‘sown ye Ayenbs "MASAA INOGY|** = ‘astadso}U Iouteaig *D “HH “WOON é ce) fp (2) ee ee es en SE ey ee tee f] wee Se cee | eee agrees eee | eee eee | ase e we | =e ) mee! peeeremnss SaaS Cmcscmes Gemeeeen> | cc es Cs a ED So cS ES Se || A SE em meet F ; aaron pag id baa 8, SyIeVUls yy ioyy, | ‘dutg | req |q°uoTlN 3e7 ‘ove *1OYIO AA PUL SPUTAA ‘so0ov[g pue sjassa, jo soureyy 134 Second Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No. 98. I have only been able to find for this Gale a good centre on the 20th September, when, as will be seen, it was blowing in a toler- ably well defined circle, the centre falling close to Chittagong, where, as we learn, several native craft perished, whether on that day or not I am not certain, but suppose it most probable. The centre, if it had one on the 21st, was not far from Chilakhal, but it seems to have been a gale which had not sufficient strength to formsitself into a regular vortex for more than one day, and was interrupted by other causes producing the ir- regularities, which will be seen*by any person who will take the trouble to examine the table with the chart.* One of the most probable obstacles may have been the range of the Kasiya hills, which skirt the eastern bank of the Burhampooter. Some account of a Journey from Kurrachee to Hinglaj, in the Lus territory, descriptive of the intermediate country, and of the port of Soumeanee. By Captain Hart, 2nd Grenadiers ; (Bombay Army.) [Communicated from the Political Department, Government of India.] Under the impression that any information regarding this part of the country may prove acceptable, I forward the accompanying remarks made during my late excursion to the celebrated temple of Hinglaj, which I am not aware of any European having before visited. A rough sketch of my route is annexed. - ; On the 24th January I left Kurrachee in company with Route from Kurrachee to s * ° . Soumeanee. 50 miles. a party of Hindoo pilgrims, and crossing the Hub river reached Soumeanee in three marches. The route as far as the Hub lies over the high ground between the range of hills in which the hot springs, Pier Munga, are situated and the sea. Owing to a heavy fall of rain a few days previ- ous to my departure, a large body of water was running in the river, but on my return, I found only a small stream, which I * The Chart will appear with Part IT. in the approaching number of the Journal. 1840.| Account of a Journey from Kurrachee to Hinglaj. 139 was told would continue to flow for ashort time, and then water always be found in pools. The bottom is covered with loose pebbles, and its width about 100 yards. I saw no signs of cultivation or inhabitants near it, but afew miles higher up, some Noomreea families with their flocks were located. A belt of tamarisk jungle extends for a few hundred yards on each side of the river; four miles beyond it, the road enters a pass in the Pub mountains, called “‘Guncloba”” by Mahomedans, and the “ Ungeekhera Bherum Suk,” by Hindoos. It is stony, of trifling ascent, and the descent equally gentle to a tract full of ravines, extending from the Mor range of mountains which branch off from the Pub towards Beila and the sand hills on the sea shore. A few years ago this Suk was occupied by a party of Noomreeas who plundered the pilgrims, and eventually stopped all communication, until the Yam of Beila sent troops and dispersed them. Some Mahomedan tombs not far from it were pointed out has having been raised to those who had fallen in battle. To the left of the road, and a hundred yards distant from it, is the Bhowanee well, only three feet in diameter and nearly forty deep. It is said never to be dry, yet travellers alone use it. The face of the country is here sprinkled with patches of milk bush, and low shrubs, which continue to the Boareed Suk, where the road leaves the high ground for the beach. A few miles before reaching it, the bed of the Bohur river is crossed. It appears merely one of the larger ravines, and the route runs a short distance down its bed to avoid an abrupt ascent on its right bank. The Boareed Suk pre- sents a most singular appearance, and is formed by one hill having been detached by some convulsion of nature from the range, which is here about two hundred feet in per- pendicuiar height. The path leads along the edge of a deep ravine, where the rush of the stream has cut a channel as even as if excavated by art, and then winding round the back of the hill, slopes to the shore. The descent is gentle, and laden camels pass without difficulty. The sea at this spot is not far distant, but further on the shore gradually widens, until it leaves an extensive flat between it and the sand hills, in. some parts nearly a mile in breadth, covered a 136 Account of a Journey from Kurrachee to Hinglaj. [No. 98. with a low jungle of tamarisk, and wild caper bushes. On my return grass had sprung up over the greater part of this tract, and afforded excellent pasture to a few ponies belonging to the pilgrims with us, but I saw very few cattle or goats feeding there. Three miles from the pass is a nulla, in which brackish water is procured by digging, where travellers usually halt, and one mile beyond it a decayed tree marks the “ Kharee well,” where sufficient is found to supply small parties. This was the second day’s journey. On the third, we continued our course along the flat, which is never at present overflowed by the sea, and passed the “ Seeta Koowas,” (a number of kucha wells so called,) which have been sunk at different times, many now filled up by the earth falling in, and but little water in the rest. The sand hills here lose their pre- cipitous appearance, and gradually decrease in size until they sink to the level of the plain. The ruins of a small building named ‘ Peer Putta’? by Mahomedans, and “ Gopeechund Raja’ by Hindoos, lie to the left of the road before it reaches the Vindoor river, which is dry except after heavy rain, when it runs for a few hours only. The bottom is sandy, and its width trifling. A barren plain brought us to a range of sand banks, ascending which we found ourselves in sight of the town of Soumeanee, situated at the head of a bay in an amphitheatre of sand hills, and remarkable only from the absence of all verdure around it. The party halted at a ruined Dhurumsalla, a short distance from the wells which supply the inhabitants with not very sweet water. They are but two in number, only a few feet in diameter, and are lined with logs of wood to prevent the sand choking them. I had previously informed the Dewan of the Yam of Beila of my intention of passing through his country; he came out to meet me, stated that he was directed to obey all my orders, and would, if I wished, accompany me on my journey. His attention was most marked, and it was with difficulty that I declined his request to be allowed to supply food to my party at the Yam’s expense, although I particularly explained to him that I was merely a traveller, and not authorized to receive presents from his master; but only desired the protection 1840.] Account of a Journey from Kurrachee to Hinglaj. 137 always afforded to strangers. He said that the Yam wished by his attention to me to shew the consideration that every British officer would meet with while in his territory, and a Noom- reea sepoy was ordered to attend me as long as I remained in the country. In the afternoon the people crowded out of the town to look at me, but I experienced no rudeness or incivility whatever from any one. The port of Soumeanee has been long known to Europeans eee own owing to its being on the direct route to and Port, Khorasan and Afghanistan. The town is built at the head of a large but shallow bay, in shape not unlike a horse-shoe, into which vessels of heavy burden cannot enter, except at spring tides. The entrance is narrow, and the low sand banks which border the harbour afford little or no protection from the wind. All boats but coasting craft, anchor outside the bar, at a distance of nearly two miles from the town, in the open roadstead, where they are much exposed. Their cargoes are discharged into the smaller dungees and then landed. On inquiring how the horses exported from Khorasan were embarked, I was told that the vessels were brought in at spring tides, and the animals swam off to them. As we halted here a day to lay in a stock of pro- visions, I had an opportunity of making a few inquiries regard- ing the state of the district under the Yam’s rule, from the Hindoo agents of Kurrachee and other merchants residing there, the result of which I now beg to communicate. The ancestors of the Yam of Beila are said to be descended from one of the numerous Hindoo Rajas who were converted to the faith on the advent of the followers of the Prophet. At a later period they connected themselves in marriage with the kings of Beeloochistan, better known of late as the “Khans of Kelat,” to whom they paid no tribute (although liable to be called on for military service), but on occasions of festivity or visits presented nuzurs as an acknowledgment of their paramount authority. The district over which they rule, extends from the port of Soumeanee northward to Khoydar, and from the Pub mountains beyond the greater range of the Horas. This tract of country is inhabited by the Noomreea tribe who pay alle- giance to the Yam. p ig 138 Account of a Journey from Kurrachee to Hinglaj. (No. 98. The only towns comprised within it are Beila, Oothul, Soumeanee, and Lyaree, the former being the usual residence of the chief. Soumeanee is the only port, and the customs on its imports and exports form the principal item of revenue. It is described as having been in former days but a mere village in- habited by fishermen, called as all such places are on this coast, ““meanee.” Its bay affording more protection to their boats than they could find on the open coast, its population naturally increased, and as trade began to flow through it, the epithet “Sou”? was prefixed par excellence. A small mud fort was built on the sea side to check the rapacity of the Gulf pirates, and many Noomreeas from the jungle located themselves there. At present it contains upwards of two hundred houses, Population of Soumeanee Huilt as usual of wattle and mud, and the num- ber of inhabitants is said to amount to a thousand families. Of these the greater proportion are Noomreeas, who earn their subsistence by transporting merchandise to the northward, and fishermen. The Hindoo portion of the population does not exceed three hundred, a few being agents of traders at other ports, and the rest artisans and shopkeepers. The Yam exercises the supreme authority, but as the present incumbent is a child, his power is in the hands of two Dewans, a Mahomedan and a Hindoo. They are however controlled by his mother, who has the reputation of being a woman of sense and dis- cretion. The former regulates the police, and the latter the revenue, the total amount of which is about 45,000 rupees per annum ; of this sum from rupees ten to twelve thousand is deri- ved from the cultivation round Beila, Oothul, and Lyaree, where Revenue. | Soowaree, oil seed (shungruf), &c. is raised, and the gum of the googhul tree found. The customs collected at the port of Soumeanee and the transit duties of Beila and Oothul are farmed by a Kwaja and a Hindoo for rupees — 34,000 per annum; a few years ago the sum paid was rupees 30,000, and before that only 26,000—a pretty convincing proof of the increasing prosperity of the port. Two thousand rupees of this amount are said to be derived from the tax on fish. The contractors pay part of the amount of their agree- ment in advance, and the balance at the end of the year. 1840.| Account of a Journey from Kurrachee ta Hinglaj. 139 Resident traders are only called on to close their accounts at the annual settlement, but other merchants pay at once. The custom duties are less than those exacted at Kurrachee, and much consideration (as I was told by some Afghan merchants I met there with large investments,) is shewn to all traders by the authorities. On each bale of piece goods rupees 10 are levied; on other articles duty is charged at the rate of rupees 32 to Duties. merchants, and rupees 38 to ryoths. The prin- cipal imports are cloths and metals from Bombay, sent to Imports and Exports. the northward; and dates from Mukron, and rice from Scinde, for internal consumption; slaves also are brought from Muscat, but seldom unless on private order; on each a tax of rupees 5 is taken. So far have the Hindoos resident here got over some of their prejudices, that the generality of them employ Seedhees as household servants to clean their cooking utensils. The exports consist of wool and googhul from the Beila district, and wheat, ghee, moong, asafcetida, and horses from Khorasan. The former article is brought in large quan- tities from the hills near Shah Bilawul anc beyond Beila; its quality is finer than that shipped at Kurrachee, and the cost here averages from 14 to 16 rupees a maund. The oil plant (Shura or Shungruf) is raised in large quantities, and both its seed and oil are sent to Muscat, Gavaddel, Kurrachee, and the mouths of the Indus: in Soumeanee alone I saw no less than twenty mills at work. The coins in circulation in the towns are German crowns or rials, —————* and Soumeanee pice, those of Kurrachee not being current in the neighbourhood. There Tonnage of the Port. are only six vessels of any size belonging to the port, five owned by a Hindoo, and one by a Mahomedan. The fishing and coasting boats are about twenty in number. When walking round the town I examined the remains of the fort. It appears to have been of very small extent. The remains of two The Fort. bastions and a curtain on the sea side are now alone discernible, and they are almost level with the ground. The bank on which it stands has been partially washed away, but the De- wan explained to me as the cause of its never having been repair- ed, that since the destruction of the pirates by the British, it was * Illegible. 140 Account of a Journey from Kurrachee to Hinglaj. |No. 98. shops. on longer of use. The number of shops do not exceed fif- teen, in which grain and dates are sold. The weavers (of whom there are not many) fabricate a few silks and coarse cotton cloths, Manufactures. which find a sale here; a common kind of carpet called a ‘‘furrash” is also made from goat and camel hair. Indigo is imported in small quantities, and is used by the dyers (there are only three) in colouring the clothes of the male portion of the population. There are four mosques, and Mosques and temples. six dhurumsallas and temples in the town and neighbourhood. I was informed by the Afghan merchants that at present the hire of a camel to Kelat was as high as twenty-five rupees, owing to the great demand for them by our troops. Goods to the amount of rupees six hundred, the property of one of them, had a few days before been stolen from the “ Peer Kee jugah” outside the town, where they usually halt. On representing his case to the Dewan, he told me the thieves had been traced, and that no exertions should be wanting on his part to re- store it, and what the plunderers could not pay in kind, they Payments made by Pi. Should in person. In the customs farmed by the grims visiting Hinglaj contractors the sum of rupees 2/2 taken from each pilgrim, and some mendicants, who visit the temple at : Hinglaj should be noticed. Of this six annas belongs to the Yam, part of the balance is divided by the town authorities, and the remainder goes to the contractors. For it, protection is supposed to be afforded them while in his territory, and as a proof of it, one of the leaders of a party we met, mentioned his having lost a “ kottia,” or drinking vessel, some years before at the Aghor river, and on his preferring a complaint, that it was searched for, and found in the hut of a Noomreea, who was forced to return it, and had a valuable camel taken from him as a punishment. I met several of the pilgrims who had lost articles of trifling value, and one, who was head of his party, a few marches beyond Soumeanee was robbed of his clothes and grain, but they felt confident if they saw the Dewan on their way back, that he would oblige the contractors to pay their value. Fresh camels having been hired in the place of those brought from Kurrachee, which do not thrive on the forage | | ; ' 1840.| Account of a Journey from Kurrachee to Hinglaj. 141 found here, and are less strong and healthy in appearance than those bred on the hills, we set out at midday on the 28th, and as the direct route was unsafe for the camels, from the ground having been so lately saturated with rain, we wound round the town, and reached the sea beach, along which we marched for some miles, until nearing the creek at the northern extremity of the bay into which the Pooralee river empties itself, we turned north, and keeping close to the edge of the sand hills which border the mangrove swamp called ‘ Gooroo- Cherla-Kar-un’’ reached a pool of fresh water, where we halted. Churoo, 9 miles. This spot is named Churoo, and is merely a place of encampment. A few herds of camels were feeding in the cypress jungle, which covers the inlets from the swamp. Their attendants where the only people we saw on the road. A short distance before arriving at our ground, we passed the tomb of “Shaik Ali, or Swamee,”’ built on one of the low sandy ridges which here extend inland as far as the eye can reach, covered with stunted milk bushes and tufts of coarse grass. To its right runs the road to Lyaree. The following morning we crossed the “ Thura,” a flat which extends for many miles be- tween Lyaree and Shaik Karaj. Brushwood abounds on it, and both cattle and goats find pasture on the grass. which grows there ; the few I saw however did not appear in good condition. An open plain on our right, sprinkled with cypress bushes, was pointed out as reaching to near Lyaree, but I could not distinguish any signs of cultivation. Continuing a-westerly The Pooralee'River. Course, we came to the Pooralee river, an insig- nificant stream with a muddy bottom. It rises in hills north of Beila, and is said always to have water in its bed, but the cultivators of Lyaree raise embankments across it for the pur- pose of irrigating their fields, so that unless after heavy rain it cannot be called a running stream below that town. Beyond ita gradual rise brought us to another range of sand hills, in the midst of which we encamped near a small well of brackish water. This is generally the first stage from Soumeanee, but the “ Truppa’’ being slippery for camels, where it is usually crossed, we were obliged to make a circuit, which doubled Dambo, 9 miles. the distance, to Dambo. This likewise is only 142 Account of a Journey from Kurrachee to Hinglaj. (No. 98. a halting place, as were all the stations on the route to Hing- laj, without the sign of a habitation or a human being near them. The few Noomreeas who are scattered over the face of the country keep their flocks at a distance from the road, but whenever they see a cafila, they come with their families to beg for food. It has become an acknowledged custom for all travellers to give it; even the mendicants themselves spare a portion of their coarse bread for the purpose. Money (save a few Soumeanee pice, to pay for milk when it can be had) is almost useless, for nothing is to be purchased on this barren waste. A mile beyond Dambo, before leaving the sand hills, a small grove of cypress trees is passed, noticed as being of greater size than those met with elsewhere. On descending from the ridge, the road crosses the heads of a number of inlets running into an extensive backwater from the sea, which here is not visible, as the sand banks along the shore are rather abrupt. Ascending a gentle rise we come on a plain covered with a small bush called Lavee or Lauoo, on which the camels fed with great avidity. Of the plant there are two kinds, the male called Lauoo, and the female Lavee. They are much the same in appearance, excepting the leaf of the latter is shorter and thicker than the former; potash is produced by burning the male plant, which is taken to Kurrachee and Soumeanee, and sells at from four to five cassess (about 100 pounds) per rupee. This tract is called “ Chura,” more par- ticularly that portion of it where low cypress bushes flourish, and pools of clear water with a few wells are found. The open plain extends to the foot of the mountains, and inland to a great distance. ‘Twelve miles from Dambo we found the wells at Kattewara, 12 miles. Kattewara, the encamping ground, choked, nor did we discover water until reaching the base of the lesser range of the Haras, when the pool of a cataract about half a The Hara mountains. mile up a rugged ravine was pointed out to us by a Beroon we casually met on his way to Soumeanee to dispose of camels. This range of mountains, although their height is comparatively trifling, present a most singularly wild appearance, from their rising at once from the plain at an angle of about forty-five degrees on their eastern side, with a still J . ( 1840.| Account of a Journey from Kurrachee to Hinglaj. 143 greater slope to the westward, and being totally bare of all verdure. They are composed of sandstone, and their summits are broken into rugged peaks of the most fantastic shapes. They appear to rise in regular layers, their height gradually increasing as they recede from the plain. Our route the next morning lay along their base, and after passing the beds of many dry nullas we came to a pass near their south-eastern extremity, where they sink into the plain about four miles from the sea. This lake is termed ‘“‘ Gooroo Bherund,”’ and is formed by a large ravine, the course of which we followed for a short distance, and then turning to the left reached the top of the heights, and came in sight of the greater range of the Haras, running almost at right angles to the lesser. The Phor river, 11 miles. Between the two ranges the Phor river flows through a plain similar to that we had passed. Its banks are fring- ed as usual with a belt of tamarisk jungle. Before reaching it a _ number of Mahomedan tombs are remarked, and near them, under _aclump of trees, some Noomreeas were engaged in raising a crop _ of jowaree, the first attempt at cultivation I had seen since leaving | Kurrachee. Water is occasionally found in pools in the river, _and higher up it can always be procured by digging. Six miles _ beyond it we came to the Tilookpooree wells, at present covered with an extensive marsh of fresh water, formed by the late rain. | The Chunder koops, 6miles. One koss from them, in a westerly direction, three hills of extremely light colored earth rise abruptly from the | plain. That in the centre is about four hundred feet in height, of a | conical form, with the apex flattened and discolored ; its southern and western faces rather precipitous, but with a more gradual slope on the others. It is connected with a smaller one of the same form, but of not more than half its size, by a sort of cause- way, some fifty paces in length. The third bears the appear- ance of the cone having been depressed and broken, and ‘covers a greater extent of ground than the others. All three towards their bases are indented by numerous cavities which reach far into their interior; their sides are streaked with ‘\channels as if from water having flowed down them. On iascending to the summit of the highest one, I observed a basin . of liquid mud, about one hundred paces in circumference, occu- 144 Account of a Journey from Kurrachee to Hinglaj. {No. 98. pying its entire crest. Near the southern edge, at intervals of a quarter of a minute, a few small bubbles appeared on the sur- face ; that part of the mass was then gently heaved up, and a jet of liquid mud, about a foot in diameter, rose to that height, accompanied by a slight bubbling noise. Another heave followed, and three jets rose, but the third time only two. They were not of magnitude sufficient to disturb the whole surface, the mud of which at a distance from the irruption was of a thicker consistency than where it took place. The pathway round the edge was slippery and unsafe, from its being quite saturated with moisture, which gives the top a dark colored appearance ; on the southern side, a channel, a few feet in breadth, was quite wet from the eruption having recently flowed down it. I was told, that every Monday the jets rose with greater rapidity than at other times, and then only did any of the mass ooze out of the basin. The entire coating of the hill appears to be composed of this mud baked by the sun to hardness. No stones are to be found on it, but near the base I picked up a few pieces of quartz. Crossing the ridge which connects this hill with the least of the three, I climbed up its rather steep side. In height or compass it is not half the magnitude of its neighbour, and its basin, which is full of the same liquid mud cannot be more than five and twenty paces in diameter; the edge is so narrow and broken that I did not attempt to walk round it. One jet only rose on its surface, but not more than an inch in height or breadth; but a very small portion of the mass was disturbed by its action, and although the plain below bore evident marks of having been once deluged to a short distance with its stream, no eruption had apparently taken place for some years. At times the surface of this pool sinks almost to the level of the plain, at others it rises so as to overflow its basin; but generally it remains in the quiescent state in which I saw it; two years previous it was many feet below the edge of the crest. On my way to the third hill I passed over a flat of a few hundred yards which divides it from the other two. The sides are much more furrowed with fissures than theirs are, although their depth is less; and its crest is more extended and irregular. The —— Oe ee ee = ee ieee 1840.| Account of a Journey from Kurrachee to Hinglaj. 145 ascent is very gentle, and its height about two hundred feet. On reaching the summit, a large circular cavity, some fifty yards in diameter, is seen, in which are two distinct pools of unequal size, divided by a mound of earth, one containing the liquid mud and the other clear water. The surface of the former was slightly agitated by about a dozen small jets, which bubbled up at intervals, but in the latter, one only was occasion- ally discernible. A space of a few yards extended on three sides from the outer crust to the edge of the cavity, which was about fifty feet above the level of the pools; their sides are scarped and uneven. On descending the northern face, I remarked a small stream of clear water flowing from one of the fissures into the plain, which had evidently only been running a few hours; the mud and water of all the pools are salt. A fourth hill, situated close to the great range of Haras, and distant from the rest upwards of six miles, was pointed out as having a similar cavity to this one. Its color is the same, and although the surface is more rounded, its summit appears broken ; I regretted not having an opportunity of visiting it. The name given to these singular productions of nature is the “ Koops, or basin of Raj Ram Chunder,”? by which appellation they are known to all the tribes. They are said to be altogether eighteen in number, seven in this neighbourhood, and eleven between Kedje and Ginaddel in Mukran. Four were pointed out to me, and I was told the other three were hid among the mountains. Some persons with my party had seen one of those in Mukran, and had heard from the Beerooees who shewed them the road to it, that many others were spread over the country ; he described it as throwing up jets similar to the large hill here. By the Hindoos they are looked upon as the habitation of a deity, but the Mahomedans state that they are affected by the tide (the sea is not more than a mile distant from the large one,) but this I had reason to doubt, as of the many persons I questioned who had visited them at all times, not one remembered to have seen the pools quiescent, although several had been on the large hill when the mud was trickling over the side of the basin. To endeavour to ascertain this fact I placed several dry clods of earth in the bed of the channel U EE — —— 146 Account of a Journey from Kurrachee to Hinglaj. [No. 98. on a Saturday, as I expected to return by the same route the following week. A range of low hills of irregular form lie to the westward of, and almost close to, the Chunder Koops. I had not time to examine them, but from their appearance I judged they contained sulphur, and on questioning some of those with me, and who crossed them, they said the taste of the earth was like that near the hot springs at Sehwan, where it is known to abound. A Noomreea who was present, mentioned that about six koss off there was another hill called by the name of the ‘* sulphur mountain.”’ : Leaving the Koops on our left, we continued our route towards the greater Haras, increasing our distance from the sea as we advanced. An isolated cluster of hills on the shore, called the “‘ Sath Durwauza,”’ and a rock near them, were pointed out as spots much reverenced by the Hindoos; a range of sand Bura and Chota Singhul, hills soon hid them from our sight, and we age ease crossed the beds of many nullas, the banks of which were thickly lined with tamarisk and baubul trees. This tract is called the “ Chota Singhul,” and a well in one of its water courses is generally the halting place for pilgrims. We found it dry, and pushed on three miles further to the “ Burra Singhul,” where in a nulla, at no great distance from the moun- tains, we came to another well with sufficient water in it for us all. A Beerooee musician with his family here joined us for — the sake of the food he was certain of obtaining as long as he remained in our company. on the other hand, z as well as the French j, proceed from y- If then those Indo-Scythian names sounded as Azes and Azilises, the Greek representation of them would be, on the one hand, a most proper one, and on the other, that. upon the coins, would serve as helping to give a proximate idea (of the sounds.) That A denotes j, is too much confirmed by the above men- tioned Greek names, to be given up; and to adopt two different * In this somewhat obscure passage I understand Prof. Lassen to mean, that the absence of the virdma in the arrow-headed characters explains the similar peculiarity observable here.--~Trans. + As. T.\iv. 830. { Diez Romanische Grammatik 1, 220. 2N 276 Lassen’s Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. — [No. 99. sounds for the same symbol, is foreign to the character of those languages, which write in accordance with prenunciation, and which are hardly acquainted with historical orthography, as the French and English have now got it, (or the mode of writing words arbitrarily, and as not pronounced.) 14. I will now observe succinctly on the s in the name of Lysjias. In As. Trans. Vol. rv. Pl. xxv1. No. 12, we find X for s; the y which follows it, which Mr. Prinsep believed to be a t, is indistinct ; so also upon the copy, R. R. II. 8: both repre- sentations by Mr. Masson (As. Tran. Vol. 111. Pl. rx. No. 15 No. 6) furnish only a scrawl, at which however, nobody will much hesitate ; with R. R. I. is distinctly the character Y, there is here indeed no trace of ani, and we had to read Lisajé. Mr. Grotefend renders the y, by reading Lisié, i. But I have al- ready previously stated, that we must here expect an i, and we may indeed take the character in the As. Trans. so, as still to preserve the trace of that letter. For by comparing si in the name of Philoxenos, it appears, that in vy the i crosses the triangle; upon the coins, (As. Trans. Vol. rv. Pl. xx1. No. 1 and 2,a x viz. si) twice before no, the difference being, that in course of time the triangular character has taken an open form. R. R. II. No. 5, is well preserved, and has V. I therefore adopt also V as the perfect character upon the coin of Lysias. I must prove hereafter, that vy 1s probably a sh (sch. q.) (To be continued.) 277 Official correspondence on the attaching of Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. Communicated by permission of Govern- ment, by W. B. O’SuauGunessy, Assistant Surgeon, Bengal Medical Service. INTRODUCTORY NOTE. | The great importance and difficulty of the question now under discussion, here and in Europe, regarding the attaching of Lightning Rods to Powder Magazines, led me to solicit the permission of Government for the pub- lication of the following documents. Opportunities are so abundant in India for the investigation of such facts as may elucidate the difficulties still besetting this subject, that I should be deficient in all public feeling, did I hesitate in publishing this correspondence, although the high name of Mr. Daniell is arrayed on the opposite side to that which I have taken. Mr. Daniell conceives conductors to be at all times infallible in the pro- tection they afford, and he would attach them closely to the Magazine. I adduce facts on the other hand to shew, 1° that to derive perfect safety from this apparatus, we must use many more conductors than are generally directed; 2° that an inadequate number only increases the risk of a direct stroke of lightning ; 3° that with any number, if placed close to the Maga- zine, although they carry off aut the lightning to the ground, the Magazine may still be blown up, by minute sparks occurring among the powder bar- rels, by the disturbance of their own electricity, while the lightning is pass- ing outside the building. Mr. Faraday’s opinion in all the essential points at issue, coincides with mine; and my lamented friend, James Prinsep, entertained exactly similar ideas to those advanced in my first report to the Military Board; in Eng- land, Mr. Sturgeon and Mr. Roberts take the same side in the discussion. Our chief opponents are Messrs. Daniell and Harris, and both these gentle- men, I know not why, have lost temper in the controversy. This indis- cretion I strive to avoid, through respect for my distinguished antagonists and for myself. The question is one simply of facts, and the inferences seem sufficiently obvious; our sole object is to arrive at the truth, and this can only be reached by the temperate and patient investigation of all the cir- cumstances before us. W. B. O'S. 3rd August, 1840. 278 On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. {No. 99. (No. 1.) To Dr. O’SHAUGHNESSY, Medical College. Ordnance Department. SIR, The Military Board having been called upon by Government to report upon the expediency or otherwise of attaching light- ning conductors to powder magazines, I have been instructed to address you on the subject, in the hope that your scientific knowledge may assist the Board in forming a correct opinion on that point. 2. Should the use of lightning conductors be considered by you desirable, the Board would feel obliged by any sug- gestions that you may be able to offer as to their height, position, size, and number for any given extent of horizontal or vertical surface. 3. The accompanying memorandum was received from the Court of Directors, and you are requested to return it with your reply. Fort Wilham, : Military Board Office, Your obedient servant, 22nd December, 1838. W. Desupg, Officiating Secretary Military Board. I am Sir, (Memorandum.) The higher a conductor is elevated, the more its efficacy will be increased. Therefore for a powder magazine the conducting rod should be elevated seven feet at the least above the highest point of the building; should be placed standing out one foot from the building, and be made as continuous and direct as possible, branching out at the level of the ground, and carried under ground in a dry brick drain six inches diameter, ten feet long, from thence carried down a hole filled with burnt charcoal, or ashes from the baker’s oven. Copper rods pointed at top with platina are recommended. ead Ee ee —— -_—s 1840.] On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. — 279 ee! As the electric matter from violent storms causes intense heat, it is recommended to have the conducting rods one inch in dia- meter, which is a quarter of an inch more than they are usually made in England. Strong wood brackets made of teak, or any other hard wood, to keep the conductors firm in their places. There should be a conducting rod upon the principle here de- lineated at each end of the building. And as the direction of lightning is often determined by that of the rain, the surface on the side of the building might attract it, it would be prudent therefore to have a conducting rod on each side of the building as well as at the ends. The rods should be united with the best screwed joints, with a top screw of the same metal as the conductor. (No. 2.) From Assistant SurGEeon W. B. O’Suavucunessy, M.D. To Capt. DEeBuDE, Officiating Secretary Military Board. Fort William, December 27th, 1838. S1r,—I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt on the 24th instant of your letter of the 22d, on the subject of the attach- ment of lightning conductors to powder magazines. 2. The question you propose is one of much difficulty. I doubt indeed, whether the existing state of knowledge regarding the reciprocal action of atmospherical and terrestrial electricity, especially during the paroxysms of tropical storms, is as yet suffi- ciently advanced to warrant the expression of more than a very diffident opinion on its several points. 3. Ishall take the liberty of premising some general remarks on lightning conductors, before I take up the special subject of your letter. 4. I am in possession of several facts hitherto unrecorded, which seem to me clearly to show that in ordinary edifices the attachment of lightning conductors, even when properly 280 On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. [No. 99. constructed, is by no means the infallible protection so generally imagined. 5. It is often no doubt easy to explain the occurrence of dis- asters by lightning to buildings thus apparently protected, on the ground of defective construction of the conductors, or of dis- proportion between the number of conductors and the extent of area to be guarded. By such considerations we may explain the accident to Government house on the night of the 30th of March 1838, and bearing these in mind, measures may be adopt- ed which in all probability will preserve such edifices from simi- lar visitations. 6. But it is a matter of greater difficulty to explain such circumstances I am now about to adduce, in illustration of the opinion expressed in paragraph 4. 7- On an evening in May 1837, the house No. 2 in Chowringhee, then occupied by Dr. Goodeve, and next door to the house tenanted by Mr. Trower, was struck by lightning and much damaged. Dr. Goodeve’s house had no conductor, Mr. Trower’s had one at the face adjoining Dr. Goodeve’s, and only distant there- from twenty feet. The conductor is well constructed. 8. On the evening in question, during a violent storm from the North-west, Dr. Goodeve was walking in the verandah (c) when Mr. Trower’s conductor and the corresponding angle of Dr. Goodeve’s house were struck by the same discharge, and the lightning in Dr. Goodeve’s house followed the course of the vertical window bolts represented by the dotted lines in the plan. 9. This case seems to me completely to falsify Biot’s opinion, that within sixty feet interval between conductors no accident can occur—and to shew that occasionally in tropical climates there is such vast disproportion between the quantity or inten- sity of the atmospheric electricity and the conducting capacity of protectors, that the excess of the discharge must pass to adja- cent bodies. 10. In Chowringhee alone, in an area of one square mile, there are over 300 lightning conductors of proper construction, 1840.] On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. 281 yet scarcely a season passes but we hear of accidents within that area, and not unfrequently too in houses actually provided with conductors 11. I attribute these accidents chiefly to the vertical win- dow rods which constitute all over Calcutta, as in Indian houses generally, a multitude of interrupted conductors, the inducing influence of which is sufficient to counteract much of the bene- fit of the well constructed rods. These vertical window rods are on a large scale, precisely identical with the models contriv- ed by instrument makers to shew at the lecture table the dan- gers of ill-contrived and ill-applied conductors. 12. Were I called on to protect an isolated house of two stories, with angular edges and roof, containing articles of me- tallic furniture and other good conductors of electricity—under such circumstances I would attach at one angle a common con- ductor several feet higher than the house, in order to divert the lightning the house and its contents could scarcely fail, under many circumstances of exposure, to attract, and at each cardinal point I would place a rod about ten feet high, connected hori- zontally by thick rods and rivets with the main conductor. A building so protected I would consider to be as safe as it is practicable to render it, according to the present state of our knowledge. 13. But in the case of a powder magazine of the ordinary construction, rounded in outline, of trifling elevation, contain- ing no metallic furniture,* removed from other buildings, and not necessarily in the contiguity of conducting objects, I think its chances of being struck by lightning are very little more than those of an equal area of soil or terrace. 14. We must remember that electric explosions are not chance occurrences,—that they are governed and guided by the influence of “induction,”? the effects of which are now * “Fittings” should have been the expression, but the word must now stand unaltered.---W. B, O’S, 282 On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. [No. 99. comparatively well understood ; that it is only between objects susceptible of rapid changes in their electric relations that the explosion passes, but that the explosion may exceed in quan- tity and in intensity the capabilities of the dischargers we usu- ally adopt. 15. Another reason for objecting to the employment of conductors in the immediate contiguity of powder magazines is, the danger of their inducing what is called the “lateral dis- charge,”’ of the nature of which I will venture to offer a few ex- planatory remarks. 16. Suppose a violent discharge to take place along the conductor a to the ground; during the passage of the electri- city an opposite electric state is induced in contiguous ob- jects, and a spark may pass in the interval between a@ and 4, and all the articles contained within having their electric state transitorily disturbed, will give sparks at the same moment ;— if animate, will experience shocks or other effects in proportion to the violence of the primary discharge. Thus the inmates of Dr. Goodeve’s house suffered a shock like the discharge of the Leyden bottle, at the instant the accident took place, des- cribed at paragraph 8. 17. Were any peculiarly in- flammable matter existing in the interval a, 6, or in the interstices vA c, d, the passage of aspark would =“ | cause its inflammation, especially fete if rain were falling at the same time. The explosion of gunpowder by small electric sparks is indeed never certain, but when water or moist substances forms part of the electric circuit. 18. I will not enter on any detailed consideration of the dangers connected with what is called the “seturn discharge,” in which the electricity is believed to emanate from terrestrial objects, and proceed to the atmosphere. Precise facts are want- ing to enable us to form exact opinions on this subject. “ \ i. 1840.] On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. 283 19. With respect to the materials and dimensions of conduc- ting bars, I think it is altogether unnecessary either to construct them of copper, or to make them one inch in diameter.* Iron can be preserved bright for an indefinite period by attaching to it small pieces of zinc, on the principle of the galvanic preservation of copper. If its point be gilt or platinized, the rod will on the con- trary corrode much more rapidly than if entirely unprotected. As to size, I have known very many instances of violent dis- charges of lightning through window rods, through ill-con- structed conductors, over picture frames, railings, through the metallic head of a spear with a wooden shaft, &c. &c. and in no case was complete fusion, or an approach to it, effected, except at the ends where the discharge entered, and from whence it proceeded. The drawing a shews the extremities of one of the window rods from Dr. Goodeve’s house, and 6 of the spear of the Britannia from Government House, Calcutta. 2). As’ for ‘the silent passage of at- mospheric electrici- ty causing the heat- is ee ee ing of conductors, 1 scarcely think it possible—certainly no instance of it has been recorded, and even were it to occur, it could not occasion any mischief. 21. To apply the preceding facts to the question before me, I think it inexpedient to attach ordinary conductors, or such as those described in your letter, to powder magazines. i. Because, being of slight elevation, of rounded surface, and of non-conducting materials, these buildings are scarcely more exposed to lightning than an equal area of ordinary ground. ii. Because a discharge may occur foo great for the capacity of a single conductor, in which case the electricity will divide itself to all adjacent objects. iii. Because though the discharge may pass to the ground, the lateral electric disturbance may occasion an explosion within the magazine. * That is where several conductors are employed as subsequently proposed.---W. B. O'S, 20 —— 284 On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. [No. 99. 22. But as it may be deemed inexpedient to commit a ma- gazine even to the chances of an equal area of land surface, I think a system of conductors on the following plan would pre- vent all danger of explosion by direct, or lateral, or even return discharge. I would erect an iron rod, half an inch in diameter, protect- ed by zinc, at every twenty paces, in a circle drawn round the building, and at least twenty feet* distant from it. These rods should be twenty feet higher than the building, be supported by frames of wood or by pillars inserted at their bases, as deep as the water level (so easily found in Bengal), and at the surface of the ground they should be connected by ho- rizontal rods secured by riveting. During storms the sen-. tinels on duty should withdraw beyond this line, sheath their bayonets, and pile their arms. I cannot conceive the possibility of an explosion caused by direct, lateral, or return discharge, taking place within this metallic circle. By such arrangements it is that the electrician discharges through a wire bird cage, without injury to its tenant, batteries sufficiently powerful to destroy a horse, and that he grasps the discharging rod in his naked hand while it is part of a circuit sufficient to cause his instantaneous death. I have the honor to be, Sir, Your obedient servant, Medical College, Calcutta, W. B. OSSHAUGHNESSY, 27th Dec. 1838. Assistant Surgeon. (No. 3.) To W. B. O’SHavcunessy, Esa. M. D. Medical College. Ordnance Department. Sir,—I am directed by the Military Board to acknowledge the receipt of your letter of the 31st ultimo, on the subject of Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines; and to express the sense which the Board entertains of the care and attention with which the subject has been discussed. * This by an error of the copyist was made paces in the MS. report.--- W. B, O'S. 1840.| On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. 285 2. As in many instances it would, from the proximity of other buildings, be impracticable to establish a chain of conductors at a distance of twenty paces from a magazine, the Board would be glad to learn whether, in your opinion, a series of conductors at twenty paces distant from each other, but as near the build- ing as ordinary conductors are commonly placed, and secured by wooden brackets, as shewn on the sketch forwarded by the Court of Directors, would add materially to the security of a magazine. Fort William, I am, Sir, Military Board Office, 16th Dilley, tava Your obedient servant, W. DesuDs, Officiating Secretary Military Board. (No. 4.) To Caprain DEBUDE, Officiating Secretary Military Board. Sir,—In reply to your letter of the 16th instant I have the honor to state, that under such circumstances as you describe, I would not recommend lightning conductors to be attached to the buildings adjacent to magazines even in the numbers before mentioned, as I feel convinced that placing one or more conduc- tors in the immediate contiguity of the building increases all the dangers attendant on the Jateral discharge. Indeed I would consider a magazine safer if unprovided with conductors al- together, than with any number placed as you allude to. I believe we may certainly obviate all danger from direct discharge by a multiplicity of connected conductors. I admit too that the lateral discharge is not likely to occasion more than a minute spark, such as would not harm a living animal, or injure an edifice, but this spark, however insignificant, can ignite gunpowder, and thus lead to as serious mischief as the direct flash itself. I have the honor to be, Sir, Your most obedient servant, W. B. O'SHAUGHNESSY. January 20th, 1839. 286 On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. [{No. 99. (No. 5.) Mr. FarapAy’s LETTER TO Mr. SECRETARY MELVILL ON THE PRECEDING PAPERS. Royal Institution, 5th September, 1839. S1r,—I have the honor to acknowledge your letter and the papers, and having read the latter, beg leave to state that my opinion is in favor of lightning conductors. It is no doubt true that low rounded buildings, such as I understand the powder magazines in the Kast Indies to be, are but very little liable to be struck by lightning, but then if they are struck, the destruc- tion and injury may be very great. It is also, I think, very probable that a lightning conductor may, under certain circum- stances, cause an electric discharge to take place where none would have occurred no conductor being present, though, on the other hand, there is some evidence to show that conductors cause a diminution in the number of electric discharges to the earth at a given place. It is also very certain that a badly erected conductor is worse than none, and may cause great injury. But notwithstanding these considerations, I have the strongest con- viction in my mind that conductors well applied are perfect defenders of buildings from harm by lightning. Dr. O’Shaugh- nessy’s papers are very valuable, and serve to confirm my pre- vious impressions ; but it would be impossible for me to go over the whole of the opinions and evidence sent me, without at the same time going into a far greater mass dispersed here and there. I would rather refer you at once to M. Arago’s popular view of the subject in the Annuaire for 1838, pp. 221, 549, &c. with which I, in almost every point, agree. I would certainly recommend copper conductors instead of iron, for the former metal conducts electricity almost seven times better than the latter. When struck, it not only conducts the shock much better, but in the pre-determination of the stroke it determines more of the electricity to itself than otherwise would fall upon it, and therefore tends in any case of a divided shock to leave less to fall elsewhere in its neighbourhood. I should prefer them pointed. I should not put them far from the building at their upper extremity, or in their course down- 1840.] On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. 287 wards, but the part that is under ground I should turn from the -building in its course through the earth, and take especial care, by plates of copper, to make its contact with the moist earth extensive and good. Conductors should be of a certain height in relation to the roof or summit of the building to be defended ; a lightning rod rising ten feet above any part of the roof or chimneys of a house, might defend that house perfectly if close to it, but not if ten feet from it; a rod rising fifteen feet above the highest parts of the roof would be more sure than one of ten feet. A rod projecting ten feet which would protect a building of a certain horizontal extent might protect a building ten feet wide, &c. A lightning rod has been considered as able to protect objects perfectly when they are not more than twice the distance Srom it of its height above them: but for this to hold true, these objects should not be themselves parts of large masses of metal, approaching by their position or connexion to the character of bad lightning conductors. ‘Ihave no fear of lateral discharge from a well arranged con- ductor. As far as I understand lateral discharge, it is always a discharge from the conductor itself; it might be very serious from a badly arranged conductor (and in fact makes them worse than nothing) but with a good lightning rod it can be but small, and then not to badly conducting matter, as wood or stone, but only to neighbouring masses of good conducting matter, as the metals, which either ought not to be there, or if they are. necessarily present, ought to be in metallic communication with the lightning conductor itself. I am not aware that lateral dis- charge can take place within a building when a lightning con- ductor outside is struck, except there be porticns of metal, as bell wires, or bolts, &c. which may form an interrupted conducting train from the conductor to the interior.* It is true that cases which come under the denomination of returning stroke, might perhaps produce a spark in the interior of a building, but the phenomena of a returning stroke cannot occur at the place where the lightning strikes a conductor. * Such as the copper linings of powder barrels in a magazine---W. B. O’S. 288 On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. (No. 99. In my opinion, a good conductor well connected with the earth cannot do harm to a building under its protection, i. e. though it may induce a discharge on the building; and the discharge in itself cannot give rise to any secondary effects which are likely to place the building in more danger than it would have been subject to, had the conductor not been there. I am, Sir, . Your obedient humble servant, To JAMES C. Meuviu, Ese. —_ (Sigd.) Wm. Farapay. &c. &c. &c. (No. 6.) LETTER FROM PROFESSOR DANIELL TO Mr. MELVILL. King’s College, London, August 24, 1839. My DEAR Sir,—I have carefully perused and considered the papers which you have done me the honor to transmit to me, relating to the subject of lightning conductors in the East Indies, and now beg to submit for the consideration of the Chairman of the Court of Directors, according to your request, the follow- ing remarks upon them. 2. It is with the greatest surprise, I have learnt that the question of the efficacy of lightning conductors, which has been considered by all the leading philosophers in Europe and Ame- — rica as settled by the uniform experience of nearly one hun- dred years, is still thought to be undetermined by some of the scientific men in the Honorable Company’s Service; and that the Governor General and Council, under the influence of their opinion, have come to the conclusion, that in “ attempting to “* protect Powder Magazines by their means more danger ‘than advantage is likely to result from the measure.” Should this conclusion be unfounded, as I believe all experience will prove it to be, it must be of the utmost consequence, that it should be corrected, especially in a country peculiarly liable to the paroxysms of tropical storms. That Powder Magazines unprovided with conductors are liable to be fired by lightning, is proved by the blowing up of the Magazine 1840.] On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. 289 at Dum-Dum,* which gave rise to the correspondence, where- as there is no instance upon record of a magazine properly provided with them, suffering injury from the same cause. 3. In the year 1823 instructions for the erection of light- ning conductors were drawn up, at the instance of the Minister of the Interior of France, by a commission of the Académie Royale des Sciences, composed of MM. Poisson, Lefevre, Ginian, Gerard, Dulong, Furet, and Gay Lussac, and adopted by the Académie. The Report is published in the 26th vol. of the Annales de Chimie et de Physique. 4. So lately as the year 1837, the facts relating to thunder and lightning again underwent investigation by M. Arago, who has published in the Annuaire par le Bureau des Longitudes for 1838 a very detailed scientific notice “ Sur le Tonnerre.”’ + 5. These two reports have really exhausted the subject, and ought to be sufficient, in my opinion, to convince the most pre- judiced; first, of the impossibility of any extra danger arising from lightning conductors of proper construction ; and, secondly, of the protection which they are competent to afford. 6. I have lately had the honor of being appointed by the Go- vernment upon a Committee to inquire into the efficacy, and best form of lightning conductors for Her Majesty’s Navy, and we have just handed in our report to the Admiralty, in which having collected a great body of evidence upon the subject, and having availed ourselves of the opinions of Doctor Faraday and Profes- sor Wheatstone, we have unanimously recommended the general adoption of Harris’s conductors on board Her Majesty’s ships. The report has been ordered to be printed for the use of Parlia- ment, and I will take the liberty of transmitting you a copy ‘as soon as it is complete. In the mean time, I will endeavour to reply to some of the observations which Professor O’Shaugh- nessy has made in his report, which is included in the papers referred to me, and upon which, in conjunction with some pri- * The building destroyed at Dum-Dum was not a magazine, see the final report, No. 7.---W. B. O'S. + Arago’s admirable paper had not reached India when I was referred to on this subject.---W. B, O’S. 290 On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. [No. 99. vate observations of Mr. (James) Prinsep, which do not appear, the Governor General’s opinion seems to have been formed. 7. First, I infer from the general tendency of the observations of these gentlemen, that they entertain the notion that lightning conductors have the power of attracting a discharge of lightning to places where without them it would not occur. 8. Nothing can be more unfounded than this supposition. The intense action which takes place between an electric cloud, of the extent perhaps of many thousands of acres, and an equal area of the earth’s surface, is much too extensive to be materially diverted by the mere point which can be directed upon the lat- ter; and which, as compared with the extent and distance of the charged clouds, must be quite inconsiderable. The path of the discharge which takes place, in the form of lightning is deter- mined by what may be the line of least resistance in the whole distance between the two great electrical surfaces, of which the conductor can form but a minute, fractional part. x 9. Over this fractional part, however, we may have control sufficient for the protection required. It has been well and ac- curately observed, ‘‘ that lightning conductors can no more be said to attract the matter of lightning, than a water course can be said to attract the water which necessarily flows through it at the time of heavy rain.” It would be absurd to say that a hollow water-pipe open at its upper end, and placed perpendicularly, at- tracts or invites rain from the clouds, or that in providing our houses with such pipes, we incur a greater risk of being inundated, because they are calculated to discharge freely all the rain which passes into them. No less absurd is it to say that a metallic rod invites lightning, and may be productive of damage, because it is calculated to transmit the electricity which falls on its point.* 10. Secondly, Dr. O’Shaughnessy refers to danger which is likely to occur from the erection of conductors in the contiguity of powder magazines from what is called ° lateral discharge.” * A pointed conductor will indeed draw off silently and safely a consi- derable portion of electricity from a charged cloud, but it.can possess no power of determining a disruptive and destructive discharge at a point where it would not otherwise occur.---Mr. Daniell’s note. 1840.| On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. 291 11. There can be no doubt, that a conductor in the moment of a discharge of electricity passing through it, influences in a degree, all good conducting substances in its immediate vicinity by induction; but no discharge will take place from it to any neighbouring body, unless it be insufficient itself to conduct the whole of the discharge; or unless the body in its vicinity be a better conductor than itself. A lateral discharge, in fact, is only a division of a portion of the principal discharge, from an insufficient conductor to another, which can relieve it. Now the very purpose of a lightning rod is to provide a suffi- cient conductor for the electric fluid which may fall upon it, and which will never pass from it, if properly constructed, to any building in its immediate vicinity, from the construc- tion of which all metallic substances are, of course, carefully excluded. 12. Thirdly, Dr. O’Shaughnessy refers to Dr. Goodeve’s house having been struck by lightning, within twenty feet of a well constructed conductor upon the house of Mr. Trower, which was struck at the same moment, as falsifying the opinion that within sixty feet interval between conductors no accident can occur; but in another part of his report he attributes this acci- dent, doubtless very correctly, to the vertical window bolts, which he has marked upon his plan, and which constitute a line of interrupted conductors to the ground. There can be no question that the discharge was diverted in this instance ; but it does not appear that any damage was done to either house ; and if damage did occur to the unprotected house, it would have been doubtless greatly increased by the absence of the conduc- tor upon Mr. Trower’s house. It would of course be an act of the greatest. folly and igno- rance to place a similar line of bolts, or any other metallic fasten- ing upon a powder magazine. 13. ‘The case by no means proves, as Dr. O’Shaughnessy seems to think, ‘* that occasionally, in tropical climates, there is such a vast disproportion between the intensity and quantity of the atmospheric electricity, and the conducting capacity of protec- fors, that the excess of the discharge must pass to adjacent 2P 292 On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. (No. 99. bodies” unless those adjacent bodies are also of a metallic nature, and themselves good conductors.* 14. Dr. O’Shaughnessy states that “in Chowringhee alone, in an area of one square mile, there are over 300 lightning con- ductors of proper construction, yet scarcely a season passes, but we hear of accidents within that area, and not unfrequently, too, in houses actually provided with conductors themselves.” interesting, and it would greatly benefit science if authentic facts concerning it were collected, and published. It appears that Dr. O’Shaughnessy only mentions the facts upon hearsay, and such evidence is not of weight enough to counterbalance the direct testimony of competent witnesses, which abound on the other side of the question. I have no doubt that upon proper inquiry, Dr. O’Shaughnessy would find that the accidents which are said to have occurred in houses actually provided with con- ductors, have arisen from defective construction. 16. It is not supposed that a large number of conductors will avert electrical discharges from a district, though, if properly constructed, they will open safe communication for their passage to the earth. 17. Dr. O’Shaughnessy thinks, that “it is altogether unne- cessary either to construct lightning conductors of copper, or to make them one inch in diameter,’ but in this opinion I have again the misfortune to differ from that gentleman. The best authorities have recommended a rod of an inch in diameter as the standard size, experience having proved that such a rod has never yet been melted by an atmospheric discharge. It is cer- tainly possible that a rod of less substance might be sufficient to conduct away a flash of lightning, but it is impossible to ascer- tain the minimum which would suffice, without incurring the | 15. The electrical history of such a district must be extremely * I must refer the reader to the succeeding paper, for proof of the error into which Mr. Daniell has here fallen.---W. B. O’S. 1840.] On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. 293 risk of failure ; and it is a point of very little importance, pro- vided absolute protection be assured.* Moreover a rod of a less diameter would scarcely have suffi- cient strength to resist the mechanical forces which might be opposed to it. 18. The rod should be of copper, first, because the conducting power of that metal is very much superior to that of iron, being in the proportion of 1000 to 158. And, secondly, it is little liable to oxidation and corrosion. I do not think that the application of zinc to iron rods, in the way proposed by Dr. O’Shaughnessy, would be, by any means, efficient in keeping them bright, at the same time I would rather erect iron conductors, than run the risk of a total want of protection. 19. Ihave no objection to make the disposition of the con- ductors proposed by Dr. O’Shaughnessy, but I see no reason for placing them at so great a distance as twenty paces from the magazine. The most material points to be attended to, are their perfect metallic continuity, and their communication with the water of the subsoil. The instructions for the erection of light- ning conductors are so minutely detailed in the two reports to which I have already referred, that I think it unnecessary to add any thing more at present, but it will give me the greatest pleasure to afford any further explanations in my power that may be required. I cannot conclude, without again expressing my strong con- viction of the necessity of procuring a revision of the opinion of the Governor in Council upon the subject in question with as little delay as possible. 1 have the honor to be, &c. (Signed) J. F. DaNnrE.t. To Puitie MELvILu, Esa. &e. &e. &e. * I did not allude to asingle conductor, but to a set of several combined. ---W. B. O'S. 294 On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. {No. 99. (No. 7.) Seconp Report FROM Dr. O’SHAUGHNESSY TO THE MiIxI- TARY BOARD. To Captain DEBUDE, Secretary to the Miltary Board. Srr,—In compliance with your request that I should draw - up a further statement of my opinions regarding the attach- ment of conductors to powder magazines, I have the honor to submit the subjoined observations to the consideration of the Military Board. 2. Ivregret much, that it is impracticable to accord to me the full measure of time desirable for the collection and accurate examination of the numerous facts bearing on the question now before us, to which I have obtained a clue, and many of which corroborate powerfully the views I entertain. I regret this the more, as I have the misfortune to differ in a slight degree with the opinions Mr. Faraday has given, while those which Mr. Daniell somewhat dictatorially professes, are widely at variance with mine. oO 3. I trust I may be pardoned by the Military Board for here publicly placing on record a tribute of my deep respect for Mr. Faraday’s labors in electrical science. This depart- ment of physics he has made peculiarly his own. My pre- sumption would be measureless were I to depart from the utmost modesty and hesitation, when I venture to persevere in an opinion, from which he ever so slightly dissents. I seek however for no more candid a judge than this illustrious philo- sopher, and on once more referring the subject to his consi- deration, I will bow to his contrary decision, with the full con- viction that I had acted upon erroneous views. 4. Mr. Daniell’s facts and arguments will be treated ad valo- rem in the subsequent observations. I have only to observe, that in the further discussion of this question, it would be well if he would condescend to use a more courteous tone, and to 1840.| On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. 295 recollect that his opinions, as well as mine, have to bear the scrutiny of individuals who are not very likely to be influenced by the mere reputation of any of the parties concerned. 5. The question before the Board, is this exclusively, “ Are we to attach lightning rods to powder magazines : and if so, how are we to place them, so as to ensure the maximum of safety from every accident ?” To this question and its bearings, we must limit this discussion. It is altogether a different matter from that with which Mr. Daniell has mixed it up, namely, the attaching of conductors to private dwellings, or ordinary buildings. All the circumstances differ so widely, that many of the most important of the facts and arguments which bear on one, are altogether inapplicable to the other. 6. The necessity for attaching lightning rods to powder magazines in tropical regions, visited by frequent and violent thunder storms, might at first sight appear so obvious, as to need no further consideration. The document (A) how- ever shews, that of all the magazines in the territories of the | Honorable East India Company, during a period of forty years, only one has been struck by lightning, namely that at Dum- Dum, on the Ist of June 1836. It will be seen, as we proceed, that the term ‘‘ magazine” was scarcely applicable to the build- ing then destroyed. 7. I stated in my first report on this subject, that I consi- dered a powder magazine when properly constructed, arched and rounded in its outlines, of low elevation, and free from metallic masses in its walls and roof, to be as little exposed to accident as an equal area of soil or terrace, the chances of which being struck by lightning are so infinitely small, as scarcely to deserve serious consideration. The Dum-Dum explosion took place in a common building of square form, formerly a godown. It was not a magazine, but a mere store- room for the powder used for the laboratory. It stood in the corner of a yard crowded with guns, gun carriages, heavy metal tools, shells, and other powerful conductors of electricity. It 296 On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. [No. 99. was exactly what it ought not to have been, and the explosion which occurred, by no means invalidates the position, that the well constructed magazine has but an infinitely small chance of being struck by lightning. 8. The questions now arise—First, Would even this minute contingency be obviated thoroughly by a lightning conductor being attached to the magazine, on the method advised by the Honorable the Court of Directors? Secondly, Can the conductor itself by possibility become a source of collateral danger ? 9. I will take up each of these questions in detail. I grant in the first place, as the foundation of the argument, that metallic conductors have the power, when properly placed, of SILENTLY drawing off considerable accumulations of electricity from the clouds; and, secondly, of guiding away to the earth considerable direct explosive discharges or flashes of lightning, without permitting the electric matter, whatever it be, to im- pinge directly on any adjacent bodies. 10. The extent to which the protecting influence of a con- ductor extends laterally, has long been a subject of attention and discussion. Leroy, in 1783, asserted that a rod four to five metres high, above the roof of an ordinary building, de- fended a circle of sixteen metres radius, or more than three times the distance of its own elevation above the roof. 11. The Academy of Sciences in 1823, in a report to the Minister of War, adopted the opinion of M. Charles, that the circle protected was of a radius double the total elevation of the conductor above the roof. ‘This opinion seems to have been generally adopted, but must be modified in consideration of the facts which M. Arago has collected, and some which have come under my own observation. 12. If masses of metal of any kind enter into the construc- tion of a building, the protecting influence does not extend to the distance above mentioned. ‘The powder magazine of Pur- fleet, provided with a conductor erected by Franklin and Cavendish, was struck by lightning twenty-four feet from the 1840.] On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. 297 nearest part of the conductor, which was twenty-six feet above the roof—the distance being less than the simple height. The parts struck contained a metallic cramp. 13. Dr. Winthorp, of New Cambridge, reports, that a tree was struck by lightning, when but fifty feet from a conductor attached to the steeple of a church, which may reasonably be supposed to have been at least fifty feet higher than the tree.* | 14. All that we are entitled to infer from the facts before us, is—that in order to give safety from direct and ordinary discharges, we must erect so many conductors, that no point of the roof shall be further from the conductor than twice the length of the height of the conductor above the level of the roofs; and this applies only to flashes from clouds in a calm atmosphere, and above the building. ‘The area of protection is unquestionably much contracted, under the circumstances, so common in India, of a thunder cloud being blown with hurricane velocity across a plain, before a furious squall. Nothing but a line or chain of conductors connected together by horizontal metal bars, and surrounding a building, can possibly protect it from discharge under these paroxysmal storms. This is the opinion I offered in my first report, dated the 27th December 1838, and I have now but to repeat, that one or even two conductors are not an adequate protection; and to ensure safety, several must be erected. The subsequent considerations will probably bear me out in repeating, that a properly built maga- zine, with but one, or any inadequate number of conductors, is in greater danger of explosion, than if it had none; and that with ever so many conductors, these should be placed at a con- siderable distance from its walls. 15. 1 proceed now in the attempt to sustain my opinion, that ‘“A magazine with but one, or any inadequate number of conductors, is in greater danger than if it had none.” * For details regarding the case, see Annuaire for 1838. ~- 298 On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. (No. 99. 16. The cause of a lightning discharge selecting the con- ductor is to be traced in the law of electrical induction, which I hope to be pardoned for briefly exposing. | A cloud highly charged with electricity of either kind (let us say, posttive) approaches the earth, and by the approxi- mation causes the natural electricities of the earth to sepa- rate, and that of the negative kind to accumulate at the sur- face opposite to the cloud. The intervening particles of air are thrown into a polar state. The cloud is attracted by the earth, the electricity of which becomes most accumulated on the buildings and objects on its surface, in proportion to their degree of conducting power. At length the resistance to the rushing together of the two opposite electricities is overcome, and a discharge by explosion takes place, the best conductor on the earth receiving all the electric discharge it is capable of conducting in the time the discharge occupies. Of all such bodies a pointed metallic rod is the most likely to receive a discharge, and will lead off the greatest quantity thereof to the earth. 17. Mr. Daniell has indeed stated, that a pointed bar must cause a silent discharge without explosion.* I am unable to comprehend how Mr. Daniell could have fallen into such a mis- conception. ‘The whole history of lightning accidents, teems with instances of well constructed pointed rods having been struck, and the points melted. Look at the accident to Mr. Trower’s house for example.~ The conductor is faultless in its construction, and the flash was seen to strike it by Dr. Goodeve. * « 4 pointed conductor will indeed draw off silently and safely, a con- siderable portion of electricity from a charged cloud, but it can possess no power of determining a disruptive, and destructive discharge, at a point where it would not otherwise occur.” Mr. Daniell’s paper. See para. 9. + Described in my first report.---W. B. O'S. 1840.| On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. 299 But let Mr. Daniell try this simple experiment. Let a bea Ley- den jar, 6 a rod and ball,connected with the inner coating, ¢ c a rod and ball connect- 6 b ed with the outer coating, 0 represents the excited cloud, ¢ e the excited surface of the earth. To the ball of c apply one c branch of a pointed discharging rod, and then RAPIDLY approach the other point to the ball 4. A hiss is heard for an instant and a loud explosion then ensues. If the point had been brought very slowly towards the ball 5, there would have been nothing more than a silent, or at most a hissing, dis- charge. Mr. Daniell will perhaps admit that it is the same thing, that the earth carrying the conductor should approach to the cloud, or the cloud approach to the earth; and he will see in this experiment that it is simply the degree of velocity of the approach that governs the nature of the discharge. The electric cloud in a calm atmosphere will give off a constant and quiet stream to the rod—but let the cloud be driven onwards before the wind, or drawn within the vortex of mechanical electrical attraction, and then EXPLOSION will inevitably ensue. 18. So much for the cause and nature of the direct lightning flash to a single pointed conductor. Let me beg the Board to honour me with their attention to this distinction, as it is essential that no misconception should arise. 19. An explosion then, it must be admitted, may occur to a pointed conductor. I have next to shew that this explosion, or the flash, or the amount of the electricity passing (which I use as convertible terms) may be so much greater in quantity than the single conductor can convey in the téme of the dis- charge, that a considerable part, nay, the whole of the excess, must pass to the adjacent objects. To make my meaning clearer ;—Let us suppose the cloud to be charged with 1000 parts of active electric matter—let us asswme the conducting 2@ | 1 ee. a ee 300 On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. [No. 99. power of a lightning rod to be equal to 250 zn a unit of time; I believe that the 750 parts in excess, will zn the same unit or instant, pass off in every direction to surrounding objects, strik- ing those which offer it the best conducting path. 20. In proof of this assertion, I refer to the accident to Dr. Goodeve’s house, which I have already reported. Dr. Goodeve’s - house is twenty feet from Mr. Trower’s. Dr. Goodeve while walking in his verandah saw the lightning strike Mr. Trower’s conductor, and at the same moment strike his own house ; taking, as might be anticipated, the window bolts, and other metallic bars in its course. 21. Let me cite another and a most important fact from M. Arago’s rich collection. The house of Mr. Raven in Carolina was provided with a conductor formed of an iron bar, fixed in the roof—a brass wire outside the wall thence led to another metal bar planted in the earth. The conductor was struck by lightning, the wire was melted as far as the ground floor—the lightning then pierced the masonry of the wall at a right angle, exactly where a gun was standing against the wall in the kitchen; the barrel was struck, but uninjured, the stock broken, and thence the electric matter passed to the ground. 22, Here we have clearly lateral deviation from a conduc- tor, and the excess passing to the nearest conducting object. The wire was disproportionately small for the quantity of the dis- charge; it was fused, and the excess passed to the adjacent conductor. It will be objected, that this would not have hap- pened, had the lightning rod, or wire, been of the ordinary dimensions, that the conductor could not have been fused, and the lightning could not have left it. In reply, I point once more to Dr. Goodeve’s house. Mr. Trower’s conductor was not melted, and yet Dr. Goodeve’s house was simultaneously struck. 23. Look to another fact, cited by Arago. A French vessel — of war, La Junon, was running before a brisk gale. A copper conductor of twisted wires led from the main-mast head to ee 1840.] On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. 301 windward, and was secured by copper strips to the ship’s side. A flash strikes the top, and a flash is seen by all on board, at the same instant, to leave the conductor about on a level with the cap of the main-mast, and to dart into the water over the lee bulwarks. This is a clear instance of an excess of electri- city leaving a conductor through which it cannot force an instantaneous passage. All that the conductor could convey was borne off to windward—the rest opened to itself another and less difficult route. 24. It might here be the most appropriate place to discuss the question, What is the greatest mass of metal a flash of lightning can fuse ?—When we remember that the surface of a cylinder increases by a simple multiple of the diameter, while the mass increases as the cube—that every fact shews it to be the surface which the electricity pursues,* while its calorific effect must be in the inverse proportion to the mass—it will prebably seem that the surface may be too small to convey a given quantity of electricity, although this be insufficient to melt or even to heat the whole mass of the metal. 23. Mr. Daniell, in reference to the efficacy of single con- ductors, enters on the much disputed question, as to whether these attract lightning, or are merely passive conductors for its conveyance. He takes the latter view, declares the former to be absurd,+ and compares the conductor to a water- * Mr. Harris, a high authority on electricity, makes these remarks re- specting the surface action of conductors :--- “The conducting power of a metallic rod has but little relation to its solid contents, but is principally dependent on its surface, from which cause the mere gilding of a ball of wood is found to conduct a proportionate electrical discharge with the same facility as if the ball was a solid mass of metal, hence a less quantity of metal formed into a hollow tube would -be as a conductor, even more effectual than a solid rod of the same diameter, because its superficies would be increased!” Harris on Electrical Conductors, p- 3l. t+ The Board are referred to the marginal note at para. 17, for Mr. Daniell’s own admission, that pointed conductors “ draw off” a considerable portion of electricity, &c. &c. Drawing off and “ attracting” are very like synonymous terms.---W, B. O'S. ES er vos 302 On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. [No. 99. course, a favorite illustration of his as it occurs in more than one part of his published writings. Practically, it is but of little consequence whether the conductor be active or passive; but of all the substances excited at the moment—en- gaged in the vast induction we have described—of the cloud, the air, the earth, and the things on its surface—the lightning rod is that in which the induction is the most powerful, and towards which the explosion is therefore the most likely to occur. Call it passive, if Mr. Daniell so pleases, but the electric fluid is more active in it than any where else. The discharge takes place ;—the first instalment, or the head of the column rushing to the point of the conductor, heats the air through which it passes—rarifies it, and diminishes the resistance to the outpouring of the rest of the electric accumulation. The excess, unable zn a unit of time to pass over the bar, rushes to sur- rounding objects.* Did it occur to Mr. Daniell that no pru- dent man builds his house by preference on the bank of a mountain water-course ? The water-course is doubtless passive, and it will quietly and silently carry off the stream of an ordinary * The Board are requested to consider Mr. Faraday’s opinion on this point :--- “The fact however is, that disruptive discharge is favorable to itself. It is at the outset a case of tottering equilibrium, and if time be an element in the discharge, in however minute a proportion, then the commencement of the act at any point favors its continuance and IncREASE, and portions of power will be discharged by a course which otherwise they would not have taken. “The mere heating and expansion of the air itself by the first portion of elec- tricity which passes, must have a great influence in producing this result. - “‘ As to the result itself, we see its effect in every electric spark, for it is not the whole quantity which passes that determines the discharge, but merely that small portion of force which brings the deciding molecule up to its maximum tension ; then when its forces are subverted, and discharge begins, all the rest passes by the same course from the influence of the favor- ing circumstances just referred to, and whether it be the electricity on a square inch or a thousand square inches of charged class, the discharge is complete. Hereafter we shall find the influences of this effect in the for- mation of brushes, and it is not impossible that we may trace it producing the jagged spark, and forked lightning.” Furaday’s Experimental Researches, p. 451. para. 14, 17---20. 1840.| On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. 303 shower; but the rains may sometimes fall in excess, the stream swell to a torrent. As the waters require a given time for the efflux of a certain quantity, the excess inundates the bank, and the house is overwhelmed. The parallel seems to me to be complete, although Mr. Daniell’s ingenuity may probably succeed in placing the question in a different, and less intelli- gible light. 26. With very great respect for Mr. Daniell’s acquirements, I cannot help wishing he had the opportunity of increasing his practical knowledge, by observing a tropical storm. Had he seen the whole horizon one dense mass of electric clouds—had he heard crash after crash, a hundred times repeated, like the broadside of a line-of-battle ship—had he seen the lightning strike (as I have) three times within a few seconds, and not a hundred feet from my house—had he been in a storm in which thirty-one persons perished,—he would very probably partici- pate in my idea, that electrical accumulation very commonly surpasses the conveying power of ordinary conductors; and re- membering that ‘ when discharge begins, all the rest passes by the same course” (see Faraday’s note, p. 302)—the conse- quence might be as apparent to his mind as to mine, that the excess must pass to the most adjacent objects, selecting among these the best conducting materials. 27. ‘These facts appear to me sufficient to warrant my opinion, that there is more danger in giving one conductor to a magazine than in leaving it unprovided altogether. It appears to me, further, as I have already stated, that even from any number of conductors there is another source of danger in what I term the /ateral discharge, unless the conductors be placed at a considerable distance from the magazine. 28. As much controversy has arisen regarding this lateral discharge, I wish to explain clearly the meaning I attach to the term. If this be patiently considered, I think it will be found that it is more about the fitness of words, than the nature of the facts, that the difference of opinion exists. 304 On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. [No. 99. 29, I select an experiment with the Leyden bottle to exem- plify my statement. Let a, be a ball and wire connected with the inner coating, 6 6 with the outer a coating of a charged bottle—let c be a metallic ball placed near, but not touching the rod b; when the discharge is made by bringing a and 6 into contact, by means of the moveable rod d, as the electricity passes through the rod 6 a spark takes place between it and the ball c, although the ball ¢ is out of the direct circuit. 30. This spark all electricians have seen; its existence as universally admitted. 'The ball ¢ may be connected with the ground, or with a long wire, and the spark will still pass. If the ball be connected with a wire, and the opposite end of the wire with the apparatus called ‘ Volta’s cannon,” charged with inflammable air, at the Instant of connecting the outer and inner coatings or discharging the jar, the cannon is exploded also. -Gunpowder, spirits, and other inflammable matters may be fired by this spark, although it is manifestly far out of the course of the MAIN discharge. 31. There have been ‘several attempts to explain the oc- currence of this spark. The older electricians, and Henry of New York, regard it as the effect of induction in the bodies adjacent to the main conductor ; that it is not a direct emana- tion of electricity from the conductor to the lateral objects. Mr. Daniell says it is only the Excrss from an insufficient con- ductor which passes to the adjacent object. ‘This idea any one possessed of a Leyden jar and a few pieces of wire may set aside by a simple experiment, when he will find the success of each attempt at obtaining the lateral spark increased by increasing the mass of the prime conductor. Mr. Faraday how- ever supposes this extra spark to be a direct expansion of the electricity—that with a good lightning rod it can be but small, , \© ef eo eee Bic 5. ge aes 1840.| On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. 305 and then not to badly conducting matter, as wood or stone, but only to neighbouring masses of good conducting matter, as the metals, which either ought not to be there, or if there, be in metallic connexion with the conductor. It is on this point that an apparent difference exists between Mr. Faraday’s opinions and mine. 32. It is however always easy to obtain this spark to the knuckle, and to many other imperfect conductors. Further, the spark now alluded to, whatever be its cause or nature, may be ex- pected to increase in power in direct proportion to the quantity of electricity in the original flash. If with a quart Leyden jar we can procure, as I have repeatedly done, a secondary or lateral spark half an inch long, capable of inflaming gases and gun- powder, I think I am not straining the inference too far, when I believe that the discharge of 10,000 acres of excited cloud may cause a secondary spark or flash capable of passing through the wall of a magazine and exploding its contents. Mr. Harris has indeed recently asserted that increasing the primary spark does not increase the secondary one; but I must state, with every respect to this gentleman, that I have repeatedly exhibited to my classes, long before his paper was published, the experi- ment described at para. 30—and that I have often shewn, that while success is uncertain with a small jar, it is infallible with a large one. I had not the means of measuring the spark, but its increase was plainly visible, and palpable, as we increased the battery and its charge. The magazine, moreover, contains powder barrels lined with copper, and even though no flash or spark pass through the wall, the barrels themselves may give sparks to each other under the influence of the electricity passing outside. Mr. Faraday has shewn in one of the most perfect of all his matchless researches, that without the direct conveyance of electricity, the wadls of an apartment in which a common electrifying machine is worked, are in a state of active electrical excitement. 33. Mr. Harris, who is doubtless a highly accomplished elec- 306 On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. [No. 99. trician, has recently published some views regarding this spark, which require a cursory notice. Mr. Harris, when ten years ago he proposed his system of ship conductors, was either unaware of the occurrence of this spark, or held it in such little respect that he actually led one of his conductors through the after powder magazine, and he has recently induced the Lords of the Admiralty to order this system to be adopted through the navy. 34, Mr. Harris admits the existence of the lateral spark, but attributes it to what is commonly called the “residual charge.” Thus after discharging a battery, it is well known that a small secondary charge collects, and will give a spark or shock to any conductor touching both the coatings. 35. I repeat, that it is but little consequence what the cause or nature of the spark in question be. It is its existence only that should influence this question. But if Mr. Harris will repeat the experiment described at para. 30, he will find the explosion of the cannon to occur at the very same instant of tame as the discharge of the jar, and that after this, he will still succeed in obtaining the residual discharge on contact of the inner and outer coatings. 36. The accident which befel Her Majesty’s ship Rodney last year in the Mediterranean, shows the occurrence of the lateral, or extra discharge in a form which scarcely admits of mistake ; the flash struck the main-top-gallant mast, and escaped from the mast seven feet above the deck, and was seen by all on deck to go over the lee-nettings, and strike the sea a short dis- tance from the ship. Sparks were seen by many of the officers between decks, and many of the men declared they saw balls of fire on the lower deck, and ran after them to throw them out. Here is another instance of lateral or indirect effect. At the moment Dr. Goodeve’s house was struck, Mr. Hutchins sitting in a room on the ground floor, several feet from the course of the lightning, received a severe shock. Whatever produces 1840.| On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. 307 a shock will in greater quantity cause a spark, and if the spark be but the tenth of an inch in length, it can inflame powder, which is the great matter we have to guard against. 37. In connexion with this subject M. Arago gives us some very useful hints. A few detached sentences may be quoted to shew M. Ara- go’s ideas :—* Lightning once engaged in a metallic bar of suf- ficient dimensions, and well constructed, does not quit it to strike the materials of which buildings are usually constructed, but in sUCH SMALL QUANTITY that no injury can arise, nor even any appreciable effect.” 38. M. Arago is here writing of ordinary buildings. But what would produce no appreciable effect on these, would cause the explosion of a magazine. 39. M. Arago proceeds to ask, “Should conductors be placed within, or external to, buildings ?” The Board will see how this bears on Mr. Harris’ ship conductors, which run THROUGH the after magazine. “1 confess,” says M. Arago, “that on this point I would be much less affirmative. Voltaire used to say, ‘there are some great lords not to be approached without ex- treme precaution, and lightning is one of them.’ I think the illustrious author is perfectly right, especially when I recol- lect the case of Mr. Raven’s house, already alluded to. Doubtless the conductor was not sufficiently thick ; but here is an occurrence in which all was apparently in good or- der, the conductors acting as well as could be desired, and nevertheless there was a deviation of the electric matter. * * * “The 31st July 1829, in the Jail of Charlestown, at the moment of an immense thunder clap, 300 persons received a violent shock, the effects of which lasted for some seconds. * * “The jail had three good conductors, eighteen feet apart, the building was untouched by the lightning.” * * * (See the Annuaire for 1838). 40. How did the inmates receive this shock? M. Arago refers it to the large quantity of iron the building contained. 2R 308 On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. (No. 99. Can I be accused of exaggeration, when I express my belief, that the same cause, which independently of direct discharge occasioned the shocks here alluded to, might in a magazine of powder barrels be sufficient to occasion minute sparks, and the consequences to which these will naturally lead ? 41. Lastly, M. Arago alludes to the proposition of Toaldo, sanctioned by the Academy of Science, that for powder maga- zines, the conductor should be placed at two or three metres from the walls, on vertical masts. He approves of the idea in principle, but describes its practical application as too expen- sive, owing to the number of conductors which would be required. 42. But there is one most important experiment by Prof. Henry, of New York, to which I earnestly invite the attention of the Board. I wish my humble voice could reach the Lords of the Admiralty with effect, and that by an appeal to the good sense of men, who have only public interests at heart, and who have no previous scientific doctrines to combat for, that I could induce them to pause before they provide the British Navy with the dangerous conductors Mr. Harris has led them to adopt. Professor Henry led a copper wire, forty feet long, from the prime conductor of an electrifying machine, into a deep well full of water. On working the machine, from every part of this wire large sparks were obtained, and a voltaic cannon was fired by one of these sparks close to the surface of the water. Nay, more, Professor Henry repeated this ex- periment on a lightning conductor attached to his house, and properly constructed in every way. From every part of the conductor sparks were given off. 43. But even in the paper by Mr. Faraday, I find ample admission of many of the facts I have contended for. ‘It is no doubt true, that low rounded buildings, such as I understand powder magazines to be in India, are but little liable to be struck by lightning.” “It is also I think very probable that a lightning conductor may, under certain circumstances, cause an electric discharge to take place, where none would have occurred, no conductor being present.” ; 44, Let us hear what Mr. Daniell himself is candid enough to allow. (See para. 11 of his report). 1840.) On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. 309 ‘“‘ There can be no doubt that a conductor in the moment of a discharge of electricity passing through it, influences in a degree all good conducting substances in its immediate vicinity, by induction, but no discharge will take place from it to any neighbouring body, unless it be INSUFFICIENT ITSELF to con- duct the whole of the charge.” * * * 45. 'To this I have only to add, that since my first re- port (Dec. 1838), in a paper published by Mr. Sturgeon in the Annals of Electricity for October 1839, precisely the same ideas as those I entertain are fully and ably advanced. Mr. Martyn Roberts, a well known electrician, advocates the same -views—such also were the opinions of my admired and esteem- ed friend James Prinsep, whose name alone is full proof, to the Indian community at least, of the sterling value of the conclu- sions he arrived at. 46. From the consideration of all these facts and reasons, I think myself justified fully in adhering to the opinions ex- pressed in my first report. I do not, and never did, deny the protecting power of well constructed conductors erected in a given number. I stated distinctly all the circumstances from which danger might result, and how I conceived these might best be avoided. I freely admit copper to be superior to iron, but I wished to avoid expense in introducing the system I pro- posed. On that system I conceive all danger would be obvi- ated, while in the method proposed in the letter from the Honorable Court at least two highly probable causes of accident remain in full operation. 47, Having obtained through your Board the sanction of Government to the publication of the papers by Messrs. Faraday and Daniell, I will take care that the views therein contained shall be generally made known. Im an early number of the Journal of the Asiatic Society, I propose further to print an abstract translation of M. Arago’s remarkable Essay “ Sur le Tonnerre” which I saw for the first time when it was sent to your Board, along with Messrs. Faraday and Daniell’s papers. The interesting facts with which M. Arago’s me- moir abounds, will doubtless lead many competent observers to study the phenomena and effects of lightning on the grand scale in which these may be witnessed in India. BASIAEON METAAOY AZOY in native characters PAPEL PAILVPATVY.F There is only one variation. Upon No. 1 7 is placed after the first 4% of the second word, neither do we meet with this symbol upon No. 10 and No. 15, nor on R. R. II. No. 17, nor upon the Azilises-coins, which represent the same Greek legend (vide As. Trans. Vol. 1v. Pl. xx111. No. 27, 28, R. R. II. No. 20) 7 is, however, not spurious on account, as Mr. Prinsep has supplementarily noticed,ft that upon the coin rv. Pl. xx111. No. 22, it distinctly occurs, having the representative mark of an e, as follows "I. There exists therefore a variety in reading for “ King of Kings,’ PAA, but the shorter form prevails. According to the previous investigations those words are to be read in the following manner, (I shall note the long vowels in my representation, ) Mahirdgé rdgardgé mahaté Ajé, ie., “the great king, the king of kings, great Azes.”” The variety is rdgddirdgé “the supreme king of kings.” I add the following remarks. Mr. Grotefend thinks, he is entitled to read in the foregoing legend mahardé nandé mahardé Azo, according to PAO NANO * As. Trans. tv. Pl. xxi. and Pl. xx11. No, 1---16. + Mr. James Prinsep’s last reading of this legend was Maharaqjasa Raja- rajasa Mahatasa Ayasa, and in a very perfect coin of General Ventura, he found Maharajasa Mahatasa Dhamikasa Rajatirajasa.---See page 655, vol. vii. Asiatic Journal.---H. T. P. { As Trans, v. p. 549. 1840. | From Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 343 PAO upon the Kanerkes-coins, and he was in consequence com- pelled to admit some spurious forms of n, resembling the shape of r and t ; his alphabet exhibits five of them. Mr. Prinsep sup- posed them to be repetitions of the word Malakdé. Both of them, I think, will admit the refutation on previous grounds. By the term Mahdrdgé the simple title, BaoAcve, is always ex- pressed, and it is remarkable enough, that the simple word rdgan never occurs for it. The Greeks were satisfied with the plain title BaciWsdc ; this term Menandros and the Greek Kings ordinarily make use of: Eukratides alone affects the prouder title BAZTIAEQ2 METAAOY, for which Mahd- rdg6 appears to be the adequate translation. It certainly may be so according to original meaning, but scarcely according to the real interpretation of the word; for Mahdrdgé was already so much worn out by use, that it was of no more value than the simple king. Many an insignificant chieftain thus styles himself in Indian inscriptions ; and the degradation of the term has so increased, that many private men at present claim this title, as for instance Rammohun Roy, who was so called, and a Mahdrdga is as common in India, as a principe* in Italy. Eu- kratides (whether the second, or not, shall here be left undiscussed) was certainly aware of the difference in the acceptation of those words, if he have also titled himself, according to the draw- ing of Masson (and not according to the represented coinst) upon some specimens PYNILT PALLY, “ the great king, the king of kings.” As then Mahdrdgé was of less value, than it was as originally compounded, the explicit addition of the term “ great” to Azes after the words, “ King of Kings’ is less tautological, than it appears at the first glance. The compound word rdgdrdgé corresponds to Bactréwe Bacirtéwy. These words (madhdrdgé rdgdrdgé) may both be Sans- crit as well as Pracrit; for as used here, the Sanscrit would * As. Trans. tv. p. 338. + If the definition of an Italian principe, “‘ something less than an English Esquire,” is correct, Mr. Lassen is certainly out in his estimate of the common usage, to which maharaja is put. It is only in Bengal and Behar, that the title may be termed degraded to the use of private men. (Ty 344 Lassen on the History traced [No. 100. change the nominative as into 6. The variety rdgddirdgé contains a remarkable mistake in orthography, the word adhirdga “ Su- preme King,* often met with in the titles of Indian Kings, has dh, not d. Whether the stamp-cutters in Azes’ time, per- haps not often natives, did not pay much attention to the pro- prieties of indigenous grammar, or whether the language itself confounded both sounds, d and dh, I shall not pretend to decide; there will hereafter indeed occur some other examples of the same substitution. Mahaté (great) compels us to declare the language of the coins a variety of Pracrit. The Sanscrit nominative is mahan, the Pracrit nominative mahanté ; the terminal 6 at this place proves also, that the alteration of as into 6 occurred in all instances, as in Pracrit. The writing mahaté, by exhibiting the same omission of n, as occurred in Atimakho for Antimachos, proves, that it is not the pure Indian Pracrit, but a dialect, approaching also to the old Persian ; for when the arrow-headed inscriptions render gadérd, hidhusht for gandara, hindush, there is the same exsection of n, when followed by dentals, or properly an absorption, when n is rendered like the succeed- ing letter; thus the Byzantines said Kaddakootzen, instead of Kantakootzen. The language of the coins, however, like the Zend, has no reduplicated consonants, consequently not mahatté. The constant epithet avicnroc, is very distinct upon the Philoxenos coin (As. Trans. Vol. rv. Pl. xx1. No. 1.) PAVHPI,f Apalihat6. Apratihata signifies in Sanscrit non repulsus; the preposition prati often becomes in Pracrit palit.) We have consequently got another Pracrit form of quite unexceptionable interpretation. Nuiknpdeoc and wKatwe are expressed by the same word. See the coins of Amyntas (As. Trans. Vol. v. * Atirag’a, being not in use for this title, I shall leave it undiscussed, ‘if there it must not be read 4 ti. + According to Mr. Beer’s correction; I have much pleasure in availing myself of this opportunity to thank him publicly for his solid and instructive, as well as kind, critique of my work on arrow-headed writing. { Mr. James Prinsep reads this epithet Apavihatasa +, and this PIsZWS Jayadharasa. § My Grammar, tv. 5. 0. 1840. | from Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 345 Pl. xuv1. No. 1) and those of Archelios, at the same place (Pl. xxxv. No. 1). Farther evidence is superfluous. It is re- presented in the native language by P13AY%. The letter, yet unknown, can be only v, and the word gdjavaté (the victorious,) according to the same form as mahaté for the Pracrit gaja- vanté, Sanscrit gajavan, in the accusative, gajavantam. We have therefore acquired v, 3. (as our 15th letter.) The word, substituted for Stcavoc, commences with a symbol yet unknown (As. Trans. tv. Pl. xx1. No. 9. v. pl. xxxv. No. 6. No, 1.*) The second syllable is every where W, mi; after it follows a yet undefined letter, and then 6. The first has the form & or & upon the two coins, first men- tioned ; upon the last coin the same sign, but reversed, so as almost to resemble ; and it is probably only incorrectly drawn, though Mr. Prinsep from the Archelios coin and from one coin of Azes, who likewise assumed this title (As. Trans. rv. Pl. xxi. No. 22. v. p. 549.) has chosen this figure for the print. It will be safer at all events to take the other. As I think, I have proved, that we have to look for Indian words upon the coins, it evidently follows from the second syllable that Phwe must be read, dhamiko (the just) ; in Pracrit dhammiké or dhamiké, in Sanscrit dharmikas. The 4 is here again unwritten, and the consonant is not reduplicated according to the already stated peculiarity of the language of the coin; the union in one character of rm accords quite with the rule of Pracrit, while the retention of the r in Hirmajé, is certainly to be accounted for (as before noted) by the authority of the king Hermaios, who would not allow his name to be corrupted. What I have further to prove, are the two new letters; on k, I shall speak hereafter; I will now discuss our 16th letter é or &, dh. It appeared already from former remarks, that the second n is not met with in the name Menandros. Now we know, * R. R. u. No. 9. is indistinct. + The Azes-coin, however, according to the representation, is not well preserved, or not precisely copied by Mr. Masson, for the last letter also is wrong: “\ for ‘P, 346 Lassen on the History traced [No. 100. that the native language did not admit an n, followed by dentals. Mr. Prinsep read Minané, as the penultimate symbol is indeed very similar to the n, already discussed. It is thus upon the coin (As. Trans. v. Pl. xiv1. No. 6,) where no error appears to have occurred Peéw, and I should not hesitate to read Minané, were it not evident, that by the law of the language the n cannot be retained in Menandros, and were not the omission of dr at variance with the rules of the absorption of consonants. Mr. Grotefend’s supposition, as it appears from his Hebrew paraphrase [yyJ] 39% is deficient, in that the termination 6, which he improperly puts also between brackets, occurs often enough to prove, that nothing is omitted before it. I do not therefore know, how he can read Menandré; for the coins he used, have no more symbols than the others. It is only fair, however, to add, that the letters of the coins (R. R. I. No. 8, 9, 11) have become so indistinct, that, with regard to the name, nothing can be decided from them. No. 10 renders, in apparently well preserved characters, Paw, which we might read Mitaré or Mitadd, but the P upon the coin is certainly spoiled. Not to judge too arbitrarily, I shall leave it to a renewed investigation, if there occur two orthographies of that name. By comparing the remaining copies we observe, R. R. II. No. 12. has still the n, though mutilated, then -€, and lastly P. Even upon Tod’s coin, No. 2, quoted by Mr. Grotefend, the terminal letters are also obviously Pe; the preceding letter is entirely mis- drawn. As. Trans. Pl. xxv1. No. 2. distinctly renders £ in the form, above established, and the final letters are again Pe. Consequently Pésw ; No. 3 is no less distinct ; the é has an addi- tional point, as at R, R. II. No. 12, As. Trans. v. pl. xuvi. No.8 has P’&£W, with two points. At the same place, No. | gives ‘€ with the point, but afterwards an n of the same form, but without the point. Thus also v. pl. xuvi. No. 6. Peéw.* Final- ly at the same place No. 9 and No. 5 have for these two é, two viz. Piiw, save only, that No. 5is more indistinct and corroded. * Mr. James Prinsep has two readings for the Bactrian legend of Menander- coins, viz. PéEey Menanasa and Pesy Medanasa.---H. T. P. 1840. | Srom Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 347 Here we therefore indeed observe an inconsistency in the characters, which depends not simply upon the state of the coins, while from the addition of variously situated points with both letters, we may presume, that the indistinctness was to be amend- ed by additional diacritical symbols. This idea as to the points, cannot be established but by carefully examining the coins themselves. The point at 1 serves perhaps to distinguish it from “, r. ? Be it as it may, it is evident from our review, that some coins obviously distinguish the second symbol from the third. As now ‘ by the omission of the cross line below, and by a greater curvature in the middle, may easily be altered in the figure é, nothing prevents us from supposing, that the second syllable may still be { or na. The penultimate symbol, being proved so incontrovertibly asn,é, I do not hesitate to declare it the above adopted dh é. In the word dhdmiké we observed also instances, showing that € has a straight form 5, and this approaches so much to n, that we can hence likewise account for the confounding of both. For r we never meet with a peculiar symbol, and the name must therefore be read Minadé. The adoption of € as dh, will lastly be confirmed by the fact, that in the same word it is commonly written “1, and seldom ¢. The “ upon the coin, R. R. I. No. 10, appears to be indeed confounded in the revers- ed way, viz. 1 for <. But < if it be a dental sound, dhdmiko decides for the adoption of dh. In Minadhé r is absorbed, according to rules of Pracrit, for instance, kandras becomes kando. As é for d appears to be the rule in Menandros, we cannot consider é to be substituted by mere chance for 1; but it must be founded upon the nature of the language. We may here recall to mind the rule of the Zend, according to which the Sanscrit putra is changed into puthra. 'The omission of the r may have had an effect, similar with the Persian sur, (si, or three) which presupposes a previous form thi, the th of which still remained, after r had dis- appeared out of the more ancient form fhri in Zend for the Sanscrit ¢77. We have in Minadhé for Menandros an evident instance, ZY 348 Lassen on the History traced [No. 100. that the language of the coins followed its own principles, in the paraphrase of Greek names. I would notice at the same time, that we may expect a similar kind of absorption in Eukratides, and we can already hypothetically maintain, that r, preceded by consonants, was absorbed. R before consonants is likewise absorbed, as in dhdmiké, and we undoubtedly have properly attributed to foreign authority the deviation from the rule in Hirmajé. If the name Archelios were precisely represented in the native writing, it would supply us another opportunity for testing the rule for r. The name of this king is certainly written thus, and not Archelaos, if the Greek be properly represented, and the native legend, according to the only copy, As. Trans. v. pl. xxxv. No. 1, be properly rendered by Mr. Masson. The Greek legend is distinct: BASIAEQS [AIKA]IOY NIKH®OPOY APXEAIOY ; the native legend is similar, save the name, which is in the copy entirely illegible. Mr. Prinsep, however, renders this also, according to Mr. Masson’s drawing. I copy the whole: PAIL PASAL Phws PLArv. Leaving the name for the present, we may assert, on the authority of the other examples, that the initial of the second word is incorrectly given, it must be €. The legend will con- sequently be Mahdrdgé dhamiké gajavaté, the supreme King, the just, the victorious. In the name itself ‘4 is evidently an error for 4, li, as Lishyo for Lysias ; for rche there consequently was only one symbol. If Mr. Masson has correctly copied, it is there Ahalyé. But as « (epsilon) must be expressed by e, it follows, that the second letter has not been completely preserved, and I do not doubt, that it was x, chi, khi. But there is no trace whatever of r, and we have again an absorption of r before other consonants. If Archelios was termed in the native language Akilyjé, his pride was perhaps gratified, as being reminded of the name of the great Pelide, so that he would not much object to the rule. The most difficult title, that namely, by which ow7np is * V. 549, - —— = ee ee 1840. | from Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 349 translated, is still left to be discussed. It too terminates in 6; but there precede three symbols, which belong all to t, d, r, letters so easily to be confounded, though Mr. Prinsep,* who, however, observes the ambiguity, has taken it for k. Among all the readings, rakaké, radaké radadé, which can be taken on his conjecture, he chooses rakaké, because the Sanscrit word rakshaka denotes protector, and because (he does indeed not expressly mention this, but it must have influenced his decision) its form in Pracrit is rakkhaké. Though I could mention several other objections to this interpretation, suffice it to say, that there is no k to be met with in the word. For the same reason we cannot adopt the word ¢draka, supporter, deliverer. Mr. Grotefend started on the supposition, that it was the same with KOPANO, which occurs upon the Kanerkes-coins. Besides, however, that this word may have belonged to a dialect, different from what we have hitherto discussed, the same objection will also be decisive; neither the n, here assumed, nor the k can stand the test. After having compared all instances of this word upon the coins of Menandros, Apollodotos, Diomedes, Hermaios, it re- mains doubtful yet, as for what we can take the three first char- acters of the word; we may read P77" just so, according to the coin which we choose as a criterion for those three letters. A hint appears in the following. We observe different orthography of this word upon coins, which certainly belong to a later period, and the words on which seem to intimate an altered state of the language, as upon the coins As. Trans. _ Vol. rv. Pl. xx1i1. No. 23, where the Greek legend exhibits BASIAEY> BAZIAEQN ZQOTHP MELAS, so also upon the coins of the unknown king, who usually has only Greek in- scriptions ;+ fortunately we can easily read a portion of the native legend, it is thus: PAT LU P1E1 P1 Ly, therefore, mahaté —adharé mahdrdgé ; to this there probably succeeded rdgardgé ; but this part is no longer legible. € is the second character in * IV. 335. + The king too is on horseback, as upon the purely Greek coins of the great deliverer ; this accords with the monogram. See at the same place No, 26. The reverse is different, 350 Lassen on the History traced [No. 100. the word we are in search of; it will therefore be in the usual form a “ord. Now the word is thus written upon the Yndo- pherres-coins Péé, dh standing here too for the first letter. Before recognising these representatives of the first two signs* of pan, I had asked myself, by what word swrne would be expressed in Sanscrit? The question was easily answered ; it could only be ¢rdtri, nominative trdtd, accusative trdtdram ; the nominative in Pracrit is ¢tdéddr6 for this ;+ thus P17" was without difficulty to be read. The reading, discovered after- wards, P71 é" confirmed this interpretation. For want of a more exact knowledge, €, dh, was substituted for d. € in the first syllable shows a state of pronunciation, still more corrupted, but otherwise it is an acceptable confirmation, by establishing the dental sound of the beginning. In the Pracrit of the dramas, the initial t usually retains its class (as a letter) while the t, included by other letters, is generally subdued {as a sound) to d, I find in P1é~ this transi- tion of t to d; without asserting, however, that this form of the d had been adopted upon the older coins. He that still ad- heres to the reading of ¢dtdré, can only be opposed by reasons, not to be derived from the characters. The form P ee which reduces the initial also to dh, refers to a still later period of the language. I think, I have sufficiently explained the usual epithets and titles, and I may now be allowed to survey the principal results. The language has apparently manifested a strong bent to the Pracrit of the dramas, by its absorptions and by forming new, short forms of A from the long ones; the nominatives in 6, as belonging also to Zend, prove nothing (as regards Pracrit affinity) words as rdgan and dharmo are so undoubtedly Indian, and not Zendic, that the relation of the language to India is quite evident from them; also gaja for victory, and tdddr6é for deliverer (though I shall not deny, that the latter belongs to the Zend) are entirely Indian roots. * Mr. James Prinsep’s last reading of this word was P“1é'é Nandatasa.--- ls Pld a as + My Grammar, p. 291. 1840. | trom Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 351 But we should be wrong in not confessing, that some traces refered to a dialect, not merely Indian, as, for instance, the - omission of n before t and d, and the want of reduplicated consonants, even when they were required for the foreign word, as Apollodotos. The latter fact does not accord with the Pracrit, where nothing is more frequent than ll, mm, and others. The former, though not Zendic, is old Persian, and the language of the coins seems to occupy a place midway between the old Persian and the Indian languages. It is now incumbent on me to vindicate the opinion I have adopted regarding k, in opposition to both my predecessors, in effecting which I shall discuss the names of Greek Kings, not yet examined, which will prove instrumental in fixing the alphabet. § 4. Inquiry into the Alphabet from the names of Greek Kings. Continued. | Mr. Prinsep as well as Mr. Grotefend, obtain their k prin- cipally from the name Eukratides ; the latter represents it in the form 1; according to the former, it does not differ from d and r. The name Kukratides induces the following dilemma,— whether we suppose the dipthong «< v to be expressed by one or two letters, both succeeding letters are displaced. No one has supposed the case, that r was perhaps omitted, though it is evident, that according as it is expressed or not expressed, k must occupy another place. Mr. Grotefend read Ukratido, Mr. Prinsep Eukratids. To arrive at the real k, we shall pursue a different course. The k I adopted in dhdmiko, is exactly ‘n upon the coin of Archelios ; upon another at the same place, v. Pl. xxxv. No. 6, 7 is substituted for it, so that the right half of the letter does not occur; upon the copy tv. Pl. xx1. No. 9, the symbol is destroyed, also in R. R. II. No. 9. But that‘h is the real, complete figure, follows from a remark of Mr. Prinsep* who notices, that upon a coin of Azes (1v. Pl. xx111. No. 22,) ‘h distinctly is the penultimate symbol of the word, denoting just. 352 Lassen on the History traced [No. 100. O is preceded by ‘in this word, by which we are prevented from adopting ‘h as loo, if + be indeed previously correctly fixed as loo. If there remain any doubt, the word Antialkides would set it at rest. That this was the name of this king, and not Antilakides, — is confirmed by the native legend, which is PAH494), Atiali- — kadé, according to Mr. Prinsep’s* examination of a well pre- Served copy. . This k is throughout well preserved upon the coins, As. Trans. Vol. tv. Pl. xxiv. No. 9, 10, 11. also R. R. I. No. 15; it has, however, been obliterated on R. R. II. No. 7. Here let me remark on the name Antialkides; /k is a com- pound, which is not admitted in Pracrit; in that language it becomes kk by absorption. Here both consonants remain, but only in this way, viz. by separating |] from k, by transferring the vowel i (1 k i) to the first consonant, and by adding a to the second, in consequence /ika for Jkt. We observe a similar method in Pracrit,t+ according to the prevailing rule of which similar consonants only, when coming together, are admitted. If therefore two dissimilar consonants meet together, of which neither will give way to the other, an intervening vowel is added to the first, and by this separation of the obstinate couple, peace is restored between them. In Pracrit this is the case with kl; kilésa from kléza, kilanta from klanta. Our Pracrit treats Ik accord- ingly; the difference, however, is, that though the vowel of the first consonant is borrowed as in Pracrit (i-i, i-é, kiléza from kléza, sirt from sri,) from the original syllable, yet, this syllable does not retain its first vowel. The Pracrit would require Antialikido. The opinion therefore, that the language of our coins trans- formed foreign names, according to its genuine rules, is here also confirmed. I think then, I have arrived at the real k, and instead of borrowing it from Eukratides, I shall only exemplify it there. I might be satisfied with Mr. Prinsep’s statement, that all BON Spee + My Grammar, p. 182. 1840. | JSrom Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 353 the drawings of Mr. Masson represent this wise the name P71hI¥. But as the k in this very name Eukratides, was entirely misunderstood formerly, I may be allowed to pro- ceed a little more cautiously. I shall therefore place the dif- ferent characters, yet preserved, of four edited coins, one un- der the other As. J. Vol. tv Pl. xxv. No. Shas “iri 99 23 9 29 9,, Paxh3 9 Zoe aap ie Oe PeuPPs) R. R. I. e Fe neg gt ap hep ae: The last half consequently is ¢7dé, three characters only pre- cede it. The third among them is decidedly not r. Two legends exhibit the k, already known to us, one gives the k (% for h,) and a fourth decides nothing, as the legend is evidently spoiled. R is therefore omitted, as in Minadé for Menandros. If therefore*—katidd is to be read, Mr. Prinsep is quite right in stating, that two symbols precede k, but I do not know in this case, how he obtains his r. Mr. Grotefend proceeded carefully by adopting one character only for , es(18) $04," (19) tes Again k seems to occur in a name, hitherto obscure, and which even now cannot be entirely illustrated. The Agathokleia-coin offers the unexpected and pleasing fact of a Greek queen in that remote quarter of the Kast ;* upon its one side we observe a helmeted head, whether of a woman we shall leave undecided, with the legend; BAZIAIZZ=A> OEOTIPOIO(Y)ATASOKAEIAS. If we now look upon the reverse for an interpretation of the unusual and obscure epithet of the queen, we find the representation of a sitting Hercules, who appears with the left hand to hold the lion’s skin, and with the right perhaps leans on a rock, as upon the coins of Euthydemos, where, however, he holds with the left the club. While in expectation of the translation of the Greek legend, we are surprized at the word;t PY1U(v) maha- vagd. We know the language sufficiently to assert, that it, like the Pracrit, has not used the masculine termination for a queen. ‘There is therefore the title of a king. Then follows P17(41) tddaré, deliverer. Two testimonial instances prove, that * As. Trans. V. PI. xuvi. No. 2. + Maharajasa according to Mr. James Prinsep, who particularly remarks, that the masculine word is used. The word after Maharaja he sug- gests may preferably be read Devamatasa, which is an exact translation of OEKOTPOTLOY.---H. T. P. 1840. | From Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 355 the Greek titles are not repeated on the reverse, and we there- fore cannot derive any advantage from discussing them here. After mahdrdg6 tdddré we expect the name of a king, which must be contained in the symbols ‘P1%Phw.* The writing does not compel us to divide the word in two, as Mr. Prinsep proposed, because P is placed in the middle. The second letter, if properly drawn, can only be k, and there is no room for doubt on this point, as the coin itself was in the hands of Mr. Prinsep. The fourth character, though most closely approaching the form of dh, may likewise be taken for ann; it is accompanied by ee. Mr. Prinsep indeed substitutes for this the figure % in his print, but on the coin it is such as I represent it. Theft initials being therefore Miké, may correspond with the Greek Mixw, Mexw, Mynxw, Muxw. It appears probable, that the next letter of a Greek word is rather n than dh, which would be only substituted for d. We lastly meet with P and the unlucky letter 1, which may be taken for t, d, or r, and affords a beautiful opportunity for a guess. Since Mex is not the beginning of any Greek word, and no king is likely styled Mnxwviric, the initial letters must cer- tainly be Mixw or Muxw ; we cannot say much in favour of Mix, even if we would look for an absorbed r in the native character, viz. Mixpw. We therefore come to Muxw, and here Muxwmoc, from the island Mycone, appears of itself ; Mouxwyvidne is indeed not a Greek name, otherwise known, though it would be least objec- tionable to read in this way the native characters. If 1 were allowed instead of ‘h, we should obtain Myronides, who would be admitted with much less opposition as a king, not yet known at the Indus. But not indulging such a supposition, merely arbitrary, we do best to wait for further discoveries. * Mr. James Prinsep reads PEP he the name here referred to Faka- saqlitasa.---H. T, P. + Mr. James Prinsep’s discovery of the letter », as equivalent to the Greek , resolves the difficulty, felt by Mr. Lassen, at finding, what he read as W me at the beginning of the name of Agathoeleia. In this word it is apparently the equivalent of the Greek digamma.---H. T. P. 22 356 Lassen on the History traced [No. 100. As the native name does not recall elements of Persian or Indian words, we shall by no means attempt to-obtrude a bar- barian husband on the noble Agathokleia. § 5. Continuation—regarding the names of Kinys, not Greeks. I now pass to the coins of Kings, not Greeks, to complete the native alphabet, and to advance our knowledge of the language from their legends. Azilises presents a new symbol. As. T. rv. pl. XxIIt. No. 27. No. 28. R. R. II. No. 20. rt, almost like an é; the Greek denotes the same by ans. We have already another s, V,. which we take for sh, and will discover a third mn. We must therefore choose z or s for either of them. Besides, it is possible, that s in Azilises is substituted in the Greek transla- tion for a k’ (tsch) Y, as this sound was not original in the Greek, and was adopted as 7¢ at a later period only. It is therefore a mere arbitrary reading, when I take conjecturally for our 20th letter ‘Y, as z. The Parthian king Vonones, has the Greek legend, BASJAE- QS BASIAEQN METAAOY ONONOY.* This follows from the coins R. R. II. No. 10, No. 11, I. No. 20, where, according to the native legend, however, not METAAOY, but AIKAIOY must have been written; for we observe upon the reverse still Phwe, as also in As. J. IV. pl. xx1. No. 5. Though we do not know yet any copy, exhibiting the entire title, we can con- fidently construe it by comparison. ‘The reverses also give us nothing but fragments of the native legends; we must, how- ever, have recourse to them to obtain the name. R. R. II. No. 10 has 4 over the right arm of Jupiter, and the letter, next following, seems to be a disfigured P ; it then would be gé the end of Mahdrdgé ; for the succeeding illegible word has five cha- _ racters, and is therefore PAIL rdgdrdgé. It would be indeed singular, had great preceded the other titles. But it appears * The Arsakides-coins also combine both titles, as those that are attri- buted to the twelfth (of those kings) or Phraates 111, Eckhel m1, 528. BAZIAEQ® BASIAEON APZSAKOY METAAOY AIKAIOY OEOY EYITATOPO® ®IAEAAHNOS. 1840. | From Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 357 difficult to decide any thing by the instrumentality of specimens, so defective. The specimen R. R. II. No. 11, commences regu- larly with mahdrdgé rdgdrdgé ma(hato). The name does not occur on either side R. R. I. No. 20, when mdhdrdgé is scarcely to be distinguished, but evidently has over the head of Minerva P‘hw (é,) dhdmike ; then follows the name,* As. T. IV. pl. xxi No. 5 has P(M1)UCP)Y, probably (mahdrdgd ragard)gé * The same also upon a coin of Mr. Masson, As. T. 11. pl. x1. No. 43, Laem SG 2 Pula hn 3 POA h are read by Mr. James Prinsep, Spalaha’rasa, Spalafarmasa and Spalirishasa, and with reference to this part of Mr. Lassen’s treatise, it may be as well to give from a letter of Mr. Lassen’s to that gentleman, dated 30th Decem- ber 1838, and which reached India after Mr. James Prinsep had left, never to return, the following extract, showing the opinion of Mr. Lassen, after reading the article referred to---“ You will soon receive a little treatise of mine in which I have endeavoured to show amongst other things, relating to the Bactrian or Indo-Scythian part of Indian history, that the alphabet of the Bactrian-coins was only in use in Kabulistan and the Punjab, and ought therefore to be called Caboolan; my book is unfortunately written in German---I say unfortunately, because I should wish to hear your opinion on this and other views of mine. Will not M. Csoma Dekoros do me the favor to be my interpreter? Your additional corrections of the alphabet are very valuable, particularly the Pass. So also your Jayadharasa. [| suspect, that Nikatoros will turn out to be Jayavatasa, the translations being so literal, and we ought to expect two terms i. e. 4 as different from q andin my opinion gy, I have in my late reading attended much to the use of the different compounds of pata, and am persuaded, that only aprati- hata would be used for unconquered ; Apatihata is in fact the very Prakrit form. For shortness sake, let me only state as aconjecture, that OWTNno0g is tadarasa from Taq on the coins of Andapherres. Tadarasa or dadarasa the € being = also in Minadasa. Not to be forgotten, is your Spalahara, a capital reading that destroys with one blow, all our lucubrations on the data of Vonones. It is evident, there was a Kabulian dynasty of Arsacide, coeval with that of Azas. I only propose to read h differently, as it cannot well be acompound ofs and‘Pp. May it not be a modification ofk ‘y, corres- ponding with the Zend 9, which takes the place of eq in Sanscrit? Spaly- rius by the Indians was called Svalyrius, which the Greek alphabet expres- sed by om. The Kabulians who called the river tqaqq Shushva Choaspes, pronounced the king’s name Shvalyrius or Galyrius.”---H. feet So 398 Lassen on the History traced [No. 100. mahaté, as it will also have been upon R. R. II. No. 10; and then the name. The state of these coins does not much invite inquiry after the name; but it being better preserved, than the rest of the words, we shall venture on the task. As. Trans. IV. Pl. xx1. No. 5, has yp 4293 Rick, Th Moot ..-, ey S41 A Bes [ig ge ak PNUidh Mr. Grotefend has read it Vonohno ; it will be observed, the © two n do not correspond, nor with the more confirmed {, not to mention the illegitimate use of h, perhaps to render the syllable long. Mr. Prinsep, who always adheres to the more cautious principle of reading out of the characters, not into them, takes it for ulalidé, which reading, however, cannot be right. On examining more closely, we find, that two authorities are against the initial ‘h; as many against the second P; the three — last characters are identical (in the three legends) ; it would be therefore P1173. The second has the greatest similarity to — an 1, and the whole exhibits Valaharé or Valahadé. This is indeed very different from Vonones, which must have been ex- pressed by PSPS3, if we have arranged the letters properly, and — fixed the system of this alphabet. I am persuaded, that the name cannot be the same, and as a conjecture is here quite indispensable, I shall propose the fol- lowing. | The name of a Parthian king which will be first thought of, and which occurs three or four times, is Volagases. Upon coins, attributed to the former, or Arsakes xx11I. is the name thus written: BOAATAZOY. What now if this name be written on the reverse of our coins? Ul, h, rendered by g will not excite any doubt, if an h in the middle of a word is to be expressed by Greek characters. The termination alone does not agree, and here we may suppose, that by the sharp accentuation, the penultimate ‘T is changed into 1. This being admitted, it would 1840. | Jrom Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 3599 be PY43, Balahazo, as the Indian v is not different in pronun- ciation from b. This result will be surprising, and I should hesitate in com- municating it, unless it appeared a very natural consequence. But how to explain the matter. Of the Parthian language we know nothing, and he that likes, may think Vonones to be synonymous in the Parthian with Valahazé ; or he may also obtain a really Indian word by writ- ing only Valahdsa, viz. he who contemns power. 1 shall choose an interpretation less ingenious, but indeed based on better historical authority. Volagases 1. was the son of Vonones 11. The father reigned a few months; his son, known by the wars he engaged in with Rome, is supposed to have reigned between 50 and 91 a. pb. Another Volagases is not spoken of in Parthian history as succeeding a Vonones. Have we not consequently both names upon our coins? This conjecture appears to me so probable, that I scarcely hesi- tate to reject the acute one of Mr. Raoul Rochette,* who states, that it was Vonones 1., the vanquisher of Artabanus ; and even though Mr. K. O. Mueller takes this explanation as undoubtedly correct, the passages of Strabo, concerning the conquests of the Parthians in Bactria, mention neither of the two Vonones. Another king, likewise not Greek, of this later period, offers another problem. Mr. Prinsep states his name to be Ipalirisos,t and we read indeed upon the coin v. Pl. xxxv. No. 7, BASIAEQS BAZIAEQN METAAOY IITAAIPISOY ; the initial I of the name, however, is not quite distinct. R. R. I. No. 21, gives nothing of the legend but BASIAEQN BASIAEQS, and upon the reverse three illegible characters. Owing to the ac- curate drawing of Mr. Prinsep, we can supersede that of Mr. Masson, As. Trans. 111. Pl. x1. No. 44. Upon No. 6 the name does not occur in Greek ; the rest is distinct. Mr. Prinsep has established his reading upon the comparison ws p. 28. jc dt8. LEADS. Vc OO, 360 Lassen on the History traced [No. 100. of six well preserved copies, but the comparison is made by Mr. Masson, and he will excuse me in asserting, that the name of the king was not this; the native legend being preserv- ed remarkably well, is thus upon both specimens of Mr. Prinsep: PAAdh Phily PLA. Mahdardgé shall no longer detain us. With regard to mahataké for great, I do only remark, that mahaté has here the additional termination ka, so frequent in Pracrit ;* there it would be mahantaké ; our king was apparently fain to compensate by the adjective the loss he had to suffer on account of the substantive ; for Bacttéwc BactAéwy certainly carries the impression of higher dignity than mahdrdg6, or it was perhaps the title king of kings, already so worn out, as to be of no more value than mahdrdgé. If we pass to the name, the penultimate letter 7 (No. 21), must be, it appears, a sibilant, according to the Greek; in de- noting it by s, I do not anticipate an examination, hereafter to ensue, in order to distinguish more accurately between v,‘v,n. The ™ will occur again as a sibilant. This being settled, the name is Kalirisé6. But whatsoever alteration of the names the language of our coins may have admitted, according to its ge- nuine laws, it could never have changed an zpa into k. I there- fore maintain zpa, not to be the real commencement of the name. What was it then? On this we are informed by the coin of Spalirios, connected at least by name; for it represents, As. Trans.) v. Pleixxxv. .No.'6, ‘av. Pl. xxr.. (NomOy (thes which is indispensable near 1, is very indistinct upon the latter, and it does not occur at all upon the former), the initial letters by kala—/(kali); here (for the coin of Ipalirisos), we require only the initial letter, which we find to be a ka for the Greek ova. I maintain, therefore, that the pretended [palirisos was called Spalirisos.t Many will perhaps think this alteration impossible; but I am of opinion, that it may not only be vindicated, but that it is particularly adapted to confirm, in a striking manner, all that has been previously said on the nature of the language. * My Grammar p. 288. + Spalirishasa is Mr. James Prinsep’s latest reading of this name from the Bactrian legend.---H. T. P. 1840. | from Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 361 Now we know, that the languages of Iran do not admit the Indian compound sv, for which they adopt another, more agreeable to the laws of their sounds. The junction of conso- nants, originally substituted for sv, is hv, as also h is used for a simple s. This hv, hardened in Zend, becomes kv or q, which simple sound is substituted for the Indian compound sv. The old Persian language, less hard in sound, softens the above mentioned hv in such a way, as to lose the h in u, so nearly related to v; the junction of characters, which corresponds in the arrow-headed writing to the Zend 4, properly denotes there- fore uv.* ‘This alteration is foreign to the Indian Pracrit. According to my opinion, the k in the name, above mentioned, represents, as the Zendic q does, the compound sv, which is in- | cluded in the Greek letters ow. Sva might be expressed in Greek by cova. But by supposing, that v was more hardly pronounced, (as for example the ¢v of Sanscrit indeed becomes cp in Zend), we shall not find the orthography ow for sv very strange. And I shall not insist even upon maintaining, that those kings were called Svalyrios and Svalirisos; but I use only sv to explain, how k (equivalent to) 4 may represent sp; This k is the third Iranian transformation of hv, in the process of which h becomes hard, as in Zend, but entirely drops the sound vy, consequently sv in Sanscrit, hv, or q in Zend, uv in ancient Persian, k in the language of the coins, not yet geogra- phically defined, (as to the countries in which it prevailed.) But why then a double kind of pronunciation upon the same coin? If the name of the king was Kalirisos in the native language, why was it not the same in Greek? and how could it be written Spalirisus in Greek, if it in fact did not sound thus in the language of the country? A third view is still possible, which appears to settle the difficulty. The king, not being a native, was probably called Spalirisus or Sualirisos in his own language, but not in the language of the country, whose inhabitants were under his sway. They changed the name into Kalirisos, according to the system of their sounds, while the coin-stampers, knowing the Greek language, had no reason to call him otherwise than he did himself. * The old Persian arrow-headed inscriptions, p. 107. 362 Lassen on the History traced [No. 100. We shall now pass to Spalyrios, so similar in his name, who appears to Oppose to us invincible difficulties. I do not intend to dwell upon the view according to which the reading of the name has been already defined. Mr. Prinsep has here also the merit of having fixed the name, and the Greek legend, which is thus, ZIIAAYPIOY AIKAIOY AAEA®OY TOY BASIAEQ®S. Three specimens are publish- ed, As. Trans. Vol. rv. Pl. xx1. No. 9, v. Pl. xxxv. No. 6, R. R. II. No. 9. The second of them alone has completely preserved the legend.* The native legend is the following tv. Pl. xx1. No. 9, d---h---wePa4.U4; upon v. Pl. xxxv., No. 6, the initial letter of the first word does not exist ; the second is preserved, and the well known word P‘hwé, only 1 is mutilated to 1. The name itself is complete rutvd‘h. The last symbol has entirely disappeared on the foregoing coin; v distinctly occurs ; the two preceding letters are likewise there, though indistinct. At R. R. ———— the first word has got all symbols, but the first appears as 2, the second is angular, and similar to r and d; the others are the same on all the specimens ; dhdmiké is legible ; in the name we can unfortunately discover only the vu. Mr. Prinsep had three drawings before him, two by Court, and one by Masson, all three of which he found in exact corres- pondence; the legend he gives after them is the following PUuTbAh PIws PANAI9. The two first signs of the first word are taken from the drawing of Mr. Masson; the coin cer- tainly has room for one symbol more, so that the complete first word would include seven letters; but for this there is only one authority. | With regard to the name, which I presume I have discovered in the last word, according to the examination of the name of * See page 650, of Vol. vir. of the Journal. Mr. James Prinsep’s latest reading of these combined inscriptions was SA ae AOL 9 IE Ri Dy IPN om Tt a bes. kK me.dn s) | Pi ra hol Balaha’ra putasa dhamikasa Balafarmasa i. e. of Balafarma (or according to Mr. Lassen’s Svalaformes) the just, son of Balahara (Svalahara): It is to this reading that Mr. Lassen refers in his letter above quoted.---H. T. P. 1840. | from Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 363 of the foregoing king, the mark of the vowel e is so often omit- ted, that we need not scruple at supplying 4, as a vestige of it is almost extant upon one coin. But if the first two syllables are kali, the third must be “1. For this the only distinct specimen has a character which we may take for r, to the head of whose angle a small circle is annexed. But then follows a sign which we may read as t, d, or r, and hence we are not allowed to take the preceding sign as r. The same &, however, denotes a Greek v upon the latest coins of this class. The most. pro- bable conjecture therefore would be to supply e with regard to the fourth character, and so far it would be read, kalyri. But now, according to the precedent of the previous names, there must follow PA, jo, viz. Kalyrij6, instead of which we meet with a character which is merely to be read as anm. ‘The fact, however, that P follows v, is of main importance, as this being the case, the word is complete. According to the specimens lying before me, this P is not certain, and the entire reading is therefore left problematical. M6 does by no means compensate for the expected jo; on the other hand the Greek writing in no sort authorises us to read OY instead of MOY. I cannot unravel this difficulty. Mr. Prinsep presumed, the word which I take for the name, to be the translation of brother, and supposed, that the word king was at the end of the legend. Against this supposition I have to raise the decisive objection, that the name cannot be ex- _ pressed by the first word, and that, on the contrary, we can point it out on the most plausible conjecture in the third word. This being the case, the construction differs from the Greek,* and the brother of the king, or what corresponds to this word, occupies the first place; the legend, as far as I have observed, never commences upon these coins from below, in consequence, we have not to look for another word, preceding the first. Nevertheless it is possible, that the third word was followed by a title for Spalyrios, though there is left no room for a legend below, if the coins are exactly represented. The first word seems to have been so well and congruously * Mr. James Prinsep reads the Bactrian legend of the coins of Undo- pherras P4 SEPIG LO Farahetasa Nandatasa, which seems a preferable read- ing to this of Mr. Lassen,---H. T. P. oA ee ee 364 Lassen on the History traced [No. 100. preserved, as not to admit any alteration of the letters. We dare only speculate, as to whether it have six or seven characters, and as room is left for the first (9) according to my previous remark, we may presume, that Mr. Masson was mistaken with reference to this letter. The word is therefore Pah"149. This, however, is a complete mystery to me; neither do I know a word, which denotes brother or relation of any degree, bearing the least similarity to this, nor can 1 derive a proper signification from those syllables, though the end (paré ? pdd6 ?) exhibits a common Indian word. I must therefore leave this word to an inquirer who is more fortunate in guessing, or more acute in discerning. Another barbarian king was named Ynadpherres* or Yndo- pherrest (Undopherres) and styled himself BactAéwe owrnpoe or BactAebe owrnps for the Greek legend gradually exhibits the nominative, which the native language used from the beginning, As. Trans. Vol. rv. Pl. xxrv. No. 5—8. The legends, which are much spoiled, supply each other’s deficiencies as follow ; I remark, that the name is to be read from within the inside, and not in the manner in which we usually read coins, by keep- ing the image on them in its natural position; this will be easily evident, if the letters are looked at in the usual way— No. 5 gives PFE PYI.lu ---- by) 6 cy) ----) PLA P ah, 4 bios PF --- ---lu Pree 33 8 >) ) PF YS * Mr. James Prinsep explains this, by discovering the word Pitasa after Balahara or Svalahara, and the difficulty does appear to be re- moved by this reading, which is quite reconcilable with the idiom of the language.---H. T. P. + There is only one letter preceding N, namely Y. Mr. Mionnet reads likewise YNAA®MEPPOY, and adds a Sic? Description de médailles antiques supplément, Tome viu. p. 506. I only got this work, while print- ing my book. I am sorry to add, that the reading of the native legends is not only not advanced by the representations there exhibited, but the legends, which we may read without difficulty in the representations of — them, given by Messrs. Raoul-Rochette and Prinsep, are perverted in an in- distinct web of confused strokes. ‘The false classification might be passed over, as it would not cause great impediment to inquiry, but I have taken sufficient pains with this work, to dare to assert, that to try to decy- pher anything with certainty from those copies would be labour in vain. & 1840. | From Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 365 I have already before discussed tHe orthography of dhddhdré, here it differs only in that it is placed before the word king. By comparing the four specimens, we observe, that the name consists only of five native characters, and also that it ends in 6. The first letter @ of the word cannot be but a vowel in its initial form, and according to the course of the language, in other instances, we should have to adopt an e for vy. As, however, the letter 3 in the name Eukratides was fixed for this, the sense of both letters becomes doubtful; for » being e, J would be u, and vice versd. I would rather adopt y for %, keeping the signification e for 1; for we found above » must be a vowel, which we know cannot be e, as e is never written in the line, while in the Greek the equivalent was v. The symbol » often occurs in the legends of Manikyala, and is certainly genuine. No. 22. Between y and 6 there are merely three letters for the three consonants d-ph-r, commencing the syllables, which we ought to admit, if the name was Yndopherres; in this case the n, preceding d, is dropped according to the rule. Also the second symbol is a real d upon one specimen; upon the second is a character, which appears indeed to be corrupt, but a corruption rather of n than d. If Ynadpherres be considered as the name, though the language of the coins would absorb d into ph, yet it would not express by any legible mark the d, so absorbed. We are here also left in the dark ; but as d is much more certain than n, I shall at once de- cide in favour of d. Therefore yda stands for the first half. Then follows %; € being expressed by e, we must con- sider it as denoting phi; but we above found p for ¢ in Phi- loxenos, and shall do the same in Kadphises. The tolerably distinct coin of Kadphises has, however, (As. Trans. Vol. rv. Pl. xxxvitt. No. 3, as with Tod. Pl. x11. No. 10,) the form i for pi; here the little cross line is perhaps meant to give the force to p as f. Our *® is entirely different from it; what might be taken for the mark of a vowel, is no e, and could at the most be u3; this will not advance us a step further. On the other hand % has a great similarity with the initial letter of Eukratides, and as @ is probably written in the line, according to the analogy of 6, we might read here 306 Lassen on the History traced [No. 100. a, and consegently yda: then would f be ph, and it has indeed the same cross line with the phi of Kadphises, but above a rounded, and not an angular shape; still I confess, I am by no means Satisfied of the reading ydéfo. But let us waste no more time and paper upon this bar- barian chieftain, and rather wait for information from others. We finally come to the last of those rulers, who shall here occupy us, namely Kadphises; Mr. Raoul-Rochette has bap- tized him Mokadphises. The reason for calling him Kadphises, is founded, as Mr. Prinsep remarks, As. T. V. p. 553, upon the fact, that Kadaphes is met with as a correspondent name upon other coins. And if that Scythian was called Kadphis, Kadphises would be a true Greek accommodation of the word, while the native language must either absorb d, whence Kapisa upon the coins, or to preserve d, it must separate this letter from ph by an intervening vowel. But as Kadaphes occurs without mo, the first supposition is more valid. Upon his coins appear either the more simple legend— BASIAEY=> OOHMO KAA®IZH>,* OOH-- MO KAA®IZH® or BAZIAEYS BASIAEON ZOTHP METAS OOHMO (OOKMO) KAA®ISHS}. The evidently barbarian word oohmo probably is the first part of the royal name, or a title. Mr. K. O. Mueller has proposed the very acute conjec- ture of reading Ovohemo or Ohovemo.t The native writing upon the coins of Kadphises seems always to present the complete title, or perhaps something more, for it is so small, and in the representation so indistinct, that we cannot derive any certain information but from examining the ~ coins themselves, under the magnifying glass. Mr. Prinsep, who had the coins before him, has given the legend$ AWEerTMAMVATANU YY — — Wa TPLTEYTVY I will compare this with the representations of the coins for the purpose simply of pointing out the name. * As, Trans. 1v. Pl. xxxvi1. No. 1 No. 3 R. R. I. No. 22, Journ. des Sav. 1834, No. vi. + As. Trans. rv. Pl. 631. R. R. I. No. 28 ditto. { Goettinger Gel. Anz. 1838, p. 240. § As. Trans. rv. Pl. 632. ’ 1840. | From Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 367 First, Mahdrdjé is evident. In the next word the third as well as the sixth character must be different. It cannot be discovered from the scrawl upon the drawings. It must be PAVIN, rqddirdé. Then we have to expect P7En, tédhdré (deliverer) ; ; and this seems indeed to be the next word, though in the foregoing legend it appears to be placed again at the end; £ has been already found used in common with €, and if + drops its small line on the right hand, we have: [P]7é". But the same word seems to recur at the conclusion. Then must follow Pou, great ; for the second figure in Mr. Prinsep’s copy occurs upon the coin, Journal des Sav. No. vir. x; also As. Trans. Vol. rv. Pl. xxxvui1. No. 3, it is therefore mahi or mahi; _ this resembles an Indian title, perhaps mahipati, (lord of the earth). Thus we are quite at a loss, where to look for the beginning of OOHMO. The ma of this word, however, is distinct, and fixed by the coins; the preceding sign, though indistinct itself, has the mark of e upon the coin, As. Trans. 1v. Pl. xxxviir. No. 3, just as e, was before substituted for 3; dima accords not with the Greek; it would rather be 1, ha. But this is doubtful, and for the two preceding syllables, OO can only hereafter show the proper reading, instead of the two 7.* But there is no P attached to ma, viz., no termination, for which reason ma rather appears to belong to the name, and not this alone, but likewise the preceding, so that the whole OOHMO perhaps was an element of the compound name. My design was merely to prove this probable. In the name itself the copy erroneously gives “\ for the * of the coins, consequently pi, or phi. We know already ™ as denoting s; the next letter, however, is not a distinct P upon any coin, it is rather like t, and as I have above mentioned, it might here be read td dhdré. We might presume, that Kadphis *See at page 646, vol. vi. the entire reading of the long Bactrian legend of the coins of Mokadphises---“‘ Maharajasa rajadhirajasa sabatrahca ihacha Mahiharasa dhi Mokadphisasa Nandata.”’ “WEePnA hy ZPIMsuf UIP PAIZLT Aa1ru “Of the great sovereign, the king of kings, both here and every where seizing the earth, &c. Mokadphises the saviour.---H. T. P. 368 Lassen on the History traced (No, 100. was to be read without any flexion, as other coins exhibit Kadagec. The less reason is there then to connect mo, which has no flexion, with Kadphises. It is evident, that much is here left to be explained, but chiefly the word which has been proved superfluous, whether it be in the middle or on the end. We shall likewise mention the two symbols #* and f, No. 23 and 24, as wanting confirmation. The most ancient coins, on which appear the characters hitherto discussed, come down to about the year 180—160. B. c. The kings Yndopherres and Kadphises probably reigned in the first century A.c. S -- - EDDY, - andBASIAEQS STHPOSSY EPMAIOY. We have here an ©ntirely foreign word Z=THPOZ, If this, 370 Lassen on the History traced [No. 100. as Mr. Prinsep conjectures with the utmost probability, is to be understood as TWTNPOG, it proves, that the whole literary heritage of the Greek era had been completely transferred, when these coins were stamped, to the hands of barbarians. We likewise cannot explain ZY by the instrumentality of the Greek language. The reverse presents the following :— wv. No. 9 V3S~ONEPAPPHAVSTS+ 27 Santelli MMR aa > aa SbyP tH With regard to the last word, the second symbol is nothing but a disfigured h ; the v too is quite distinct, the non-existent e is probably exhibited by the coin tv. Pl. xxiv No. 13 as before Vv. I therefore read Uhavima, and look for this word likewise upon the coins of Kadphises*. At the commencement there are again two symbols, but they differ, as well at this place as upon the foregoing legends, too much one from each other, so as to allow us to do any thing with them. Then follows again Kagola the word following would be read Kavé, according to the last copy, and it bears therefore the appearance of the nominative, but Uhavima not having got this termination, it becomes doubtful, whether we have to admit the flexion, which we took at other places for a regular termination. As Kagola and Uhavima evidently are no Indian words, we must consequently no longer expect the same termination. With regard to Kavé we might be reminded of the word in Zend for king, viz. Kavd, Kavdém;+ but for the present it would be a * Mr. Prinsep has thus represented the legend rv. p. 347.--- POTAP Tor PPA dh WU His division is certainly false. I had his own representations copied, and we shall look in vain for p on the end of Kagala upon the coins. The h in Uhavima has the same form upon the coin below, p. 112. Mr. Jas. Prinsep’s last reading of this word is given in page 646 Vol. vir, and is as follows--- PO HYXPP, Varahima Kadphisasa.---H. T. P. t+ Burnoue Yasna tr. p. 447. 1840. | From Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 3/1 conjecture, entirely ungrounded, as we cannot at all explain the following; not even the name of Hermaios is to be dis- covered, and we should probably find extant the name of his Scythian conqueror, together with what corresponds to the strange, TY. Notwithstanding this obscurity, we may, however, derive some isolated facts from these coins; first, that the language is here no longer Indian. Thus Uhavima and Kagala do not admit of a natural and appropriate interpretation as Indian words. Both of them perhaps belonged to the Scythian language, and it appears cannot be explained, but with reference to the context. KOPANO agrees with the Indian dialect upon the Kanerkes- coins, which have PAO in place of the former Rajé; we can- not therefore allow of Koipavoc- Nor can it denote king or prince, used as it is in immediate connection with PAO, king. Therefore upon the Kadphises-coins, where XOPANO appears in juxta-position with KOZOYAO, the title of king, must be look- ed for, being probably KOZOYAO, king. As these Hermaios- coins have the word BaciWéwe, and give ornooc asa Greek word, viz. for swrnooc, we must expect to meet with an equivalent for deliverer upon them ; the plausible inference suggests itself, that Uhavima upon the reverse may be the Scythian word for owrno. To this interpretation it may be objected, that Uhavima, being the same with Oonpo in the great Kadphises legends, is observ- ed to follow cwrne, and that consequently it cannot be the same term, but rather some native epithet of the Kadphises. To this division belongs a third variety of Kadphises-coins, upon which ZAQOY is substituted for KOZOYAO ; this also is a term for king, probably not of Scythian origin; for it oceurs As. Trans. Vol. v. Plate xxxv. p. 553: XOPANOY ZAOOY KAAA®ES. I shall not undertake reading the native legend from the edited specimen, especially as Mr. Prinsep has promised to put together some other coins of this class. KOPANOY and ZA@OY are declined as Greek words, unless OY be not taken for a varied orthography of O: the barbarian name Kadaphes, on the other hand, is not declined. 3B 3/2 Lassen on the History traced [No. 100. Zafov calls to mind as well the Sanscrit Kshatir (man of the military caste) as Khshathra, the Zend word for king ; the r in this case would have been absorbed on account of the softer — dialect, while z was used for khsh (X) or rather for a softer pronunciation, perhaps sh as in Pilushino for Philoxenos. This interpretation being ascertained, we make the attempt at ex- plaining also in the same dialects the word KOPANO, or XO- PANO. Kirana (ray quasi, radiant) finally adopted by Mr. Prin- Sep, is not at all satisfactory, any more than Karana (to do) ~ but Karana also denotes man of impure caste, son of an impure Kshatrija couple, or according to the opinion of others, son of a Vaishcha by a Soodra woman, whose occupation — is the profession of a writer. By this interpretation we should have got two titles from Indian castes. But I am prevent- ed from acceding to it by the fact, that XOPANO occurs © with ZAQOY, and that the combination of the different — titles of this class of coins leads to owrne, as representing — the word KOPANO; for the title deliverer is adhered — to with such predilection by those Scythians, that we may ~ ordinarily expect this meaning, and as ZAQOY for king pro- — bably refers to a dialect, nearer related to Zend, I would rather — look for an interpretation to that language. Here, however, it appears, it is not to be discovered; for though garena is a word in Zend, the signification (brilliant) is not a proper one. The following, however, also speaks in favour of Zend. — By the title KOPANO a tie is formed between the Kanerkes- — coins, and those of the family of Kadphises, for both of them — are thus styled. But then the other words upon the Kanerkes- coins refer to a dialect, which indeed also contains reference — to India, but at the same time points at certain elements, more congenial to Iran. if While this class of coins, partly by the name Hermaios, — partly by the title owrne, and bythe combination of Greek and native legends, is linked together with the expiration of Greek dominion, it is also connected by the word KOPANO with the class of Kanerki coins of partly Scythian origin, the words of which, though not of the Greek language, are always written in Greek characters. The terms Zafov and KoZovAo le ’ a hy vi 1840.| from Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 3/73 as well as the form of characters, somewhat altered, are peculiar to it, whilst other coins with the name Kadphises present the characters, previously used. The real Kadphises coins have all symbols of worship of Siva, and the word oonuo, Uhavima, the Karano-Kadaphes, a Hercules. To comprehend all the palzographic and philological facts, re- fering to our investigation, we must, before entering upon the attempt at applying these coins to history, at least touch on some other relics of this writing. | § 7. The legends in the Topes. In the digging of the Topes, (s/oopas), which are so frequently discovered throughout the whole region, governed by the Indo- Scythian kings, and which were most probably destined for their ashes, some inscriptions are found in the same characters we have hitherto discussed, in a more running hand, however, and difficult to be read with accuracy. They are published by Mr. Prinsep, and I may refer to his accounts of them.* These inscriptions being important in more than one respect to our investigations, we should have made the attempt at their inter- pretation, if we could have done it, without departing too much from the subject, peculiar to this work. ; But this departure would have been necessary, for the writ- ing is more indistinct than that upon the coins, especially so the characters of the inscription, most ample and apparently most important. Though engaging therefore in tedious grammatical discussions, yet many things must have been left partly without any explanation, and partly under a mere doubtful interpretation, and from the decyphering, but partially successful, no profitable conclusion would have resulted, as respects the historical arrange- ment of the Indo-Scythian kings. Lastly, it would also have been necessary to have entered upon a consideration of the end, for which these remarkable architectural monuments themselves were ‘constructed, and to have examined the views, which a celebrated German scholar has pronounced concerning them. The topes * As. Trans. 11. Pl. xx. and Pl. xxx. It must be attributed to the inexperience of these characters at that time, that the inscriptions are reversed. raz) _—>-- 374 Lassen on the History traced [No. 100. are much better adapted to a separate treatise, which may be published in time. Here we shall merely call in ae the view under which these monuments are deemed Buddhist. Buddhistic coins, exhi- biting on the obverse the old Indian characters which occur on the columns of Asoka, and on the reverse those characters we are here illustrating, have been indeed discovered in India, but never in the topes. Hence appears it very surprising, that Buddhist kings should have had buried with them, various coins of the Romans, of the Sassanides, of the worshippers of Mithra, and ~ even such as allude to the worship of Shiva and Vishnoo, exclud- ing entirely (their own or) Buddhist coins. We shall take from these inscriptions only what is confirmed beyond doubt. They first prove, that the native characters, adopted upon the coins by the Greco-Indian kings, out of re- gard to their subjects, were not only retained under the govern- ment of the first Indo-Scythian, but also continued to the period of the Sassanides; for in the topes Sassanian coins, furnished with Pehlvi, and Deva Nagaree legends, are discovered among the coins of Kadphises, and Kanerki. The characters of our coins therefore were still in use under the Sassanides, even after the time when the Kanerkes dynasty had abolished the use of the characters upon the coins in their empire. The inscriptions, moreover, bear witness to the writing being” used for other purposes than for inscriptions on coins; probably, — however, by kings only of foreign descent, and who reigned on the borders of India. On this hereafter. Lastly, with regard to the language; as the termination 6 | frequently recurs, and the word Mahdrdjo* was discovered by Mr. Prinsep in the larger inscription of Manikyala, evidence is afforded, that we fall in here also with the Indian language; the inscription at Jellalabad contains. purely Indian words in Pracrit. Upon monuments of a later period than that of the Sassa- nides, no traces of the characters upon our coins have yet appeared. * As Trans. 11. pl. xxx1u. second line, rv. p. 336. 1840. | Jrom Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 375 § 8. Coins of Agathokles and Pantaleon. We may now turn to another class of coins, those namely of the kings, above mentioned. The coins of both of them have genuine Greek characters, and those of Agathokles must be numbered with the most beautiful coins, which have been pre- served, and belong to the most flourishing period of Greek art in Bactria, and the countries adjacent. Both kings hold to the simple title BaciAéwe, but have besides upon the reverse of some coins, legends in the most ancient shape of Indian charac- ters, of the very same shape which is discovered in Pracrit upon the laths, thus’ styled, or columns with Buddhistic inscriptions in Pracrit. The merit of having decyphered these most ancient Indian cha- racters, is also due to Mr. Prinsep, and I have here only to give an account of the manner he has applied them to these coins.* The Agathokles coins (R. R. I. No.1, As. Trans. 111. Pl. rx. No. 17. v. Pl. xxxv. No. 9) present the following signs: HA OTL € The penultimate alone is indistinct; Mr. Prinsep presumes it to be 2, therefore Agathuklajég, which he takes for the Greek genitive ” AyaoxXsove 5 I should rather prefer &, or jog. Still it appears strange to meet here with a Greek rather than a native form for the Greek. That the Greek ¢ should be expressed by Sf, or j may be explained by suggesting, that the final ¢ was received as a media (sound) like the zin Zend, to which j would be the most appropriate Indian letter. These coins had another word over the female Bacchanal, of which no undisputed characters have been preserved ; it is perhaps, as Mr. Prinsep supposes, a fragment of rdja. : In the name we observe also a mode of representing vowels purely Indian, viz. a, not expressed by asign, and u, annexed below to the consonant, as also the ligature ke, which is com- pletely Indian. | Of Pantaleon have only been discovered coins with legends, likewise in the same Sanscrit characters, As. Trans. vol v. Pl. xxxv. No. 8, 111. Pl. 1x. No. 18, excepting the first letter, the name * As, Trans. vi. p. 465. 3/6 Lassen on the History traced [No. 100. is preserved: L°AJd°& Pantalavanta; the termination is wanting, and what Mr. Prinsep has supplied for it, ta, appears to me unsatisfactory. Here, as with Agathokles, the hiatus in cov and ¢o is amended by the insertions of a semivowel, in the latter j, and here v, as above, in the names Dijamidd, Lisijé. Besides, the use of the Anusvara must be noticed, as representive of nasal sound. Upon the Pantaleon-coins, moreover, are only ille- gible fragments of the title; but two of these symbols lead to rdja, preceded by something else, which perhaps formed’ originally mahdrdjé, “* the supreme king.” To the historical illustration of these coins, the only ones upon which Greek and purely Indian characters are put together, we shall afterwards return. Sect The Kanerkes Coins. Lastly, come we to a very numerous class of Indo-Scythian coins, having only Greek characters, which seldom represent Greek words, but ordinarily give in Greek letters, either un- Grecian regal titles, or names of gods. They are of very differ- ent types; on the obverse, either a standing male figure in the dress of a Tartar, or a bust only; or else one mounted on an elephant; or, lastly, a figure, resting on a couch, with the legs crossed one over the other, after the fashion of the East, the head surrounded by a glory. The legend sometimes BASIAEYS, sometimes BASIAEYS BAZIAEQNKANEP KOY, or PAO. NANO PAO KANHPKI KOPANO or PAO- KANHPKI, upon those with the bust PAONANO PAO OHPKI (OOHPKI or XI) KOPANO3; upon the others the same titles, with an illegible name. The reverses have various figures of gods, together with their names in Greek characters, but seldom in the Greek language, but commonly in a native one. : This result, which I have taken from Mr. Prinsep’s laborious investigations, may suffice for the present purpose ; I also refer to him for the fact, (As. Trans. tv. p. 630) that the coins never ~ present legends in native characters. I call the king Kanerki, because he so styles himself, when he assumes native titles. The form Kavnpxov appears to have ari- 1840. | rom Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 3/7 sen from the mere misunderstanding of the Scythian die-founders. Observing upon the former coins ordinarily the Greek genitive in ov, on the reverse in the native language the nominative in 6, which did not sound very differently, they overlooked the different application. Kavnexov therefore appeared to them the proper form, to be placed by the Greek titles, even when the use of the nominative was then adopted for the Greek legend. Thus is Kavnpxov put by Pacirevc, though Kanerko could be only properly used, when accompanied by Mahdrdjo. I have already previously professed my ignorance concerning KOPANO ; it is singular, that owrnp, according to our con- jecture, corresponding to that word, never occurs, to my know- ledge, with the word PactA “Bas 0} JNO pUe}s 0} spassaa Surydeisayoy £ pxeajseny wos [Tenbs ev 1oyye SUIsvOIOUT oTes "WA PIY “SOYIL; LT UTM Burp $speasoyur ye urer AAvoy YIM “SA ANA Wor strenbs prey Jaye] {seq Woy oppprat “GSA 10 “Sqy 0} “NAW Wory soyes ysory yred ysatq|‘°°° ‘auueyg Nog ‘1oyoue yWI"* °° “A ‘dq ‘ouer ‘jas ATIO]soM SuoIs oy] JO yuNoIoe wo ‘sertMTeq |*"*° ee cree °° §seITU]ed juIog uo royoue ye uoOU}Y ‘urer pue ATTenbs “|SA 0} “| Woz pulp |JUlog pue pouUBYY °§ TeeAjoq Suizmig|** “A ‘qd ‘astoyeeg “ured YIM ‘Apnop pue spurm Apioyseq, Suosjg] ‘septut Z “NAA Aong joo ‘jouueyo-pryy}** “A “d “euysiy “TS oY} 0} Suruayeaig} pure ‘urer pue pura jo styenbs Aaeay ut preg Axoa Sutmoyq yystupiypy ‘epes Aveoy v@ Jo aouecvodde Arosa YIM ‘aules oy} JosuNS “AES ey} 0} Apnojo pur ‘oures a4} UOON “AN °F “A WOT PULA ‘oUIes aI 4G STTAep ye pue ‘premise Woy "W'v f Je SuIseetoUT ‘ured pue pur jo strenbs Aavoy YIM “GAN 0} “ Wosy prey Surmoyg "w'v|"*** ° ae vere orVeIG TMQ!" A TA WOOP! — gooy DON MOT “oUIT} [LATO “MOTFENITS | ‘sjessaa Jo soueny | “aed 2 SS | SS a SO SSS eel “syeUley pue “leyyea AA “SPUTAA ee ee es ee ee ee EIS yee er arg : “pes ; = ‘ [No. 100. A Second Memoir with reference to 424 *Aloyseq OIG “JYSUpIP, “AN WeLopoy[ *W'a g “SULVIOPOT] “Wd FP *alojoq se WOON, ‘uUteI JO Stamos yUONbaTZ YITA ‘Aypenbs pue Autoojs ‘yrep “NW 0} “Sqy wor sozoaaq ATIoyseq oeIEpoyy|*° ‘uorye}g Iouuy ‘1oyoue WI °° ° AT a ‘odo "AST PULAA "Kd LE ‘premjseq oy} 07 soouvieedde Sutuezeoryy Atos pure ‘sjpenbs [euorse900 YIM “Go Woy sezoorq o7eI “q2aS "A L'a -apout 19330] § Aypenbs Azo o[pptyl “ASA 9} “NOW Soze01q Sto aed ysarq| ‘Ap1993v'T *JouUeyYD YINog AoYoue zy] °° "A ‘d ‘ouve “VySt] Sur[ey “AS PUI “Wd ¢ “SuTVeQe puTA sv OF FV ‘“SUOYIL} GT UL SeITW[eg JUIOg UO "WY G63 “PY oy} Surmnp PLVAYINOG oY} 0} pOog -ToyJVOM SUIMOTY PUL "|S 0} “YN Wor ofqeire, | ‘Wed uToyIION ‘SeATU[eT JULOT HO|** °4 gq Sastoyras | “Apnoyo pur “q@g 0} yseq sezaarq *SqdS "T “dT “MIMS WS] L0yVT “YS 0} 4seq ulory ures yim ‘Aypenbs syred arpprur pur ysarq\Aong jooy ‘1oyour ye pue ‘ SutzinIDI*> *\ ‘gq ‘euysUy “AS oY} 0} Surusywery) pue sipenbs Aavay yyIM “q@g pur ‘ACT 0} ‘Y WON} Ysory SULMOTG “IY Stuprur 0} *Wwea H |G 04} 0} Suruozeerq} pue syjenbs Suissed Aavoy YyIA “NY 0} “GY WLOIy YSory SUIMOTG WOON, Op “W'V\** = *” ** HOTVIG TOMNO|***A "T*7.“Wooveg) “6E8T “AON, WILE ee eS et See ea ees ES SEES SESS SEER (SRD ee | SSSA RY ES (ES SE SY SD SS | oy cy “OUIN [TAL *Syleuloy pur ‘1ay}eo AA ‘SPULAA *UOT}ENPS “s[essaA fosoureny ‘aed rt re a 425 the Theory of the Law of Storms. 1840.] “pura "ASS WS] Wed 1yjery *preaysery oy} 0} pojtys ATUapplis puIM oyy wd |e aia = ie "MOMS “WINg “YZT Iv “Aured pue spurm “AS opppruz ‘spur Aproysery YSI] wed ysurq|Aong jooy “GAS “I A toyouejzy|*- “A “q “euysuy | ‘qed 4s UL UreL pue spends YIM “Gqg pue “AS 0} "|S sezae1q WYSITI] °° os oe ‘auueyy yyNog}"* “A fF “esxoyveg "pIVMjseG 0} palooA PUIM “W'd Z°AAG Woy sppenbs Aavoy “wpe "YT “yynog 0} persvea pur ‘Ayenbs ‘woe -yZy ‘Apnoyzo pue ezee1q “ANY ayetoporiq}<° ee ‘“oe}g Louuy “ioyouedy{** “A Ty ‘odozy “MSS pue “g 0} |] Worx urer snordos qytm ‘sypenbs Aep oy} ynoySnoryy|>* mag yoge A "Tq ‘YSIOM Jopug| sss “A *q “ours pue "Sg 0} “TS WSUupu TY ‘Wd F WS pum GystpAeq ‘soouereadde poy -jasun pue sijenbs suissed q}IM *g pue “AQ 0} “| S}eLapoul UOOT 0} “W*V| °° oe ca ‘uote}G 10INO}| “A “Ty ‘uWoorveg ; ‘6881 a NT es | pe Oe nn ee etm eer apes | ees a EE ER SE "oWIy [IAT ‘ayeq *syremloyy pue ‘roo AA “SPUTAA *SUOTJENITS | ‘spassaA jo soureNy 426 A Second Memoir with reference to (No. 100. Barometrical Observations, Honorable Company’s Floating Light Vessel * Hope,’’ Captain Hudson, Lat. 21° 26', Long. 88° 17’. Date. Time. Bar. Ther. l4th Nov. | 8a.m. 29.95 72 |Moderate NE. hazy. Noon, 96 76 |Ditto Northerly, ditto. 8 P.M. 95 80 |Light breeze from Eastward. » 15th Nov. 8 A.M. 29.91 75 |Moderate ENE. squally to Southward. Noon, 92 76 |Strong ENE. cloudy. 4 P.M. 86 76 |Ditto ditto ditto. 8 P.M. 92 76 |Moderate NE. and squally. 16th Nov. 8 a.m. | 29.90 75 |First ENE. and squally. Noon, 92 77 =|Strong Hasterly breezes and unsettled. 8 P.M. 92 78 |N.Easterly winds decreaging fast. 17th Nov. 9S ae 99.94 79 Moderate Easterly winds, gloomy, and squally weather. Noon, 99 78 |Ditto ditto, thick gloomy weather. 4 P.M. 88 77 ~=| Ditto ditto ditto. 8 P.M. 92 77 =+‘|Ditto NE. cloudy. 18th Nov. S a.m. | 29.94 77 +‘|Moderate Easterly, and cloudy weather. Noon, 98 79 =| Ditto ditto ditto. 92 78 (Light Southerly breezes, cloudy. Meteorological Register kept at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, 1839. Nov. |Bar. Noon.| Ther. oO 12 29.994 SILO Nise wet cae Cloudy, faint Sunshine, 13 30.018 84.5" ING Aho ee Clear, 14 29.970 © S4.0:ScNeser. . cme Partial Haze, 15 952 86.0 |E. ... . .|Cumuli and Haze, 16 972 81.0 |EbS... . .|Cloudy, 17 976 82.1 |S. .... .|Cloudy, 427 the Theory of the Law of Storms. 1840.] : WSuprwort [[y pue ‘wd Sutseasouy the winds and weather, &c. at ise _ each position, at Noon, Civil time, of the day to which they refer. sour Te “AL NN 2 wolg syyenbs ‘urer 4yueysu0g§ "AON Y}[] JO woou sours Sutsvei9 Q -uy ‘ayes B Jo soueieadde *w “vg § “SyIVUO WY For more convenient reference, and as marking some striking con- tabular views, which compr trasts, I have collected the whole of the foregoing logs and reports, with the exception of that from the Baramahl Survey, into the follow- ing i, YILT 92 YIZ WO4, er ee | | |] | 66'6Z GG Q8 29 ra coon es ‘aurys -uns Jurey ‘Apnopg “Ni **** VILNOTYO LY 18 "| GhS8 | 8p6L |°° ‘Apnop -g oF'AN]*t** **“qyeuIns -onpf JO ‘aa100g 1¥ ms ; "* | $888 | GOST | “ezaetq Ysarq “NQg)*’ — (‘r1eureayg ‘QO ‘H) ‘soduen eeec oe ‘UOOsSuO TW, ‘AN Yseoig “qN| ‘wejyede8ezt, iv GOT6 | 6 &T ‘azeaiq Ysolg “ANG ‘eryeung cZ G6 | 89 91 (Sao. AIAN wWOly UISVILOUT SazaaIq “PT | QUE A aLULYSe YD) 68 : 00S) eae Goa aur 1 Lees ‘OUlT AS] “prgypeg jo oxnq : vs : 02 06 | Of IT |** ‘urea pue syyenbs Sac. Aavoy ye aA "MI ttt? A lense "ASE STe ee. Ochuaediere Oteeiaae oe acl SoZ (220 10 peer suoyg j°°** Sesnyjory SUG ——= ee Soriano i ‘sooeyd pur ‘IOUT, ‘dure “leq |°H udT IN Je'T | 107 eo MW pue pulMm s[asse A Jo saule N "GERT Swaquaaony a qobuag fo ling ayz ur ar JO! 6 “6E8T “AON “UIZT u00 NT *ounry [LATO ‘ayeq, | a ee ee , A Second Memoir with reference to [No. 100. 428 crs “1oyoue FY L *TasseA SutAaAInG “o Z ‘qeAyy Url 1oyoue yy 308 TEES TLY ‘qeAyy ye 1oyoue yy e 10} Snus [je {eves ysty Aso ak “jayyeam peq tof Surredarg ‘ayes ev jo aouereedde abe 08°63 “eg FqBIU -pi “Sq stenbs Aavoy “wd 18 “ZUISIL VS O[GeLopIsuog ‘sjvesdo} payoor ajqnopsspuyy ‘eyes Suryoroad -de ue so oouereadde Aroag ‘somnuIuE (0% JO CT IOJ spuo | -ureaq 1oy U0 Sug 04} SUIArT jenbs Aavoy e& “N'Y TT eer ee aS ES ES EE, SS SS ee | moe es | eens See *syIewley G6 06 00 06 eee - os ‘TOY | ‘durg) weg | “uoT) “NWT a ee | ee et es ve i ee Sieh eRe ae ZZ soecce ‘rayyeom reayo ‘yION pocieye re © ‘VLLADIVO W BOS -* Quy pute oye1ep -ow sazaeiq ‘(NN pue“aNl**’’ °° “A TW ‘uooveg 8 12 le area Aaeoy WIM “yWON|** 788s) 8% fadoseTeg IV 92 1z |°°°* ‘Apnojo pue oyetopour “|N|** °* ‘sseineH ‘gd ‘O°H Sper |" cues “Toyyea auy pue ozeeiq Ysaly “”N| ‘“Weumssne Jo ‘sa100g FV OT 02 ee ‘Suru9}ea1yy “q}10 N eceevoce “sro yu y Ss Te) HH 00 GT | ‘89z001q eyeLopouUr NWO aAN| "°°" *° oo: * oe Qs, digas: deo. *premyseny ay} wory Suruozeoiy} soyjeopy|?? °° “oztAdtayug “49 °O “H IZ OT eseee e@ees ‘Loyyeom AunoojS yzep ‘soye3 prey aNale**’ °° “sesuey IS "OH shop ai seats ‘MOOSUO| YSalf “APN |** °° °° ‘meyedesezi A 1V HEL cates ‘gaye TSol Meer Nia iee es ae “eyeuUNng °S°Iy ae, CT eoceoe e@ceo ‘Kapdry *SqO ON|'**° “ANT 0} SutAiea qeeny| = Queyoleyy ateuysed “purpeso y “progpeg Jo oxnq ayeS Suoays ‘Apnopo “Abs "a NNI|*° °° coos 6P PI ‘ured 29 sqrenbs “Sqq ol “agsittte*° CLCLeicse 2 suols cummolg = Aq giesmawis =? ‘quonsyeg *S “4q zeez | ‘styenbs Aavoy eyes ysoay “QN|'**° eee ‘esnyaly | asin “19Y}C2 AA PUL SPUT AA ‘sa0e] q pure spasse A JO soule Ny oe “6E8T ‘AON WET WOON satel i EN ‘aqeq 429 the Theory of the Law of Storms. 1840. "preMYyyNog wWoIy Ajtayseq Suoss yystu 7V JTeMs £9Z991gG “PIBMISEY 0} SUTIOI A “apisyno vas AAvay pue ojes v Jo soouvaveddy “qeAty IV “qvéyy IV “pas AAvay *S 0} ‘YS pum ‘Wd [ “SulIvapo AjjueIedde sAsyVeOA\ “W'd QO] }@ paouUsUIUOD a[ey) *T]OmMsS 2 YIM “YS oy} ut couereadde Ayjenbg "MN PUue “MNN 0} SUIIO0A “Wd ‘[resdoj-ureul pajaar osopo rapuN “MOTYVATASGO ON ‘07 SuLs]T—vas ssolo snopueutery, |’ 0L°6% IoyeuIOX ‘TayWVOM peq 1oj poredoig BG ‘KA F "eas posnjuoo Aavay W “YONUL SULINOge] JassaA ‘Pas YStTYy AIO A Vas 64 £08 Gs “IOUL "duirg 06°66 02°66 $9°66 08°66 49°66 "eg G6 88 4088 16 88 OL 28 96 06 Ig 16 oF 98 8° 66 G& 88 89 66 8& 88 96 €8 06 68 6h 68 1é $8 06 06 FE 66 96 16 FO 1¢ 86 IG 06 1é 0G GZ SP 61 OL 06 OL 0G OL 06 LE ST GP LL OL ZT 80 61 0€ FL GE £1 ‘| ‘Woy | "NIT ave ese ‘ozey [ered “YON |*** “es ‘ayeIopout sezaerq ATAIYIION |**° = ‘sozaoiq yuesee[d “ANN Jnoqy|*** ‘ouy pue "NGAN|* * ‘gguervodde popyjosuy “AN yoqy')"* “+ — ‘Kpnoja pue ozaeiq Apeaig “AN |*"* re ‘97901q SuO4s ‘YTON Noqy|*** ues ‘{pnojo pue oyeiepoul “WGN |*"* ane ‘Apnoyo pue a[Qeiite a, “HS 0} “ANN ree BO mo pue Syerepoln “7TN|°*° “489A 0} Suruazeery} pue “AN 0} “MNN 34907)" ‘sezeoiq Apeois "(NW|""’ oe ‘pIeMSeY WOT, SUIMEZOIILT, |°°* eee oe eee eee eee “* ‘oyyevem AULOOTS yep “|S oqy)"* one ‘AIS Asseiq ‘uoosuoul “WNT Yyserq\°* TOON 7e ytodar ON |*"* * UTBI YIM 9Z901Q SUISBOIOUL "NW |*" “- ‘srrenbs pue ares Aavayy “t}ION|""* ere ‘soyed SUISvOLOUL “SW |**° RP cl 4 “Toya AULI03S pue sores prey ‘ENN jnoqy|*** ao ae “DIEM seq wo sysns Aavoy ut Sulmo[g|** eee ene eee Ue pue Apnopo sss ** A Ty ‘odoyy eecee eeee ‘Aqyenbs “qo eeue ee "A | ‘sues "SBATU D ‘seers -Suryeqe ‘agg moqy|'s <'** “A “q ‘esxoyeag -jeq jog wed uswyON FOS ; i ‘Aypenbs aZ901q YSolf “WS 0} “AI °° 20 "Ad “euysuyy & qe 38 t0 1Z eer. eece eoce ‘stpenbs S Aaeoy Sutssed “NG 0} Wseqisc's ‘uooReg *A “T “y = C664 | €6 88 00 1% _ ‘Kpnojo ‘azee1q ysedy "A Qal***° “aug “auojspre yy, = 82 P8°8z | OT £8 82 IZ pee SUISeALD9P “AS 0} "“AANI'°*° *< ‘aloseled 4V i ‘soyouy 7¥| 8 66'6z | 9S 06 0616 {°° eg pre spur Jysry “HNO ee “sseryeH SD °H ee cP cs SP Gl Seite os eae Wool UNG "°° roe ‘aal00g 1V a COLBe= 66.06. St" aie SUSU SM. Sie eee 2 UOaET Ss ‘W'¥ g ye Sujeqe oueowin yy sis ie. 9Z901q SUOS “AV S| ** ee ‘usen’ uerpuy 3 9% £8 7p Lt °° is ‘ayetopoul yynog|*s*> °° ‘weyedeseziA 1V : 91%8 | IS9I “Suryeropoyy]**** ‘esuts0r yo -s ‘asnoyjyysiry purrs] doy yy = "W'YV P Oj pelsey ‘Aavoy oueoLun Fy BO 0 ‘OuTyeALa pou *premyjnog ee eo “eyjooTNUTeG 1W oS 0€ 68 | OF 6I "Wed “10% 3 = ~29M JU 0} SUIZeIopou ‘oqq|** ee eIyeUING *g “yy eeoce eos ‘auy papayas ‘aS ecse esee ee2ee ‘Aopdiy = 84 26 LS OV een eee te ie ‘AS 'ASH|"*** «= “ueyolaq o1owYyseD S “UIPT ouy 9OUTS prem . eeeaeeee € eaeonece 4 QS -yytoyy ay 0} QQ Jo Juouno i. GOO | Sh 68 | SP 0Z sae Ist] Aptoyseq PLP JOPANG) — -pogy w co 98 ee Ii eeee C8 ee 9Z901q ouy. “AS eevee @ee0 ‘esnyyory “AON UW : ‘U0ON, q i fo} ] fo} OUT} TIATO “SYIOUIO IY ‘oy| dure} ‘veg |'q@ ‘uoT| “N ‘Jey “19YJVO AA PUL SPUTAA ‘saoeTd pu sjassa A JOsemeN| ‘a}eq N of = lig a NR ce et D_ a " oe ar a 1840. | the Theory of the Law of Storms. 433 HurRICANE OFF THE Preparis, 2ls¢ Nov. 1840. A little hurricane experienced by the ‘“‘ Cashmere Merchant,” between the Island of Preparis and Point Negrais, is one of singular interest, for _ it much reminds us of the smaller whirlwinds seen on shore in tropical countries. By projecting the vessel’s track and drift, it appears that this vortex—and it clearly was one—could not at the most have exceeded sixty miles in breadth. Its centre must have passed very close to the ship. The direction in which it was travelling, also differs from that of the preceding storm, being about NbW., and in this it approximates to the September one. We have no farther notice of this storm from any quarter. I have marked it upon the chart, and the following is the extract from the ‘ Cashmere Merchant's” log. Extract from the log book of the Bark “‘ Cashmere Merchant,” Capt. 7 F. G. Warren ; reduced to Civil time. On 20th Nov.—At 5 a.m. the Island of Preparis bore SE. about — five or six miles distant. To noon calm. p. m. strong breezes and heavy squalls ENE. till midnight ; standing to the NNW. 3032 miles, and to the NNE. 142 miles till midnight. 21st November.—Midnight, strong gales EbN. with a heavy sea. Noon increasing to heavy gale at eastward, veering to north. 1 p. m. Wind North to NE. At 5, p.m. heavy gales. At 9 Pp. m. wind flew round to the westward, being about NW. with a complete hurricane, and cross-sea ; vessel thrown on her beam-ends, all the canvas blown from the yards, five shrouds of the main, and three of the fore rigging being carried away, and water up to the hatches on deck ; cut away top- €. gallant mast and yards, and sails from the yards to save the ship; , sea making a clear breach over her. At midnight wind west ; vessel lying on her broadside, working much, and making much water. At 5 p.m. the wind was WSW. having moderated from about 2 a.m. Noon, wind NE. bore away for Coringa being leaky, and too much damaged to reach Rangoon. Lat. by observation 16° 4’ N. PPLE LP PPPPLIIIGI DO We have now to consider what is the amount of the knowledge to be deduced from these data,—how it agrees with the theory, —and how the evidence goes to prove the track which I have laid down for the Coringa storm. I may refer here to what I have said in the preceding memoir, p. 585, Journal of the Asiatic Society, for June 1839, on the 434 A Second Memoir with reference to [No. 100. subject of the uncertainty which besets us, either from the state of the weather, or other causes, rendering it impossible to ascertain exactly the ship’s position, or the true direction of the wind. I may add here, that we should further consider, that in a circle of 320 miles circum- ference, or about 100 in diameter, each point of the compass includes an area of ten miles, which may be considered as a trifling error in a vessel’s reckoning in bad weather, so that if the wind be marked a point wrong, and the vessel’s situation also be only ten miles wrong, and both these errors the same way, we may thus find a considerable discrepancy appearing where none really existed. I mention this for the information of those, who might perhaps look for more mathe- matical exactness than our data will allow, and because I am desirous of shewing how important correct observations are to us in tracing out, step by step, the truths or probabilities which we deduce from them. It will be more convenient to consider this storm under the follow- ing heads. I.—The formation of the vortex, or circle of the tempest, and evidence for its form. II.—Its size. III.—Its rate of progression. I.—The formation of the vortex, or circle of the tempest, and evidence for its form. , We find that on the 12th at noon, (Diagram No. I.,) the Duke of Bedford, Balguerie, Sumatra, and Cashmere Merchant, were all on the eastern side of the Bay, between Lat. 11° 30’ and 17° 00' N. and long. 90° 00’ E. and 92° 30’ E. Of these, we find the Sumatra with the wind at ESE., and the Balguerie with it at_ WNW. both with a strong breeze, and from this last being opposed to the usual monsoon current of that season (which is from the northeast- ward) we may suppose a vortex to be commencing. The monsoon seems to have been blowing steadily all across the bay, at least from the lat. of 14°, for we find on this day the Arethusa two degrees to the eastward of Coringa, and the Ganges Steamer in the middle of the Bay, in about 18° 30’ N., all with the winds between East and ENE. We may then conclude that the disturbing force, what- ever this was, had only began to operate below the latitude of 19°, and near the Andaman Islands, and that its centre, deduced from the positions of the Balguerie and Sumatra, was about where I have placed 1840. | the Theory of the Law of Storms. 435 it for that day; in say 13° 30’ N. and 92° E. The SE. wind experi- enced by the “‘ Duke of Bedford” is scarcely an anomaly, because of her proximity to the Andaman Islands; the mountains of which, being some of them 2000 feet high, may have operated, as ail high ranges of land seem to do, by deflecting the winds into a different course. I have therefore rejected her log for that day. The ‘“ Cashmere Merchant” seems also out of the influence of the vortex, and too near the coast of Tenassarim. ‘The centre, if there was one, might have been further north or south, but I have preferred placing it nearly on a line with the general direction of the tempest on the following day. Could we have obtained from these ships a single observation when in Calcutta, so as to test the accuracy of their barometers by a standard, these ob- servations would have been far more valuable ; but as I have before ob. _ served p. 420, I could only obtain this in one instance out of about thirty applications made, while collecting information for the present memoir. 2. On the 13th we find the circle in some degree formed, for we have, as will be seen by the Diagram No. II, and tables Wind. The Ganges,.... ENE. .. Hard gale, high sea, The Bedford, ... ESE. .. Heavy squalls and Bar. falling, al@uerie, 22)... SW. -- Blowing strong, sea rising, and with their positions on the chart, this will give the centre of the vortex, if there was one, about where I have placed it, in lat. 13° 42' N. long. 89° 47’ E. _ The ‘‘Sumatra’ seems to have run out of the influence of the | vortex to the northward, and having no barometer, we cannot refer to | _ its height. The storm can scarcely be said on this day to have reached _ the ‘‘ Arethusa,” “ Ripley,” and “ Rosalind.” | It is worth noticing, that the three ships first mentioned had all been running fowards this point from noon of the 12th, and the changes of wind which they had since that date are exactly such as ought to occur if a vortex had been forming, moving onward in the direction laid down, and they had been running into it. We have for the Barometers, that of— The Ganges,.... 29.00 at 6r.m. at which time she was about ' on the meridian of the centre. The Bedford, .. 29.90, being 00.10 Azgher than on the 12th, the centre having passed her. aK 436 A Second Memoir with reference to [No. 100. The Balguerie,.. 29.66, being also 00.71 hzgher, than on the 12th. We have unfortunately no comparisons in Calcutta for these Baro- meters; if we had so, they might have proved of great value. That of the ‘“‘ Ganges” was probably too low. On the 14th, at noon, we have (Diagram, No. III.) Ganges, wind about SE. clearing a little, heavy sea, Bar. 29.20. Arethusa, NE. increasing strong gales and squalls. Ripley, North, heavy gales, 29.65. Rosalind, about NbE. hard gales and stormy. The “ Bedford” it is worth remarking, had her barometer again falling on this day, with very heavy weather from the eastward. The above winds, and positions of the ships, place the centre in about 14° 28’ N. 87° 11' E. On the 15th, at noon, we have (Diagram, No. IV) the “ Arethusa’ on her beam ends, in a hurricane which veered in 18 hours—or from 3 a.m. when it was at NE. to9 p.m. when it was at SSW. and moderating—22 points; or about 11 point inan hour. I presume that she must have been blown round the western side of the vortex, though ~ so far clear of its centre, that the calm which is usually found when the ships cross the centre, and experience sudden shifts, did not occur | with her. The “ Ripley” we find also in pretty nearly a hurricane as to — the force of the wind. Her barometer as low as 29.25 at noon, when we find the wind WNW. veering to WSW. by 6 p.m., or about — four points in six hours, or at the rate of about 3 ofa point in an hour; | from which we should conclude, she was farther from the centre than the, “‘ Arethusa.” The “ Rosalind” had a hurricane at from WDbN. at | 2 a.m. to SW. and SSW. at 1 p. m., or veering seven points in 11 hours, or alsoabout 2 of a point in an hour; from which coincidence, _ and the direction of the wind, I have placed her on the same circle as the “ Ripley,” having most unfortunately no better datum to go by. | We have thus on this day, curiously enough, three ships blown each | half or two-thirds round a circle! For the unprofessional reader should : be told, that in weather such as is described in the vessels logs, of | which I have always carefully preserved the expressions, a vessel does | little more than drift bodily to leeward, as the wind veers with her. — It will be observed, as to the extent of the storm, that the ‘‘ Ganges,” | and “ Balguerie” had both the weather moderating, and were getting far- ther from the centre. The “ Bedford’ and ‘‘ Cashmere Merchant,” how- 1840. ] the Theory of the Law of Storms. 437 ever, had still very heavy weather, but this was in the vicinity of the coast, and not against the usual direction of the monsoon at this period of the year; another instance in which, while a hurricane was fairly formed, and travelling across the Bay, the monsoon also rises to the strength of a heavy gale, asin the case of the hurricane of June, in my firstmemoir. To the eastward we find that the “Indian Queen” on this day was discharging cargo at Vizagapatam, and that the red ap- pearance noted there, is the only indication of any change of weather, in the absence of the barometer. On the 16th we find that the “ Ripley,” “‘ Arethusa,” and “Rosalind” had all fine weather, and again by noon they had borne up and made sail, so that the hurricane must have moved very rapidly past them, and have been of small extent. We have for this day’s data the some- what vague accounts from Vizagapatam, Coringa, and the Hope Island Lighthouse, but fortunately also the ‘‘ Indian Queen’s” log. That of the “ Jane” is very imperfect ; the circle or its influence seems to have been just reaching Vizagapatam at noon ; for we find that during ; the morning “ it veered to the northward, and blew hard the whole day, varying from NE. to north, mostly north ; the strength of the gale blowing about 10 a.m., and that in the evening the wind veered back to the eastward ; blowing steadily all night from ENE. to east,” showing that the centre of the vortex had passed somewhere to the south. At Coringa itself we find some discrepancy in the simple report of the Collector, and that of the Lighthouse-keeper on Hope Island, which bears from the flag staff on Coringa, about EDS. distant five miles. ‘This last report would place the centre to the north eastward at the be- “ginning of it, and yet according to the latter part of it, and to the Collec- _tor’s report, it must have passed to the southward. I suppose these anomalies in the direction of the wind, as well as any which may have occurred in the direction of the storm,—for I take the Lighthouse-keep- ers report to be the correct one, as to the direction of the wind, which as a seaman he was most likely to estimate correctly—to have been owing either to irregularities which do occur near the centres, or to have been caused by the deflection of the first efforts of the wind against the chain of the Rajamundry hills, to the northward, and not far inland, against which, the direct line of the storm from seaward was impinging, _ and by the opening of the valley of the Godavery. From the log of the “In- _ dian Queen,” I have placed the centre at noon about where it is marked, ~ 438 A Second Memoir with reference to (No. 100. and I take it to have passed over the meridian of Coringa, to the south- ward, and at avery short distance, about midnight of the 16th and 17th, or early in the morning of the 17th. We have no farther news of it in- Jand. Samulecottah, from which some reports are dated, is about fifteen miles north of Coringa, but within 7 or 8 of the coast. I wrote to the Collector of Coringa for further information as to the storm inland, but have no reply. By the Lighthouse-keeper’s report, we find the rise of the river to have begun at 2 p.m. of the 16th. Now as this was owing to the damming up of its waters by those of the sea, and not to any inland fall of rain,—for the inundation was one of salt water, a wave, or rise, forced in over a low country—we may suppose this to have a little preceded the vortex, which thus becomes, as I have made it, one of about 150 miles in diameter. This agrees with the position of the *‘ Arethusa,” which vessel we find at this time bearing up at 6 a. with fine weather, and the wind at SE. at noon, being out of the storm. I trust that to those who will take the trouble to follow these obser- vations, referring to the diagrams which are upon the same scale as the chart, will be satisfied that there is as good evidence as the mature of things will allow, for the track which I have assigned for this storm. II. The size of the vortex. It will be seen by the chart and diagrams, that this is a remarkable instance of a storm decreasing in size as it progresses, but apparently increasing in violence. The diagram of the 13th, No. II, where we © have the “‘ Ganges” with a severe gale at ENE ; the “ Balguerie” with | it at SW., and the “‘ Bedford” at ESE.; all with their positions well | ascertained, and including thus 22 points, or 2ds of the compass, may be _ taken I think, as a fair instance of a circular storm, about 300 miles i in f diameter. That of the 16th where, though the hurricane—for it cer tainly was one there—had just left the ‘“ Arethusa,” ‘‘ Rosalind” and “« Ripley” a few hours, was but just touching Coringa, Vizagapatam, and | Samulcottah, and had fairly begun with the “ Indian Queen,” may be | taken as proof that it had then contracted to about 150 miles, and was | blowing with much greater violence. There is no instance in this hur- ricane of any vessel having been becalmed while the centre of the vortex was passing ; so that we must either suppose that there was no calm at the centre, or that no vessel passed directly through it. This is a distinction wortb being borne in mind for future guidance. 1840. | the Theory of the Law of Storms. 439 III. The rate of progression of the Storm. If our centres are correctly laid down, we find that the storm must have advanced from the 12th to the 13th about 150 miles, 13thi, >. | Wthows." 159 P4thioe loth ©. 262 Toth’ "sr “rGthy: f° 160 Porn... 17th, es Total, .. wa. wat) | fe 66d vailesuimitive days or 131 miles per day—or about 54 miles per hour, on a line about N.71 W.a rate which does not very greatly exceed that of the storm of June. The apparent check in the rate of motion between the [4th and 15th, if it really occurred, is curious. The centres on those days are tolerably well ascertained, and I should be inclined to suppose them, as correct as the others. I cannot close this second memoir, without repeating that from every officer connected with Government, and from most of the mer- | | | ) | cantile community, I have met with the most zealous assistance. The Marine Board, through their indefatigable secretary, Mr. Greenlaw, the Bankshall, through Captain Clapperton, and Captain Biden, Master Attendant at Madras,—to whose kind attentions I shall have particu- larly to refer in a future memoir,—have all vied with each other in forwarding the collection of materials for me ; and indeed, though it is ‘strange to say it, the only class of persons whose co-operation was especially necessary, and who were somewhat dilatory in according it, is that for whose especial use and benefit it is intended !—the command- _ ers of ships! To this however there are, I am happy to say, some very honorable exceptions ; and I trust that as the uses, objects, and suc- _ cess of our inquiries become more evident, we shall have less reason to i | } . | ; | _ complain on this score. The negligent commanders may reflect that there can be no harm done, in giving us the information ; and to get safe off when others are dismasted, always reflects some credit ; | while, on the other hand, the most careful man may have his re- putation and his prospects injured by a succession of misfortunes ; against which the best safeguard is the knowledge we are trying to elicit. 440 Notes on the Wild Sheep of the Hindoo Koosh, and a species of Cicada. By Capt. Hay. Genus Ovis. Incisors Molars ~ — Adult male 3 feet 4 inches at shoulder. From nose to tail 5 feet 4 inches ; head 1 foot; horns 2 feet 6 inches in length, tip generally broken, and 12 inches in circumference at the © base, and turned spirally backwards and downwards, points — afterwards incline forward. A large beard from the cheeks and under jaw, divided into two lobes, neck ponderous, 14 inches long and 24 in circum- ference. It has no mane above. General color pale rufous, inclining to grey, fading off to white beneath. Muzzle white; beard on - either lobe white, connected to a streak of long black flow- | ing hair reaching to the chest. Legs covered with white smooth short hair; belly white; tail small, short, and together with | buttocks white. Girth of body measured behind shoulders 4 feet. Has a lachrymary sinus, very perceptible on dissection, there being a deep cavity in the bone under the eye. The hair is particularly electric. This differs from the Ovis Tragelaphus (of Dr. Smith), or 4 bearded. Argali, in the following respects— Ist. In having a lachrymary sinus. 2d. In having no standing mane. 3d. In having no long hair on the knees. Ath. In colour of horns, which in the species inhabiting the | mountains of Mauritiania (Morocco) are black. A variety of the Ovis Tragelaphus, inhabiting the mountains | of Upper Egypt, is represented as wanting the mane on the | shoulders, but is nevertheless said to have long tufts of hair | round the fore knees, which differs from the species inhabiting the hills of the Hindoo Koosh range, and now under description. | 1840. | Wild Sheep and Cicada. 44] They are gregarious in flocks of about 40, and are usually led by an old ram. The female is inferior in size, and not so much of a rufous colour, and has small horns, inclining backwards and outwards about 6 inches in length. They produce their young in May and June. ‘The lambs are the colour of the female, have a dark stripe down the back, and in front of the fore legs. On my march with the army of the Indus from Kandahar towards Cabool, I observed a remarkable congregation of the insects commonly known by the name of Cicade, or Tettigonia, _(Fab.) which in no book on Entomology have I ever seen noticed. These insects, as far as I had hitherto observed in the Eastern Islands, where they are called Trumpeters, and in different parts of India, especially in the Himalaya about Simla, where their evening chirping must be familiar to all visitors, have never appeared to me in large societies, an individual person not being able to capture above a dozen of an evening. These likewise have always been confined to wooded countries, and the Tetti- gonia of Italy, and shores of the Mediterranean, the celebrated insect made sacred to Apollo, and mentioned by Virgil, Cicada stridens, is, I imagine, always found in thickly wooded countries. In Afghanistan, where scarcely a tree is to be seen (generally speaking), I have been astonished at finding certainly not less than eight species of this insect; I believe them all to be new, because I have never before met with them, but I regret to say I have not a single book upon Entomology to refer to, and this note not being intended to identify species, but merely to show ‘the very extraordinary numbers they were found in, I shall confine myself to the observations I made. The first species of Tettigonia that attracted my notice was in the month of May at Kandahar, a very diminutive insect, which flew into our tents of an evening; this did not surprise me, because there are trees in the neighbourhood. " But at Jellowgheer, in the Turnuk valley, about fifty miles 442 Wild Sheep and Cicada. [No. 100. from Kandahar, where not a tree is to be seen, or a shrub, ex- cepting the jewassee, which grows in luxuriance, and a few tamarisk bushes, I discovered three larger species of Tettigonia, and fully as abundant as any flight of locusts I had ever seen. The prevailing colour was a deep orange, and the stems and — branches of the tamarisk were covered with them, as hardly to be able to distinguish a particle of green, and their noise all day was unceasing. The jewassee bushes being at the same time covered with the empty scales of the pup, and shewing at once that these insects were bred on the spot: otherwise I should have conceived they were only migrating. Our tents and tent ropes, as soon as pitched, were covered by these insects, in fact every thing looked yellow. They continued in equal numbers for several days march through the Ghiljie country, and I saw in — all eight or nine different species. One scarce variety I dis-_ covered with pink wings, and another, far less active in flight, — appeared upon the ripe ears of corn, and immediately they were ‘ approached made a heavy flight for a yard or two and fell to the ; foot of the corn, not again lighting upon the heads. The wings of this last species have not the transparency that all the others, excepting the pink winged variety, possess. Fortunate indeed is it that Providence has formed these insects to live by suction, or their damage to the crops if fur- | nished with the jaws of a Locust, would be irreparable: their _ clinging propensities had, however, entirely deprived some bran- | ches of their shoots. : 4 i Now what appeared to me extraordinary was, that these insects Should appear in this country, where there are apparently no birds or animals to feed upon them. Locusts where they appear in vast numbers, as in Africa, always have their destroyers fol- lowing them: but here not a gryllivorous bird was to be seen, | not even the Vespertilionide to disturb them at night. The only | enemies they appeared to have, were some large Libellule, which | pounced upon them, and carried off what appeared to be double their own weight. 1840. | Wild Sheep and Cicada. 443 The Pupe* at seasons must be very abundant, and might even _in this country have afforded the ale food, as well as the : Pupe of the Locusts. * T believe I ought to have written Larve for Pupe, as they only undergo a semi-metamorphosis. ft, Grit. Note on the above. The readers of the Journal who would wish to compare the description of the wild sheep of the Parapomisan range with that of the Himalayas, will find Mr. Hodgson’s full and accurate notice of the latter animal Vol. iv. Journal Asiatic Society, p. 492. Capt. Hay, in a letter to me, says, “The enclosed description of our wild sheep at Bameean differs I think from the species in the Himalaya. I have now three lambs in my room perfectly domesticated, but such places as they attempt to climb, show the nature of the mountains they inhabit; what think you of a couple of them setting to work to climb up my chimney, nearly perpendicular, but with projecting bricks here and there! I am anxious to observe their habits, and if any of my notes, &c. &c. &c.” ie Capt. Hay has in a part of his note on the Cicada alluded to the possibility of the species of insect which he found in such numbers, or their “larve” furnishing an article of food to the Greeks, in the same manner as the locust. Being curious to see whether any allusion is made by ancient writers to the locust, or Cicada, as an article of food in countries adjacent to Bactria, I referred to the ordinary and well known _ authorities for information. Pliny alone has, speaking of the locust, (Lib. xi. ep: 29.) “Tot orbis partibus vagatur id malum. Parthis et he - cibo grate.’ No mention is made of the insects in the accounts extant of Alexander’s march (Arrian. Quint. Curt.), nor even in Strabo (Lib. xv.) for the ordinary use of the locust as an article of food with the Boeotians, y. Aristoph. Acharnes. Act. iv. scene 7. , ’ , a ? ’ ay] ’ (rérepov akoldse nowy eotv, 7 KIyAat.) The querist being informed, in reply to this, that ‘locusts are much better flavoured” (than thrushes) v. also scene 1 of the same act, where a Beeotian comes in selling them, calling them “the four winged.” I did eT not like to publish the whole of Capt. Hay’s note, without remarking on what might have appeared startling. (Ty by eb ig 444 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (Wednesday Evening, 15th July, 1840.) The Honorable Sir E. Ryan, President, in the chair. Read the Proceedings of the last Meeting. | Major R. J. H. Bircn, and Captain Broome, proposed at the last Meeting, were ballotted for, and duly elected Members of the Society. A. CameBELL, Esq. Superintendent of Darjeeling, proposed by the Officiating Se- cretary, and seconded by Sir E. Ryan. Rev. A. Wattulis, of Bishop’s College, proposed by Sir E. Ryan, seconded by the Officiating Secretary. Major PotrinecER, Bombay Artillery, proposed by Captain Mac irop, seconded by the Officiating Secretary. J. J. Torrens, Esq. B. C. S. proposed by the Officiating Secretary, seconded by Captain Mac eon. Baboo RamMcopauL GuHosE proposed by Dr. J. Grant, seconded by Captain — MacLeop. ; Dr. T. Tomson, the Curator of the Society, proposed by the President, seconded by the Officiating Secretary. Read letters from W. J. Hamixton, Esq. Secretary to the Geological Society of London, and J. ForsHat, Esq. Secretary to the British Museum, acknowledging ; receipts of the 2nd part of the 20th Volume of the Transactions of the Society. ” Read a letter from Messrs. W. H. ALLEN and Co., Book Agents of the Society in London, intimating their having paid the arrears of subscription, 24/., due by the Society to the Oriental Translation Fund up to the end of the past year. Library. The following books were presented :— Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland, London 1839, No. 10.—by the Society. Oriental Christian Spectator, Bombay, May 1840, Vol. I, No. 5. Letter to Major General Jonn Briaas, on the discovery of part of the secon Volume of the Jami-al Tawareekh of Rasheed-ul-Deen, by W. Mor.ey, Esq. —by the author. Committee of Commerce and Agriculture of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland, London 1839,—by the Committee. Sojutii Liber de Interpretibus Korani Arabicé editus et annotatione illustratus, Lugduni, Batavorum, 1839. 4to 1. Lexicon Arab. et Lat. of Haji Khalfae, by Gustavus Fluegel, Leipzig, 1837. 2nd Volume. Map of Hindustan in Nagree character.—by the Honorable H..T. Prinsep, Esq. Cotton Trade of India ; its future prospects,’ part 2nd. The following were recejyed from the booksellers :— Recherches sur les Poissons Fossiles par L. Agassiz, Neuchatel, with plates. ae ap af ‘ 1840. ] Asiatic Society. 445 Histoire Naturelle des Poissons, par M. ©. B. Cuvier—Tome, 4 1839. avec Planches,—2. Journal des Savans, October, 1839. Annals of Natural History, and Magazine of Geology, Botany, and Geology, Lon- don, 1838, Nos. 1 to 10. Literary and Antiquities. Read a letter from Mr. W. Mor.ey, Barrister of Lincoln’s Inn, forwarding a pamphlet on the Jami-al Tawareekh, a General History of Nations—which is to appear in the transactions of the Home Society. The discovery of portions of this curious work, the Ist Volume alone of which was hitherto supposed to be extant, is highly valuable ; the first vol. is the history known as the TaRREEKH-I-GHAZAN Kuan: the whole work consisted of 4 volumes, and was completed by its author, RUSHEED-0OD-DEEN, about 709 Hej. The MSS. now discovered came originally from Luckrow, and was found by Mr, Mortey, and subsequently other and later portions of it by Profes- sor ForsEs, in the Library of the Society in London. The portion of the manus- cript that has as yet been found, commences with the eleventh race of the kings of Khut- _ta, the previous part had not yet been traced, and unfortunately the date is not in consequence ascertainable, but the titles of the kings, “‘ Rai Kugao,’’ or “‘ Kukao,”’ seem to point them out as of that race with whom the numismatic discoveries in ‘ Affghanistan have made us acquainted; but the Officiating Secretary informed the _ Meeting that there was a chance of recovering the remaining portion from Lucknow, or from the Royal Library at Delhi, at one of which places he hoped traces of it might be found among the collection of other manuscripts. There was also a trace of the same work at Herat; and he had sent copies of Mr. Mor.ey’s pamphlet to several influ- ential members of society in different parts of the country, in order to endeavour a partial recovery of the Manuscript. N. B. Since the above announcement, nearly 100 abridged copies of the pamphlet, ‘translated into Persian, have been circulated to every person, and place, by whom, or ‘in which, traces might be found of this invaluable work. The Officiating Secretary ~ has had late intelligence from Lieut. Conolly of the alleged existence of original MS. of so very ancient a date at Bokhara, that he almost dares to hope that some portion of ‘the work may be discovered in that stronghold of Islam. Suggestions have been made on the mode of effecting this. Museum. A number of Coins from Ispahan were laid before the Meeting by the Officiating Secretary for their inspection ; and were found to be not very ancient, but they were beautiful specimens. . Physical. The Officiating Secretary next submitted the Report of the Curator upon the speci- ‘mens of Natural History in the Museum—with a proposition to the Society to purchase the specimens of stuffed animals and birds which were still remaining of Captain Hay’s collection at Messrs. Tulloh & Co’s Auction Rooms. Captain Hay had written to the Society, wishing them to make an offer for the whole, as he was desirous of getting them off his hands. The Curator and Mons. Boucuezy had on this been to inspect the Bie » 446 Asiatic Society. [No. 100. specimens—many of which they found to be very valuable and in good preservation, but many had suffered from the neglected way in which they had been exposed in the Auction Room. Both gentlemen, however, strongly recommended the Society to make this addition to their Museum, if it could be done for 3000 or 3500 Rupees ; the cost to Captain Hay, to make the collection, had been 26,000. Dr. Grant thought it a great pity that Captain Hay had not come to some resolution of this nature be- fore; he doubted not Captain Hay paid every farthing of the sum stated for the collection. Dr, G. was in Cape Town when he commenced it. When the ex- pense for the transmission of such specimens to the Society was taken into the account, he thought the Society would do well to give the sum required, and place them in the Museum, for it would cost considerably more to get similar specimens of their own. Sir E. Ryan, called the attention of the Meeting to the proceedings held re- garding this collection on their first arrival in India, in 1838. A Committee was formed for the purpose of taking the subject into consideration; they highly approved — of it, and an application was made to Government to furnish the Society with the means of purchasing the collection, but it was refused, on the ground, that specimens of birds, &c. were, of too perishable a nature for a climate like India, but that they may be offered to some Society at home. Sir E. Ryan, did not think proper to purchase the collection by raising a sub- scription among the Members, as the object for which the Society was originally established was to obtain only Indian specimens, of which duplicates were to be sent to the Museum of the India House, and the purchase of foreign specimens merely for the purpose of comparison, could not well be done with any good results, unless there was a perfect Museum, and the funds of the Society could not raise it to that. Dr. Grant begged to recall what he had before said, as he was then unacquainted with the circumstance now mentioned, and to concur entirely with what had fallen from the President; but he would in addition beg to suggest to the influential members of na- tive society, that they should step forward, aud now that so good an opportunity offers, purchase the collection themselves, and have a Museum attached to one of their in- stitutions, the Hindoo or Medical College, by which means, and a very little outlay, they would save to the country this valuable collection. Mr. E. Stirling proposed that an offer be made to Captain Hay to place the specimens in the Museum at the So- ciety’s expense till a purchaser be obtained. Sir E. Ryan said this offer had once | been made to Captain Hay, but refused—he however had no objection for its being | made again. ‘The proposition was then put and carried nem con. Read a letter from Captain Hutton, 37th N. I. dated Candahar 24th May, regard- ing his Ist part of a tour to the Spiti valley, which persons writing anonymously im the public prints had reflected upon in a manner to hurt the author’s feelings. | Captain H. entered at some length into the subject, and expressed his desire to re- | fund the advance made to him by the Society for the purpose of the tour, if doubts | were entertained as to the mode of his having performed it, or as to the general origi- nality of the information communicated. As no doubts were expressed, it was resolved to decline the offer of refund, and record the Society’s sense of the value of the ad- dition made to its Museum, in the Geological specimens procured by Captain HutTon, during the tour in question. N. B. The 2nd, 3rd, and last parts of the tour have since been received. ee | ; : a ™ sa - | sy | 447 Erratum in the article on Lightning Conductors,” published in the last Journal. It gives me regret to have to point out a serious error in my account of the accident by lightning which occurred to Dr. Goodeve’s house, in May, 1837. The distance of the part struck from Mr. Trower’s con- ductor, is twenty-two yards, instead of twenty feet, as stated in my letter. _ The error was occasioned by my entrusting the measurement to a native assistant, who no doubt either contented himself by a guess, or unknowingly used the word feet instead of yards in his report. Illness prevented my making the measurement myself. Fortunately, however, the error does not in the least degree vitiate the argument, in which the accident was mentioned for illustration’s sake alone. That the best conductor will not protect a radius of 60 feet (as Biot has assumed it would) is now proved by the history of so many lightning explosions, that an error in one is of no importance whatever. The reader will find in paras. 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14, of my second report, sufficient facts to set this question at rest for ever. My chief object in noticing the accident to Dr. Goodeve’s house was to shew, that one and the same explosion may fall on a conductor and also on other adjacent bodies; that is, that one conductor may not be capable of carrying off the whole of the electricity of a single flash, although the conductor remain unmelted, or even be not perceptibly altered by the heat of the discharge. This view is but strengthened by the occurrence as it now stands in the corrected account. The greater the distance, the more remarkable is it that the primary flash should have been subdivided, as in this instance. Let it be remembered that Dr. Goodeve saw the flash strike both objects at the same instant. I congratulate Mr. Daniell on the occasion thus afforded to him for a further display of the peculiar tone, and temper, which characterized his first report. But I repeat here distinctly, that the error into which I have been betrayed does not in the slightest degree affect the inferences which ail the facts recorded manifestly lead to---1st, that a conductor, however well con- structed does not infallibly protect aspace of sixty feet radius,---2d, that a flash of lightning may strike a conductor, and other adjacent objects at the same instant. The occurrence at Dr. Goodeve’s house has nothing to do with the discussion regarding the “ lateral discharge ;” and had the accident never taken place, the arguments I advance would not be in the least de- gree affected. One good result, at all events, will proceed from this mistake---that I shall never again depend on the measurements made by persons who do not understand the object in view, and the necessity for care in their performance of so simple a task. W. B, O'SHAUGHNESSY. Calcutta, 10th September, 1840. x ( Exe obtary pe athe JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCLETY. Points in the History of the Greek, and Indo-Scythian Kings in Bactria, Cabul, and India, as illustrated by decyphering the ancient legends on their coins. By CurisTIAN LASSEN, Bonn, 1838. _ With Mithra, it appears, was connected a very peculiar poly- theism, which had utterly departed from the spirit of the unfi- _gured worship of light, as taught by the original and true Magi; it also appears, that Mithra himself was considered in this wor- ship as the solar god, Helios, as the Sol Invictus of the Roman inscriptions of later periods, and that a number of deified _ beings are grouped around him, produced by the same com- "bination of the religious elements of Asia Minor and of Iran. This religion was more congenial to the Parthians than the _ purer form of Magism. When under Arsaces vi, they con- _ quered the sanctuary in Elymais, where the goddess Nanea was adored, and when they appropriated to themselves its _ treasures, they may have probably admitted the worship of _ this goddess under the name there used.* The Indo-Scythians, when in the time of Arsaces vii, and vit1, about the year 130 B.c. they roamed and plundered throughout the Parthian _ empire, found this worship already established, and a horde of _ the same people maintaining themselves for some ages in a remote corner of the Parthian empire, made it as entirely their own, 1 Continued from p. 378. vol. ix. * Strabo xv1. p. 744. Vaillant Arsac. imp. p. 41. No. 101. New Series, No. 17 3M 450 Lassen on the History traced [No. 101. as if it had originated with them. It must have been the same horde of this people of Nomades, which was ruled by the dynasty bearing the name Kanerki, as the coins of the Kanerkis alone, not those of Kadphises and Azes, exhibit the gods of this system. | Without as yet undertaking to determine chronologically the era of the Kanerkis and Oerkis, J shall now content myself with collecting facts from the fragments of the language upon the coins, to apply them hereafter to history. Now as to this, Mr. Mueller has pointed out, with great minuteness and perfect correctness, as appears to me, two principal elements, included in the system of gods upon the Kanerki coins ; deified beings, according to the doctrine of Ahuramazda, of Ormuzd; and, secondly, those taken from the religious belief of the countries of Asia Minor, viz. of Mithra, of Nanaia, and of the | Persian Diana. ‘This supposition is countenanced by the names of gods, which, as far as their interpretation is corroborated, are not derived from the countries of India, but from those of Iran. I shall review the names of these gods, with regard to | their derivation, and in effecting this, it will be my principal | object to ascertain, whether Indian names be discovered among | them, as the consequence of this would be, that the Pantheon of the Indo-Scythians received some additions on the banks of | the Indus. My whole task is here so beautifully prepared by Messrs. — Prinsep* and Mueller, that I cannot do better than present | their inquiries in a form, which assimilates with those of my own, | The gods are the following — a I. Mithra. A figure in the dress of the east, with flowilil | robe, the head surrounded with a circular nimbus of pointed . rays, extending the right arm, and supporting the left on the | hip, or leaning on a spear. M. 229. Upon the coins, on the face of which Kanerki is styled | Baoirsvc, we observe HAIOD$; and MIOPO where he is | styled PAO-KANHPKI; MIIPO appears exclusively to be- | * Especially rv. p. 629, &c. 1840. | Strom Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 451 long to those coins where the name is already corrupted to OOHPKI. Mueller p. 236. The original form in Zend is Mithra, to which the Mi@ox of the names of the Cappadocian months corresponds: hence is produced Mihir in Pazend, and Mihir (y¢0) in modern Persia, which forms are connected with the Cappadocian forms Minoav (pronounced Miiran) and Mvap in a more corrupted form. In ‘the same manner MIOPO upon the Kanerki coins is transformed into MIIPO, which latter must probably be pronounced Mihiro. (v. Mueller at the same place.) I beg only to add, that Mitra, though in Sanscrit likewise denoting Sun, is merely one name of the sun among many others, nor is it distinguished in a way, that it can have given rise to this peculiar name of the supreme Helios. Mihira also denotes sun in Sanscrit, and though this cannot be corrupt- ly altered from Mitra, yet it is to be derived from a Sanscrit root, as grammatists do. But it must depend wholly upon the fact being carefully ascertained, that Mihira was not only used in modern writings, but also in the Vedas to denote sun, whe- ther we can approve of this derivation, or we have to bring back this word, together with the worship of the Indo-Scy- thians to India, after its corruption in the countries of Iran from Mithra to Mihira. II. MAO, the moon. A youth in the dress of the East, similar to the dress of Phrygia, with flowing robe, a kind of turban on the head, with a large half moon behind his should- ers, such as the Deus Lunus bears upon coins of Asia Minor, the situation in the whole, the same with Mithras. (v. Mueller at the same place.) Mao is the nominative of the Zend form of mds, the word in- ‘deed is likewise Sanscrit, as it is a common word of all the Asian Tanguages, denoting the moon as a measure for time; the root is md, (measure) but the Sanscrit nominative is mds. The forms May, Mny, are only various off-shoots of the same root. The genitive MANAO, shortly to be alluded to, which presupposes the root MAN, appears to warrant, that the lunar god in the form he is possessed of upon our coins, was received from the West. But here may likewise be admitted the interpreta- 452 Lassen on the History traced [No. 101, tion, that MANAO is to express the Zend genetive mdonhé. In this case a@ would have been substituted for A, which letter could not be expressed in the Greek language, while do, the o of which, together with the succeeding nh, takes its origin in the s of an older form, probably was no real diphthong ; but both o and nh together seem to express the nasal pronunciation, which precedes f in this position; the vowel d, as that of the root, was therefore alone expressed in the Greek orthography. III. MANAO BATLO, obviously a deified being, related to Mao ; a large moon-like sickle therefore also appears with him behind the shoulders ; he has four arms, leaning one arm on the hip, and holding symbols, not to be made out, with the three others; he is in a kind of Turkish dress, with large trowsers, seated on a spacious throne. (v. Mueller at the same _ place, p. 236.) Mr. Prinsep has explained BATO by Hie: (Sanscrit) splen- dour ; the word besides denotes, beauty, glory, omnipotence; and Bhagavat, is a name of Vishnu, as also a frequent epithet of gods. At the same time it belongs to the Zend, and even to the old Persian language, and on carefully examining the mean-_ ing of the word in them, it becomes evident, how this peculiar god of the moon is to be understood upon the coins. The four arms perhaps intimate Indian influence. IV. Anaitis, NANAIA, NANA, strangely also called NANA PAO, a female figure, dressed in long folded drapery, having a nimbus without rays, and a tiara with flowing ribands, with the right hand holding a branch, or something similar. (v. Mueller at the same place.)* The Persian Artemis has been long ago recognised in this | goddess, the worship of whom Artaxerxes Mnemon endeavour- | ed to spread over all Persia, especially in Bactria, and it agrees with this supposition, that this Artemis, as Mr. Raoul Rochette has proved it, appears upon the Agathokles-coins as Artemis Hecate, bearing a torch, and triple-formed according to the phases of the moon. The word could hardly have originated in Tran, and certainly not in India; it is a goddess of the moon, and the grammatical form of the word is likewise feminine ; * As. Trans. pl, ur. No. 4 pl. xxxvi. No. 4. 1840. | Srom Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 453 so that the form PAO, by her name, seems to violate the rules of grammar. V. Athro, AOPO, an old man, bearded, clothed in a tunic, with a wide flowing robe, with the extended right hand (at least on many coins) holding a wreath tied to a long riband. The upper part of the figure is surrounded with flames, which leave no doubt, that here a genius of fire is represented, (v. Mueller at the same place). To Mr. Prinsep is due the well founded interpretation by the Zend word dtars. The word is here, however, transmitted from the grave declination dtars into the soft one ath(a/ra, (nom. athro.) In Sanscrit (of the classic period at least) the word atar does not occur in the _ sense of fire. | VI. OKPO. This word is usually met with near a figure, the lower parts of the person clothed, with the left hand holding a trident, and the right a snare, and leaning upon an Indian ox. Mr. Mueller reminds us, that this position is similar to the figure of Siva and his bullock, Nandi, upon the Kadphises-coins. The same name is also ascribed to a figure, standing opposite to Nana,* having a light dress, four arms, and the head surrounded with a circular nimbus without rays. Mr. Prinsep has proposed to explain the word by arka (in Sanscrit, sun); this is doubtful, for besides that we have al- ready the sun, Mr. Mueller very properly reminds us, that all the names, authentically explained, lead to a Zendic origin ; like- wise the reason for the transposition of rk to kr is not evident. ~ On the other hand, a Zendic word suited to explain OKPO, is not known, and besides another interpretation is indeed more to the point. The bullock, and the four arms, call to mind the Indian god Siva, whose name is Ugra; the snare ? (pdéza) also is an attribute of Siva. By the coin, As. T. rv. pl. x1. No. 1, it is still more evident, that Siva is meant, when he as pazupati, (lord of animals) has an antelope with him. As to what Siva had to do with this system, might be differently interpreted ; leaving, however, this to the mythologists, we would only add, that * Vol. 1. pl. xxxvur. No. 7, 454 Lassen on the History traced [No. 101. whenever Nana and Okro are placed opposite each to the other, Siva in this case is obviously interpreted in accordance with the character of Mithra. For the Indian Siva has the goddess of the moon only as attributive, usually as a moon-formed sickle over his head, here however stands the goddess of the moon opposite to him as his wife, as if she were understood as meta- morphosed into Parvati ; moreover Parvati has a strong resem- blance to Artemis Hecate. If this interpretation of Okro be well founded, (and so it must be by reason of the bullock Nandi upon the coins, As. Trans. tv. Pl. xxxvii1. Nos. 4, 5), an Indian element appears in the Indo-Scythian system, which as first annexed to it on the banks of the Indus, may be easily explained by the Siva wor- ship upon the Kadphises-coins. Okro as well as Athro point out a dialect, which allowed of no literal absorptions, and therefore was different from that ex- hibited in the native legends. VII. OAAO, As. Trans. tv. pl. ur. No. 8.°A youth with a crown of glory, and a light dress. He holds, as he runs, with both hands, a wide robe, which falling down in large circular lines, surrounds the figure. (Mueller.) The name is as yet unexplained ; I propose vddé, that is wind, (in Zend vdté, modern Persian bdd.) In Sanscrit too, vdtd denotes wind, the god of wind; more frequently vdju. As the wind is also worshipped in Zendavesta, and even as védéo, this element of Scythian mythology perhaps belongs to Iran. . The running alludes to the wind.— VIII. (A)PAH©PO, upon the coins of Kodes, As. Trans. Iv. pl. xxv. No. 11, 12, and No. 13. 2@find. T...Strabo,’ XV. § 27. | | | + Droysen, history of Alex. p. 374. | | i \ 474 Lassen on the History traced No. 208: the fabulous Nysaeans. We have mentioned every important fact for our purpose by adding, that Alexander did not touch the southern bank of the Kophen, since he was informed, that it was not fertile, as the beautiful land of Alps in the north.* We therefore meet between the Paropamisades and the Indus a series of independent, warlike mountaineers, under their chief- tains, separated into many smaller tribes, rich in flocks and herds ; they are always called Indians, though no mention is made of either institutions characteristic of India, nor of Brahmins. This is doubtless correct ; for they were inhabitants of the Indian frontier, not exactly regulated by Indian customs, outcasts of the soldier caste, as Indians might term them. As mention has been made of the Gandarians, we are allowed to combine these accounts with those, long before given by Herodotus. The Gandarians he mentions, must be the same with those now under consideration. Darius also enumerates them among the number of the nations under his sway. He- rodotus does not mention the general name of the Paropami- sades, but only single tribes, among whom the Sattagydes perhaps belong to the Paropamisades of a later period.f In these accounts the national discrepancies between eastern and western Cabulistan appears most evident, the western half belonging to the Paropamisades, the eastern to India. Ptolemy’s accounts are contemporaneous with a period refer- red to in some of the coins; the additional value his infor- mation thus acquires, is enhanced by constant perspecuity of detail and expression. He considers the (Keac) Koas (VII. I.) as the main river, as” it indeed has a much longer course than the Cabul or Cophen, which stream is not mentioned at all. Hence according to him, the Koas disembogues into the Indus, and the Suatus (in the In- dian language Zubhavastu, the Sewad) into the Koas. He knows the sources of the latter in the mountains of the high north, which he calls the mountains of the Komedes. Under the sources at the Koas there live the Lambage, * Strabo; XV: 26: + Old Persian arrow-headed inscriptions, p. 110. 1840. | from Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 475 (Lampate) whose billy district extends to the mountains of the Komedes, hence up the valley of the Kameh and into the Cau- casus over the Pengkora or Guraeus, a country of wide extent, while in Sanscrit Lampaka denotes only the inhabitants of the valley Lamghan, on the western side of the Kameh valley. Ptolemy’s authority gives us evidence, that the restriction of that name (Lamghan) is of a more modern date, and that the deriva- tion of the name from Lamech, according to Sultan Baber’s con- jecture, is a wholly vicious etymology. The peculiar Lamghani language, prevailing in this mountain valley, together with the language of the inhabitants of the higher Kameh valley and the Indian Caucasus, viz. of the Kafirs, thus called, is an Indian dialect, and the separation of the Lamghanians and Kafirs into different nations, as is the case in Cabul, is not founded upon any original national discrepancy. According to Ptolemy, the Koas is the most western river of India, however, he does not consider it as the boundary river, _ but in his opinion, the confines between India and the country of the Paropamisades are the meridian, in which the sources of the Oxus* are included ; he places them one degree more to the west than the Koas, and therefore according to him, a district westward from the Koas still belongs to India, which as it ap- pears, is inhabited by the Lambage, he (Ptolemy) mentions ; for the present Lamghan is included in the very same district to which Ptolemy has assigned no other inhabitants. These | | L | | | national boundaries almost completely coincide with the poli- tical demarcation between the Satrapies of Alexander, viz. be- tween that of the Paropamisades and of the Upper India. Looking to eastern Cabulistan, we observe, the district Suas- tene lies, according to Ptolemy, at the sources of the Suastus ; it is therefore the same that Elphinstone has called Upper Sewad. He places the situation of the country Goryaea (r wovata) be- low the Lambage and Suastene. This is the district between the Bagur and the Pengkora, and on the other hand, that to the Lundye, i in the north of the Cabul river to the mountains, which include the Kameh from the east. Mey Vols, ee 476 Lassen on the History traced [No. 101. The name Goryaea is therefore used by Ptolemy, as it appears in a more comprehensive sense, than the name of the nation of the Guraei is ordinarily used by the ancient (geographers). The evident carefulness with which Ptolemy always proceeds in the applications of names, renders it not improbable, that he had good reasons in using that name in a more comprehensive sense. Goryaea (perhaps Garja in the language of that country,*) seems indeed to point to an expression like Kohdaman in our days, (west from the Kandar hills,) the mountain district below the highest ranges of the snow-clad peaks. Ptolemy places between the Suastus and the Indus, the Gan- darians, to whom the town Proklais (Poklais) is appropriated ; here then the Gandarians are restricted to the northern bank of the Cabul river; for Proklais is the Peukela of the ancients, and the Pushkala of the Indian geography ; according to Strabo the Kophen still runs through the Gandaritis. The dominion of the Gandarians, as it appears, is therefore restricted to the northern mountain valleys, and Ptolemy is instrumental him- self in explaining this. In describing the extent of the Indo- Scythian empire, he observes, that its main part is situated along both banks of the Indus, but he also places Indo-Scythian towns just in the country along the lower part of the Cabul river, i. e. just in the old seats of the Gandarians. Among them Artoartar | appears even to be the capital or the royal camp of the horde. | Artoartar is there a foreign word, and arta reminds one rather of | the Parthian than of Scythian elements of the language, it is the drta of the names Artaxerxes, Ardeshir, &c. But since upon | Scythian coins Athro and Ardethro, consequently Persian | names of Gods are observed, it is no wonder, that we meet like- | wise in their towns with elements of Iran.f Artoartar having * From gari, in Sanscrit giri, mountain, Zend gairi ; there consequently perhaps gari. The modern word in Affghanian language is gur, but hence it does not follow, that Goryaea must be derived from that language. . + Artoartar 121° 30’, 31° 15’. Nagara 121° 30’, 32° 30’. Divertigium Coae ad Paropamisades 121° 30’, 330 0’ the juncture of the Cabul and Kameh, Nagora and Artoartar were therefore situated in the same meridian. But since the course of the Indus as well as the country bordering to it is | displaced much too far towards east and west, the real situation of those three places carmot be looked for in the same meridian. 1840. ] Jrom Bactrian and Indo-Scythian coins. 477 been ascertained as a town of the Scythians in the country of the lower part of the Cabul river, gives evidence, that the Gandarians had at that period no longer the dominion in their native country, and it offers itself the conjecture, that an in- dependent power of the Gandarians maintained itself only round Peukela. Of the towns which Ptolemy still mentions as lying in these Indian confines, Nayapa m kat AtovucdrodArg is especially notable, Nagara, a genuine Indian word, is the name of the town, it therefore probably had with the Indians the meaning of the principal town of this district. The term “ town of Dionysos,” cannot be attributed but to the Greeks, who full of the expedition of Bacchus to India, thought, that they recognised even in this town the vestiges of his energies. If Ptolemy has correctly fixed its situation, it would lie opposite to the mouth of the Kameh. As, however, the whole country is assigned another position in geugraphy, this only is certain in the statement of Ptolemy, that Nagara was situated on the southern bank of the Cabul river, not far from Jelalabad. Below Nagara there follow four more towns, assigned to Indo-Scythia, Nagara itself is not numbered among them. When we now turn to Ptolemy’s description of western Cabulis- tan, this is, in his opinion, the country of the Paropamisades.* The eastern boundaries toward outer India are already defined ; Jelalabad and Lamghan belong to India. Bactria borders it in the north, the natural confines there being the Hindookush ; in the south is Arachosia, from which the Paropamisades are separated by mountains under the name Ilagurat. Mr. Ritter asserts, probably correctly, that they begin at Sefidkoh, and extend to the table land of Ghuzneet. It is indeed a very general term, parvata, mountain, and the name recurs for the northern tribe of the Arachosians, viz. Hlapyunrac3 as it is the Same name, so it is undoubtedly the same nation, the moun- taineers on the right bank of the Ghuznee river. Ptolemy sup- _ posed these mountains to extend from east to west, while they tun south-west. He fancies, as does Strabo on the authority of at Wile $8: + See the map to the essay above mentioned. 478 Lassen on the History traced (No. 101. Eratosthenes, that the country is a square, and on this supposi- tion he defines the place of the different nations. The Cabolte live according to him, towards the north, namely in the valleys of the Gurbend and Panjhir; the town Ortospana or Cabura in the centre of the country (which is certainly identical with the modern Cabul), supplies their name. The Sp. CC. Lupus. The Wolf. 14. A Skull. Mr. G. T. Lushington is mentioned/in the Journal As. Society, vol. iv. p. 56, as having presented a series of skulls, among which were _ three of the Wolf. i No. 13. 15. | Canis familiaris. The Dog. 16. A Skull. 17. No. 18. Gen. Viverra. Sp. Viverra. A Shull. No. 19. Orv. Quadrumana—F am. Simiade—Gewn. Semnopithecus. Sr. SS. entellus. The Entellus Monkey. | 1840, | Museum of the Asiatic Society. 517 A Skull. The common long tailed, black-faced, black-handed Monkey of Ben- gal, Behar, and Orissa. No. 20. Orv. Carnassiers.—Fam. Carnivora.—Trise. Plantigrades. Gen. Ursus. Sp. U. labiatus (?) The long lipped Bear (?) A Skull. No. 21.) Orv. Marsupiata—Gen. Kangurus. 22.) Sp. K-——? The Kangaroo. A Skull. I am uncertain as to the species, and prefer to leave a blank, (which may be filled up hereafter) to the chance of a wrong designation. A cranium of a Kangaroo is stated in the 12th vol. Researches As. Soc. to have been presented by Dr. Wallich, probably one of the above. No. 23. Orp. Pachydermata.—Gen. Tapirus. Sp. T. Malayanus. The Malacca or Indian Tapir. i A Skull. Major Farquhar sent this specimen to the Secretary in 1816, and his paper upon the Malacca Tapir appeared in the 13th volume of the Researches, 1820. Sir S. T. Raffles has since discovered the same animal in the forests of Sumatra; and Sir E. Home has given a short notice upon the comparative anatomy of the Tapir of Sumatra, which was read before the Royal Society on the 22d March, 1821, and pub- lished in the cxi. vol. of the Philosophical Transactions. These dates are given, because a discussion has been carried on between some English and French naturalists, as to the discovery of the Malacca Tapir. The latter stating that it was discovered by Mr. Diard, and the former by the donor of this specimen. The present specimen has an additional interest, from its being the first that brought the Malayan Tapir to the notice of the naturalist. No. 24. Orv. Cetacea.—Fam. Sirenia.—Gen. Halicore. Sp. H. Indica. The Dugong. A Skull and part of the Vertebre. : This specimen was either presented by Major Farquharson, or Dr. Tytler ; I am uncertain which. In the paper in the Philosophical Trans- o18 Zoological Catalogue of the [No. 101. actions, by Sir E. Home, mentioned under the last specimen, the author has instituted a comparison between the Lamintin and the Du- gong, or Duzong. A matter which was settled long before # the ‘¢ Annales du Museum d’Histoire Naturelle.” No. 25. Fam. Cete.—Gen. Delphinus. - Spr. D. Gangeticus. The Gangetic Dolphin. . A Skull. | The Gangetic Dolphin is the Platanista Gangetica, of Hardwicke and Gray. No. 26. Sp. Delphinus delphis.—-The Porpoise. A Skull. In the 12th vol. of the Researches As. Society, mention is made of a presentation by Dr. Wallich, of the cranium of a “Dolphin, found near the Isle of France.” | No. 27. Orp. Pachydermata. 28. Gen. Rhinoceros. 29. Sp. R. Indicus. The Indian Rhinoceros. 30. A Skull. Dr. Wallich presented jive crania of the Rhinoceros ; see Researches vol. 12. No. 31. Sp. Rhinoceros Indicus. The Indian Rhinoceros. An articulated Skeleton. This specimen was shot at Baugundee, in Jessore, by Mr. J. H. Barlow, and presented in his name to the Society, 1834. No. 32. Fam. Proboscidea. 33. Gen. Elephas. 34. Spr. E. Indicus. A Skull. Nos. 32 and 33 were presented by Dr. Wallich, (see Researches vol. 12) the latter being a divided skull. No. 34, a fine specimen, was presented by the late Dr. J. Adam. The old trivial name for this species has been, for some reason or other, changed into that of “ Asiaticus,” a name less definite even than that of Indicus; and not, like it, recommended by time and classical recollections. 1840. | Museum of the Asiatic Society. 519 No. 35. Gen. Sus. Sp. S. scrofa. The Hog. A Skull. No. 36. Sus babyrufsa.—The Babyroussa. 37. A Skull. Crania of the Babyroussa are mentioned in the list of donations in the 12th vol. of the Researches, as presented by J. Dunlop, Esq., and Dr. Wallich. No. 38. Orp. Carnassiers. Fam. Carnivora. Tris. Digitigrades. Grn. Canis. Sp. C. lupus. The Wolf. A Skull. Presented by G. T. Lushington, Esquire. No. 39. Spr. Canis familiaris. The Dog. A Skull. No. 40. Orv. Rodentia. Gen. Lepus. Sp. L. cuniculus. The Rabbit. A Skull. It is well known that the teeth of animals of this genus are subject to an extraordinary growth of the incisor teeth. In the present speci- men, this is carried to excess; for not only are the incisors, above and below, enormously lengthened, but the molar, or cheek teeth, also partake of it; particularly the two anterior ones in the upper jaw, which are much larger than any of the rest (though all are long) and | _ curved outwards, as if making their way through the cheek. No. 41.) Orp. Ruminanta. 42. | Tris. Capride. 43. > GEN. Antelope. 44,| Sp. A.cervicapra. The common Antelope. 45. J A Skull and Horns. No. 46. Sp. Antelope leucoryx. The White Oryx A Skull and Horns. Major Hamilton Smith states the Antelope leucoryx to be the true Oryx of Appian; the Antholops of Eustathius; and the great Goat of 520 Zoological Catalogue of the [No. 101. the Shah Nameh; it is said to be common in Bahrein, and along the coasts of the Persian Gulf, and also on the western side of the Indus, as far as Candahar. No. 47. Sus-cenus Damalis. Sp. D.caama. The Caama. Horns and part of the Skull. Presented by R. Home, Esq., if this is the specimen put down in the list of donations to the Museum in the 12th volume of the Re-. searches as “a skull of the Cape Antelope.” The animal named by the Caffers, Caama, is the Harte beest of the colonists; and the Cervine Antelope of Pennant and Shaw. No. 48. Grn. Antelope. Sp. A. Thar. The Thar Antelope, Horns and part of the Skull. No. 49. Horns of the last species. No. 50. A horn of the Thar Antelope (?/) This horn differs from the preceding in being more robust, more gradually tapering, not so sharp at the point, not transversely wrinkled © so far down, nor so much wrinkled longitudinally, as they are; and in the rings being more numerous, and better defined than in them. These differences are so marked as to lead to a doubt, if the two are of the same species. No. 51.) Sp. Antelope? | 52. Skull and Horns. 53. > There are three skulls, and some detached horns of 54. J this species in the Museum. They were presented by Mr. 55. J G. T. Lushington; and came, it appears, from the neigh- bourhood of Bhurtpore. The species is unknown to me; and per- haps is a new one. The last specimen (No. 55) has the horns apparently distorted, being more lyrated, and more bent inward at the tips, than the others. No. 56.) Sp. Antelope chiru.—The Chiru. eal Horns of the Chiru. 58. \ Presented by Lieut. Robison. The Chiru, or Unicorn as 59. ee is still absurdly called, is by some supposed to be the 60. J Kemas of Elian. All the specimens (except No. 56. which appear to be a pair) are odd horns, or of unequal length. 1840. | Museum of the Asiatic Society. 521 No. 61. | Sr. Antelope cervicapra—The common Antelope. 62. Horns of the common Antelope. No. 63. : os bs. Antelope ? 66. Polished Horns of an Antelope. No. 64. Sp. Antelope ? A single Horn. Species similar to No. 51, but horn more bent backwards. No. 67. Sp. Antelope guoral—The Ghoral Antelope. A Skull and Horns of the male. Presented by Lieut. Vicary, 4th Regt. N. I. No. 68. Sp. Antelope guoral—The Ghoral Antelope. | A Skull and Horns of the female. Presented by Lieut. Vicary. No. 69. Sp. Antelope cervicapra—The common Antelope. A Skull and Horns. | Presented by Lieut. Vicary. | No. 70. Sp. Antelope chiru—The Chiru. F A single Horn. ? A Skull and Horns. Another specimen of the species mentioned under No. 51. No. 72. Gen. Capra. Spe. C. Jemlahica—The Jemlah Goat. , Horns and part of the Skull. No. 73.) GeEn. Ovis. No. 74.) Spr. O. Argali—The Argali. Horns and part of the Skull. The Ovis Argali is the O. Ammon of many modern naturalists. The O. Pygargus is also called Argali. No. 71. Sp. Antelope ) j No. 74 has a larger portion of the skull attached to the horns, than ‘the other has; it was presented by Mr. W. B. Bayley; see Re- searches, vol. 13. ox 4 : A , 522 Zoological Catalogue of the [No. 101. No. 75. Sp. Ovis aries. The common Sheep. Part of the Skull and Horns of an Indian variety of the common Sheep. No. 76. Geren. Damalis. Sp. D. Strepsiceros—The Koordoo. A single Horn. No. 77. Gen. Bos. Sp. B. taurus 7 Part of the Skull and Horns. No. 78. Sr. Bos gour. The Gour. Horns and part of the Skull. Major General Hardwicke has well described the horns of the Gour in the Zoological Journal, vol. 3. p. 231. His description is accompanied by a plate. No. 79. . 80, | Se. Bos bubalus. The Buffalo; Indian variety. 81. Skull and Horns. 89. No. 79 was presented by Lieut. R. C. Nuthall. No. 83. Sp. Bos gour. The Gour. A pair of polished Horns. Presented by Mr. G. Dowdeswell, see Researches, vol. xii. No. 84.) Sr. Bos 85. J Polished Horns of a species of Bos; perhaps of the Gour. No. an Bos bubalus. The Buffalo. ? 87. Horns of the Buffalo; Indian variety. 88.) No. 87 is polished. No. 89. Gen. Ovis. Sp. O. aries. The common Sheep. A pair of Horns. No. 90. Grn. Cervus. Sp. CC. Wallichia. The Nepaul Deer. A pair of Horns. These horns were perhaps cast by the specimen of Nepaul Deer dent, in whose honour the species was named. : brought from that country by Dr. Wallich, our esteemed Vice-Presi-_ 1840. | Museum of the Asiatic Society. 523 No. 91. 2 Cervus Bara-Singha. The twelve antlered Deer. 93. A Skull and Horns. The present species is the Bara-Singha, or twelve antlered Deer of Indian sportsmen. The species is, perhaps, as I have assumed it to be, new to science; and it seems to be intermediate between the Elaphine and Rusa groups. The bifurcation, and rebifurcation of the horns, with the single antler below, is somewhat similar to that of the Cervus _ .macrotis of the North-west of the United States, but in other res- pects the horns differ. No. 94. Spr. Cervus. ? A pair of Horns. A pair of distorted horns, according to a label attached to them, “ cast by the Elk at Allipore, 15th February, 1833, W. Bell.” What | the animal here called an Elk really was, is doubtful, especially as the _ horns are distorted. They appear like those of the Bara-Singha. Se. Cervus porcinus. The Hog Deer. | Horns and part of the Skull. ‘J No. 96 a pair of Horns. > Sp. Cervus —.? 3 f 4 pair of Horns, distorted, probably cast by a Deer hept in confinement. No. 99. Sp. Cervus pocinus. The Hog Deer. A single Horn. No. eit Sp. Cervus axis. The spotted Axis Deer. 101.) Horns of the Axis. The pair No. 101, covered with the skin. | No. 102. ; ie Skull and Horns. Sp. Cervus hippelaphus. The great Rusa Deer. Fe 103 Horns only, but covered with skin. In Griffith’s Synopsis, the name of Baren-Singha (Bara- Singha per- haps) is given as a Hindi synonym of this Deer, but it is evidently a mistake, for, in India it is called Saumer; and there are two Deer so called, which differ much from each other, one black, the other red, and the latter much larger than the former. The present species is the great Axis of Pennant, 1 j | 1 524 Zoological Catalogue of the [No. 101. No. 104. Sp. Aristotelis. The black Saumer, or Rusa Deer. Horns and part of the Skull. No. 105. Sp. Cervus hippelaphus (?) The great Rusa Deer (?) A single Horn. No. 106. Sp. Cervus muntjak. The Khyjang. Horns and part of the Skull. No. 107. Sp. Cervus hippelaphus. The great Rusa Deer. A single Horn. No. 108. Sr. Cervus aristotelis. The black Saumer or Rusa Deer. A single horn. No. 109. Orn. Pachydermata. Gen. Eguus. Sp. E. caballus. The Horse. A Skull. No. 110. Gen. Rhinoceros. Sp. RR. Indicus. The Rhinoceros. An articulated right hind foot: the os calcis mutilated. No. 111. Gen. Elephas. Sp. EE. Indicus. The Indian elephant. A Scapula. No. 112. Orv. Carnassiers. Fam. Marsupiata. Gen. Thylacynus. Sp. T. cynocephalus. Van Diemen’s Land Tiger. A Skull. ~ This specimen was taken from a stuffed skin presented by Dr. J. — Henderson. The dentition of the species having been incorrectly _ given heretofore, I described it as accurately as the state of the present — specimen would admit of (the incisors being wanting) in the 4th vol. of the Journal of the Asiatic Society, page 572. But since my des- — cription was written (and in consequence of its having been written) another specimen has been presented to the Society; and it is to be desired that some competent person should describe the position of the incisor teeth from it. I have reason to doubt the accuracy of my con- — jecture, formed as it was, from the empty sockets only. 1840.] Museum of the Asiatic Society 525 No. 113. Orv. Cetacei. Fam. Cete. Gen. Monodon. Sp. M. monoceros. The Narwhal. A Tusk. Presented by Captain Lumsden: see Researches, vol. xiv. No. 114.7) Cuass. Reptilia. 115.)j Orv. Sauria. GEN. Gavialis. Sp. G. gangeticus. The Gangetic Gavial or Guryal. Skulls of the Guryal Alligator. No. 116. | Gen. Crocodilus. 117.) Sr. C. biporcatus. The Indian Crocodile. Large skulls, the former covered by the skin. Of these specimens, the former was presented by Mr. M. Cheese, and the latter by Dr. Wallich: see Researches As. Soc. vol. xii. It has been supposed that there are two species of the Indian Cro- codile ; but so far as I know, nobody has yet been able to distinguish correctly between them. I have discovered, however, what I consider to be undoubted signs:—viz. the cranium of the one has ONE TOOTH MORE than the other, and is much broader in-proportion. Several specimens in the Society’s Museum, shew this. No. 118. Crass. Mammalia. Orv. Ruminantia. Gen. Capra. Sp. C. hircus—The Domestic Goat. A Skull and Horns. No. 119. Gen. Ovis. Sp. O. aries. The common Sheep. A Skull and Horns. No. 120. Orv. Pachydermata. | Gen. Hippopotamus. Se. H. amphibius—The Hippopotamus. . A Tush. No. 121. Orp. Quadrumana. GEN. Simia. Sp. S. gigantea. The Gigantic Ape. The lower Jaw. 526 Zoological Catalogue of the [No. 101. The lower jaw of the Gigantic Ape shot by Captain Cornefield in Sumatra and presented by him to the Society ; described by Dr. Abel in the Researches. I am not sure whether or not the above trivial name has been given before, but it seems to be the most appropriate. No. 122. Fam. Lemures. Gen. Lemur. Sp. L. mongoz (?) Woolly Lemur ( ?) A Shull. No. 123. Orv. Rodentia. Gen. Castor. Se. C. fiber—The common Beaver. A Shull. No. 124. Onrp. Carnassiers. Fam. Carnivora. Tris. Digitigrades. GEN. Lutra. Sp. L. The Otter. A Shull. There are at least two Otters in India; a large and a small species. No. 125. Orp. Cetacei. 126. Fam. Cete. GEN. Baleena. Sp. B. mysticetus. The A Skull, Scapula, and thirty-four Vertebra. No. 126. One side of a large lower jaw. No. 125. Presented by G. Swinton, Esq. No. 127. Orp. Quadrumana. Fam. Simiade. Gen. Semnopithecus. Sp. S. maurus (?) The Negro Monkey ( ?) Presented by Mr. J. T. Pearson, mounted in the Museum. A. Skeleton. No. 128. Orn. Rodentia. Gen. Mus. Sp. M. decumanus. The Norway Rat. A Skeleton. Presented by Mr. J. T. Pearson. 1840. | Museum of the Asiatic Society. 527 No. 129. Orp. Carnassiers. Fam. Carnivora. Tris. Digitigrades. Gen. Paradoxurus. Sp. P. typus (?) common Paradoxurus ( ?) An articulated Skeleton. Presented by Mr. J. T. Pearson. I am uncertain as to the species of this animal ; in colour, form, and size, it is like the Viverra musanga of Horsfield, but the dental system is different. No. 130. Grn. Felis. Spe. F. catus.—The Cat. An articulated Skeleton. Presented by Mr. J. T. Pearson. No. 131. Orv. Pachydermata. GEN. Hipopotamus. Sp. H. amphibius—The Hippopotamus. . An incisor Tooth. No. 132. Cx. Reptilia. 133. Orp. Sauria. 134. Tris. Crocodilide. Gen. Crocodilus. Sp. C. biporcatus—The Indian Crocodile. A Skull and lower Jaw. Nos. 133 and 134 are of the Skull only. No. 1385. Cu. Aves. Orp. Grallatores. Fam. Ardeide. Gen. Pheenicopterus. Sp. P. ruber. The Red Flamingo. The Bill. No. 136. Orv. Natatores. 137. Fam. Pelecanide. Gey. Pelecanus. n Sp. P. onocrotalus. The Pelican. The Skuli and upper Mandible, and 137 with lower do. 528 Zoological Catalogue of the [No. 101. No. 138. Orp. Grallatores. Fam. Ardeidez. Gen. Mycteria. Se. M. Australis. The Jabiru. Skull and Mandibles. No. 139. Orp. Insessores. TriBe. Scansores. Fam. Ramphastide. Gen. Ramphastos. Sp. RR. pectoralis—The Red Breasted Toucan. Skull and Mandibles. No. 140. Tries. Conirostres. Fam. Buceride. Gen. Buceros. Sp. B. Malabaricus—Pied Hornbill. A Skull. Presented by Lieut. Vicary. No. 141. Orn. Grallatores. Fam. Ardeidde. Gen. Platalea. Sp. P. leucorodia—The White Spoonbill. A Skull. Presented by Lieut. Vicary. No. 142. Cx. Mammalia. Orv. Rodentia. Gen. Sciuropterus. Sr. S.————/? A Skull. Presented by Lieut. Vicary. No. 148. Orv. Ruminantia. Fam. Capride. Gen. Antelope. Sus. Gen. Tetracerus. Se. A. chikara—The Chikara. A Shull and Horns. Presented by Lieut. Vicary. 1840.] Museum of the Asiatic Society. 529 No. 144. Gen. Capra. - Sp. C. Jemlahica. Jemlah Goat. Skull and Horns. Presented by Lieut. Vicary. No. 145. Gen. Antelope. Sp. METAAOY EYKPATIAOY. « (Coin) of the great king Eucratides.” Reverse.—The Dioscuri mounted, with spears in their hands, charg- ing at speed to the right; in the field a Grecian monogram. Legend in Bactrian characters in two lines. Maharajasa Eukratidasa ‘* (Coin) of the great king Eucratides.” The numerous coins of Eucratides are, with one exception, of two distinct classes—the first class consisting of all the pieces bearing a diademed head, with the simple inscription BAZIAKQ=> EYKPA- TIAOY « (coin) of the king Eucratides”—the second class, including all the pieces with the helmed head, and the longer inscription of BASIAEQS METAAOY EYKPATIAOY «(Coin of the Great king Eucratides.”) This’marked distinction between these two groups of coins has led the learned and judicious French antiquary, M. Raoul- Rochette, to attribute the class with the helmed head and the more Wy Wit 11 fal Mt nln i iil Hi id PMT Th wet AT. Ht | LS Ao i a T. Black, Asvatic Lith Frese Gl. rnd tbe uatier Watney re a GYairer Shed a RS EAE, oe <%. Cape oral vty hy on aches yim, onthe aint Be he Rye a apne wee ; Pings tig sual, fe, eee r penne > imal: re ‘ iy aon af “ pai Bid PB Corey. @ a wrap at neil a i a ial anal ren py se ;2°<@ 0): 4pie £ we wih , = iSet e ‘ § aa —=- eel ‘ peer .% b Ast i. 1840. | Jotes on Captain Hay’s Bactrian coins. 939 ambitious title, to a second Eucratides; the son, successor, and mur- derer of Eucratides the First—thus giving the first class, with the bare diademed head and the simpler title, to Eucratides the murdered Prince. But that Eucratides the Great, was the murdered prince, and not the murderer, we may infer from the language of Justin (lib. 42, c. 6) who, speaking of Mithridates the Parthian, and of Eucra- tides the murdered prince of Bactria, calls them both “ great men’— We have also the testimony afforded by the small square copper eoin of Eucratides, published in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal for November, 1836, which gives the title of ‘“‘ Great’ to the bare-headed and diademed prince, and proves that this creation of a second Eucratides is without any foundation. The existence of a second Eucratides is, besides, no where mentioned in ancient history ; but the supposition that there were two princes of this name, first started, I believe by Bayer, has been gradually gaining strength, until by the knowledge of these marked distinctions in the coins bearing the name of Eucratides, it has been almost universally believed. Fortu- nately for the cause of true history, we know from Dr. Lord’s beauti- ful coin (published in the Bengal Asiatic Society’s Journal for July, 1838) that Eucratides the Great king with the helmed head was the son of Heliocles and Laodice : and therefore it follows almost conclusive- ly, that Eucratides the king, and Eucratides the Great king, were one and the same person. It is however quite in accordance with Grecian custom, that the son of Heliocles should have been called Eucratides, after his grandfather: but that the father of Heliocles, even supposing he had been named Eucratides, was a king of Bactria, is highly im- probable. On the same grounds of different types and epithets exist- ‘4 ing on coins bearing the same prince’s name, we might create two _ Menanders, double Heliocles and Hermeeus, and multiply Azes into at least a dozen princes. No. 3. This coin may be at once seen to belong to Azes, and is avery bad specimen of the commonest type of the coins of that prince. I have seen at least one hundred coins of this very type ; and three engravings of the same are to be found in the Bengal Asiatic Society’s Journal, vol. 4, pl. 22, figs. 1,2, 3; one of the same type is likewise figured from a miserable specimen in the 7th number of the Numismatic Journal of London, pl. 3. fig. 34; 534 Notes on Captain Hay’s Bactrian coins. [No. 101. and the same coin is likewise described by M. Raoul-Rochette in the Journal des Savans for April 1836, page 20l—and by M. Jacquet in the Journal Asiaticque for February, 1836, page 167. The description of this coin is as follows—Round copper piece of large size. Obverse.—The humped bull of India walking to the right, over which is a square monogram with two diagonal lines. Greek legend— BAZIAEQS BAZIAEQN METAAOY AZOY. « (Coin) of the great king of kings, Azes.” Reverse.—The sinha, or maneless lion of India, walking to the right, over which is the monogram composed of the Bactrian letters s. p. l. t.; surrounded by the legend in Bactrian characters, Mahara- jasa Rajatirajasa Mahatasa Azasa. “ (Coin) of the great king of kings, the mighty Azes.” No. 4.—Is a coin of an anonymous prince, with sounding titles, whose titles are however not in the possessive case, as stated by Cap- tain Hay; but he is quite right when he says that none of these coins have any king’sname upon them. The following is a description of this coin. Obverse.—Head of the king radiated and diademed to the right, the ends of the diadem floating behind the head, the chlamys thrown over the shoulder: in the right hand, which is extended, is a sceptre or sword, which on some coins changes into a cross with two streamers hanging from it: in the field a monogram composed of a trident and circle joined by a cross; the whole surrounded by a dotted circle. Reverse.—A person on horseback to the right, with the right arm raised, and holding in the hand a cross: behind the head are two streamers, and before the horse is the monogram already described. Legend in bad Greek BACIAEYC BACIA€WN CwTHP | METAS The great king of kings, the Saviour.” Nos. 5, 6, 7.—These three coins are of a prince whose name varied on different, specimens as observed by Captain Hay in three coins which he has figured: some pieces of this type bear the name of Hermeceus, some have Kadphises and Kadphizes, whilst others have Kadaphes and Kadphes, all of which names, except the first, agree so nearly, as to warrant the conclusion that they belong to the same prince ; and at the same time they furnish us with an almost convinc- 1840. ] Notes on Captain Hay’s Bactrian coins. 535 ing proof, that the name of the Indo-Scythic prince, whose coins are so numerous, was Kadphises and not Mo-kadphises ; a reading which I believe has found but two advocates, Messrs. Jacquet and R. Rochette. The differences in the names observable on these coins arise, in my opinion, solely from the artist’s ignorance of the Greek character ; which the inferior workmanship of the coins proves to belong to a declining period of the Grecio-Bactrian power. The general des- cription of these coins is as follows. Round copper piece, of middle size. Obverse.—The king’s head to the right, bare and diademed, with the ends of the diadem floating behind the head, and the chlamys on the shoulder: legend in barbarous Greek BACIAEQC =THPO SY (or SYAQ) EPMAIDY (or KAAPIZOY or KAAPELDY &c.) * (Coin) of the saviour king Hermoeus (or Kadphises).—On all the coins of this type which I have seen, the Q is wanting in the word ZOTHPO®. Reverse. —Figure of Hercules naked, standing to the front; the lion’s skin hanging over his left arm, his right hand leaning on his club, which rests on the ground. The legend, in Bactrian characters, I cannot read satisfactorily. I have carefully examined about twenty specimens of this type, and I have found that all of them, whether belonging to Hermeeus or to Kadphises, bear, with some slight varia- tions. the same Bactrian legend. This isan important fact, which I am unable to account for. Captain Hay’s Euthydemus, published in the 97th No. of the Journal, is a coin of this type, with the name of EPMAIOY plainly legible. No. 8.—A round copper coin, of middle size, and apparently in bad preservation. Obverse.—Bearded head of the king, bare and diademed to the right, the ends of the diadem floating behind the head. Legend in bad Greek BACIAEWL (uTHPOL YNADFEPPOY “ (Coin) of the saviour king Undopherres.” Reverse.—Figure of Victory winged, standing to the right, and hold- ing in her right hand a chaplet with two ends hanging down. Legend in Bactrian characters, “ Maharajasa (name not satisfactorily read- able) nandatasa.” ‘Coin of the great king, the saviour (Indo- _ pherres?)” I have examined about twelve specimens of this type, on most of which the letters of the name are clear and well defined, — 536 Notes on Captain Hay’s Bactrian coins. {No. 101. notwithstanding which, the king’s name has proved an insurmount- able difficulty. The two Moosulmaun lumps of copper at the foot of the plate re- quire no notice. . PLATE II. No. 1. A square copper coin of middle size, and apparently in good preservation. Obverse.—The figure of Hercules naked, standing to the front, holding the club and lion’s skin in his left hand, and crowning himself with his right hand; a type similar to that on the coins of Euthydemus and Demetrius. Legend on three sides PactAewc BaxIAEQN METAAOY oNQNoY. (Coin) of the great king of kings, Vonones.”’ Reverse.—Figure of Minerva armed, half turned to the left, with a buckler on the left arm. Bactrian legend in three lines [ Maha- rajasa rajatirajasa mahatasa| Balabarasa “(coin of the great king, the king of kings, the mighty] Balbara,” the name being the only existing portion of the Bactrian legend. No. 2. A square copper coin, of middle size, in very good pre- servation. Obverse.—The king’s head bare and diademed, to the right, with the shoulder clothed. Legend in three lines BASIAEQS TOTHPOX EPMAIOY. « (Coin) of the saviour king Hermeeus.” Reverse.—A horse moving to the right; beneath the horse a Grecian monogram composed of the letters ® and I. Bactrian legend in three lines; Maharajasa dadatasa Ermayasa. “ (Coin) of the great king, the saviour Hermeeus.” No.3. A square copper coin, of middle size, seemingly in good order. Obverse.-—The king’s head bare to the right, the shoulder clothed. Legend in three lines BAZIAKQ> ANIKHTOY AYZIOY. « (Coin) of the invincible king Lysias. Reverse.—The bonnets of the Dioscuri, surmounted by two. curves —over which are two dots, most probably intended for the stars Castor and Pollux, which are seen over the bonnets of the Dioscuri on the coins of Antialcidas; these stars escaped the observation of Mr. Prinsep, of Professor Wilson, of M. Jacquet, and even of the quick- : at ft (> E Me tut j A | aes fl i th ime ti) Ys A 21 Het Ny J Z y , ‘ | by A a 1 Y Z ZZ teh ZB: Hy | AAGAEe MABAA? | { ZA \ Z i i “vA i a= ii wa oT re | “EN : i | a | i HW egal : Ned oa HD al TN UT ul ———_—— i T Black, Asiatic Lidh:Pre sf 4 » . Fr wat ty Tine ) 7 * Aiioe a A » 1840. | Notes on Captain Hay’s Bactrian coins. 537 | sighted M. Raoul Rochette. Beneath the bonnets are the monogram TA. and the letter =. Bactrian legend in three lines, Maha- q rajasa Assavihatasa Lisiasa “ coin of the great king, the invin- cible Lysias.” The bonnets of the Dioscuri which have been long familiar as the type of all the known copper coins of Antialcidas, and of some rare small silver and small copper pieces of Eucratides, now figured for the first time on the coin of Lysias ; and this fact serves to strengthen the connection between Lysias and Antialcidas already observed in the numismatic coincidences of the monogramis on their respective coins, as well as in their corresponding size, thickness, and make; _ and it may almost warrant us in supposing that those two princes were of the same dynasty as Eucratides, and that they succeeded him at no great interval. No. 4. @ 1840. | Notes on Captain Hay’s Bactrian coins. 541 with his right arm raised ; in the field the two monograms already described on the other coin of Azes, No. 3, Plate 1. Legend in Bactrian characters—Maharajasa Rajatirajasa mahatasa Azasa. (Coin) of the great king, the king of kings, the mighty Azes.”’ No. 5.—A square copper coin, of small size, and apparently in good preservation. Obverse.—An elephant’s head with the trunk turned up, to. the right—under the neck a chain and bell. Legend on three sides BASIAEQS SOQTHPOS MENANAPOY. « (Coin) of the savi- our king Menander.” Reverse.—The knotted club of Hercules erect (the sketch gives the reverse in the wrong position): in the field a monogram. Legend in Bactrian characters on three sides; Maharajasa dadatasa Midanasa. “‘ (Coin) of the great king, the saviour Menander.” No. 6.—A round silver coin of the size of a drachm, in middling preservation. Obverse.—Head of the king helmeted to the right, the ends of a diadem appearing under the helmet; and the chlamys on the shoulder. Legend —BAZIAEQ2 ZQTHPOZD MENANAPOY. “ (Coin) of the saviour king Menander.” Reverse.—The Thessalian Minerva, or Minerva Promachus, walk- ing to the left, in the attitude of hurling a thunderbolt raised in her right hand, and holding before her on her left arm the Agis, in the middle of which is Medusa’s head : in the field a Grecian monogram. Legend in Bactrian characters—Maharajasa dadatasa Midanasa. *‘ (Coin) of the great king, the saviour Menander.” No. 7.—A round copper coin of middle size, and in bad preservation. This piece, from its type and general appearance, and from the few Bactrian characters visible on the reverse, is undoubtedly a coin of Undopherres, similar to that which has already been described as ‘No. 8 of Plate I. No. 8.—A round copper coin of middle size, and in bad preserva- tion. It is ‘a piece of the king Kadphises, or Kadaphes, before de- scribed in the notice of Nos. 5, 6, and 7, of Plate I. No. 9.—A round silver coin of the size of a drachm ; of good make, and in beautiful preservation. & 542 Notes on Captain Hay’s Bactrian comms. __[|No. 101L. Obverse.—Head of the king to the right, bare and diademed, the ends of the diadem hanging at the back of the head. Legend— BASIAEQSS QTHPOS EPMAIOY,. “ (Coin) of the saviour king Hermceus.” Reverse.—The Olympian Jupiter seated on a chair. Legend in Bactrian characters, Maharajasa nandatasa Ermayasa. “(Coin) of the great king, the saviour Hermeeus. A beautiful specimen of this same coin was first published by M. Raoul-Rochette in the Journal des Savans for October, 1835. No. 10.—A round copper piece, of middle size. This is a coin of the anonymous prince already described in the notice of No. 4, Plate I. No. 11.—A round copper piece, of middle size, in bad preservation. This is, with some slight variations, another specimen of the same type of Hermceus as No. 3 of the present plate, already described. Captain Hay’s opinion that there must have been several princes of the name of Hermeeus is likewise held by Mr. Masson, who has created three Hermoei, and located them in an imaginary seat at Nysa, which he says was near Jelalabad ; but from what has been said in the notice of the coins of Eucratides we may learn to be cautious in creating several princes of the same name, from different types and mintages of coins of the same prince. No. 12.—A round copper coin, of small size, and in very bad order. The only word legible in the Greek legend is ZQTHP “ saviour,” and I can make nothing of the marks occupying the usual place of the Bactrian legend: I incline however to attribute this coin to Azes, from its similarity in size, type, and general appearanee, to many coins of that prince which I have seen. No. 13.—A round silver coin of the size of a drachm. From the imperfect sketch of this coin. I am unable to come to any conclusion regarding it; I think however that it does not belong to any Bactrian prince; but from having no means of reference to the published coins of the Lysian, Cappadocian, and other kings, I cannot do more than record my belief that it is not a Bactrian coin: should it however prove to be so, it will be one of the most valuable acquisitions with which numismatology has been lately enriched. ALEXANDER CUNNINGHAM. a 4 7. 343 Appendix to the notice of Forged Bactrian coins in No. 100. Since writing the above notice, I have found in Capt. E. Conolly’s Journal of Bactrian Numismatics (about to be published) the follow- ing description of a gold coin of Amyntas. “Gold coin of square form, in the collection of Lady Sale, pur- chased at Peshawur, in all respects similar to the copper coin of the same king, except that the figures are reversed.” The square form of this piece—a form hitherto unknown in the gold coinage of Bactria, its perfect identity in shape, in size, and in type (only reversed) with the copper coin of this kind already known, added to its having the same sloping cut in the corner which ex- isted in Col. Stacy’s copper specimen ; and also in the forged silver piece of General Allard; all prove, most satisfactorily to my mind, that this square gold coin of Amyntas is likewise a forgery. The existence of the sloping cut would alone be to mea sufficient proof of spuriousness of this new piece; the ignorant forger having been unable to complete the legend of the coin on either side. The circumstance of its having been purchased at Peshawur, where Gene- ral Allard resided so long, and from whence he dispatched to France the drawing of the forged silver coin already mentioned, seems to prove that this gold piece was the production of the same hand that manufactured the spurious silver coin, purchased by General Allard, the type having been reversed with the intention of selling the new piece to General Allard, and of preventing any suspicion of its genuineness arising in the mind of the General, who had pur- chased the silver piece of the same type, from the same person. The fact of the type having been reversed, shows an advance in the art of forgery, which should tend to make our countrymen still more cautious in the purchase of Bactrian coins; and more particularly of pieces in the other metals, which reproduce types already known in copper. In the same paper Captain E. Conolly mentions a tetradrachm of Euthydemus belonging to himself, as being “‘ evtdently cast.” There can be no doubt therefore that this ‘‘ evtdenily cast” te- tradrachm of Euthydemus is a spurious piece, forged, with many others, to satisfy the demands of our countrymen in Afghanistan, whose ’ 7 544 Notice of Forged Bactrian coins in No. 100. [No. 101. commendable zeal leads them to give higher prices for these coins than prudence warrants; and I fear that many will find their col- lections diminish in value as their numismatic knowledge increases, and enables them to detect the spurious coins they have purchased. The goldsmiths in northern Afghanistan are, I believe, chiefly, if | not all, Hindoos, who have been accustomed from their youth to the casting of gold and silver into an infinity of small forms, and to the making casts of old coins, with figures of their Deities, to be worn as charms round the neck. I have myself seen a dozen brass casts from two different gold coins of Govinda Chundra Deva of Kanouj; one cast was remark- able in having no inscription side, two moulds of the obverse hav- ing been placed together to form a piece with the seated figure Durga on each side. These casts were made openly when deception was no object, but when 100 rupees are asked for a tetradrachm of An- timachus, and the same sum for a tetradrachm of Euthydemus, we may be certain that the same man, who would make a few casts from an ancient coin for the sake of the small profit to be obtained from one or two native customers, will now multiply casts of the genuine coins that may fall into their hands for the sake of the high prices that are given for all coins of Bactrian appearance by many of our countrymen, whose numismatic experience is not yet sufficient to distinguish a true coin from a forged one. The forgery of coins is no novelty in India, for the high prices given for the Zodiac coins of Jehariger, soon excited the cupidity of forgers, who produced the whole of the twelve signs both in gold and in silver—no complete silver set of genuine Zodiac coins has, so far as I have been able to learn, yet been obtained. In 1837 I saw Mr. Laing’s cabinet containing nine silver Zodiacal coins, all of which were forgeries, stamped by a die imitated from genuine gold coins, which differ both in type and in inscription from the silver coins;—and which, joined to their hardness and crude- ness of outline, are the best tests for distinguishing the forged coins from the true ones. ALEXANDER CUNNINGHAM. 545 Note on an inscription from Oodeypore near Sagur. This inscription sent by Capt. Burt (Eng.) to our late Secretary, has been already noticed in the Journal, though but casually (As. Soc. Jour. p- 1056, vol. vir.) Capt. Burt having again submitted it to the Society through me, the translation is now published with the original in Devna- gree, as I have not thought it necessary to have a lithograph prepared of the facsimile, the character being well known. The errors of grammar, and incorrectness of expression occurring in the inscription are so gross, that the pundit Kamalakanta Vidyalanka declined helping me in the pub- lication of it unless I permitted him to interline his emendations, which, as will be seen, has been done accordingly. The date is s. v. 1116, or 918 of Salivahana, or 446 of Oodyadhitya, thus establishing the era of the latter monarch, as has been already noted by Mr. H. T. Prinsep, at about A. p. 618. A misapprehension occurred however when the former notice was published, as to the name of the reigning raja, the recorder of the inscription ; and especially as this record introduces us to names hitherto unknown among the rulers of Malwa, I have thought it expedient to pub- lish Kamalakanta’s acknowledgment of his error in having taken one of the attributive epithets of the reigning raja, on a hasty perusal, for his actual name. Our present raja has stood hitherto recorded as Punya Pala, in place of his proper appellation: had not circumstances induced the necessity of a cursory notice, the oversight would have been of course corrected as soon as made. I have in vain endeavoured to trace the Pavara dynasty in ordinary books of reference; the names of the chiefs therefore recorded on this tablet are of course unknown to history. Of the three* generations noted on this inscription, one only in the person of the reigning raja is recorded as in possession of its regal authority, and he is represented as having regained the heritage of his fathers, though the fact of their ejection from it is, for obvious reasons, but dubiously alluded to. According to Abool Fuzl (Useful Tables, p. 107) Jitpal Chohan recovered Malwa from Kemal- ood-deen, whom he murdered a. p. 1069. Conquered in 866, Malwa would appear from the slight notice afforded by historians during the period intervening between the years of its invasion, and the accession of the so- called Jitpal Chohan, to have owned but a doubtful submission to its Islamite oppressors. Reduced as we are to the meagre chronicles of his- torians, who belonged to the invading and aggressive party, we cannot expect to find the record of their defeats kept with any thing approach- * I do not include of course the fourth generation, adolescent sons of the reigning Raja. 4a 546 Note on an inscription [No. 10]. ing to general accuracy. Of the two great authorities, Ferishta and Abool Fuzl, the former makes no mention of the early conquests of the Mussulmans towards the Nurbudha, while the latter merely enables us to conclude, that the country after having been overrun, was either left for years together unvisited by the conquerors, or was confided to the charge, perhaps, of a Hindoo tributary chief. Let what may have been the case, there is little doubt but that subsequent to the Mussulman invasion, the country must have been a prey to disorder, the efforts of the Mussul- mans on the one hand striving to reap the fruits of their conquest, and on the other, of the Hindoos endeavouring to re-establish the power of the ancient dynasties, tending equally to destroy the semblance of a social system, and set at nought the efforts of the historian, did he attempt to delineate the principal events of times so troubled. As regards the certain record before us, I will merely observe that the coincidence (within nine years) of the accession of the so-called Jitpal Chohan to the throne of Malwa, and the exertion of regal authority in that country by the raja who in the inscription is represented as having recovered his domi- nions, is a valuable fact. The subsequent history of the Hindoo princes of Malwa gives us instances of scions of the. royal house returning (sa. pv. 1192) after a long sojourn in a distant land (Kamroop), and achieving by, it would appear, their personal prowess, a restoration of their authority over their patrimonial possessions. This suffices to prove the little security which Mussulman ascendancy could have obtained in Malwa after the lapse of even more than a century from the date of our inscription ; the natural inference is, that the dispossession of Kemal-ood-deen might have been at that earlier period still more easily effected by one who in recording his deeds, proves his hereditary right by mention of his immediate ancestors, though unable to say more of them than that, landless as they were, he won back his sovereignty in right of his descent from them. The total dissimilarity of the name of the Chohan Raja of a. pv. 1069, and of the scion of the Pavara dynasty, a. pv. 1060, recorded, the former by Abool Fuzl, the latter by himself, as having recovered his -possessions in Malwa, is not on reflection so startling as it might at first sight appear to be, when we remember the incorrectness — with which indigenous names are usually given by foreign writers, and the practice among Hindoo princes of assuming a titular appellation on accession to their throne. The coincidence of date is of course the only point of real importance. The incorrectness of the Sanscrit in which the inscription is written, I take as a strong indication of the state of the country at the time of its composition. Fatigued by years of war and desolation, and oppressed 1840. | JSrom Oodeypore, near Sagur. 347 by the fanatic violence of the Mussulmans, the country had so ceased to afford encouragement to the cultivation of its indigenous literature, that when a son of its ancient race regained for a time his authority, there remained not a man of letters able to celebrate his restoration in fitting Literal Translation. By Pundit Saropua Prusnap. language. May success attend this salutation to Ganesha, the Supreme Deity. Hail to the husband of Parvati (Siva) the source of prosperity, who in each of his five faces is possessed of three ears, ten hands, two vehicles (the bull and the lion), the half moon on his forehead, and Ganga on his head. His person besmeared with ashes is adorned with serpents, and his throat stained blue. Half his body is rendered beautiful by Haimavati (his wife), on whose feet are golden anklets* shining with jewels. There was a fortunate Raja named Suravira, who was descended from the Pavara line, and was himself very learned, pious, liberal, valiant, and possessed of both Azs own and his enemy’s armies. He had a son named Gondala, who was renowned —very liberal, receptacle of all noble qualities, devoted to the gods, enjoyer (of happiness), judicious, conqueror of his enemies, and famous for his own deeds. His son, named Avevalamathana, who was the protector of all, and famous, and whose fame is white like the moon beams, went to Ma/ava and recovered his former kingdom of Madhyadesha, which had formerly been governed by his ancestors, and was usurped by inimical Rajahs. There he performed many religious ceremonies, eaused tanks to be made, which are filled with water, and a temple of Siva to be built. He erected- many divine temples, and granted Dhanyast and gold to the Brahmans, and was succeeded by his son Udayaditya the king, who was equal to his father in power. There further (he Avevalamathana) who was himself an ascetic _ and renowned for his fame, offered sacrifices, and performed many virtuous deeds, and caused this sacred and divine temple to be erected, which is perfect and best in its kind within the whole Jam-budwepa, * An ornamental effect. + Corn or lands productive of corn a48 Inscription from Oodeypore, near Sagur. ([No. 101. in the year of the Vekramaditya samvat 1116, corresponding with the Saka year 981, in the year Kaliyuga 4160, and in the same of Udayaditya 446. During this time all his subjects avoided the usages of Kaliyuga, and paid homage to all the sacred temples, and Jam-budwepa itself was the dwelling place of Bhagavati. His son Sdlivdhana who was distinguished by all the marks (of prosperity,) has agreeably to the customary observances of kings, cherished virtue, and furnished all the temples with the furniture of worship. He was devoted to the worship of his tutelary gods, persevering, hospitality, and firm in mind. He acquired virtue and wealth, gratified his passions, and performed the religious acts in the manner as declared in Vedas. Bhava, the son of Rama, who was known by the name of Dhurma- dhyaksha, caused this eulogy to be inscribed on the Friday, the thirteenth day of the moon’s light, fortnight of the month of Chaitra, when the sun was in the sign Pisces. This eulogy, which is placed on the walls of this temple, and is durable till the sw and the moon will endure, was composed by Apajay?t, a Brahmana, who was studious in the Vedas and the arts of singing, and was dear to kine as well as to Brahmans, a superior Pundit in astronomy, and respected by all. It was expected that so long as the earth, the sun, (Swaha) the wife of fire, the Meru (the golden mountain) and the rivers will endure, so long from generation to generation, it will show the extent of his education in Shastras. If any previously point out where my errors are, I shall be pleased with him. Success! This inscription was engraved by Szvala, the son of Santala Deva, and the grandson of Setasya. He was by caste Sutradhara, and the meanest and most faithful and obedient servant of the king. w an, & Rg z 8 u s Sree SEU . fafa: SOT Hl TT Hl VARTA: 1 segirt afafaeentari 1 ahemaare 1 areitit tS GMIsy Safed AMHATyAIa 1 aT = conde rEMTENESEGT schetaya | aqqrcimradt fetrenaistas * uqTar 1 Fat EcreangighrafaencuiaTesTaCTOT 1 spree uct 1 ye = mn 7 ewefcradttedtrieter: mr . x coerce qequfawa son grate uneiragaareTigets cierPeaea reg eae Teta crac emer er : We * fret ewe araie aera yaa fea ATs eae fe aaa wag Thee AT eeaA Te cawieretaeattorerrensafe: yafaqaataaiaare tase uskiararaaeriaga famriagstaragcicarrarearet 1 afatareaa Feat RTT ea Fg TATA Lee Te TS TTT TET RTE Cf TIRE ATCT ATS TAT, ag esta eT TT ENT AH FAT RATER RA BATRA T HTT a ee ariteenaTeT . oa oN R nif . a AR a is afaq eA ICHAT aaa aaa 999 € TATACAA eH Maes TTT by ATTRA ee RB is hbap ehh pain fears Bree a gett vege ETT TOES ATE ATTT ATTN 1 rareacantchrekaentcemcraaatrat gue Gaquradaah Safar Fecorleeemtaen sega taeaadt ate: aqua tac ena ataaun tear biaisaa ee fame ggg 1 asbiaomecaratataa aateatraresisrs Foad aaa fates rare oT aa RUT ATCA PCOS 1 ATR RAAT PHS PATA He ene are eR ey TAT ¢€ FTA HTS TTA MT SAT Rae aT SAT ATT aT fee TTA ea TAT TEE ge mAT TT ATT TATA Tg TTT Ree ee TICE RICICEEEEIEEEGe AEIEE ERIC TIGREI EEC EEE RIRI TRICE RIPE ORIRIDEDIC einer eriacadanaieaned #4 : eaeent a0 ar reap Fe aT ree a TATRA A TL AAA AT THAIN TTA OPT CT AAA A TAT TTA FITTS care esa eae Fee FL TT FRA HE Te FPA AL ATT Te ATT gH ET TATA feqratentafaamefuueranaaaecuauastetaaa 141 UUCHTeAae 141 arequfanfaatenatacn ua saataa ofa fa dager ATAVATATE Ro WAUSAU TT ARS MARTHA TAT ag TAHA AAA SAAT 89 o AAS eeTAAT STAT fecarmidanat ¢gse admagarahetrarenga aaa ea a aah a Tega A aa ToT Ta a = ~) is Shore en v arama aafeaarren Ry) Wareaaeatieraaasaferral carer) HTH Pea IMIR Se ara ea CTT ATT ATA TI TY ATA TAA 1R2 ATTA MATA TA Re Re RY (RRR ee Ry a q aS a sa a a ¢ 3 RL RR RR Re aah: aplengeaTIng Prager se fufanfarma:caan afafagadelgsnsia:) afadaate: nara tadornanty: ena erro Fen ufaaiagaam Re ufusa: Woes, 5 = tS 2 Re my 5 = ATA ener PAL AA STS TSA FT HAT Tae Ae AAT UST eT fea SIRT TAT gC free PAST 23 ac ie Ferree gH fs aea: 30 seroma regenera raga sa 1 ar eames te aTTaS ue a mek bs at:13 =) ari gesr freer aResiTa eye 2 Fo as Rataae ie AN Sy 13g 28 By 24 US! Pens UNy fey q Varma 4 a 4: aaa Aaareqatar BB By 4c ve Yo Yu fafy: 1 < are T ee Ra AP Tees TUT POTENT ETS WOOT D Bevnnide De View of a Shall. aired irarts of the Nerbadda Heons of the Wild Bull ne found in the fowvarstr the Seurve r i aD we tly : AS ees 4 A haath cates ‘ = Inches wy ee eS NYY tenn ceepilad view, ine animal simutar to the one delineated. in the Journal for Nov" 1039. but the hora here os free of matrae ging the sxacdk sive whish coud net be deterred ui the Soomer Frontal view of he same hs ‘jam . A PA a o Pe eee 1 «= 951 On Bos Gaurus.—By Dr. SPILSBURY. [Extract of a letter from Dr. Spilsbury (with plate) to Prof. W. B. O’Shaughnessy. ] *“ Ouseley writes me that he has sent you the skull and horns of a wild bull; now I send you a frontal and occipital view of a bovine skull, and part of horn (similar animal as delineated in November Journal) both done to the same scale; the upper one shews well the breadth and flatness of the occiput, and the whole being clear of matrix, a good notion is obtained of the size of the horn, of the teeth, breadth of skull, &c. You havea good view in the former plate.* Now I should like to have a cognoscent account of this animal. I have perused Dr. Evans’ paper on Bos Gaurus; Pearson on Gour, and Gyal; and Hodgson on the Bibos, all in vol. VI. for 1837, of the Asiatic Journal, without being able to come to a conclu- sion as to which the fossil belongs, and it is equally distinguished from the fossil Buffalo. The horn of the latter is straight, also great breadth of forehead, as shewn in the contrasted specimens No. 3 and 9 with Nos. 7, and 8, in the November Journal. Along with the fossil ones, I send you a drawing of a recent head of the wild bull, as found in our wilds, for comparison with the Sirgorjals. This specimen has the crest, as shewn in p. 16, vol. VI. but I do not think so large, but the age of the animal may alter it; see p. 18, same vol. Hardwicke’s horn and forehead are delineated, which does not come so near the ap- pearance of ours as p. 16. The fossil has no crest, and the horns are quite different; so I submit them to the cognoscent, and shall be glad to see your remarks, or those of some one conversant with Zoology upon them. I have another batch nearly ready for trans- portation, which will be under weigh in due season.” Note.---I regret exceedingly that the departure of Dr. Thomson, our late Curator, prevented my having the pleasure of submitting the above ex- tract, and the acco mpanying plates with remarks upon them, with which he had promised to furnish me. I trust that Dr. Spilsbury’s discovery may not pass uncommented upon, and shall have great satisfaction in giving early publication to the further specimens he promises to oblige us with. Hy * November Journal, 1839. hb? Proceedings of the Asiatic Soctety. (Wednesday Evening, 5th August, 1840. ) The Honorable H. T. Prinsep, Esq., Vice-President, in the chair. The Proceedings of the last Meeting were read. J. J. Torrens, Esq., Rev. A. Wattis, Mr. A. Camppeiyt, Dr. THomson, Major Pottinger, and Baboo Ramcopaut Guose, proposed at the last Meeting, were ballotted for, and duly erected members of the Society. : Major Rawtiinson was proposed by Lieut. C. B. Conotiy, seconded by the Officiating Secretary. Read letters from Messrs. E>warp Baxrour, Secretary to the Royal College of Surgeons, and Joun WasuiNnGrTon, Secretary to the Geographical Society of London, acknowledging receipt of the 2nd part of the 20th vol. of the Asiatic Researches. Library. The following books were presented :— Transactions of the Geological Society of London, vol. 5, pt. 2nd. second series. — By the Society. Madras Journal of Literature and Science, vol. 26.—By the Madras Literary Society. Transits as observed, and Calculation of the Apparent Right Ascensions 1$34.— By the Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty. Zenith Distances observed with the Mural Circle, and Calculation of Geocentric South Polar distances, 1836, 37.—By ditto. Bessel’s Refraction Tables—By ditto. The Oriental Christian Spectator, No. 6. vol. 1—By the Editor. General Anniversary Meeting of the Royal Society of Northern Antiquaries at Copenhagen; in French 2 copies; in English and French, 3 copies; and in English, French, Danish, &c. 2 copies, 7 Nos.—By the Society. Memoires de la Societe Royale des Antiques du Nord, 1836-37.—By ditto. Annaler for Nordisk Oldkyndighed—By ditto. Bulletin de la Societe de Geographi, vol. 11th, 2d series—By the Geographical Society of Paris. Journal Asiatique, Vol. 6th 3d Series Nos. 34, 35, and 36, from October to Decem- ber; 1838, Vol. 7th Nos. 37—42; January to June 1839, Vol. 8th Nos. 43—47, July to November 1839.—By the Asiatic Society of Paris. L’Indicateur des Poids et Mesures Metriques instructions par M. Martin Victor Paquet.—By the author. Weber die indirchen Verwandts chaften in Aegypischen.—By Professor Othinar Frank. Gelelorte Auzeigen.—By ditto. The following books were purchased :— Naturalist’s Library, Vol. 6th. Yarrell’s History of British Birds, part 17. Annals of Natural History, No. 28. 1840. | Asiatic Society. 553 Literary and Antiquities. Read a letter from Captain McLeop, correcting an error in the position of the coal fields in Tenasserim as published in the map of the Coal Committee in the Society’s last number of the Journal. The Officiating Secretary then laid before the Meeting a curious pootee (religious work) which he received from a Jain priest, mentioned in the last number of the Journal, The MSS. was dated 1508 sumbut, being about 400 years old, and was pro- duced by the priest in support of his assertion that one of Lieut. Conolly’s gems, mentioned in the above number of the Journal, gave the heads of a Buddhist teacher bearded, and with a cloth over the mouth. A figure, illuminated in the style of the old missals, was given in this Manuscript in position to support the Jotee’s argument. He also attempted the explanation of the supposed monogram (No. 1. ph I. As. Soc. Jour. No. 98) by stating that it represented the Seuthi Sthapani, or stand for supporting sacred works in use among Buddhists. Captain McLeop inclined to consider the explanation a very fair conjecture ; but the Officiating Secretary stated that the Jotee’s interpretation, as well as the result of further investigation on the other gems were not published in this number, as it was wished to invite further inquiry, and also to accompany them with corrected copies of the ancient character on No. 6 gem, which had been faultily lithographed. The Officiating Secretary called the attention of the Meeting to a paper containing Memoranda by Mr, PivpiNeTon, regarding the Law of Storms. A portion of this paper was read to the Meeting. Mr. Pippina@ton, mentioned that he had met with difficulties in procuring the information he required, to enable him to carry out his object, from the unwillingness of some, and the want of time, &c. in the commanders of vessels, to give extracts of their logs regarding the bad weather they might have experienced on their passage. On this account Mr. PippiNGTon wished the Society to apply to Government for the issuing of some order, making it com- pulsory on all commanders of vessels giving the requisite information on their entering port. Mr. Prinsrer thought that Government would not adopt any compulsory measures, as commanders of vessels were only answerable to their owners for their log books ; but he doubted not that they would use every persuasive means, and make the strongest appeals to their feelings for the desired information, and even if it would be of use, a lithographed letter of thanks should be given to all who afford the required information, on their leaving port. Mr. Pippin@Ton desired it to be under- _ stood, that only those parts of their logs as related expressly to the state of the few days bad weather which vessels might have experienced, and the situation of the ship at the time, were all that were solicited. The Officiating Secretary said that he would throw all that had been urged into the form of a letter to Government, and solicit it _ to make an appeal to Officers and Commanders of vessels that every facility might be given to Mr. PippinGToN, for the accomplishment of his object. A palm leaf Manuscript on Burmese Cosmogony, was exhibited at the Meeting by Captain McLrop, who informed them that the Manuscript in question is the property of Dr. Bayrietp, and that he would take an early opportunity of presenting the Society with a similar work on the arrival of his books. Read a communication from Mr. CAMPBELL, regarding the Lepchas. 554 Asiatic Society, [No. 101. Museum. Read a letter from Mrs. DenHAmM, forwarding one of the balustrades of the old London bridge. ; A collection of snakes preserved in spirits was presented by W. Porteous, Esq. The Officiating Secretary regretted to inform the Meeting that the Society has been deprived of the services of their Curator Dr. T. THomson, on account of his being ordered to proceed to the Upper Provinces. During the short time Dr. THomson, undertook the duties of Curator, he rearranged the specimens of natural history, &c. in the Society’s Rooms, and was of very material service in other departments of the Museum. JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY. Journal of a trip through Kunawur, Hungrung, and Spiti, under- taken in the year 1838, under the patronage of the Astatic Society of Bengal, for the purpose of determining the geological formation of those districts —By Tuomas Hurron, Lieut., 37th Regt. N. I., Assistant Surveyor to the Agra Division. LOLI LP DODD OS LE LODE PART III. On the 3rd July I retraced my steps to Hungo, and found a very different aspect to that I had witnessed in the beginning of June; then the snow was lying deep on all the surrounding hills, and within a few yards of the village itself. The yellow flowering furze was the only plant that seemed hardy enough to face the chilling waste of snows that spread around. Now, the wintery sheet had melted all away, except towards the summits of the mountains, the furze had lost its golden flowers—and in their place were others of various kinds scattered through the fields or on the mountain’s side. The loud sharp whistle of the bhair was hushed, and had given place to the sbrill chirp of the ericket and the grasshopper. SS 1840. ] Journal of a trip through Kunawur, &c. 579 I call attention to these facts, because it has hitherto gone abroad to the public that the snow on the Himalaya lies longer, and lower down on the southern face, than on the northern, and as both my experi- ence in this matter, and Dr. Lord’s remarks on the Hinducush are directly at variance with this reputed fact, I have ventured to quote the above named gentleman’s words, and shall endeavour to remove what I have found to be an erroneous impression. ** At the time of our visit,” says Dr. Lord, “‘ the snow which on the southern face extended in any quantity, to a distance of not more than four or five miles, on the northern, reached ezghteen or twenty, and at a subsequent period, November 9th, when I made an attempt to go into Turkistan by the pass of Sir Ulung, and met with no snow until wethin ten miles of the summit, it actually on the northern face extended séviy miles, or nearly four days’ journey.” This is a fact which forcibly arrested my attention, as the severse is well known to be the case in the Himalayan chain, where snow lies lower down on the southern face than on the northern, to an extent corresponding with 4,000 feet of perpendicular descent. But the Himalaya and the Hinducush have the same aspect; the same general direction ; lie nearly in the same latitude ; and in fact are little other than integral parts of the same chain. The local cireum- stances however connected with each are precisely reversed. The Himalaya has to the north the elevated steppes of Central Asia, and to the south, the long low plains of Hindustan; Hinducush, on the other hand, has to the south the elevated plains of Cabul and Koh-i-damun, between five and six thousand feet above the level of the sea, while to the north stretch away the depressed, sunken, and / swampy flats of Turkisian.” | Against this long received opinion, that the snow lies deepest on the southern face, I shall merely oppose the few facts which fell under my limited observation during my journey into Tartary, and leave others of more experience to decide the point. First, then, it must be observed that in the month of June, when | I crossed the Roonung pass, the snow lay deepest and farthest down _on the northern exposure. On the southern face of the mountains it was first met with at about 12,500 feet of elevation, “ lying in large fields or patches, and 45 580 Journal of a trip through Kunawur, &e. [No. 102. uniting,” at about 13,000 feet into one broad unbroken sheet, from - whence to the summit of the Pass, or 1,500 feet more, it continued so, with the exception of fifty feet at the crest, when on the southern face there was none at all. | On the northern slope, on the contrary, it commenced at the very crest of the Pass, and continued in an unbroken sheet “ to fully two miles and a half,” while ‘‘ beyond this, for half a mile more, it was broken and lying in detached masses.” The facts observable here therefore are greatly in favour of the northern face, for while the extent of snow is there estimated at three miles, that of the opposite exposure is but two ¢chousand feet. Again, on the Hungrung Pass the southern side had far less snow, both in respect to depth and extent, than the northern face down which it stretched nearly to the village of Hungo, or to a distance from the crest of the range of 3,600 feet in perpendicular descent, or between four and five miles from the Pass. _ Again, in Spiti, above Leedung, while the southern exposure of the Pass was almost entirely free from snow, except immediately at the summit of the range, the whole northern face was buried deeply to some extent. 7 On my return to Hungrung in July, the northern side still held patches here and there, while the crests of the mountains were covered; but to the southward not a vestige of snow remained, except far down the glen, where from the falling of repeated avalanches from above, a hard and solid mass had become wedged into an arch or bridge across the brawling torrent that descended from the Pass. Opposite to this, and merely divided by the narrow valley in which stands Soongnum, the northern aspect of Roonung still retained “a broad, and hardened belt of frozen snows” along its crest, while to the southward, not a trace of it remained. To the right of Soongnum, towards Roopa, on the southern cliffs, no snow remained at all, while those with the northern aspect were in most parts still deeply buried, as was also the northerly face of Ma- nerung, in Spiti. . From these few facts it will appear, that contrary to the usual be- lief, the snow is retained longer on the northern than on the southern exposure, exactly corresponding to the scientific observations, and re- 1840. | Journal of a trip through Kunawur, §c. 581 marks of Dr. Lord on the Hinducush ;—and why indeed other than such a result should be expected, I am at a loss to divine. The aspects nearly the same, forming part and parcel of the same great range, surely the same phenomena in this respect might naturally be looked for. From the crest of Roonung Pass, I bid a long farewell to Soongnum, which was seen in the depth of the glen below, and then dropping over the Pass, I descended gradually for about four miles to a stream of water, and a flattish piece of ground, where I sat down beneath a rock to await the arrival of my tent and baggage. Fatigued by the length of the toilsome ascent from Soongnum, and by the heat of the day, I soon fell fast asleep in my shady retreat, and on again opening my eyes, I found the tent pitched, and ready for my reception. It was now four o'clock p. m. and I found that I had enjoyed a sleep. of as many hours, having arrived at the spot about midday. We were here still at a height of 12,000 feet, and far below us in the distance was seen a part of the town of Khanum, while immediately beneath our encampment, at about two miles distant, was a broad piece of cultivation, with a few temporary huts called a Dogrée, and belong- ing to Khanumi and Leebrung. These patches of cultivation, far from villages, are often met with both in Kunawur and Hungrung. A few huts are erected on them, which serve to shelter those to whom the crops belong during the summer months, and which, when the harvest is gathered in, are abandoned during the winter. To these places the flocks and herds are also driven, where upon the surround- ing hills, now free from snow, they find an abundant pasturage. In the language of Kunawur these temporary residences are termed | Dogrées, and in that of the Tartars “ Rezzng”; thus we find _ “© Rezing’ and “ Chang-rezing’, on the road to Spiti, to be patches | of cultivation, and sheepfolds belonging to the inhabitants of the | village of Chango. 582 Note on the Map attached to the Report of the Coal Committee in the 98th Number of the Journal of the Asiatic Society— By Cart. Macuxop, M. N. I. late in charge of Ava Residency. The importance of correct geographical information, and that errors should not continue to be perpetuated through the Journal of the Asia- tic Society, or at least, that what has been advanced on native infor- mation, or laid down on surmise, may not be received as indisputable facts, induce me to trouble you with this note, and the accompanying sketch. A comparison between the sketch map appended to the Report of the Coal Committee in the 98th No. of the Journal of the Asiatic Society, and the one now submitted, will at once show wherein the errors in the former lie, I will not, therefore, take up your time by pointing them out. The sketch by the Coal Committee, above alluded to, has been evidently copied from the map of the Eastern Frontier, by the late Capt. Pemberton; the coal locality marked C. was not noted in his original map, not having been discovered at the time of its com- — pilation; indeed, corrections in the sheet representing that portion of . the country in the map, become necessary, in consequence of many doubtful points having fallen under the personal examination or survey of various persons; and subsequent to its passing out of Capt. Pem- berton’s hand, a whole sheet was cancelled, and another substituted in its place. I presume, however, the boundary line as marked by Capt. Pemberton from information, was preserved in the new sheet, and when the coal field was discovered, its site being from observations beyond that line, it was taken for granted as belonging to the Siamese, and placed accordingly in the Map. The position so assigned to it, has evidently led the Committee into doubt; for in the report above noticed, it says, “although the quality is excellent in the third situation in which the mineral has been found by Dr. Helfer at C., yet its distance from the coast is such as to render it of very doubtful utility on the Bengal side of the Peninsula, whatever benefit it may eventually prove on the Gulf of Siam, as it seems to be situated beyond the boundary range of hills.” It is this point that, I think, merits some attention, and on which I have to offer a few observations. "ha bere Tear Eh se Taay ray IME: iM orm’ ° is Kwan shading Mie Rossi* The Margat (aest 12 bahtne teen e of the Mergus strchipielage, the u Sullivans 14 Lampee of 10 mutes to an Tock | | | | | | z 3 | Charles Forbes 513) } Pale Sancort = 1 smote a tla Shea he ually a earl |e cnet a * Y Le thy i te As ig ‘ i ea west a, Ve (Mots? sata te hott a dem drigRbaale en tt etn Ae ‘hag tnt aree le 4 Pe oe Sayin abet lapis den lias Oe - Sa i r eit acti eeniney tel ear J ie ves a F Oe ed) EE ee dk PRB patina ee ACR SPC aaa. di Tp ee eb 2 5a be > penal ; o 1840.| Map attached to Report of the Coal Committee. 58 That there is no possibility for the Siamese to benefit by this coal field, even supposing that it belongs to them, is almost certain; for they have no water communication to the place; but the coal, if ever required, must be transported by a land route, and I presume over hills, though of what magnitude, I will not venture to surmise. That it may not be supposed that I speak from information alone, I beg to observe, that I proceeded myself by water to within 8 or 9 miles of the spot, where finding the stream too shallow to admit even of small bamboo rafts ascending it, I continued my journey by land to the old Siamese town of Thain Khan, standing on the stream we had quitted, and from thence to the coal site, crossing many small nullahs on the way, which discharge themselves into the Thain Khan river, on the banks of which the coal is found. This stream appears to come from some distance beyond this locality, for our subjects from Mergui annually proceed up it beyond that spot for the distance of two days’ journey, to cut the Karamet, or the bastard sandal wood (which is an article of commerce), and which they bring down on rafts, when the stream is swollen by the rains, without any question from the Siamese. No boundary has been fixed on this frontier. At the close of the Burmese war, the British considered themselves as having a right either to what properly belonged to Pegue or Burmah, or what those incorporated nations held at the time of the rupture with us, and was wrested by us from them, or was included within the districts ceded to us. It is well known that a considerable space intervened between, the two countries having become depopulated by the constant aggressions of either party, and which was left unoccupied from motives of safety and convenience. ~* That this is not the only point in which incorrect geographical information has misled us into wrong conclusions as to defined boundary marks, will be seen on a reference to the note attached to the Map of Dr. Richardson’s route from Bankok to Zimmay, published in the 97th No. of the Journal, we have to the north and west of Moulmain considered the Thoung Yeen river as the line of demarcation, and when this line is lost at the source of that river, a range of mountains supplies its place, and which is supposed (for I may safely say no part of the line from the 14th degree of Lat. downwards has been examnied) to continue in an unbroken line to the southern extremity of our 584 Note on the Map attached to [No i102. territories. It must be admitted, that this change from a river to a range of mountains, which coming from the N. W. runs at some short distance from, and parallel to it, and in which numerous streams take their rise, and descending the hills contribute to swell that river by their tributary streams, is not the best line that could have been select- ed. But it is now discovered, that the range of mountains them- selves was considered by the Burmese and Siamese as the boundary. Capt. Lloyd also, from whose excellent and accurate Map of the Mergui Archipelago I have borrowed largely, when speaking of the same coal field, the position of which was fixed by Lieut. Fell of the Indian Navy and myself, appears to doubt “whether the locality in question is in the British or Siam territory; for Cin Point of the charts on the Gulf of Siam side, is in latitude 12° 10’ N. and longitude 100° 10’ E., or only 35 miles in a direct line further from the coal site; whilst from the town of Cin, situated in a more southerly direc- tion, where the Gulf of Siam is represented as having a deep course to the westward, it is only 23 miles.” The mountains on the eastern shore of the Gulf of Siam, called by the Siamese Samroi Yot (the 300 peaks), is mentioned by Mr. Crawfurd in his “Embassy to Siam and Cochin China;” he says, in latitude 13° 2’, ‘“‘ a few miles to the north of us was seen the entrance of a river, upon which is situated the town of Kivi,” (Cin). This shows that there are rivers rising in the range of hills to the west- ward of it, which flow into the Gulf of Siam, and whether the Kivi river or the Thain Khan, or as some call it, the little Tenasserim, rise in the same range or adjoining ones, that range in which the latter has its source is certainly our Proper boundary. From Cin Point the coast has been delineated from native information, though I believe the best of the description that could be obtained; but may the coast not have been drawn as tending too much to the westward from Cin Point? But whether it does or not, or what ever the breadth of the range of hills may be, I conceive, that it has little to do with the present question, for no doubt can exist, even on a reference to that ultima ratio—the Law of Nations. I think we should be culpable in the present case to remain silent, and allow a Map to go forth disseminating error, and which might be hereafter brought forward as clearly defining the boundary line. 1840. | the Report of the Coal Committee. 585 I cannot avoid noticing, that a most interesting point of geographi- cal research still remains involved in doubt; viz. the breadth of the Peninsula between the Mergui Archipelago and.the Gulf of Siam; the advantages which might result to Government, both in a political and commercial point, by an investigation into the subject, has already been brought forward by Captain Lloyd and others, and it is to be hoped, now that our attention is called to the Eastward, that this portion of the Peninsula by which the communication across might be facilitated and shortened, may be examined by experienced and intelligent Surveyors. Calcutta, July 27th, 1840. Note.---I had received the above interesting geographical notice, when - it occurred to me to refer the subject to Capt. J. Lloyd, of the Indian Navy, so well known by his recent valuable surveys in the Bay of Bengal, which with Capt. Macleod’s ready permission, was done accordingly. The result of the reference appears in the following noies, addressed to me by these officers, which will better explain their views and opinion on a geographical point of some interest when given in the original, than would be the case were I to attempt to embody their contents in a more compendious form. ae From Cartain Luoyp to the Officiating Secretary. “ We know nothing of the Coast about and below Cin Point beyond what the old maps afford us, and which disagree very much; indeed, this portion of coast seems to be very little known, and is a part which I pointed out as desirable to be surveyed three years ago. Capt. Macleod has had access to all the charts and information that I have been enabled to get hold of, and therefore there are no additions or alterations in his map that I could venture to make; but as my recent survey makes the mouth of the Pakchan river, which forms the boundary of the British territory, considerably further to the south- _ward than laid down in Captain Pemberton’s map (nearly a degree), I would suggest that Champhon be brought further down, so as to cor- respond with the best information we possess of its being nearly east from, or on the parallel of the town of Pakchan or Karao.” From Captain Macteop éo the Officiating Secretary. *¢ Many thanks for the perusal of Captain Lloyd’s note, which I have kept longer than was intended, to make some additions to the sketch. 586 Note on the Map attached to [No. 102. My object in furnishing you with the sketch, was to rectify such errors as I could within what I supposed to be our own territories ; but as the position of the Choomphon river has now been brought forward, the whole of that portion of the west coast of the Gulf of Siam may be taken into consideration ; I will, therefore, at the risk of tiring you, even enter somewhat fully on the subject. When I made the sketch I sent you, I followed Crawfurd as the latest authority for that part of the coast of Siam, except so far as to give the coast below Kivi Point a less curvature than it had in his map, to accommodate it to the site of the coal fields. I have since looked into Horsburgh’s Chart, and find his delineation of that part would have suited me better. I have also since met with certain documents’ connected with that coast, and a sketch, which I shall allude to below. , I have now added to my original sketch the outline of the Siamese coast as given by Crawfurd, Horsburgh, and the sketch mentioned above, so that these being placed in juxta position with each other, you will be able, at a coup dail, to see the differences of the authori- ties, and draw your own conclusions. I am not acquainted with Horsburgh’s authorities for his chart. Mr. Crawfurd sailed in sight of Kivi, or Cin Point, so that we may con- sider this point as satisfactorily fixed. (The remainder of the coast was delineated from information obtained from an intelligent native Mahomedan of Siam, who was acquainted with the use of maps, &c. and could even take an altitude of the sun. So that the value of these two authorities must be left to the judgment of persons interested in the matter. I must now revert to the sketch noticed above. During Colonel Burney’s Mission to Siam in 1826-27, he left at Sigor, Mr. Harris, - Acting Assistant Surgeon, and Mr. Leal, his interpreter, to accompany the rajah of that place by land to Bangkok. Mr. Harris appears to have kept a Journal, from which I have extracted largely, as the ac- companying paper will show; and though the purpose I intended it for has been nullified, yet as we are on the subject of that coast, I en- close it. | By the Journal it appears that the late Mr. Leal, who was, I believe, a nautical man, fixed the latitude of many places by observation, and | | F ; Sa 1840.] — the Report of the Coal Committee. 587 amongst others Choomphon. These materials were embodied by Co- lonel Burney ; taking as it will be seen, the coast line from Horsburgh for his ground work, I concluded that the point respecting the posi- tion of Choomphon would have been thus set at rest, but finding that though many of the latitudes given in the Journal coincided with the position of the places as laid down by Horsburgh, that with a quadrant only, which Mr. Leal had, (unless some mistake has been made res- pecting the instrument) he could not have taken the altitudes of the sun at the places where he was, at the time of the year, to produce the results given, unless he worked by double altitudes, which from the situation he was in, I fear he could not have had the opportunity of doing, I am at a loss, therefore, what value to place upon these observations, especially as he has made a great error in the position of the Pakchan river, on the western side of the Peninsula. Mr. Leal proceeded from Bangkok to Mergui with a number of Burmese captives, who had been released by Colonel Burney’s exertions. This portion of Mr. Leal’s journey has been noticed by Mr. Wilson in his usual interesting manner, and devoid of the stiffness of a Journal. It does not appear that Mr. Leal took any observations during this journey; at least the author does nor mention them, nor does he indeed notice those noted in Mr. Harris’s journal in their journey up to Bangkok. After landing at Bangnorom, in the Gulf of Siam, on the fifth day, Mr. Leal and his party reached the Kosoon mountain. This is placed in the sketch by Colonel Burney about thirty-five miles direct from the village on the coast. By the description of this portion of the journey, I conceive the mountain to be one of the range placed by me immediately to the southward of the coal field»or a continuation of them to the eastward. A tree was pointed out to me as the spot where conferences were held by the Burmese and Siamese; this may have been one of the three mentioned by Mr. Leal. I did not, however, understand that it mark- ed the boundary, and would, I think you will admit, be a strange mark in a land of mountains and forests to divide two countries. I was informed that the spot was selected as the most convenient and spacious for such meetings, after passing over the hills from the Siamese side, and, indeed, the only one adapted for such assemblies, AR = 588 Note on the Map attached to [No. 102. certainly for many miles towards, or in the Burmese territories: now ceded to the British, as far as I know or saw. That the place is the same as alluded to by me, the similarity of the name, making allowances for Burmese and Siamese pronunciation, will show; the Burmese call it Thaing-Khon-Myo; Mr. Leal, Sing- Khon-Thape. Myo is the Burman word for a town, and may correspond in signification to the Siamese word Thape, which has been dropped by the Burmese, and the othef substituted for it. That the stream the party came upon was the little Tenasserim, or that part of it called the Thaing-Khon river, there can be no doubt, both from the length of time they were coming down on rafts, which on the great Tenasserim would have placed their starting point much too far north, and from the channel being obstructed by trees, which ‘is not the case with the latter, but which I found to be with the former. The party themselves were of two opinions as to which branch they were on. This I think will bear me out in what I said respect- ing the hills, marking our boundary in the map of the Coal Committee. The next point to be noticed is the Pakchan and Choomphon rivers, jointly. Mr. Leal proceeded up the former river, and travelled by land to the town of Choomphon. He does not appear, however, to have made use of a compass in ascending the river, for in the sketch, its course is marked as being from east to west, and that of the Choomphon river, which he says is very winding, from west to east. The late Dr, Helfer, found the course of the former to be from the NE.; now as Mr. Leal has made a mistake in this, is it not possible that he has followed up the error in the latter, and made it run from the West instead of the SW.? If so, there would be no necessity for moving the mouth of the Choomphon river to the Southward, but merely to change itg course as marked by me on the map. All the information obtained by Captain Lloyd, and what Mr. Leal says, would justify the removal of the town and river of Choomphon as propesed by Captain Lloyd, but there would be some difficulty in accommodating the other places on the Siamese coast to it. Some of these may have been correctly laid down. Choomphon had a force stationed at it when the Burmese held the Tenasserim Coast, to watch their proceedings, and also to make \ ) t | H ¢ i 1840. ] the Report of the Coal Committee. 589 occasional kidnapping incursions into the Burmese territories; it is well known that in those days Mergui and Tenasserim were the only places inhabited, having forts for the protection of the inhabitants. If Choomphon was moved to the Southward, would not the distance which is for such purpose already great, be somewhat beyond bounds? Taking every thing into consideration, I should be inclined to leave the Siamese coast alone, and rather than removing Choomphon at a venture, and continuing without wholly rectifying an error, merely add the notes to the maps as I have done. [I hope the day is not distant when we shall have these points satisfactorily adjusted. Extracts from Mr. Harris’s Journal, taken from Mr. Moors’s work on the Indian Archipelago. ** Dec. 18th 1825.—Leave Ligor—crossed the Tha- Wang (1) river, and halted for the day at the village of Nam Jin. Mr. Leal made the latitude of Ligor by observation 8- 17/ 160 N, ‘¢ 19¢h,—Remained all day at Nam Jin, “* 20th.—Started from Nam Jin at about 9 a.m. At 10 crossed a small stream, Nam Khoa, from which the road was very bad, until § past 2 p. m. when we arrived at Ban Hooa Thap-han, close to the sea-side. ** 21s¢t.—Started at about 10 a.m. and after passing over very bad roads covered with water, arrived with a few of the party only, at 8 at night, at Ban Cloi, a village on the right bank of a river of the same name. «¢ 22nd.—The Rajah not being up, we took a boat and went down to the mouth of the Cloi (2) river in about an hour. Mouth of the river in latitude 8¢ 42’ N. “¢23rd.—Detained all day at Ban Cloi. «© 24th.—Started from Ban Cloi at £ past 7 a.m. At 1 crossed a small stream named Khlong Punsoo. At 4 past 10 another, Khlong Klien. At £ past 12, another, Khlong Nam Hooa, near which we passed through paddy fields; At 4 past 1 we crossed the Khlong Tha-phoon; at 3 Khlong Thanok, near the foot of a high hill; and at 6 Pp. M. we arrived at a place Ban Krang, (3) where we halted for the night. Our halting place was situated at the foot of a hill, on a beautiful plain, through which a fine clear stream, Khlong Krang, flowed. * 25th.— We crossed the Khlong Krang, at } past 7 a.m. At 11, Khlong Soch Hoon. At % past 2 came in sight of an extensive range of mountains on the left side of the road; and at 6 P, m, arrived at our halting place near the village of Hooa- nat. “*26th.—Left Hooa-nat at 8 a.m. and after crossing three or four streams, and 1 I suppose this is Crawfurd’s Ta-yang. 2 This must be Horsburgh’s Clay. 3 This is about where Horsburgh and Valentyn place Along. 590 . Note on the Map attached to - [No. 102. in one -place some hilly ground, called by the Siamese the Nine Hills, we arrived . at 6 p.m. at our halting place, near a small village named Kahnom. (4) ‘¢ 27th.— Detained by heavy rain. ‘* 28¢2.—Started at 2 past 6 a.m. and at 12, crossed a stream, —e Chekram, and halted at Ban Chekram. * 29th.— Started at 4 past 7 a.m. At 8 crossed Khlong Tha-thang, a small stream. At 12 passed near some hills, the road leading between two of them, at some distance from each other ; and at about 3 arrived at our halting place near Ban Hude, on the side of a very rapid stream, Khlong Koowat, which we crossed. ** 30th.— Halted. ** 3lst.—Started at } past 6 a.m. At 10, crossed, Khlong Dinles ; and at 4 past 10, Khlong Sai; at 3 past 11, Khlong Banpring; and at about 3 P.M. arrived at the halting place, Ban Kliung. “1st January. Started at past 6 a.m. At 10 crossed Khlong Hooei Yong reng ; at 12 saw a hill to our left, and at 2 p.m. arrived at our halting place on the right of a large river, Khlong Tha-Khan, on the opposite of which, towards the mouth of the river, is a large town called Ban-Phoon-phin. (5) ‘*2d.—Detained in crossing the elephants. We attempted to go ina boat down to the mouth of the river, but it was too late in the day. We saw a branch of the river running down to the southward, which we were told led to the town of Ban- don. We visited the town of Phoonphin. Mr. Leal took an observation, and made the latitude 9° 38’ N. ‘‘The Thakan (6) river is the northern boundary of the Rajah of Ligor’s jurisdiction. “3rd.—Started at 10 a.M., crossing Kholong Thakhan in a boat, down the left bank of which river, the road passed for some time. At4 P.M. arrived at our halting place near Ban Kalok. ‘‘ Ath.—Started at 7 a.m. 12 crossed a small river, and passed through two small vil- lages ; halted at 2 p.m. at Phumrieng, (7) a small village situated inland of the town of Chhaiya. ‘“‘ 5th.—Visited the town of Chhaiya. The river is a large, broad, deep stream. We did not cross the river (8) but passed, as I suppose, at the head of it. Latitude 9: or? IN. 4, This is likely to be ‘‘ Carmom” of various charts and maps, although by them the river of that name is placed more to the southward, and Carmom point is about 8° 55" N. Lat. 5. Crawfurd’s Punssin. 6. The Thakham discharges itself, it is said, into the sea by two embouchures ; the northern one having the town of Thathong at it, and the southern one Bandon. The Rajah stopped at the place where the river is usually crossed, and where it bears the name of Thakham, though the name of Bandon is some times erroneously given to the whole stream. The Thakham is said to be a large stream, which leads to Pennon, 3 days journey from Phoouga, near Junk-Ceylon. There are numerous islands at the mouth of this river, or rivers, named by Horsburgh and Vallentyn ‘Larchin Islands.’ Mr. Crawfurd in his map lays down this part of the coast very differently from the authorities above noticed; a reference to the sketch No. 2 will show the points wherein they disagree. 7 Crawfurd’s Pumring. 8 Mr. Harris states he did not cross the Chhaiya river. The town is probably, therefore, situated on an arm of the sea, unless the small stream crossed during the march of the 4th be the head of the Chhaiya river. Horsburgh has a place called Patanon on or near the site of Chhaiya, but as Crawfurd has left it out of his map, it in all likelihood does not now exist. 1840. | _ the Report of the Coal Committee. 291 ‘¢ 6th.—Started at } past 9; at 3 past 2 passed a large stony hill, and at 4 past 4, arrived at our halting place, near Ban-Tharena. “‘ 7th.—Started at 8 a.m. crossing a small stream, Khlong Tharena, and at 11 arrived at the sea beach. We passed the mouths of two streams, Khlong Kauthoree and Khlong Punke Doowat; at 4 halted on the sea-shore. ‘*8th.—Pursued our journey for an hour along the sea-shore ; we then turned inland; and at 5 passed through a village; at6sawahigh hill. At 7 arrived at our halting place on the right bank of a large river, Khlong Lang Sewun, on the other side of which is the large village of Lang Sewun. (9) «© 9th.— Halted. <‘ 10th.—At 4 past 7 crossed over in a boat ; at 4 past 1, crossed a small stream named Khlong Thakho, and arrived at our halting place, near a village on the other side, called Thakho. | ‘¢ 11th.—Started at £ past 7, and at 2 halted on the right bank of a stream, Khlong Suwi, near a large village named Suwi. “‘ 12th.—Crossed the Khlong Suwi at 4 past 9, and at 1 p.m. halted on the right bank of a stream, Khlong Wisai, near a small village named Wisai. “13th.—At 4 past 8 crossed the Khlong Wisai; halted at 6 p.m. on the right bank of the Chhoomphon river, near and below the town of that name. (10) 14th.— Halted. River extremely winding. Mr. Leal made the latitude of Chhoomphen 10: 55’ N. 15¢z.—At 4 past 7 crossed the Chhoomphon river, and halted at 4 past 5 at Bangsoon. 16¢2.—Started at 7, and halted at 4 past 3 at the head of a small stream called Pathiu, near the mouth of which is a small village of the same name. “17th.— Halted. ‘18¢4.—Dropped down in a boat to the village of Pathiu. Mr. Leal made the latitude of Pathiu 11: 10’ N. ‘¢ 27th.—(Here they were detained until 27th, when, ) we left Pathiu at 12 o’clock, and after rowing for three hours, we anchored close to the shore; at 9 p.m. there being a fine breeze, Mr. Leal who took charge of navigating the boat, insisted upon pro- ceeding, and we then set sail. ‘¢ 28¢h.—Continued under sail all day in sight of land, which appeared low. ‘© 29th.—Came in sight of the high mountains called Samroi yot, (12) ‘“ three hundred peaks,’’ at the foot of which, ata small village of the same name, we anchored at 4 p. M. to take in water; (13) at 7 p. m. continued our course along the shore where it is steep. 9 Horsburgh has a place named Penomxin about this place; whether a former town or another name for Lang-Sewun, cannot be said. Crawfurd has this town lower down, though he retains the Islands of Carmom and Saucori as given by Horsburgh. 10 At Chhoomphon the Siamese forces destined to attack the Burmese at Mergui always assem- bled, and the Governor was entrusted with the duty of watching the Burmese on the coast of Tenasserim, and since the conquest of Tavoy and Mergui by the Burmese, it has become a purely military post. This and the want of population caused by the ravages of war, account for the cessation of that valuable trade, which formerly passed between Mergui and the Gulf of Siam. 11 Horsburgh has a place called Bardia here. 12 Sam, three; roi, hundred; yot, peaks. This is Koemfer’s Jamajata, and the mountains of Pensels of Portugese charts. 13 Near Samroi yot is a Siamese village called Kosi or Cin, which has been yariously written Cin, Kieoi Cen. Loubere writes it Cuil, and Koemfer, Kin, 592 Note on the Map attached to [No. 102. ‘¢ 30th.—Mr. Leal who had a compass and quadrant with him, finding that the passage along the coast would be unnecessarily long and tedious, obliged the boatmen to steer a more easterly course, and direct for the mouth of the Menan. Towards evening a stiff breeze coming on, the boat, which had no keel, could not keep her course, and was driven to leeward until 10 Pp. m., when she got aground on the mud flats between the mouths of the Thachise and Menan rivers. ‘“‘ 31st.—Got off the flat easily at 6 a.m.; between 8 and 9 entered the Menan, and shortly after anchored at the foot of Paknam, Extracted from Witson’s Burmese War. “The court of Siam having consented to release certain Burman prisoners, it was thought advisable to send them back in charge of some confidential person; accordingly the first detachment, consisting of between five or six hundred persons, proceeded under the superintendence of Mr. Leal. “‘ The party left Bangkok on the 13th February 1826, in six junks. They sailed | from the bar on the 23rd, and on the Ist March, reached Bangnarom, a place on the west coast of the Gulf of Siam, in about latitude 11: 50’, from hence the route proceed- ed overland. ‘¢ The first day’s march was, in the early part, over an indifferent road, but the greater part was good, with pools of water at different places ; the second was also over a good road, and terminated at a place where it branched off in two different directions, the right leading to Bangthophan, the left to Mergui, and distinguished by two large trees, one on the Mergui road, marked with two large crosses, and the other on the Bangthaphan road, with four. “¢ On the third day’s march, the people suffered much inconvenience from want of water, not a drop of which was encountered. Early on the morning of the fourth, water was met with. The road here again divided into two, one leading to the E. (W. ?) the other S.S.E. (S.S.W. ?) the latter terminating abruptly, at a short distance, the former continuing to Mergui, and marked by a large stone. “* The fifth day’s march, came early to the foot of the Kasom mountain, along the skirts of which ran a small rivulet; the mountain was steep, and the ascent and descent occupied the greater part of a fatiguing day. By 9 o’clock on the morning of the following day, the party arrived at the boundary of the Burman and Siamese states, marked by three tamarind trees; the place is said to be called Sing-khow- the-pe. In the afternoon, they halted at a pagoda, where the Burmese offered their adorations. ‘*The next day’s march continued throughout the day along a good road to the banks of the Tenasserim river, where the party constructed seventy-five bamboo floats, for the purpose of completing the journey by water. According to impressions received on the spot, the river here was thought to be the main branch, but, according to the assertions of the more intelligent among the Burmans, it is but a branch of the Tenasserim river. ~ The passage down the stream was very tardy, being much obstructed by trees in the river. On the afternoon of the third day a fishing boat was seen, and dispatched to Mergui, where the party arrived on the fifth day of their voyage, the 15th March. ARORA a “4 1840, | the Report of the Coal Committee. 593 “The party, allowing for the detention of three days at Bangnarom, and of the greater portion of the fourth and eighth day’s route, whilst engaged in ascertaining the direc- tion of the road, and constructing bamboo floats, was about sixteen day’s passing from the bar of the Menan to Mergui, but their progress was necessarily slow, owing to the number of women and children, and we understand, that the Kasoon hill might have been crossed at a more easy pass. There are two instances on record of the jour- ney between the old capital of Siam and Mergui, when the French occupied it, hav- ing been made in ten days, and on one of these occasions, the party consisted of prison- ers in chains, escorted by a detachment of Siamese soldiers. ‘*The late king of Siam is said about thirty-three years ago, to have constructed the military road from Bangnarom towards Mergui, for the purpose of invading the Bur- mese territories : the road is described to admit elephants, and even wheel carriages. But in former times there appears to have been a carriage road between the Gulf of Siam and Tenasserim, as, in a letter from the Bishop of Tabraca, from Siam in 1761, we find the following passage: ‘‘ Jaienvoyé M. Martin (a Merguy) Il alla jusqu’a Piply, ou Von a coutume de quitter les batteaux, et y, attendit inutilement, les charretes, pen- dant trois semaines.’’ Piply is the Siamese Phriphri, a large town on the west coast of the Gulf of Siam, in about latitude 13: 20/, and once the capital of the Siamese Em- pire. ‘From Mergui, Mr. Leal proceeded to Tavoi, by sea, and was thence sent back by the Commissioner with instructions to proceed to the Siamese station, on the other side of the peninsula, at Chhoomphon, to deliver a number of Siamese prisoners, and receive charge of the Burmese still detained there; he accordingly started from Mergui on the 23rd March, with twelve Burman boats, and four others, containing one hundred and nine Siamese prisoners, and reached the mouth of the Pak-cham river on the 25th. He rowed up the river on the following day, and arrived at Pak-cham on the afternoon of the 26th. Mr. Leal describes the river as of considerable size. The Pak-cham river is separated from the Chhoomphon river by a very small interval of level ground, and it is said that during the spring tides the two rivers often unite. The former is, through- out, broad and deep, and the latter flows in asandy bed; both are free from rocks. From Pak-cham Mr. Leal proceeded across the country to Chhoomphon, in the vicinity of which he arrived on the afternoon of the second day. Having concluded his busi- ness, he returned by the same route to Pak-cham,’’ From Cartan Luoyp to the Officiating Secretary. “ When I wrote to you before on the subject of Captain Macleod’s map - of the Mergui province, which had been referred to me, I suggested that ‘‘Champhon,” situated on the Gulf of Siam side, should be brought more to the southward, so as to preserve the same relative position with respect to the Pakchan, corrected by my survey, as it had with that of the old maps, which place them nearly east and west of each other, and is in accordance with the best information we have; but in 594 Map attached to Report of the Coal Committee. (No. 102. suggesting this, I was entirely ignorant that any observations had ever b been made for the latitude of ‘“‘ Champhon,’ been the case by a Mr. Leal; who this gentleman was, or what were which appears to have his pretensions as an observer, upon which depends in a great measure the confidence his observations are entitled to, is unknown ; it appears, however, that he had a quadrant, and Captain Macleod very justly remarks, that it is doubtful if with such an instrument he could take in the sun’s meridian altitude, and if not, what method did he adopt to obtain the latitude? and what had he for an artificial horizon? Until we have the position of Pakchan, as well as Champhon accurately determined, (the former may be out four or five miles, as it is merely laid down from a sketch by Dr. Helfer, who had no observations), I shall be disposed to consider their present positions as only an approximation to the truth; at the same time my opinion is, that ‘“ Penomoxin,” or “ Penonper” of the old charts, is “‘ Champhon” of the Siamese, and will be found to be (I mean the mouth of the river) in about the latitude which they assign to it, or 10° 40’ N. But this interesting question ought to be set at rest; it is of no use, sending such men as Mr. George, ‘the Master Attendant at Mergui, who al- though he has travelled two or three times between Pakchan and Champhon, can give you no more idea of the direction and distance of the one from the other than, that he left one place at such an hour — on one day, and arrived at the other, the same or the next day at such an hour! Beyond that, he has no more idea of distance, or conveying information, than a common Burmese, even if so much. I think with Captain Macleod, that it is very probable the Champhon river takes a direction different from that laid down. Forrest says, the paterage from one river to the other is six hours. Horace Wilson, in his notes on Mr. Leal’s journey, says the rivers are separated by a very small interval of level ground, and it is said, that during the spring tides, the two rivers often unite.” Se et On 495 Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes hitherto undescribed. By A, CAMPBELL, Esq. Superintendent of Darjeeling. The Limboos form a large portion of the inhabitants in the moun- tainous country lying between the Dood-Koosi and the Kanki rivers, in Nipal, and are found in smaller numbers eastwards to the Mechi river, which forms the boundary of Nipal and Sikim. In still fewer numbers they exist within the Sikim territory, as far east as the Teesta river, beyond which they very rarely settle. In Bootan they are unknown, except as strangers. 7 The word “ Limboo” is a corruption, probably introduced by the Goorkhas, of ‘ Ekthoomba,” the correct denomination of these people ; and is generally used by foreigners to designate the whole population of the country between the Dood-Koosi and the Mechi, except such as be- long to other well marked tribes, such as the Moormis, Lepchas, Bhotiahs, and Purbuttiahs. The division of Purbuttiahs is into the ** Khas” Muggurs, and Gurungs, all of whom are Brahminical in reli- gion; the Moormis, Lepchas, and Bhotiahs are Bhuddistical. In the generic term ‘ Limboo,” are included people also known as the Kerautis, Eakas, and Rais, but such is the confused notion among the people themselves of the real nature of the differences which have led to these several denominations, that they are often used synonymously with the word Limboo, and with good cause, as the appearance, habits, and religion of all are very much alike, and as all intermarry, and are not divided by caste. The Kerautis are mentioned in the Purans as a warlike race of mountain Mlechas; the Eakas are distinguished from the Rais merely by their habitat, which is confined to the lower and central ranges of the mountainous tract between the Arun and Konki rivers; the Limboos consider themselves to be the aboriginal inhabi- tants of the country they now occupy, at least they are satisfied that none of the neighbouring tribes have any claims of preoccupation, but they are not agreed among themselves, on the point of nativity. The majority assert that from time immemorial, the tribe has occupied the valley called “ Tambar Khola,” at the head of the Tambar Koosi river, and that they have no grounds for ascribing their origin as a distinct tribe to any other country. When closely questioned to ac- count for their existence in these mountains, among races differing AG 596 Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes. [No. 102. from them in language, religion, and habits, a few among them state that they have heard China mentioned as the land whence they emi- grated, but from what part of that vast empire, and in what age of the world, they are quite unable to give any idea. It is doubtless that they belong to the great Mongolian family of the human race. This is clearly evidenced in their form of features, absence of beard, and yellow colour of the skin, but to which of the numerous divisions of this family, to be found between the Himalaya mountains and the Yellow Sea, they especially belong, and are an offshoot, it remains for the comparisons of their language and their religion, with those of other known or unknown Mongols to decide. Although they have been long in close contact with the Hindoos, there is not any percept- ible mixture of the blood to be observed, in more regular features, or in the absence of the small low nose, and presence of the beard. That they have mixed much, and for long, with the Lepchas, is evident enough from the number of persons to be met with, whose tribe cannot be settled except by a very practised observer, or by reference to the individuals themselves ; and in more recent days, during the last twelve years, since the great migration of the Lepchas from Sikim to the westward has been in progress, the mixture of these two tribes has greatly increased in frequency. The Limboo is a very little taller in stature than the Lepcha, somewhat less fleshy, and more wiry in the limbs, as fair in complexion, and as completely beardless. He is scarcely ever ruddy as the Lepchas sometimes are; his eyes are if any thing smaller, and placed more to the front than the Lepchas ; and his nose, although somewhat smaller, is rather higher in the bridge than that of the Lepcha. He wears his hair long, but does not plait it into a tail; has no fancy for bead necklaces; wears a Kookri instead of the Ban ; and wide trousers and a jacket, or Chupkun, in preference to the j robe and long jacket of the Lepchas. To a person used to closely — observing the different people of this neighbourhood, it becomes intui- — tively easy to recognise a Limboo from a Lepcha by his features and figure alone; but as no man can describe even his horse or dog, and — far less his sheep and camels, leaving out the colours, so as to render ; them cognizable to another person, neither is it easy to give the differ-_ ences by which a Limboo is recognised from a Lepcha, in such a manner — as to render them obvious to strangers. : 1840.] Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes. 597 At the period of the Goorkha conquest of the country east of the Arun river, the Limboos held a great portion of the country now in- habited by them in feudal subordination to the rajas of Beejapoor and Mukwanpoor. They were divided into many small chiefships, and were represented at the courts of these rajas, not Limboos themselves, by Limboo chiefs of note, who held the office of Chountra, or prime minister, either hereditarily, or by election of the rajas. In each chiefship it was the custom to maintain a fort or stronghold of very difficult access, in which the chief generally lived, and to which his chosen followers repaired for its defence during a feud with a neighbour, or dispute with the lord superior ; it was to these strong- holds that the Limboos retired during the incursions of the conquering Goorkhas, and in many of them that they are said to have displayed the most heroic bravery against the common enemy of the indigenous mountaineers. The accounts now given of the resistance of the Limboos to the Goorkhas, speak well for the former as soldiers, and innumerable defeats over the latter are related as having preceded the establishment of their supremacy. Foremost among the Limboos, as brave men, are the ‘“ Pheda Hung;” they held their stronghold of Yangrong against a superior Goorkha force, for nearly a month, and did not yield until nearly the whole clan fell in a succession of assaults hand to hand with the Kookri. In proportion to the praises bestowed by the Limboos on the gallantry of their own tribe, are their execrations against the brutal excesses of the Goorkhas when victorious. It is said to have been their custom to put all the aged of both sexes to the sword; to carry into slavery the youth and able-bodied; separating mothers from their children, and ripping open the bellies of women with child, who were unable to march with their columns. These statements are probably exaggerated ones, although they are very similar to those made by William Fraser and other British Officers of the conduct of the Goorkhas in their conquest of the Sirmoor and Gurhwal Hills, where the recency of the occurrences previous to the war with us, rendered it more easy to ascértain the truth than it is now. Whether to the remembrance of their former sufferings, or to the irksomeness of the Hindoo laws of Nipal, bearing as they do on the beef-eating, casteless, Re eZ 598 Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes. [No. 102. habits and propensities of the Limboos, or to both combined, I know not; but it is certain that they are not much attached to their Goorkha rulers, and that they do not possess in connexion with them any of the strong national spirit, which so markedly characterises the Khas and Mogors, or real Goorkhas. | ‘ It has been shewn that in former times the Limboos were a war- like race, and a good deal devoted to arms, although subjects of Nipal, and this way disposed, they do not strictly speaking belong to the military tribes of modern Nipal.* They are however found in the ranks of the Nipalese army at Cathmandi, and in the Provinces ; but I am not aware that they are represented in any of the higher grades of civil or military office. Their principal occupations now- a-days are agriculture, grazing, and petty trading; but referring to their former history, they consider themselves a military race, and desire others to regard them as people who from the pressure of adverse circumstances,{ are temporarily driven to these ignominious employments, but who are ready, on fitting occasion, to resume the sword as their more proper and desired means of livelihood. That the Limboos are disposed to a military life, may be inferred from the circumstance that fifty of this tribe from Nipal have been enlisted at Darjeeling this season ; that the Lepchas are averse to such a life, may equally be inferred from the fact that there is not one individual of this race under arms at the place. The subdivisions of the tract in- habited by the Limboos are two—“ Kirant Des,” extending from the Dood-Koosi west, to the Arun river east, and the Limbuan country of the Limboos from the Arun west, to the Konki river east. The Limboos, using the term in the extended sense already noticed, are ranged under two great divisions, viz. “Hung,” and “ Rai,” and subdivided into the following families or clans :— * See Mr. Hodgson’s Account of these tribes in the As. Soc. Journal. + The Khas, Mogors and Gurungs furnish the great bulk of the Nipal Army, and are probably preferable as soldiers to the Limboos. + Are these the original ‘‘ Huns,”’ so long sought for in the mountains of Asia by Mr. Csoma de Koros ? 1840.| Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes. 599 Enumeration of Limboo Tribes. Hungs. Ling dum chung* Pheda hung Locktum chung Chung bung hung Tlam hung Chinglenden hung Yunge hung Shamba hungt Maboo hung Hembi hung Songmi hung Mamben hung Muringlah hung Seringdoomyung Tegim hung Pheka hung Mangmoo hung Saling hung Laboong hung { Legua hung Song sungboo hung Rais. Tilikchum rai Kembang rai Phagoo rai Luksum rai Sirma rai Kewa rai Eaka rai Kumboo rai Chamlingia rai Sang pungia rai Pheka raf Sheba rai Kaktin rai Kebang raf Wesing rai Nembung rai Chemboojung rai Yougia rai Kambung rai Poutak raf Kinding rai Paloonga rai Pooroonboo rai Limkum raf Phapoo rat Samling rai ‘Koojung rai Khamba rai Religion. It is well known that the religions of Brahma and Buddh are the prevailing ones throughout the Himalaya, from the Sutledge to the * Tlam in Nipal, and Phougiari in Sikim. + Tambar Khola, the especial habitat of this clan. ¢~ Tambar Khola. 600 Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes. {No. 102. Burrampootur; and that Islamism has not made any progress in those regions up to the present time. Hindooism is probably the more recent of the two, but I am not aware that it has been settled what form, or forms of worshipping the Deity were the prevailing ones previous to the introduction of Buddhism or Brahmanism, nor is it settled which of the numerous tribes and races now found in thése mountains, have the strongest claims to aboriginal antiquity. It is probable that those have the best claim to the distinction, who even down to the present day have withstood the pressure of Hindooism and Buddhism, exercised through wily and educated Brahmuns on the one hand, and meditative tolerant Lamas on the other. How all of these tribes are distinguished, and where located throughout the vast — extent of mountains indicated, I know not; but among them, must be included the subjects of this note, and the Haioos, an allied race who live among them, and more westerly towards the valley of Nipal. For a long time it was my impression, carelessly assented to, that the Limboos were Buddhists. This arose first of all from observing the bad grace with which these people submitted to the restraints of Hindooism so rigidly enforced in Nipal, where nevertheless, they frequently are to be met with, professing to follow the Brahmins, when they become ambitious of identifying themselves with the rulers of the country, and the religion of the state ; and latterly, from the number of these people who in this neighbourhood, where Buddhism is ripe, seemed to follow with devotion the Lamas of the Lepchas and Bhotiahs. The real fact however is, that they do not belong to either of these religions, but as the Hindooism of Nipal suiting itself to the wants of the Mlecha world around it, readily admits within the pale all who practice even in a slight degree the outward forms of purity, and as the Lamas are entirely catholic in their principles, it is not uncommon to find Limboos passing for Hindoos, where Brahmins are numerous ; and very common to find them shewing all becoming respect to the Lamas, and giving their best attention to the doctrines they inculcate. The transi- tion from their own religion, or form of worship more strictly speak- ing, to Buddhism, is an easy one. Altogether free from the trammels of caste, they have not to sacrifice a single habit or practice in qua- lifying themselves to give their readily accepted adhesion to it, and as their own gods do not seem to be jealous ones, they without alarm ete 4 ee ‘ . eo ae ee 1840.] Note on the Limboos, and other Mil Tribes. 601 readily adopt and repeat the simple invocation,* which is all that the ignorant have to shew as their stock, whence they derive their claim to be considered good Buddhists, It is easier to settle what religions the Limboos do not belong to, than to give a name to the one they practice. They believe in the existence of the great God, who is called “‘Sham Mungh,” and worship other deities named Nihang Mo, Takpoopa, Hem-Sung-Mung, Teba- Sum, Hem-Sum, and Mungul Mu. Mungul Mo, is a preserving god; Hem-Sung-Mung, a destroyer; Teba-Sum, is the god of wisdom and knowledge ; Sham-Mungh, the god of the universe ; and Hem-dum, the household god; the counterpart of the Kool Deota of the Hindoos. They do not build temples in honour of these deities, nor make unto themselves graven images or other idols, but they propitiate the gods through a wretched description of priests, and by sacrifices of living animals. ‘The usual form of worship consists in making small offerings of grain, vegetables, and sugar-cane, and in sacrificing cows, buffaloes, pigs, fowls, sheep, and goats, to one, or any and all of the gods, and in eating the flesh afterwards, or as it is pithily expressed by themselves, in dedicating “the life breath to the gods, the flesh to ourselves.” The usual places of sacrifices are merely marked by the erection of bamboo poles, to which rags previously consecrated, by having been offered up, are tied ; these are generally placed for convenience at the road sides, and a cairn of stones collected at their base. When it suits a Limboo’s means to make. a sacrifice, or he is otherwise de- voutly disposed, he performs it just as readily at a shrine of Kali or Shiva as to Nihang-Mo. The gods above named, with the exception of ‘‘Hem-Sung-Mung” have beneficent attributes, but there are evil spirits in the imaginary world of the Limboos, as in that of other people, who require peculiar management in warding off their caprices. This task gives frequent occupation to the Bijooa and Phedangbo, who are equally the clergy and necromancers of these ignorant people. The Bijooas are wandering mendicants peculiar to Sikim and the eastern parts of Nipal, where they are cherished and propitiated in a less or greater degree by the whole population. They are wholly illiterate, do not teach any docirinal scriptures, and are supposed to minister to the evil spirits, and malignant demons ; they travel about the country * Om Mane Paimi hoom. OS ae ee 602 Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes. [No. 102. dressed in the purple robe of the Thibetan Lamas, with broad-brimmed hats, carrying in their hands the revolving hour glass-like apparatus of the Buddhists, the name of which I forget, but believe it to be symbolical of time, muttering prayers and incantations to its move- ments. They sing, beg, dance, cast out devils, and prescribe medica- ments to the sick ; attend at births, marriages, feasts, and funerals; and are held in considerable awe, if not in veneration. ‘‘ The Bijooa’s god is not a beneficent one; when he curses you, his words are sure to come to pass ; when he blesses, there is a real blessing attending it; you never should allow him to leave your door dissatisfied, for surely something bad will happen to you, whereas, if he leaves it contented, you infallibly grow fat, and remain contented.” Such is the information seriously given regarding these mountebank priests by the simple people who feed and propitiate them in the belief of their mysterious powers. The ‘“Phedangbo” is the especial priest of the Limboos, and is entirely disregarded by the Lepchas, who are not indifferent to the powers of the Bijooa. He holds converse with the gods, officiates at sacrifices, deaths, and marriages, and is also unlettered. The calling is generally hereditary. Bijooas and Phedangbos marry, although there is no necessary separation of the priesthood from the laity, by reason of birth. “In a family of six or eight sons, one is generally a priest; this one fancies he has had—and when he says so he is believed to have—a call to the sacred office.” In fact, he feels within him that he can propitiate the gods, therefore he becomes henceforward a Phedangbo. Marriages. “ When a Limboo desires to have a wife, he looks about and fixes on a young girl who takes his fancy, then he sends a friend with two or four rupees to her father’s house to gain his consent to the union, and | arrange preliminaries of the sum of money to be paid, and the time of performing the ceremony. When these are concluded, he sends the remainder of the purchase money, which altogether rarely exceeds ten or twelve rupees, and proceeds to the ceremony accompanied by a ‘‘ Phedangbo” and some one carrying a couple of fowls. The young _ pair being seated side by side, are sworn to connubial chastity by the priest, who now places a hen in the hands of the bride, and gives the cock into those of the bridegroom. A plantain leaf is laid on the ground between the animals; the priest repeating some gibberish, cuts off the Shy 1840.] Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes. - 603 cock’s head first, and next the hens, directing the streams of blood on the leaf, where they intermingle. If the blood spreads into fanciful shapes, or flower-like patches, it is an omen of good luck and happiness to the parties, if into large blotches, it betokens evil. This ceremony being ended, the friends of the parties are feasted, and when it has previously been agreed on, the bride is carried home. The poverty - of the bridegroom, however, often renders it necessary for him to remain with his wife’s father for sometime, to whom he becomes as a slave, until by his work he has redeemed his bride. A poor man generally gets over all preliminaries, as well as the marriage ceremony, in one day. It costs aricher man a week. The Limboos marry with the Lepchas and also with the Moormis; the latter, however, is objection- able, but is not followed by any other inconvenience. Births. The Phedangbo is called in at births, if parents can afford him a dinner ; he examines the infant carefully, and then pronounces its destiny, sacrifices a fowl or kid, and invokes the blessings of the gods on the young stranger. The parents name the infant on the third day after birth. Children born out of wedlock. and the produce of Limboos and Lepchas, are called “‘ Koosaba.” Boys become the property of the father on his paying the mother a small sum of money, when the child is named and enters his father’s tribe; girls remain with the mother, and belong to her tribe. Deaths. Just as the vital spark has taken its leave of the mortal tenement, it is usual among Limboos, who can procure a little powder, to fire a gun; the report is supposed to give intimation of the event to the gods, and to speed the soul* of the deceased to their keeping. They burn the dead, selecting the summits of mountains for the purpose, and afterwards collect and bury the ashes, over which they raise a square tomb of stone, about four feet high, placing an upright stone on its summit. On the upright stone is engraved a record of the quantity of largess distributed at the funeral of the deceased; this inscription is either in * « Wungsa,’’ synonymous with life and breath. . An 604 . Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes. [No. 102. the Dev-Nagri, or Lepcha character, according to the comparative faci- lity of procuring an engraver in either of these characters. It is an act of virtue in the relatives to give largess; but it does not appear to be considered of any efficacy to the soul of the departed. The Limboos do not make offerings, or sacrifices for the dead, nor have they any belief in the transmigration of souls. They mourn the dead by weeping and lamentations at the time, and by avoiding merry makings, and adorning the hair with flowers for a month or two. Houses. Their houses are built of stone raised over platforms of the same, from two to four feet from the ground ; they rarely consist of more than one apartment, and are roofed with grass thatch. In all respects of neatness and comfort, their dwellings are far surpassed by the roomy and picturesque houses of the Lepchas. Like the latter however, they avoid hill tops for their residences, and either locate themselves in vallies at great elevations, or along the hill sides, at elevations of 2, 8, or 4000 feet above the sea. The Limboo language has no written character, nor has it, so far as I can judge from attending to its pronunciation, any similitude to those of the Lepchas, Bhotiahs, Mechis, and Haioos, and it is altogether free from any connection with the Parbuttiah, which is a dialect of Hindi origin. It is more pleasing to the ear than the Lepcha tongue, being labial and palatal, rather than nasal and guttural. The comparison of the various languages spoken in this neighbour- hood one with the other, and all with the Thibetan and Sanscrit, ~ as well as with the numerous dialects of the countries bordering on Assam, and with the language of the Dhangurs, Coles, Goonds, and Bheels, offers a tempting subject to philologists, and will probably reward the labourers, by enabling them to throw some additional light on the small knowledge now possessed of the races who peopled India previous to the advent or rise of the Hindu religion. The following are the dialects of these respective people to which attention may without much difficulty be directed at Darjeeling— The Lepcha, Limboo, Bhotiah, Haioo, Moormi, Mech, Dimal, — Garrow, Tharoo, Dhunwar, and others which I am unable to particu- oo ee a 1840.] Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes. 605 larise from memory, although at one time possessed of written memo- randa regarding all the polyglot tribes of the Nipalese Turai and Morung, a tract of country which I traversed in 1839, and which contains a most extraordinary assemblage of outcastes from Hindooism, yet ununited under any form of religion, unless a devotion to a few superstitious rites, propitiatory of evil disposed spirits, be considered to constitute a religious union. above, tangh aged, kapoba air, shdmi all, kerre arm, h66k arrow, thoong ashes, kassoo ask, V, shelasste axe, tonti back, N, ar bad, menzejaba bag, shoowa bamboo, pha bark, V, ho bark, N, shinghoori barrel, tow& bead, eiche bear, N, magyeu beat, sheray beautiful, nogha bed, netuadry bee, leem bell, pongyay belly, shdpoo bird, modyava bitter, ki black, makloh blanket, namboo Limboo Vocabulary. blood, lakshokpa blue, mukloh board, shingophreu boat, kombe body, yam bone, kalangji book, sapla bow, N, li boy, henja bracelet, shiringma branch, kodneke breast, loongma bridge, phoong broad, yomba brother, amphoo younger, nisha buffalo, shangwa buy, meuloong candle, tialoo cannon, potang caste, keloongji cat, miongma cheek, nedengba child, oong negwa city, pang yek cloth, tek cloud, ka mi cold, choongsi 606 Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes. (No. 102. comb, takomah come, tangay copper, tamba cotton, takay cough, humama country, lajay cow, yepi eubit, chamkoo cut, V, cheptay dance, V, langmé daughter, meuchuma day, koolen deaf, natakpie dear, guaéktee deer, keliba die, shray, B, dig (earth,) kamtoyie dog, kochoo draw, ddkay drink, V, toongay dry, kohedia eagle, negura ear, neko earth, kambekme east, namgam egg, wateen elbow, noksdomba empty, hoblang evening, namtayeh eye, mih face, gua far, manka fat, so father, amba feather, waylup fever, toong-dushu field, yean fight, kema find, komah finger, hookeja fire, may fish, gua flesh, karay flower, phoong fog, kamay fool, kengungba foot, leugyetimba forest, tamphoong fruit, kooshay full, koodeen garden, kame ginger, hambe goat, menda god, sham gold, shamiang good, note grass, great, yomba gun, tumok hail, phoh hair, tugek hand, hook hard, chimjoomlo hear, kepshoobi heavy, leep heart, ningwa heaven, shanglumdung hell, tangshukpa hen, wah here, kotna high, tank hill, toksong hog, phak horn, koodang 7 A a 1840.; Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes. horse, on, L, hat, nimsay house, tera hunger, shilak husband, meet I, eruga iron, phenjay kill, V, sheray king, hung knife, kurda knee, khora ladder, preng lamp, dio laugh, yema lazy, ke shooba leaf, tela lean, chookpa leap, hochoom-lokpa leech, lukphet left, pheuchanga leg, poklam leopard, ke ba lie, imshi little, chookpa load, gok loom, chiriketokpa long, kembaé louse, shee low, yeo maid, menchia maize, makee man, namni many, yeolik marry, mat, lompay middle, kooloomio milk, bidno monkey, choba mouth, moora moon, lhaba mother, amé mouse, shooba mouth, leba, L, mud, legua kham nail, nung name, koming near, koyeo neck, shurra needle, sumett net, kioong or churi new, kusong night, sendik north, thé nose, nebati oil, mingay old, koo drong onion, maké order, no word other, egi umba ox, beet paddy, yah paper, no word peacock, myoongjay pine-apple, por shay place, la jee plantain, tela she plough, no word poison, ning, L, potatoe or yam, kay powder, (no word) quick, hurra hurra rain, weehi ratan, shi read, neeray Be age din SS —_ a ————— 608 Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes. [No. 102. red, he tamba rice, shidh right, phenchung ripe, doomshay rise, boghay river, yeomba choa road, lum rope, tuk pa root, shap roof, him tong round, kooshay salt, yim sand, yeu ka scissors, kuturna seed, yeali, L, shield, koh shoes, no word shoulder, phok tang shut, sak te sick, took silver, yang sin, minoba sister, noosa-noonchema brother, noosa-empercha sit, yoong-e scratch, soma slave, henja female slave beecha sleep, mig yeu small, tanga smith, themba smoke, me koo snake, wa seh snow, nah soldier, no word son, koosa south, yeo speak, bap ma stand, ebe star, sohor stone, loong straight, don don ba strike, hipar strong, tom toomba sun, nam sweat, so-al sweet, limba tail, sheem thief, kootriba thigh, poklam thin, chookbé thou, kenne thread, kee thumb, koodom thunder, kamian tiger, keba tobacco, shirka to-day, eu to-morrow, tandu tongue, ullee tooth, ha tree, shing true, koocha turban, pake tusk, hakemba umbrella, (no word) uncle, umpunga under, yeo unripe, mudoomsin valley, tompoya village, bang pe vomit, pe shoo walk, lang, kekma war, tokma 1840.| Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes. 609 warm, mowah water, choa wax, malim we, annigay weak, mun toomba widow, bidooa widower, randa weave, langtuk well, N (no word) weigh, tangu | west, namta what is it? hene go where, atte lajee whistle, V, thuriyok white, pho dang be one, teek two, netchi three, soomch{ four, leesh{ five, nashi six, tookshf seven, nosh{ eight, etchi nine, phangshi ten, thibong who, Eng. oh wind, N samet yemba woman, menchima wife, Amett wood, shing word, ban world, yeolik lajee worm, tamboo worship, mangjokma yam, ke year, toong be tik yellow, peyor bu yesterday, anchen young, taugmen Numerals. twenty, nibong thirty, soombong forty, libong fifty, nabong sixty, tookbong seventy, nobong eighty, etbong ninety, phang bong hundred, thibong bong The Haioos inhabit the central and lower ranges of the mountains in eastern Nipal, between the Arun river and the Konki. The Konki river runs under Ilam Gurhy, and is only three days journey west of Darjeeling. They are mingled with the Kaka division of the Limboos, but always » live in clearances and villages exclusively their own. Their language is different from that of any other people in this neighbourhood, so is their religion and all their habits.. They keep strictly to themselves, do not marry with any other tribes, and rarely associate with other people. By the Goorkhas and all Hindoos, they are treated as outcastes ; they cultivate in the vallies of the lower hills, but have their houses | 610 Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes. [No. 102. at such elevations above them as insure them exception from malaria. The above is the small amount of information regarding these people which I have gained at this place from the Limboos and Lepchas, who although constantly seeing these people, do not trouble themselves much about them. As yet the Haidds have not found their way to Darjeeling, although our proximity to their country, will probably ere long add them to our visitors. The following notice of these people, is extracted from memoranda made at Cathmandu, where I once only saw a few of the race. Hamilton mentions the Haioos in his account of Nipal. ‘“ September 9th 1835.” “ Yesterday being the great day of the Indra Jattra festival we” (the Residency party) “paid our annual autumnal visit to the durbar at 8 p.m. The principal streets of the town were well illuminated, and crowds of cleanly dressed people of all callings, castes, and ages throng- ed the avenues to the palace. Groups of Newari dancers were station- ed at short intervals in the crowd, picturesquely dressed, and suitably masked to represent gods, demons, warriors, and comic characters, and every now and then the dancing ceased, and the performance in pantomine of scenes from the Ramayun and other Hindoo legends, was recommenced. After taking leave of the Raja, we repaired with the minister and some other chiefs to Bussunthpoor, the ministerial resi- dence and place of business, to witness a nautch performed by a strange tribe of hill people, recently arrived from the eastward, deno- minated Haioo. The nautch was indeed a singular one, and novel; about thirty males and as many females were drawn up in line, as_ closely packed as possible, the first a man, the next a woman, and so on alternately, not standing side by side but back to belly, and all holding on to each other by throwing forward the hands and grasping the arms of the persons in front. The column thus formed, and preceded by half a dozen men beating drums and cymbals, and shouting in a bar- barous dialect what was said to be a metrical lament, moved slowly in a circle, nodding and keeping time to the music. In this fashion, and so closely packed that the circle of sixty individuals had the appear- ance of a machine with a row of heads and feet set in motion, did they revolve and mourn for an hour. “The dress of the women was romantic enough, and very becoming ; a tartan jacket reaching to the waist, and fitting close to the bust, a # ~ Mies . ty) ee ee ee ee Gyapaka, Theng, Ghesing, Doomjan, Mepchun, Guurba, Beil. 1840. | , Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes. 611 short, white, neatly plaited petticoat, reaching to the calf, the hair raised into a tiara on the crown, and surmounted by a plume of peacock feathers, the neck and arms loaded with shell and brass ornaments, and the entire face tattooed in blue, yellow, and red arches, and other fanciful devices. ‘The men were dressed for the occasion in trowsers, chupkuns, and large turbans of white cotton. The physiognomy of this tribe is rather of the Mongolian cast, the bridge of the nose is not perceptibly raised, the cheek bones are flattened and very high, the forehead narrow ; in stature they are short, averaging about five feet four inches. Their language is peculiarly their own, but many of them speak the current Purbuttiah. They bury their dead, and worship Rawun, the Raksha king of Lunka, and him only. The dance and dirge, are lamentations for the death of Rawun. They describe themselves as having come originally from Lunka in great numbers, not being content to remain after the defeat of their king by Ramchunder ; that they had at the time of their migration upwards of 300 volumes of sacred writings, connected with their peculiar creed, which were gradually destroyed and lost, until now, when they are without any record of it; that they remained for sometime in the Dukhin, whence they journeyed on to Semroungurh in the days of its glory ; and that, lastly, but a long time ago, they reached the hills, their present abode. The Moormis are a very numerous tribe, found in all parts of the Nipal mountains, from the Gunduk river twenty miles to the west of Cathmandu, to the Mechi; whence, in smaller numbers they are to be met with in the Sikim country, as far east as the Teestah. The great bulk of this tribe, however, is to be found between the valley of Nipal and the Dood Koosi. They are altogether a pastoral and agricultural people, rearing flocks of sheep and goats at great elevations near the snows, and culti- _ vating at the greatest elevations capable of producing Indian corn and | Murwa, their staple grains. They settle on the mountain tops at ele- _ vations of from 4 to 6000 feet, living in cottages built of stone and thatched with grass. They are divided into several families or clans as follows,— Mooktan, Pakreen, Shengar, Yeunjan, Thokar, Bomjan, Roomba, 2 612 Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes. (No. 102. The Moormis are Buddhists, and follow the Bhotia and Lepcha Lamas, as well as those of their own tribe. It is necessary for the latter, however, to have been educated at Lhassa, or at some other Thibetan College, ere they gain much respect among their own tribe. The Moormi priests are not restricted to celibacy. The language of the Moormis is, I believe, a dialect of the Thibetan, although the Bhotiahs and Moormis cannot converse in it. The only written language known ‘to the Moormis is that of Thibet, in which their Lamas read the sacred scriptures of Buddhism; they bury the dead on the mountain tops, raising tombs of earth and stone over the graves, and occasionally engrave the name of the deceased in the Thibetan characters on slabs of stone laid into the erection. They are decidedly a Mongolian tribe, and certainly the least handsome of all the mountaineers of this part - of the Himalaya. They are, however, a very powerful and active people. Their standard of stature is taller than that of the Lepchas and Limboos. They are not so cheerful as the Lepchas, having a good deal of the gravity of the Bhotiahs, but they are good tempered, and alto- gether free from prejudice to strangers. Indeed this is a marked feature in the character of all the people of these mountains, all jealousy and prejudice in this respect, being confined to the rulers. The Moormis are not admitted into the ranks of the Nipal army, being considered an unmilitary people; as ammunition carriers, klassies, and gun-lascars, however, they are in request. They do not seem averse to take up arms, as a few have enlisted into our service at Darjeeling, but their favourite pursuits are grazing and agriculture. In one respect the Moormis are a very interesting people to those who desire the pros- perity of Darjeeling, and to see its waste land cleared and inhabited ; their custom of living and cultivating at elevations nearly as great as this place itself, point them out, above all others, as the most useful settlers. The Lepchas do not object to temporary sojourns at elevations equal to Darjeeling, but they never establish themselves permanently at such. The Moormis and Gurungs prefer elevations of 6000 feet to any others, the Limboos and Lepchas, those from 4000 to 2000 feet; while the Haioos choose the lowest spots of the vallies beyond the nfluence of malaria, and even brave this with impunity, derived from habit. For the malarious Morung, which skirts our mountains towards the plains, the Meches and Dimalsare the local people we haye to look | 4 . md | “| ‘ 1840.] Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes. 613 to as settlers, and from a distance the Dhangurs and Coles, who are also proof against malaria. house, teem cow, mih head, tho-bo eye, mih nose, na mouth, soon arm, ya hand, promji chest, koo belly, pho thigh, bulli foot, bullipha fire, me water, kim snow, khug stone, yeoong mud, sabra man, mhi woman, muring boy, kola girl, chamey father, aba mother, ami brother, kroon sister, augha soldier, (no word) smith, (do.) river, shiong mountain, kung valley, kunjung bridge, cham road, kiam tree, thoong wood, shing Moorm Vocabulary. root, thoongla leaf, lapte branch, til mi bamboo, putap ratan, kreh horse, tha goat, ra sheep, kew rice, mla flour, prah ghee, murh salt, chaja yam, semeh oil, keugoo murwa, sanga paddy, soon iron, phai silver, mooi gold, mir copper, sungbo gun, toomuk arrow, meah bow, dulli kookri, koja candle, nung sul book, keoi door, morup roof, teem, la, to plough, no word hoe, tho axe, turri rope, cho dog, nagi bitch, nagi mama 614 Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes. fowl, naga hog, thua flesh, sha cat, tawr tiger, chun elephant, lungboochi pheasant, porua rain, num clouds, k4soo sky, moo God, chungryo Nipal, Yung India, Kegur Thibet, Poi paper, (no word) letter, higi large, lujung small, wotibajuja one, keek two, nh three, som four, pli five, gua six, too seven, nees eight, preh nine, koo ten, kun January, Tubla February, Hindi name used - March, Doogoo April, Mamdong May, Hindi name used long, ringjim short, toomba high, gnoba fat, gnujung lean, chitpa black, mlung ~ white, tur red, wala . yellow, oar green, pingh come here, kir kan go, niu year, tiding moon, la ni sun, dini stars, kurjeu lightning, tibling thunder, moodoorba. Numerals. eleven, chookri twelve, chocni thirteen, chooksom fourteen, choopli fifteen, chooqua sixteen, choo too seventeen, choo nus eighteen, choo puh nineteen, choor koo twenty, neesio. None beyond this. Months. June, Pelba July, Hindi name used August, Koni neo _ September, Tubla juja Ttleok Keomed - ~ 0 eenuk ke Gera sa SCS, pe ol oe SY Geers Actias graves wl } Soumeance hnutaer River ‘ Sooper ewes SKETCH : of the Countrybetween rye, = WRurrachee ard theA ghar River, Shewing the Raite teHinglaj Aghor eMingel tne Seale of OMiles te an Inch v7 Ay Camp \ + 5 faeactiee Prope 1840. } Note on the Limboos, and other Hill Tribes. 615 October, Hindi name used Names of days wanting in this November, Kebala language. December, Hindi name used. Classification of Mountaineers and Turai men in Eastern Nipal and Stkim. Denominations. Remarks. Brahmins, Known to all the world. Khas, Mogurs, Gurungs, Hindoos; speak dialects of Hindi. Bhotiahs, Lepchas, Moormis, Buddhists, with languages of Thi- betan origin. Mountaineers. Limboos, Kerantis, Haioos, Forms of religion unnamed. Lan- guages supposed not to be refer- able to the written ones of India or Thibet. Mountaineers. Meches, Dimals, Garrow, Not Hindoos. Tharoos, Dhanwars, Buddhists, or Muhummudans. Lan- guages as the last. Turai men Batur, Kebrut, Amath, Maraha, Dhanook, &c. Turai men : speak Hindi! Would be Hindoos, but without the pale. To the Secretary of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. : Str,—Some gentlemen who have received the 98th number of the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, have mentioned their regret that a rough map of my route to Hinglaj did not accompany the paper, as it was through a part of the country but little known. I do not hesitate therefore to send you one, that, should you consider it of in- | terest enough, a copy may be appended to the next number. Yours faithfully, Camp near Sukkur, on the Indus, N. W. HART, Captain, 5th September, 1840. 2nd Gren. Reg. Bombay, N. I. / Note.---Immediately on the receipt of Captain Hart’s obliging communi- _ cation, I put his sketch into the hands of the lithographer, and have now the pleasure of publishing a map, which I only regret should not have | accompanied the narrative of his journey to Hinglaj. : (Ty 616 Inscription found near Bhabra, three marches from Jeypore on the road to Delht. By Carr. Burr. My pEAR SIR, I have the pleasure to send you for the Journal, copy facsimile of an inscription in the No. 1, or oldest Lat,h character, which I have lately been fortunate enough to discover upon a hill lying adjacent to a place called Byrath, which is situated at a distance of six kos from Bhabra, to the left, or east, of my route from Delhi to Jeypore, Bhabra being three marches from this place. I found it on a hard, grey granite block, irregularly shaped, and mea- suring about two feet in two of its dimensions, and a foot and a half in the third ; the weight of it is therefore inconsiderable, so that if the Society wish to possess so beautiful a specimen as it exhibits of the durability of an engraving executed upon that material, you have only to make their wishes known to Major Thoresby, who has kindly stated that he will, in that case, endeavour to obtain the consent of the peo- ple of the neighbourhood to its removal, when it could be transported to the Jumna on a cart, (a few men sufficing for its trip down the hill) and from thence be conveyed by an ordnance return boat to Calcutta at a very trifling cost. Jeypur, 18th August, 1840. I am, my dear Sir, yours truly, To H. Torrens, Esq. J. S. BURT. es Se Note.---This inscription, which is in the oldest of the Lat,h characters, has been sent to me for publication by Capt. Burt, in copy facsimile. The dis- covery of such an exceedingly interesting historical relic, has added another to the list of most valuable contributions for which the thanks of our Soci- ety are due to that intelligent and indefatigable Officer. It is, as will be seen, another of Asoka’s edicts. Capt. Kittoe having most kindly offered to superintend the publication of the inscription, I will not rob him of the fruit of his research, by anticipating, in any observations of my own, the results which a careful examination of the writing led him, I think most justly, to deduce from it, both as regards the reading of the characters and interpretation of the words. A reading kindly supplied by Capt. Burt was of much value in determining the exact meaning of several of the characters, but as the one now submitted may be considered, with the united aid of Pundits Kamala- kanta, and Sarodha Prushad, an emendation, it alone has been published. 1840. | Inscription found near Bhabra. 617 The whole credit of the interpretation, and of the editing of this inter- esting inscription rests with Capt. Kittoe; and I will only state, I have ad- dressed Capt. Burt, in hopes of obtaining from him traces of further Boodhist relics, as it would be likely that such should exist in the immediate neigh- bourhood of the site in which an inscription so remarkable was discovered. Ty Note.—By Captain M. Kittoe. The above mentioned inscription is evidently one of Asoka’s edicts, differing somewhat in style and language from those of the pillars and rocks, the character is however the same as No. I. The subject is the Budhist commandment, forbidding the sacrifice of four footed animals, and appears to have been addressed to offenders either of the Budhist faith, or perhaps to those who had not yet become converts, but still followed the laws of the Munis, i. e., the Vedas, which books are here condemned as “ mean and false in their doctrine, and not to be obeyed ;” in this point the inscription is curiously interesting ; it is the only one yet discovered in which the Vedas are condemned by name. With the aid of the learned Pundit Kamala Kanta, I have been enabled to offer what I trust will be found a tolerably correct version. I first transcribed the whole in Deva Nagri, supplying by guess the letters represented as doubtful or obliterated, when after reading it several times to the Pundit, he had. no difficulty in rendering the whole in pure Sanscrit, from which language that of the inscription differs but very slightly. From the style of the first sentence, 1 should be inclined to think that the chapter, (though in itself complete) may have been connected with others; for upon comparing it with the Lat,h and rock tablets, it will be found that all the leading chapters in those commence with the titles of Asoka in full ; thus, “ Devanum Piya Piya-Dasa Raja Evam aha,” “the beloved of the gods, the much beloved Raja—thus spake,” and it is only in the intermediate ones that ‘‘ Piyadasi Raja” alone occurs ; it would be therefore worthy of in- quiry, whether any other fragments are to be found, also whether from appearances the spot indicates the former existence of any Stuppa or Deogope, or otherwise, that it may be presumed that the inscribed 618 Inscription found near Bhabra. [No. 102. block may have been brought from some such place in the vicinity, probably some hill, where caves and other Budhist relics still exist. The Pundit pointed out several orthographical errors, which have been corrected ; in the lithograph accompanying, I have distinguished such (as well as doubtful letters supplied) by their being dotted in outline only.—M. K. Sanscrit Version by Kumala Kanta. fraeat cst are da afraterara are: srarfud = —™~™ N eae aay aratfad fafedaa aria: | AaaHET ATA Gea ued a cfa ica Vega way afer aaa aga aifad wa UH aifaa at caear arf: i wat fear ws eras Fat eat fa adianifa arad afestarey ara: catia afar car fa nreata farauaa ae farefer satmaaat afaarat alaaga Vaafa: TaT Ta Bal Fe saat: afaufas ay aat aga aifad | varia atin wea ate aria atfa cet fa afarsar faqat fama aatea Beat at waetaa az uqag Vulaary sarfaary warfa arf ca Sarawat fa afaaa aa The Original Palé in Roman Characters. Piyadasa ldéja Magadhé sunghum abhi vadé manum dha: apa badhitunch pustiiva haltunch viditévé bhanté, avutkéha ma Budhsi Dhumsi sungh siti gulvénchuna pusdéch aikachi bhanté; Bhugvaté Bidhén bhasité suvésésii bhasitéva aichikhabhanté pumiyaya disiya héevum, sudhummé chilustiti, kéhostiti, alhami hkam tavuté {mani bhanté ; impali yayami vinyas makusé aliya vasani anaguté bhayani, munigatha monagasocté upati supusina aiva, lugulo vadé mutsava chum, adhiogichya bhugvata badhén bhasité, aitani bhanté ; Dhumm pali yayani, fchhami: kitibahika bhikhpayécha bhikhanniyécha abhikhnum sinyticha tp dhaléya yoova hévum, heva ipaskacha upa- siokacha aitani bhanté: imum likhapéyami; abhi mitimé va intiti. ee eee a Ts orl Mn reeor sr wi te MA BYRATH six bie fram BHABRA betmaate Doble and Seyprow by Ont? 29 Burt Bog= Innersp tion Crandon o ack aff granit Cd bdo VE BAD'UUNn 5} LHC HO BDA Gd LA S8A5 eA HOATE YODA Ded UldA AUS LAP dtd we ASK QDL ACA ABAd AAS Od EMA LYELL GAL Vd ddB PIARE FEMAK AVES LE ASAS UO LMA PHL LIL ELLAd+Aa HLSOT HEAA ALL BLAO VALAA LUA ALCL BES ts SP BOSH HDAG ASK ODL oh A SAL oA DY LILLE soe FROLF Ad Pe hLld debe 4ijd wlbdJL 46 LS VS LLAEE LOMAS DAL PA HU VOY Hak BEI Captt FS Burt FAS alt Capt Mitton, Litht minted dy IT Ballin be r % % Anh y a G A yee Sry pRB Ae 1840.) Inscription found near Bhabra. {7019 Translation from the Sanscrit Version. Piadasa (the beloved) Raja, unto the multitude assembled in Magadha! saluting him, speaks (thus)?— That the sacrifice of animals® is forbidden, is well known unto ye; spare them: for those who are of the Budhist faith such (sacri- fice) is not meet, thus (spake he). The offering of dpussad* is best of all. Some there are who kill—that which the Supreme Budha spake at the conclusion (of his commandments) was well spoken ; those who act thus, follow in the right path, they will re- main healthy in their faith for a length of time to come. There are some who make blood offerings, (but) of these there are few, this is right and proper, (the Budhist creed) these (of the faith) I protect, (likewise) those who keep company with the righteous and uncovetous. The Scriptures of the Munis (the Vedas) are observed by their dis- ciples ; their future state is to be dreaded. The texts of the Vedas in which the sacrifice (of animals) is en- joined, are mean and false (obey them not) ; follow that which the lord Budha hath commanded ; do so (practice) for the glorification of the faith (dhurma). This I desire, that all of ye priests and priestesses’; religious men and religious women®, yea every one of ye, ever hearing this, bear it in your hearts! This my pleasure, I have caused it to be written, yea I have devised it. 1. It is evident that the assembly here mentioned is the great convocation which is recorded to have taken place at Pataliputra (Palibothra) modern Patna, the then capital of Magadha and of the Indian Empire, inthe 17th year of the reign of Piadasa Dhurmatsoka, B. c. 309, for the suppression of schisms of the priesthood (see Turnour’s | Examination of the Pali Budhistical Annals, vol. vi. part 11, Journal Asiatic Society, p. 900). 2. The word > db evam, ‘‘thus,’’ does not occur as in the Lat’h and rock in- scriptions, but it is nevertheless understood ; itis supplied by the word afta at the end _of the sentence following. 3. The word Leb (Sanscrit Wy) literally means any animals which chew the cud, and have hair on their tails, such as goats, sheep, deer, &c. 4, A mixture of ghee, milk, teil seed, and rice. tra fray 5 Weary sufeary 4k 620 On the Fossil Remains of Camelide of the Sewaliks. By Cart. Cautiey, Artillery. ‘But the most interesting discovery was that of a Camel, of which the skull and jaw were found. It is to be observed that no decisive proof of any of the Camelide, either camel, dromedary, or lama, had ever been hitherto found among fossil bones, although Cuvier had proved certain teeth brought from Siberia to be undoubtedly of this family, if they were really fossil, which he doubted. This discovery in India was therefore extremely interesting, as, supplying a wanting genus. But for this very reason, it became the more necessary to authenticate the position of this supposed camel’s remains the more clearly, especially as there were abun- dance of existing camels in the country, which there could not be in Siberia. The Indian account is somewhat deficient in this respect, leaving us in doubt whether the bones, admitted to bear a very close resemblance to the living species, were found in a stratum, or loose and detached.” Dissertations on subjects of science connected with Natural Theology, by Henry Lord Brougham, FR. S. §¢. vol. it. pp. 218, 214, 1839. — it is only within the last few months, that the most interesting volumes from which the above is an extract have reached this remote part of India; long as the extract is, however, its introduction may be permitted, as affording us the opportunity of removing all doubts of the existence of the camel among the Fossil Fauna of the Sewaliks, by a few supplemen- tary remarks, which a reperusal of the original paper published in the Transactions of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, with reference to the para- graph above quoted, renders necessary. To those who have interested themselves in the discovery of the fossil remains, which has been made in the Sewaliks, it need hardly be necessary to allude to the two very distinct states in which the mineralization has taken place: that in which the fossil is impregnated more or less with iron in the form of a hydrate, and that where the calcareous elements of the bone are nearly or entirely unaltered, and the medullary hollows filled with matrix ; the former universally existing in those remains extracted from the sandstone rock, the latter from the subordinate beds or substrata, either consisting of clay, or anadmixture of clay, sand, and shingle. The difference in external appearance is remarkable ; the sandstone fossil being to a common observer an organic substance converted into stone, whereas that which is found in the clay strata, not only conveys an idea of a lesser antiquity, but looks like a substance merely in a progressive state of petrifaction. As the beds of clay, &c., are inferior in position to the extensive sandstone strata, the palm of antiquity rests with the fossils of the clay. These 1840. | Fossil remains of Camelide of the Sewaliks. 621 very imperfect and half-fossilized looking remains, being evidently of older date than those of the sandstone. With very few exceptions, the only remains that have been discovered, scattered on the faces of the mountains, or in the ravines and water-courses which drain them, are those. from the sandstone strata; those from the lower beds appear to be of a quality too little indurated to withstand the effects of weather and exposure. The greater proportion of the latter, amongst which are some of our most interesting genera, viz., Simia, Anoptotheria, Camelide, &c. were exhumed, removed out of the parent strata in which they were originally embedded. The remains of Ruminants and Rhinoceroses brought to light in this way, were singularly striking; nume- rous crania of both families, in many cases not having shed their milk teeth, being found closely and compactly imbedded together, the stratum of rock being a perfect Golgotha, not of the skeletons of old and worn out animals, but of those who were cut off when young, or in the prime of their existence. In the osteology of the camel there are certain distinctive marks, which at once separate it from the true Ruminantia, laying aside the peculiarities of the cervical vertebrae, in the absence of perforations for the vertebral arteries in their transverse processes, which, with the atlas excepted, is universal in the family, and separates it not only from the Ruminants, but from all other existing Mammalia. There are two very simple points of difference, which can never be mistaken by the most careless observer, the 1st, being the want of anchylosis in the lower extremities of the metatarsal and metacarpal bones,---that of the camel exhibits itself in a cleft or separation of the two bones, to a distance of two or three inches from the articulating surface, whilst the same bones of the Ruminants are perfectly undivided : and, secondly, in the marked distinction existing in the carpal bones of the camel, in the separation of the scaphoid and cuboid, these two bones being joined together in the true Ruminantia. Of these metatarsal and metacarpal bones, we have forwarded specimens both to the British Museum and to the Geological Society of London, extracted from the lower beds of the Sewalik strata, as well as from the sandstone rock; numerous other specimens of the same family have also been sent to England the more perfect remains of crania being still in our possession, although ultimately intended for the British Museum. The most valuable remains of Camelidz, which have as yet been dis- covered in those hills, and which were figured in the Transactions of the Bengal Asiatic Society, were dug out in my presence. The stratum in which they were found consisted of a sandy clay, inclined at an angle to the horizon of about 20 degrees, the position about half a mile north-east of the 622 Fossil remains of Camelide of the Sewaliks. [No. 102. village of Moginund, which lies at the foot of the range, and the elevation about 4 or 500 feet above that village. These fossils were removed by a working party over whom I was standing, and taken to my camp imme- diately afterwards; there can be no demurrer on their being fossil remains, for even had they not been exhumed before me, their state of fossilization is a proof of their not having belonged to the existing family; and the position in which I found them was such, that laying aside their being - a part of an inclined stratum of rock, no camel of the present day, at least, could have reached such an awkward locality, the excavation having taken place at the head of a deep ravine, terminating in a slip, in a wild preci- pitous region, far away from the habitation of man, and far removed from even the grazing ground of village cattle. In the paper above referred to, certain specific differences are noted between the fossil and existing camel, which a fortiori establish the dis- covery of the animal in the former state; as these appear to have been overlooked by Lord Brougham, I will, in referring your readers to the memoir in question, note, that the most remarkable points of dissimilitude were in that portion of the cranium connected with the lower jaw, the breadth between the articulating or glenoid surfaces for the condyles of the latter, being much greater than that in the animal now existing---a peculiarity not confined to one solitary specimen, but common to others, amongst which was a very perfect cranium of a second species, for which we proposed the name of C. antiquus, procured from the sandstone strata. With the marked difference above alluded to, it was natural to expect some modification in form to the condyles and rami of the lower jaw; in this we were not disappointed; the obliquity of the ascending branches similar to that of the ox, their form, and the excess of transverse diameter of the condyle, were points of great difference between the fossil and living animal; and in total correspondence with the peculiarities of the cranium ; it will be observed, that the difference of structure in the skull is by no means of trifling importance, and as far as the subject of this paper is concerned, is evidence that the bones found by us could never have been the remains of the animals now existing in India.* That the camel lived at the same time with the Sivatherium, Anoptothce- rium Simia, Hippopotamus, Rhinoceros, and with the very prototype of the Crocodiles and Gurials now abounding in the great rivers and estuaries of Modern India, there can be no doubt of, as far as the researches on the Sewalik hills have exhibited proofs. * At the lower extremity of the metatarsals and metacarpals the cleft appears to be somewhat less in the fossil than in the existing camel; in the latter the separation of the points of articulation is somewhat greater, a remark drawn from an inspection of a great number of fossil remains of this part of the animal. 1840.| Fossil remains of Camelide of the Sewaliks. 623 As a fossil discovery, the camel is of great interest ; its position with regard to the Pachydermata and Ruminants, is a link of a now broken chain. The Sivatherium was one, and Mr. Owen’s Macrauchenia was another, to explain the mystery, and add two links to a broken series. That future discovery will tend still further to prove the wisdom of design as an inference, is borne out, by every succeeding step in Paleentological Research. Whether the camel has existed in an originally wild state in any period within the historical era, is a question that has been argued at consider- able length. The animalin a state of domestication is spoken of during the early period of the Scriptural writings, and by subsequent authors at all periods of history; it is mentioned by Strabo and Diodorus Siculus, as having been found in a wild state in Arabia about the commencement of the Christian era. Pallas who argues on the evidence of the Tartars, that the wild camel is found in Central Asia, is met by Cuvier in the well known fact, of the Culmuks being in the habit of giving liberty to all sorts of animals on religious principles: the natives of Hindostan, who act in the same way, and are guided by similar motives, have in their affection for the cow and Ox, given rise to a race of wild cattle perfectly distinct from those of the forest. In the districts of Akbarpoor and Dostpoor, in the province of Oude, large herds of black oxen are, or were, to be found in the wild and uncultivated tracts; a fact to which I can bear testimony from my own personal observation, having in 1821 come in contact with a very large herd of these beasts, of which we were only fortunate enough to kill one, their excessive shyness and wildness preventing us from a near approach at any second opportunity. The wild horses of Southern America, are another proof of the tendency of animals to congregate in herds, and assume the character of originally wild animals, although properly the offspring of domesticated cattle set at liberty ; the proof, however, after all, is merely in the possibility of domesticated animals being able to return again to a state of nature, and assume the functions of their primitive designation. The object of this paper is merely to establish the fact of the camel _ having been found in a fossil state in the Sewalik hills, the identification _ being more complete perhaps than that of any other of the numerous genera and species which these hills have made us acquainted with. _ Judging from the number of the remains of this family in our collections, the camel could not have existed in great abundance, and their proportion to the true Ruminants, must have been comparatively small. Northern Doab, Sept. 8th, 1840. 624 Fossil remains of Camelide of the Sewaliks. {No. 102. Nore.---Professor Wilson’s work, compiled from the papers of Messrs. Morecroft and Trebeck is not procurable in Calcutta, or I should cite, on better authority than mere recollection, Mr. Trebeck’s mention of the wild camel as now existing. I regret exceedingly I did not take a note of the passage which occurs in Mr. Trebeck’s journal of a tour in Sadakh, and which mentions the confines of the great Tartaric plain as the alleged tract in which the camel is still found in a state of nature. The question is one on which even Gibbon’s immense reading (Miscell. Works. vol. 1.) throws no light beyond the caution of the authority of Diodorus Siculus, as noted by Capt. Cautley (Lib. i. Capt. 44.) The only copy of Professor Wilson’s work that I have seen or heard of in India, was in the possession of Sir Alex. Burnes, who while at Simla sent it to me. Hy Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. ( Wednesday Evening, 2nd September, 1840.) Dr. John Grant, Senior Member, in the chair. Major Raw inson, Political Agent at Candahar, proposed at the last Meeting, was elected a Member of the Society. The Secretary shewed to the Meeting an Astrolobe which had been prepared at Benares for Mons. Théroulde. 3 The following gentlemen were then proposed as Members, M. P. Epcreworts, Esq. Capt. W. Lovepay, ditto. Capt. T. Hurton, 37th Regt. N. I. Dr. J. D. D. Hasercin. Captain Kitroz presented to the Society the egg of an Alligator, and the egg of the Caprimulgus (rarely found), with some specimens of precious serpentine found near Sumbhulpore. Several papers were submitted to the Society, which either have appeared, or are in course of preparation for the Journal; two Reports by the late Dr. HeLrer, on the Mergui Archipelago, were among these. Specimens of the Ground Fish of the eastern part of Bengal were presented by — White, Esq. of Kishnaghur, they were dug up from a depth of twelve feet below the surface of the earth in Nuddeea. For notice of this fish, vide Asiatic Society’s Journal vol. viii. p. dol. A model of a Monster communicated by Colonel CauLFiEeLp, Resident at Luck- now, was made over to the Medical College. A letter was read from Professor WiLson, stating that arrangements have been made for preparation of the bust of our late Secretary Mr. James Prinsep; thanks of the Society were voted to Professor WiLson, for having thus anticipated the wishes of the Society. ee OO ae ee _ 1840.) . Asiatic Society. 625 A letter from Professor Lassen, of Bonn, was read, acknowledging the receipt of several numbers of the Journal, and offering to dispose of any Sanscrit works the Society might think proper to send to Bonn for sale ;—transferred to the Committee of Papers. ; Specimens of Fossil Alcyonites from Girhur, a village about 40 miles from Nagpore, were submitted by Dr. Spitspury of Jubbulpore, with extract from a Madras paper noting the experiment performed by ParkINson on similar fossils, viz. immer- sion in diluted muriatic acid, which having removed about a quarter of an inch of the substance of the fossil, enabled the observer to perceive with a lens of moderate power, several cruciform spines, formed, as it were, by two fusiform bodies crossing each other at right angles; he supposes from their having withstood the action of the muriatic acid, that these bodies, which were originally the spines of the animal, are now formed of hydrophanous chalcedony, and imbedded in a matrix of carbonate of lime, which has pervaded or supplied the place of the soft spongious parts. ‘* I placed one of these alcyonites,’’ says Dr. Spitspury, ‘ in diluted muriatic acid, which produced exactly the effect described in the paper above quoted, and with the magnifying glass, the silicious radiz from a centre became very apparent.’’ A communication was read from A. Grant, Esq. Magistrate of Delhi, announcing his having dispatched to the Society a case of forged seals discovered among the ruins near the town, by a party of prisoners while at work there. ‘They purported to be the seals of most of the persons of note who held authority during the decline of the Mogul Empire, and must have been used in the fabrication of false sunnuds, deeds, and warrants. This curious collection has since been received and lodged in the Museum. A lithograph, prepared by the celebrated Ritter, shewing the altitude of the snow line throughout Asia, was presented to the Society by Dr. Jamrzson, of Umballah, with a promise of communications on the result of recent observations by him upon the formation of the Himalyas. The Officiating Secretary informed the Society that the letter press of Ritter’s Sections was in progress of translation, and that the whole should appear in the Journal. A communication from the Rev. Professor Street, of Bishop’s College, with extracts from a manuscript in the Library of the College by Fra Gruseper Da Rovato, was read to the Society. The manuscript, dating from 1755, contained with various miscel- laneous notices, on Hindoo Mythology and Literature, a notice of some of the antiqui- ties which had struck the Rev. gentleman; among others, the following notice of the well known columns in Tirhoot, by which it would appear that both the columns had then, when Fra Griuseprx examined them, the figure of a lion on their capital. ‘In regnis ergo Bettie duas ego vidi columnas, in duas provincias differentes, que “quidem eequales sunt, ex integro et solo lapide, habentes altitudinis viginti septem “‘cubitos supra terram, et septem in circumferentia, cum supraposito proportionato *‘Leone. Inutraque columna ex eodem charactere quasi eadem videntur esse verba. **Quas litteras ego retraxi, et misi ad diversa loca, sed nemo potuit neque intelligere ‘‘neque legere; non sunt litters Indian, neque ultramontanz, sunt ex aliquo Greco ‘quia multee litteree sunt de Greco Alphabeto, alique vero non. In fine vero descrip- *‘tionis legitur in Arabico Idiomate ‘““* * * * primus minister magui Alexandri ‘ferexit:’? nomen vero non bené legitur.”’ The writer of the manuscript was a member of the Roman Catholic Mission in Nipal and Thibet from 1769 to 1787, about which time the monastery was pillaged 626 Asiatic Society. _ fNor oe. and the Mission ejected by the Goorkahs, then extending their conquests in every direction. The greater part of the Library, attached to the Mission was, the Officiating Secretary observes, brought off to Katmandhoo, and preserved there with great care. Mr. Hopason, he believed, and Mr. Ross BEt1t, while Assistant Resident there, | had succeeded in obtaining many of the books so preserved. Captain Burt’s Letter, with facsimile of a new Asoka edict, was submitted to the Society. This interesting relic is published in the present number (102) of the Journal. A Skeleton of a Cobra Capella, beautifully prepared by M. BoucuEz, was on the table for the inspection of the Meeting. For all the above contributions and presentations, the thanks of the Society were accorded, and the meeting broke up considerably after 10 o’clock, P. m. The Geographical notice of Seistan had been for some time in print, when I learned the death of its author, who was killed by a shot from the Fort of Tootumdurrah in the Kohat, north of Cabul, during the attack on that place under Sir R. Sale. Capt. Conotty was, as a member of our Society, energetic, and indefatigable in research, not only as regards the study of Indian antiquities, but with respect to all subjects coming under his observation, whence he conceived himself capable of deriving and supplying useful information. The Society will, I am sure, regret the loss of one of their body, whose merits, as an officer, are worthily noted in the annexed Extract from a letter to Major General Sir Willoughby Cotton, G.C.B. dated 26th October, 1840, which has been most kindly supplied at my request from the Political Secretariat Office. “The Governor General in Council has learned with much regret the “death of Captain Epwarp Conotty of the 6th Light Cavalry, Commandant ‘of the Escort of the Envoy and Minister, whose zeal and spirit placed him ‘as a volunteer under the immediate fire of the place. The service has, ““by this casualty, been deprived of an active and enterprising officer, whose “energy and intelligence, as exhibited on every opportunity afforded for “their exertion, gave promise of distinction to himself, and advantage to “the Government he served.” Putting private feelings aside, I could not, as editing this Journal, refrain from recording the loss which it has sustained in one of its most zealous and efficient contributors, who, though prematurely cut off, died at any rate a Ty soldier’s death, and in his duty. PA eC LN a Poa ee olan ce ate a - = Per var 2 See RENE TE Ne - } = aS - Pl i a ip - - z Jf “— es a E ‘ 2 ; : : f = ss te 2 mY - i ft ; Ne ( f i er 1 % { -— E ae . < , a { _ \ iv * ty . 2 < . \ -— Md 4 _ / c { ; C t : 5 bs 4, “a4 == ) is ; t i a > = = = 7 rT] ¢ se ' = ‘ y ‘ j t = a a ty, ts at ‘ ( 4 Ree = \ io io — 7 ¥ > ae I po) 5 2 - i cs ‘ f = ‘ S ¢ : ui 4 ae =) vis ae ha ; — x hs my — a wi SI . ] ; e #4 ‘ 7 oy = . Nt 1 s a a) /, 4 ft a ~ % > | a as a oe ie